Mechanical - Spec

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

SECTION 15010
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
This section generally specifies administrative and procedure requirements regarding

Mechanical Work. Additional requirements are specified in various sections of
Division 15 and also may be required during the execution work due to project
conditions.
B.
The requirements of this Section do not supersede or take precedence over any
provision of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, and
should any discrepancy become apparent between these requirements and the General
Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer in writing, and the Engineer shall interpret and decide such matters in
accordance with the applicable provisions of the General Conditions and
Supplementary General Conditions.
1.02
EXTENT OF WORK
The Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, equipment, tools, appurtenances,
storage, services and temporary work, necessary to completely install, in accordance
with these specifications and the drawings.
Work, materials, equipment or services not specifically mentioned in other clauses of
these specifications or elsewhere, or indicated on the drawings but found necessary for
the completion and perfect functioning of the installations must be included in the
Contractors price.
The work shall include also operation of the installations after completion and
acceptance including maintenance and guarantee of the works as described hereinafter.
The work shall be designed and carried out in accordance with the contract drawings
and specifications as well as the standards of the country of origin.
The following builders work shall be considered as part of this work:
i.
Concrete foundations and pads under pumps, chillers and other equipment.
ii. All Builders work in connection with fixing support, hangers, anchors, etc.
iii. Cutting or forming all openings, mortar, chase, etc., in floors, walls and ceilings
required for the installation and making good after.
iv. Painting items of equipment and exposed pipes and supports.
v. Labeling.
Page 1 of 16
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Division 15 of this specification covers the supply and installation of the mechanical
and Air Conditioning services as shown on the design drawings and in this
specification.
B.
To balance, adjust and test heating and chilled water systems, air moving equipment,
air distribution, exhaust air systems and other systems as herein specified.
C.
It shall be clearly understood that these specifications and design drawings are
complimentary documents, intended for the selection of equipment having the general
and specific characteristics as detailed in the documents.
D.
Unless otherwise specifically stated, the mechanical installation shall be complete,

ready for operation and fully integrated and coordinated with all other building items.
E.
Materials and methods included in this Section are of a general nature, and apply to
most systems and installations in this Contract. Refer to individual system sections for
materials and methods specifically required for the respective systems.
F.
The systems described include the following:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
G.
Ventilation and Air Conditioning.

Water Treatment.
Domestic and Specialized Water
Fire Services.
Liquid Petroleum Gas (LPG).
Automatic Controls.
Underground Drainage.
Sanitary Soil and Waste Drainage.
Rain Water Drainage.
Air-conditioning equipment capacities are based on the following conditions:

1. Outdoor Temperatures
In Summer
46C
35.1C
Dry Bulb temperature.

Wet bulb temperature.
In Winter
7.2C
Dry bulb temperature.
2. Indoor Temperatures
Unless other wise noted on drawing and in this book of specifications the indoor
room conditions are:
In summer
- Indoor areas
231C
505%
Relative humidity.
Page 2 of 16
In winter,
20C
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Mechanical equipment shall conform to the latest version of ASHRAE Standard.
2. Reference Standards
a. Provide materials and equipment listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. except
in those cases where an Underwriters Laboratories listing is not available.
b. Comply with the latest applicable standards of the following:
1) ASME American Society of Engineers.
2) ARI Air-conditions and Refrigeration Institute.
3) ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
4) ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials.
5) AMCA - Air- moving and Conditioning Association.
6) AGA American Gas Association.
7) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
8) AWS American welding Society.
9) NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
10) BS British Standards.
11) SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors.
12) DIN Deutsches Institute for Normalisierung
13) FM Factory Matual.
14) IRR Institute of Boiler and radiator Manufacturers.
15) ISO International Standardization organization.
16) Local Standards (SBC)
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Definitions: The required submittals of this division, in addition to the definitions of

the General Conditions, and elsewhere in the contract documents, are further
categorized for convenience as follows:
1. Product data shall include manufacturers latest standard printed literature such as
manufacturers installation instructions, catalog cuts, color charts, roughing
diagrams, wiring diagrams and performance curves on materials, equipment and
systems for this project. Product data shall include references to applicable
specification section and item number. Product data shall be provided in addition to
the required shop drawing submittals.
2. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for Approval as described
hereinafter.
Page 3 of 16
3. Samples shall include physical examples of materials in complete units for visual
inspection. Samples shall indicate applicable specification section number and item
numbers within that section.
4. Certificates shall include statements of applicability, certifying reports from
governing and testing agencies, industry standards and applicable certificates
specified in each Section of the specifications.
5. Test and inspection reports shall include reports specified in each section of the
specifications.
6. Miscellaneous submittals shall include submittals related directly to the work (nonadministrative) including warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship
bonds, reports, and physical work records, copies of industry standards, record
drawings, field measurement data and similar information applicable to the work
and not processed as shop drawings, product data, samples or certificates.
7. No equipment or materials are to be purchased or delivered to site until the
required submittals have been approved.
1.06
INTENT
The purpose of the shop drawings and specification is to provide an approach for
intended complete installations, finished, fully adjusted, tested commissioned and put
in perfect operating condition. The spirit as well as the letter of the drawings and
specification shall be followed, and all work shall be executed according to the true
intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications.
1.07
DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS

It is the responsibility of the Contractor, to inform the Engineer of any discrepancies in
the drawings and specifications before signing the Contract, default of which will make
him responsible for any errors or omissions in the drawings and specifications even
though these have been approved by the Engineer.
All costs incurred by any changes or alterations necessitated by any errors or omissions
shall be on the Contractors own expense without having the right to ask the employer
for any indemnity.
1.08
ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS
The Engineer's drawings are generally diagrammatic and include general layouts and
typical details of the various systems to be installed. No deviations from the drawings
shall be made without receipt of prior written approval from the Engineer.
The drawings shall not be scaled. The Contractor shall base all measurements both
horizontal and vertical from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these
established lines and levels. All measurements shall be verified on Site and checked as
to correctness of same as related to the work.
Page 4 of 16
The Contractor shall check all Architectural, Structural and Electrical drawings in
laying out work for verifying the adequacy of space in which work will be installed.
Maximum headroom and space conditions shall be maintained all points. Where head
room or space conditions appear inadequate the Engineer shall be notified before
proceeding with installation.
1.09
SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

Prior to starting the work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval
detailed shop and installation drawings showing to scale dimensions of equipment,
pipes, etc. in plan and elevation with clearances and relation of same to the space
assigned. Minimum scale of shop drawings shall be 1/50.
Where the work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with the work
of other trades, the Contractor shall coordinate space conditions to make a satisfactory
adjustment. The Contractor shall prepare composite installation drawings and sections
to a suitable scale of not less than 1/50, clearly showing how work will be installed in
relation with work of other trades.
Prior to submissions of the drawings and approximately 30 days after award of the
Contract, The Contractor shall submit lists of all equipment and materials with the
names of proposed manufactures. Lists shall show submission dates. The drawings will
not be accepted prior to submission of such lists. Drawings of interrelated items shall
be submitted at approximately the same time.
Drawings of equipment and material shall include detailed manufacturers drawings,
cuts of catalogues and descriptive literature, showing specifications, type, performance
characteristics, construction, component parts, dimensions, size arrangements,
operating clearance, capacity, electrical characteristics, power requirements, motor,
drive and testing information. Data of a general nature will not be accepted.
Catalogues, pamphlets or manufacturers drawings submitted for approval shall be
clearly marked in ink for proper identification of the item being proposed.
Deviations from the specifications and drawings shall be indicated clearly with the
reason for each deviation.
All submissions for approval shall be furnished in three copies and submitted
sufficiently in advance of requirements to allow the Engineer ample time for checking
and approving. Failure of the Contractor to submit the drawing in ample advance time
shall not entitle him to an extension of contract time, and no claim for extension by
reason of such default will be allowed.
The Engineer shall have 21 days to answer any submittal either shop drawing or
material submittal. Any resubmital shall entitle the Engineer to an additional of 14
days.
No equipment or material shall be purchased, delivered to the site or installed until the
contractor has in his possession the approved drawings for the particular equipment or
material.
Approval rendered on drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility
to provide equipment and material to meet the performance and quality standards as
Page 5 of 16
indicated on the drawings and as described in the specification or to be of physical size

to fit the space assigned for it.
Material not covered by drawings such as pipe, fitting and incidentals shall be
submitted for approval in letter form giving ratings and names of manufacturers.
During the progress of the work, drawings shall be submitted as required by the
Engineer and as specified elsewhere in this specification. These drawings shall
comprise but not necessarily be limited to concrete bases for equipment with location
of anchors bolts, manufacturers certified installation drawings and instructions,
certified performance characteristics of equipment, wiring diagrams of motor
controllers and control systems, etc.
Where required by the Engineer the Contractor shall submit for approval samples of
material to be used and workmanship proposed. The Contractor shall not use material
or workmanship that does not correspond to the approved samples.
1.10
COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

The Contractor shall plan and coordinate the work with all other trades in advance of
requirements and shall provide all necessary resources to ensure compliance with the
construction program. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a set of composite
coordination drawings in plans and sections with minimum scale of 1/50.
The Contractor shall coordinate the space requirements of all other trades involved and
shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases and adequate
clearance in double partitions, hung ceilings, etc. for the proper installation of the work.
The Contractor shall give full cooperation to all other trades to permit the work of the
trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
The Contractor shall furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates,
patterns, setting plans and shop details for the proper installation and coordination of
adjacent work.
The Contractor shall undertake to make, without extra charge, minor changes and
modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or
for proper execution of the work.
Any extra coast incurred by lack of coordination on the part of the Contractor shall be
at his own expense.
1.11
RECORD DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for record a complete set of as-built
drawings including three sets of soft copies on CAD 2004 and electrical wiring
diagrams, in tracing or other reproducible form reflecting all the changes made from
the original drawings during the progress of the work. The drawings and electrical
wiring diagrams shall show all labeled equipment, valves, controls, instruments and
electrical devices.
Page 6 of 16
1.12
INSTRUCTION MANUALS AND SPARE PARTS LISTS

The Contractor shall furnish four copies of an instruction manual bound in booklet
form containing the following information:
Brief description of every system and equipment with basic operating features.
Descriptive literature of all equipment and components with manufacturers name,
model number, capacity rating and operating characteristic.
Service manual for every major piece of equipment giving operating and maintenance
instructions, starting and shutdown instructions, lubrication instructions and possible
breakdown and repairs, the service manual shall be prepared specially by the
manufacturer for the particular equipment.
Manufacturers list of general spare parts for every piece of equipment with unit prices.
Manufacturers list of recommended spare parts for one year of operation for every
piece of equipment with unit prices.
Detailed and simplified one line, color coded flow diagrams of every system with tag
number, location and function of each valve and instrument.
The instruction manual shall be submitted in draft form to the Engineer for his review
and approval as to the fulfillment of the specified requirements prior to final issue.
The instruction manual shall be submitted to the Engineer at least four weeks in
advance of the complete date of the system to be available for the final inspection prior
to acceptance of the respective systems.
1.13
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

Deliver products to the project properly identified with name, model number, types,
grades, compliance labels and other information needed for identification.
1.14
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL QUALITY WORKMANSHIP

All equipment and material provided by the Contractor shall be new, free from defects
and of the same type, standard and quality as set forth in the specification.
Equipment and material of similar application shall be of the same manufacturer
unless otherwise specified.
All workmanship shall be of the highest standards of the industry, of accepted
engineering practice and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Poor workmanship
shall be rejected and the work reinstalled when in the judgment of the Engineer, the
workmanship is not of the highest quality.
1.15
SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

Reference in the drawings and specifications to any equipment or material by name,
make or catalogue number, as well as any list of approved manufacturers, shall be
Page 7 of 16
interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and performance and shall not in any
way be construed as an intention to eliminate the products of other manufacturers and
suppliers having approved equivalent products.
Approval of a manufacturer does not necessarily constitute approval of his equipment
as equal to those specified. After award of Contract and before start of construction, the
Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer a complete summary of
proposed equivalent to be furnished indicating service, manufacturer, figure number,
type and pressure rating.
The Tender shall be based on the trade name and catalogue reference named in the
specification and products of the approved manufacturers. Should the Contractor wish
to use any equipment, material or products other than those specified, he should so state
as an alternative to the Tender, naming the proposed substitutions and indicating what
difference, if any, will be made to the Contract, price and detailing all differences
entailed by the substitution.
All the times the Engineer shall be the only judge of equality between the proposed
alternative and the item specified. No alternative shall be implemented without the
written approval of the Engineer.
Where the Contractor proposes to use equipment other than that specified or indicated
which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or
any other part of the works, all such redesign, new drawings and detailing required
shall be prepared by the Contractor at his own expense. All additional costs resulting
from such substitution if approved by the Engineer in writing shall be paid by the
Contractor.
Where such approved substitution requires a different quantity or arrangement of
piping, wiring, conduit and equipment from that specified or shown on the drawings,
the Contractor shall provide all such piping, structural supports, installation,
controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduits and any other additional
equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Employer.
1.16
PROTECTION
The Contractor shall order all equipment from the manufacturer specifying adequate
packing for export at the factory to avoid damage during shipment to the Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for safe storage and the adequate protection of all
material and equipment until finally installed, tested and accepted.
He shall protect work against theft, injury or damage and shall carefully store material
and equipment received on Site in their original crates or containers until they are
installed. This responsibility shall embrace any delay pending final testing of systems
and equipment due to any condition.
The Contractor shall close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during
construction and storage to prevent entry of obstructing material.
The Contractor shall coordinate the protection of the work of all trades and shall be
liable for any damage sustained to other trades resulting from his work.
Page 8 of 16
If any equipment is damaged during shipment be before it is tested and accepted, the
Contractor shall replace or repair the equipment depending on the extent of damage and
as determined and decided by the Engineer, on the Contractors own account and
without additional cost to the Employer.
1.17
ACCESSIBILITY
Contractor shall be responsible for determining in advance of purchase that equipment
and materials proposed for installation shall fit into the confines indicated areas,
allowing adequate space for maintenance.
All work shall be installed so as to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and
repair. Deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, after the written
approval of the Engineer.
Concealed valves and devices shall be grouped together in as practical a way as
possible in order to be accessible through access doors.
1.18
ACCESS DOORS
The Contractor shall arrange for access doors and frames to be provided for easy
access to concealed equipment, controls, valves, traps, vents, drains, cleanout and other
devices that require periodic operation, inspection or maintenance.
However, the dimensions and locations of access doors shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall have the approval of the Engineer before the work is installed.
Requirements of access doors shall be submitted in sufficient advance time to be
installed in the normal course of the work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct identification of access doors by
means of buttons, tabs or markers to indicate the location of concealed work. The
method and schedule for identification of access doors shall be approved by the
Engineer.
1.19
NAMEPLATES
Each piece of equipment provided shall carry, at a conspicuous location, attached in a
permanent manner to the equipment at the factory, a certified nameplate on which shall
be printed or stamped clearly the name and address of the manufacturer, the equipment
model number, serial number, date of manufacture, Electrical characteristics,
performance rating or duty, pressure, temperature or other limitations and all other
pertinent data as deemed necessary by the manufacturer for any future reference to the
equipment.
1.20
LABELING
The Contractor shall label and identify all equipment, instruments, controls, electrical
devices, valves, etc. as to duty, service or function.
Page 9 of 16
Labels on equipment shall be of laminated bakelite with black surface and white core,
with incised lettering nomenclature written in English.
Labels shall be attached to equipment, instruments, controls, electrical devices, etc. or
to adjacent permanent surfaces, in an approved permanent manner.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval prior to installation a
schedule of all equipment and devices to be labeled and the suggested nomenclature.
Controls and electrical devices shall be labeled to indicate clearly which equipment
they control.
1.21
GUARANTEE
All works are to be guaranteed for a period of one year dated from the final acceptance
of the work by the Owner.
Repairs or replacements made under the guarantee shall bear an additional one year
guarantee dated from the final acceptance of the repair or replacement.
Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment,
date of beginning of warranty or bond, duration of warranty or bond, and names,
addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filling a claim and obtaining
warranty services.
The guarantee is to cover perfect mechanical operation of systems, acceptable noise
and vibration levels, reasonable consumption of power, fuel and water, and perfect
attainment of temperatures and humidity within specified design conditions for HVAC
systems.
If during the guarantee period any equipment or material proves defective or any part
of a system fails to function properly, equipment is to be replaced and defects and
malfunctions corrected as directed by the Engineer.
If during the guarantee period any piece of equipment is replaced or rebuilt, the
guarantee period for this equipment is to be extended for a new period equal to the
original guarantee period.
During the guarantee period, provide necessary skills and labor to assure proper
operation and to provide regular and preventive maintenance for equipment and
controls, on a continuous 24 hour basis.
Act promptly to correct problems arising in operation of equipment or system.
Provide Owner with monthly inspection certificates of equipment, record findings on a
check list and certify that each piece of equipment has been examined, is operating as
intended and has been properly maintained as recommended by manufacturer.
Check all controls monthly to ascertain that they function as designed.
Spare parts for normal wear and tear during guarantee period are to be provided by
Contractor.
Page 10 of 16
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions at the job site where Mechanical Work is to be performed to insure
proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site
conditions.
2.02
PREPARATION
A.
The Engineers drawings issued with these specifications show the approximate
location of mechanical apparatus, the exact locations are subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
2.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems,

materials and equipment. Comply with the following requirements.
B.
Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment and material installation with other

building components.
C.
Verify dimensions by field measurements.
D.
Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building components during progress of
construction, to allow for electrical installations.
E.
Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
F.
Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment

for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring
positioning prior to closing in the building.
G.
Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, material, and
equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
H.
Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each
service.
I.
Install systems materials and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,
including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements
indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown
only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual
system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer.
Page 11 of 16
J.
Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel; and perpendicular
to the other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished
spaces.
K.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or

replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for
ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
L.
Install access panels or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.
Access panels and doors are specified in Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods .
M.
Install systems, materials and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems

required to be installed at a specified slope.
N.
Painting
1. Follow manufacturers recommendations for surface preparation and application
procedures for paints and finishes.
2. Thoroughly clean surfaces requiring prime painting of rust, loose scale, oil, grease
and dirt by the use of wire brushes, solvent and other required means.
3. Do not paint on damp or frosty surfaces or during wet, foggy or freezing weather.
4. Spread and brush paint evenly to eliminate drips, runs or sagging.
5. Fill voids, open or hollow places and irregularities with compound.
6. Thoroughly clean and retouch damaged or dirtied shop coat surfaces.
7. Do not paint controls, nameplates or labels.
8. Paint thickness is measured when dry.
9. Machinery: Before shipment, paint machinery including fans, compressors, pumps
and motors with the manufacturers standard shop prime coat.
10. Piping
a. Prime coat steel and cast iron piping and related pipe supports, immediately after
insulation, regardless of whether or not they will be subsequently covered with
insulation and / or finished paint. Apply prime coat in accordance with
manufactures specifications. Do not prime galvanized metals.
O.
Cutting and Patching

1. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with the provisions of the Contract
Documents. In addition to the requirements specified, the following requirements
apply:
Perform cutting, fitting and patching of equipment and materials required to :
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

Remove and replace defective Work.
Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the
Contract Documents.
Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
Page 12 of 16
6)
Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore

Work to provide for Engineer observation of concealed Work.
2. Cut remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, component and
materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical items
indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new work.
3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent materials not indicated or
scheduled to be removed.
4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the
spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
5. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect
adjacent installations.
6. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials
matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers qualifications
refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building
components being patched.
7. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for
the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers qualifications refer to
the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being
patched.
2.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests
1. Perform tests on individual equipment, systems and controls in the presence of the
Representatives of the Employer, Engineer and such other parties as may have
legal jurisdiction.
2. Supply labor, materials, properly calibrated instruments, power, etc., required for
testing, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Before conducting any tests on system or equipment, thoroughly clean the
associated systems or equipment just prior to testing.
4. Test equipment and systems which normally operate during certain seasons during
the appropriate seasons. Where the equipment or system under test is interrelated
with and depends upon other equipment, systems, and/or controls for proper
operation, functioning and performance, operate the latter simultaneously with the
equipment or system under test.
5. The duration of tests shall be as determined by authorities having jurisdiction, but
in no case less than the time prescribed in each section of the specifications.
6. In general, apply pressure tests to piping only, before connection of fixtures,
equipment and appliances. Do not subject any piping, fixtures, equipment or
appliances to pressures exceeding their test rating.
Page 13 of 16
7. Promptly repair or replace defective work and repeat the tests until the particular
system and components parts thereof receive the approval for the Engineer.
Replace any damages resulting from tests, as directed by the Engineer.
8. Submit test records on reproducible sheets to the Engineer for approval and include
approved copy in the instruction Manual. The Engineer shall approve the format of
the record sheet prior to actual testing of equipment.
9. During tests of equipment and systems, fully instruct the Employers representative
on the operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems. This period is in
addition to any required special instruction, elsewhere specified.
B.
Final Inspection
1. At final inspection, it is essential that certain trades be properly represented
including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Mechanical Contractor including people thoroughly familiar with

project, its intent, equipment and system installation and operation.
Air-conditioning equipment manufacturer.
The automatic control manufacturer representatives familiar with
installation who can demonstrate to the Employers satisfaction that
controls perform according to the specified requirements.
The Electrical Contractors, representatives familiar with
installations wiring and interlocking.
the
the
the
the
2. The Mechanical Contractor shall verify the actual operation of equipment and
controls prior to final inspection
2.05
CLEANING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING-GENERAL
A.
Thoroughly clean any apparatus before placing in operation. Restore finished surfaces
if damaged and deliver the entire installation in an approved condition.
B.
Adjust and balance systems to operate as shown and specified.
2.06
INSERTS AND SLEEVES
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS for the installation of
pipe sleeves.
B.
Inserts in concrete for supports are to be as specified in other Division 15 Section.
C.
Lay out the work in accordance with approved shop drawings. Furnish and set in place,
in advance of placing of slabs or construction of walls, all inserts and sleeves necessary
to complete the Work.
D.
Pipe Sleeves: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, pipe sleeves are to be as follows:
1. General floor sleeves are to be standard weight galvanized steel pipe with bottom
and flush with surface, calked with glass wool and sealed at top and bottom with
Page 14 of 16
butyl mastic. Top end is to extend 25 mm above floor level in mechanical rooms.
Top end of sleeves is to be flush with finished floor surface in finished rooms.
2. Sleeves in Foundation Walls: Cast iron fabricated sleeves, flush inside and outside,
calked water tight.
3. Sleeves in Concrete Walls: Standard weight galvanized steel pipe, flush with wall
surface at both ends, calked with glass wool and sealed at both faces with butyl
mastic.
4. Sleeves in Interior Partitions and Ceilings: 20 gauge galvanized steel with lock
joints.
5. Sleeves for uninsulated piping are to be approximately 20 mm larger than pipe
passing through. Sleeves for insulated piping are to be large enough to
accommodate the full thickness of the pipe covering with clearance for expansion
and contraction.
6. Fire Rated Wall or Floor Sleeves-Galvanized Pipe : Annular space between pipe
and sleeve in the fire rated wall or the fire rated floor is to be packed with fire rated
silicon foam.
E.
Duct Sleeves: Where ducts pass through walls and partitions, provide sheet metal
sleeves and pack tight between duct and opening with fiber glass. The exposed side of
ductwork is to have galvanized 40 mm angle iron closure around duct. The angle irons
are to be secured to the wall construction.
2.08
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PIPE TRENCHES
A.
Excavation and backfilling of trenches required for the installation of all utility services
and underground piping within the building, and to points of connection with exterior
underground utilities outside of the building, are to be performed by each trade for its
work as specified.
B.
Excavate to the required depths and grade, the bottoms of trenches to secure the
required slope for pipe lines. Rock or existing concrete, where encountered, are to be
excavated to a minimum depth of 150 mm below the bottom of pipe. Where mud or
otherwise unstable soil is encountered in the bottom of the trench which is incapable of
supporting the pipe or utility lines, such soil is to be removed to firm bearing and the
trench is to be backfilled with sand to the proper grade and tamped to provide
uniformly firm support. Pipe is not to be laid on frozen subgrade.
C.
Trench Size: Sides of trenches at point 300 mm above the top of pipe is not to be more
than 4/3 overall lateral dimension of the pipe, expressed in millimeters plus 200 mm.
Above this point the sides of trenches are to be kept as nearly vertical as possible and
are to be braced and shored to protect foundations, utility pipe lines and workmen.
Where machines are used to excavate pipe trenches, such machine excavation is to
terminate 75 mm above the invert of the pipe. Final excavation and shaping of the
trench is to be performed only for short distances in advance of the pipe laying.
D.
Separation: Separate trenches are to be provided for potable water and sewer lines.
Page 15 of 16
E.
The trenches are not to be backfilled until the piping has been tested by the Contractor
as required and reviewed by the Engineer and any local authorities having jurisdiction.
2.09
MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM PRIOR TO

FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A.
Take necessary measures to insure adequate protection of equipment and materials

during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown conditions. This responsibility shall
include provisions required to meet the conditions incidental to the delays pending final
test of systems and equipment under seasonal conditions.
B.
Operate the completed systems for a period of time prescribed by the Engineer to
determinate the capability of the equipment and controls to conform to the
requirements of the drawings and specifications.
C.
Guarantee period for mechanical works shall be one years from the date of issuance of
taking over certificate.
D.
Make final operating tests with systems in simultaneous operation and building in
normal operating modes.
2.10
TRAINING
A.
The Contractor shall instruct and train Owners designated personal in the operation and
maintenance of every part, device and piece of equipment in the systems with emphasis
on proper startup and shutdown procedures, preventive maintenance and lubrication
procedures with recommended lubricants, overhaul and maintenance methods,
adjustment and calibration of instruments and controls, use of special tools and safe
practices.
The duration of training shall be for a total period of ninety working days, eight hours
a day.
This period shall follow the final inspection date and shall not necessarily consist of a
single series of consecutive days. Apportion time between summer, winter, and
intermediate operating seasons as mutually agreed.
B.
All expenses for training Owners personnel shall be at Contractors own cost..
C.
Commencement date of training shall be subject to client approval.

END OF SECTION
Page 16 of 16
SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL WORKS FOR

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 15030
ELECTRICAL WORKS FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEM
A.
SCOPE
Supply and install all Electrical Works, equipment and accessories specified under the
various Mechanical Systems.
Electrical Works shall comply with any of the following standards:
ANSI, NEMA, BS, VDE, DIN, IEC, UTE.
Electrical Works for mechanical systems shall comply with SBC requirements.
All electrical equipment, materials, accessories, etc,... to be supplied for the
Mechanical Systems, as well as all electrical works and tests to be done shall conform
also with the requirements of the relevant Specifications for the Electrical Systems.
The scope of the Electrical Works under this section and executed by the Mechanical
Contractor includes the supply and installation of the followings:
B.
a.
Motor control centers, motor control panels for each item or system and
housing all protection gear, switches and controls required for the specified
function.
b.
All cables and wires between equipment and the corresponding motor control
center or motor control panel.
c.
All electrical equipment, wiring, cables, conduits, boxes, earth connections,

control switches, starters, circuit breakers, isolating switches, relays,
contactors, protective gear or equipment, transformers, etc,... and all other
necessary item or components required for the satisfactory operation, control
and protection of the systems.
WORKS NOT INCLUDED

The following electrical items will be supplied and installed by the Electrical
Contractor.
C.
a.
Power close to each electrically operated equipment not fed from a control
panel.
b.
Main feeder to the motor control centers and control panels of mechanical
equipment.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a.
Ratings of circuit breakers serving electric motors are design values and must
be checked and readjusted, if need be, to conform with motor actual power and
rating as recommended by motors Manufacturers.
Page 1 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
b.
Power supply connections to vibrating or rotating machinery shall be made

through adequate metallic flexible conduits or tubings through which cables
and wires shall be drawn.
c.
Cables shall be color coded for identification. Red, Yellow and Blue shall be
used for phase conductors, Black for neutral and Green for earth conductors.
d.
Control voltage for starters and control circuits shall not exceed 240 volts.
e.
Shop and Installation Drawings are to be submitted for approval prior to

ordering materials and equipment. Drawings to include the following:
i.
Complete technical data on all motor starters, motor protection relays,

sensing units, control accessories, etc.
ii.
Instructional details of equipment, particularly motor control centers

and panels
iii.
Wiring diagrams of all power and control circuits
iv.
Installation details of motor control centers and panels and of control

and sensing accessories
v.
Exact routing of power and control cables, wiring and conduits
vi.
Feeder termination details at motor control centres, starters, motors,

isolating switches, control and sensing accessories etc.
f.
Power and control wiring to run in conduit unless otherwise specified.
g.
Power and control wiring to run in separate conduits.
h.
Rigid conduits are not to terminate in nor be fastened to a motor frame or base.
j.
Flexible conduits to be used at motor connections. Allow sufficient slack to

permit motor to slide over adjustable length of motor base. Length and radius
are to be sufficient to permit bending of feeder cables without damage to
conductor or its insulation. Flexible conduits are not to be used in place of rigid
conduit except at motor connections, unless otherwise specified.
k.
Conduits are to be supported with conduit supports in an adequate approved

manner.
l.
Conduits are not to cross pipe or vent shafts, ducts or openings. They are to be
run a minimum 100 mm away from pipes of non-electrical services.
m.
Detailed control wiring diagrams and a list of control equipment with

descriptive literature are to be submitted for approval. Free hand field wiring
diagrams or sketches will not be accepted.
n.
Circuits to be arranged to satisfy operating requirements specified for various

equipment driven by electricity and other requirements pertaining to proper
functioning and operation of equipment.
Page 2 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
D.
p.
Circuits to be protected with high rupturing capacity fuses or circuit breakers.

Auxiliary supply for controls, other than from main power circuit, is to be
effectively isolated by auxiliary contacts on main isolator.
q.
Motors to be earthed by connecting green insulated conductor from earthing

bushing in starter to motor frame. Run earth conductor together with circuit
wiring and terminate in motor terminal box, provided earth terminal in box is
connected to motor frame. If this is not feasible, extend earth conductor
through insulated bushed opening in terminal box and connect to motor base.
r.
Equipment to be earthed by connecting non-current carrying metal parts of

system to earth source. Non-current carrying metal parts include conduits,
cable trays, outlet boxes, cabinets, enclosures, doors, grilles, and barriers
protecting or shielding electrical equipment from direct access.
s.
Detailed wiring diagram is to be fixed inside each starter enclosure cover to

clearly indicate circuits.
t.
Control and power wires are to be identified either by distinctive colored

insulation, engraved tags or other approved method.
u.
Circuit breakers earth fault detection and interruption are to be coordinated

with those of main incoming breaker on main distribution panel.
v.
Manufacturers to be proposed by Tenderer as part of his Tender, in all cases to

be approved by Consultant.
CONDUITS
Size is to be minimum 20 mm unless otherwise specified.
Steel conduits are to be welded, drawn, heavy gauge, to BS 4568 Part 1 or approved
equal, galvanized internally and externally and threaded both ends.
Fittings for steel conduits are to be threaded, galvanized or cadmium plated malleable
iron specifically designed for size and type of conduit.
E.
WIRES AND CABLES

Power wires and cables are to be 600/1000 V grade, to BS 6004. Single conductor
wires and multicore cables to have high conductivity tinned copper wire conductors
insulated with PVC compound, with additional PVC sheath for multicore cables.
Control wires and cables are to have conductors tinned annealed copper, minimum area
1.5 sq mm. Insulation is to be moisture resistant flame retardant PVC compound.
Wires and cables to be rated for 240 V service. Multicore cables for control and
signaling to be PVC insulated copper conductors, PVC sheathed, to BS 6346.
Control wires and cables are to be provided with special heat resistant insulation or
corrosion resistant sheath where required.
Page 3 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Armored cables to have the armor as single layer of galvanized steel wire under the
PVC sheath.
Connections to motors to be single conductor wires pulled inside conduits or multicore
cables armored or no armored and fixed on cable trays or supports.
Special conditions: where required high temperature resistant cables, silicone rubber,
cross linked polyethylene, MICC, or approved equal, corrosion resistant sheath is to be
provided.
F.
ELECTRIC MOTORS
Motors are to be supplied by driven equipment manufacturer, to be as specified for
equipment concerned and specifically supplied for available supply voltage and
frequency.
Motors 1/2 horsepower and under to be single phase and over 1/2 horsepower to be
three phase. Motors to be totally enclosed, fan cooled type, unless otherwise specified.
Motors are to have Class B insulation as a minimum requirement as defined in IEC 85
and
IEC 34-I.
Motors that will operate outdoors are to have Class F insulation.
Motors operating in ambient temperatures exceeding 45 deg. C to be tropicalized and
derated for satisfactory operation.
Motors to be rated for continuous operation.
Power to be adequate to operate driven equipment without motor overload under all
operating conditions and loads and throughout capacity range of equipment. Motor to
be capable of delivering full rated output when operating at voltage deviating by 5%
from rated voltage at rated frequency.
Starting and torque characteristics to be as required by driven equipment.
Speed to be as specified for equipment concerned.
Conduit terminal box on motor to be approved model for type of motor enclosure.
Motor windings to be connected to terminals in terminal box at factory. One additional
earthing terminal to be connected to motor frame.
Motor base to be adjustable where motors are directly connected to driven equipment,
unless otherwise specified. Motors connected to equipment through V-belt drive to
have adjustable sliding base. Fractional horsepower motors to have slotted mounting
holes in base.
Page 4 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
G.
STARTERS
The starting current of all motors above 10 hp shall not exceed twice its rated full load
current, for 15 seconds. For motors of rating 10 hp and below, the starting current shall
not exceed 6 times its rated full load current, for 5 seconds.
In general, motors above 10 hp shall have assisted start in the form of Star-Delta
starters of the close transition type. Motors below 10 hp can be Direct on line Start.
Motors above and including 50 HP should be assisted by soft-starter.
Each three-phase motor shall be provided with means of automatic starting and to
disconnect the supply to the motor in case of:
a. Failure of one or more phases.
b. Serious drop in voltage.
c. Flow of excess current.
All starters shall be properly derated for operation in an ambient temperature of 45C.
All starters shall be of the magnetic automatic type fitted with thermal over load
relays/devices calibrated for close motor protection.
These devices shall trip the starters in case of overload and shall not allow it to reset
except manually.
The starters shall be capable of making and breaking their rated current adequately and
shall withstand as high as 5 times their rated current for at least 10 seconds without any
injury or failure.
Starters shall be fitted with On/Off/Fail Pilot lights, start and stop push buttons,
Hand/Off/Auto selector where required. All starters shall be provided with contacts for
BMS control and signaling (start/ stop and fault). Contacts to be provided to show the
position of the selector switch on BMS.
The contactors shall be capable of withstanding an intermittent duty and the number of
switching cycles required in the Standards. They shall be AC3 duty rated.
The contactors shall be provided with auxiliary contacts for connection of signaling,
interlocking, and other circuits required for controls.
The enclosures of the contactors, starters, etc., as well as their installation and
accessibility for operation and repair shall be suitable for the corresponding motors
with which they are related.
The contactors shall be suitable for mounting in any position. The contacts shall be
silver plated, bounce free and fully enclosed.
All motors control gear and ancillary equipment shall be protected by thermal and
magnetic circuit breakers in addition to the protective starter mentioned above.
Where starter operating circuits and ancillary apparatus are energized by an auxiliary
supply other than the main power circuit to the motor, the isolator shall also incorporate
auxiliary contacts to effectively isolate all poles of phases of such other power supply.
Page 5 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
All Starters not in a central panel shall have a sheet metal enclosure with a removable
lid and cover and necessary brackets for mounting on panel or wall. A clear schematic
diagram of the starter circuit shall be fixed inside the cover of each starter.
H.
ISOLATING SWITCHES
Isolating switches to be non fusible, single throw type, housed in separate metallic
enclosure, with arc quenching devices on each pole capable of interrupting at least six
times its rated current. They are to simultaneously interrupt power supply to all line
conductors, any neutral and control circuits.
Isolating switches for single phase fractional horsepower motors to be single pole,
dolly operated type, rated 15/20 A at 250 V AC, quick make, quick break, with silver
alloy contacts, flush or surface mounted to suit application. They shall be AC3 duty
rated.
Operating mechanism to be quick make quick break type, with external operating
handle mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover to necessitate disconnecting
switch to be in OFF position for access to inside of enclosure. Means are to be provided
for by passing interlocks. Position of isolating switch to be clearly indicated on cover.
Isolating switches for motors with star/ delta starting shall be interlocked with the
starter control circuit to reset the starter to the star connection in a way to prevent the
starting of the motor on delta connection after closing the switch.
Enclosure to be general purpose type, unless otherwise indicated or required, with
provision for locking operating handle in OPEN and CLOSED positions.
Enclosures where indicated or required by location to be weatherproof totally sealed
water and dustproof type.
J.
COMBINATION STARTERS ISOLATING SWITCHES

Components to comprise magnetic starter, isolating switch and short circuit protection
devices required by the Standards, in approved sheet metal enclosure to suit application.
Isolating switch operating mechanism quick make, quick break, with external operating
handle mechanically interlocked with enclosure cover necessitating disconnecting
switch to be in OFF position for access to inside of enclosure. Means are to be provided
for by passing interlocks. Position of isolating switch to be clearly indicated on cover.
Short circuit protection gear to be HRC fused cartridges or molded case circuit breakers
of appropriate current rupturing capacity.
Operation of circuit breaker to be possible from outside of enclosure. Position of
breaker ON/OFF/TRIPPED to be clearly indicated by position of handle.
Page 6 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
K.
PUSH BUTTONS
Push buttons to be one unit momentary contact START/STOP with normally open or
normally closed contacts as required by wiring diagrams and with lockout attachments.
Heads to be color coded and STOP button to be protected. Push buttons controlling one
piece of equipment to be housed in separate enclosure.
L.
RELAYS
Relays to be multipole with normally open or normally closed contacts, electrically
operated at 240 V maximum, and magnetically held. Contacts to be double break,
silvered type, interchangeable from normally open to normally closed without
additional parts. Relays are to be rated at 10 A, 600 V.
M.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Circuit breakers to be thermal magnetic type, with molded case, manually operated for
normal switching functions and automatically operated under overload and short circuit
conditions.
Circuit breakers to give positive trip free operation on abnormal overloads, with quick
make quick break contacts under both manual and automatic operation. Stationary and
movable contacts to be non welding silver alloy adequately protected with effective
and rapid arc interruption.
Branch circuit breakers to be minimum 125 A frame size, unless otherwise shown.
Main circuit breakers to be 125 A frame size or larger as shown on the Drawings.
Breakers of 250 amp frame size and larger to have electronic trip units.
Main incoming breakers to be current operated, earth leakage type, or suitably
equipped to provide earth fault protection. Earth fault detection and interruption to be
time coordinated with those of main incoming breaker on main distribution board.
Multiple pole breakers to have single handle mechanism. Each pole to have inverse
time delay thermal over current trip element and magnetic instantaneous over current
trip element for simultaneous tripping of all poles.
Trip elements to be ambient temperature compensated type.
N.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER (MCC)

Totally enclosed freestanding sectional type, cubical and with-drawable type with
sections joined to form one assembly. Sections to be designed to allow other sections to
be easily added or removed.
MCC shall be of unit construction single or double fronted type with a common bus
bar. It shall be made up of any number of steel plat cubicles with turned edges and
subdivided into compartments to suit the control gear items, all bolted together to form
self-contained switchboard.
Enclosure shall be NEMA type 1 unless otherwise required or indicated on the
drawings or required by the equipment location.
Page 7 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Enclosure shall have provision for locking the operating handle in the OPEN and
CLOSED positions.
MCC shall be constructed such that all compartments doors are interlocked preventing
access to the starter until the corresponding isolating switch or breaker is in the off
position.
Motor control centers are to be provided with Automatic transfer switches.
Construction to be 2 mm thick sheet steel, adequately reinforced and braced for
maximum rigidity, sand blasted, rust inhibited after fabrication and sprayed with one
coat primer and two coats enamel internally and externally.
Components motor control centre to include the following:
1.
Main incoming circuit breaker or isolating switch as shown on the Drawings
for terminating incoming supply cables and isolating the bus bar system
2.
Main copper bus bars rated as main incoming circuit breaker or as shown on
the Drawings
3.
Branch copper bus bars of adequate capacity to distribute power to each circuit
breaker and starter served
4.
Neutral copper bus bar rated at half capacity of main bus bar and distributed
throughout whole motor control centre
5.
Earth copper bus bars to be minimum half the neutral bus bar rating extending
full length of motor control centers
6.
One voltmeter with commutator range 0-415 V
7.
Ammeters on main supply with necessary current transformers
8.
Starters, circuit breakers, push buttons, indicating lights, switches, relays,

contactors and accessories as shown on the Drawings
9.
Interconnecting and interlock wiring.
10.
Provision for KWHM.
Bus bars to be adequately isolated and braced to sustain maximum possible short
circuit current.
Compartment doors to be interlocked so that isolators or breakers must be in OFF
position before door can be opened.
Spare positions to be fully equipped cells ready for connection to motors are to be
provided in adequate number.
Space positions to be fully equipped cells ready to receive control unit are to be
provided in adequate number. Space positions to have blank cover plates.
Page 8 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Starters, Switches, other components and electrical devices to be clearly labeled in

English as to number and function, with incised letters on black Bakelite with white
laminated core. Labels to be permanently fixed under each component.
Incoming line connections to be made with solderless, terminal four bolt type clamps.
Labels starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labeled in
English as to function and number. Labels are to be permanently fixed under each
component.
Schematic and wiring diagrams to be firmly fixed within motor control centre, showing
each component and cross- referenced with component labels.
Submit for approval electrical schematic diagram of whole installation, suggested
layout of motor control centre, interior wiring details and complete technical literature
on all proposed components, prior to fabrication or purchase.
P.
MOTOR CONTROL PANELS

Motor control panels to be wall mounted or unit mounted, lockable type.
Construction to be minimum 1.5 mm thick hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, finished with
one coat etch primer and one coat stove enamel internally and externally.
Panels installed outdoors to have weatherproof totally sealed water and dustproof
enclosures.
Panels are to contain necessary breakers, starters, push button switches, selector
switches, relays, indicating lights, interconnecting and interlock wiring and all devices
and accessories required for automatic or manual operation of equipment as specified
under equipment concerned.
Labels starters, switches, electrical devices and accessories to be clearly labeled in
English as to function and number. Labels to be permanently fixed under each
component.
Schematic and wiring diagrams to be mounted in permanent approved manner on
inside of panel door. Diagrams are to show each component cross referenced with
component labels.
Q.
SWITCHES
Float switches to be level operated, heavy duty, bracket mounted type, suitable for
application in open tanks, complete with 178 mm spun copper float, brass rod, two
stops, floor mounting stand, lever and counterweight. Switch to have oil tight and dust
tight enclosure and 2 pole double throw silver contacts that open on liquid rise.
Pressure switch to be industrial, heavy duty, bellows actuated type, suitable for water
service, with contacts to close on falling pressure. Range to be 0.1 to 8 kg/cm2. Switch
to be good for 1720 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm pipe tap bottom
connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole double throw
contacts and setting adjustment.
Page 9 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Low suction pressure switch to be industrial, sensitive, low range, diaphragm actuated
type, suitable for water service, with range of 2 to 20 kPa of falling pressure, preset at
factory to 3 kPa. Switch to be good for 690 kPa operating pressure and to have 6 mm
pipe tap bottom connection. It is to have oil tight and dust tight enclosure, single pole
double throw contacts, range adjustment knob, sealing cap and range locking nut.
R.
SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS
1. General.
Instruments shall be supplied and arranged as called for on the drawings and herein
specified.
All instruments shall be housed in identical 4 inch white enameled square metal
cases suitable for switchboard flush installation.
Instruments shall be with linear scales and markings in according.
Instruments shall be suitably protected and sealed for tropical use.
Accuracy of all instruments shall be within 1% unless otherwise specified.
2. Voltmeters
Voltmeters shall be moving coil type 90 scale and a center zero adjuster.
Voltmeters shall be fitted with a rotary type 7-position selector switch permitting
both line to line and line to neutral readings and OFF position.
3. Ammeters
Ammeters shall be moving coil shunt operated type with 90 scale and center zero
adjuster.
4.
Kilowatt Hour Meters

Kilowatt hour meters shall be switchboard type with built-in test facilities, a front
nameplate on which CT and PT ratios and meter constants shall be stamped.
The counters shall be of cyclometer type with six digits and a register multiplier as
indicated on the drawings.
5. Test Terminal Block

Test terminal block shall permit Site testing of switchboard instruments without
interrupting the load circuit.
Test block shall be fitted with 4 voltage terminals and links, and 3 sets of current
terminals and links.
All terminals shall be of solid brass and rated 50 Amps at 50 C.
Page 10 of 11

MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
6. Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be suitable for withstanding thermal and dynamic
stresses due to switchgear short-circuit currents. Current transformers connections
to protective and control devices and all outgoing current terminals shall be by
means of terminals which can be short circuited, isolated, and in addition provided
with plug in test points for portable instruments.
Unused secondary terminals shall be short-circuited. Additional taps on current
transformers shall be wired to the outgoing terminal block.
The current transformer range shall match the associated device.
END OF SECTION
Page 11 of 11
SECTION 15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 15050
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
complete installation of basic mechanical materials and related work as indicated on
the drawings and specified herein.
B.
Related Work
Division 15:
Division 16:
C.
Mechanical
Electrical
Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Excavation for underground utilities and service.
2. Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment.
3. Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings and floors for access to mechanical
materials and equipment.
4. Mechanical equipment nameplate data.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable code and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following submittals in accordance with Section 15010 Basic Mechanical
Requirements.
B.
Provide product data for the following products:

1. Access panels and doors.
2. Joint sealers.
3. Pipe and duct sleeves.
C.
Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood
supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment.
D.
Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations in accordance with
Section15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements .
E.
Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective

demolition prior to commencement of work. Include coordination for shutoff of utility
Page 1 of 4
service, and details for dust, fire and noise control. Coordinate sequencing with
construction phasing and Employer occupancy specified in the contract Documents.
1.04
A.
Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period
for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B.
Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with manufacturers

recommendations to prevent their deterioration and damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Mechanical Equipment Nameplate Data

1. Nameplate: For each piece of mechanical equipment provide a permanent
operational data nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number,
serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested
compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible
location, as approved by Engineer.
2. Relocate nameplates as required and approved after installation to permit easy
reading.
B.
Sealant
1. Provide ready-to-use silicone penetration seal that will stop passage of fire, smoke,
and water will cure in the presence of atmospheric moisture to product durable and
flexible seal, and will form airtight and watertight bonds with most common
building materials in any combination including cement, masonry, steel, and
aluminum.
2. Sealant Composition shall be one-part ready-to-use materials with consistency of
soft caulk at temperatures ranging from -35 to 160 F, and extension and
compression properties of plus/minus 40% of original gap.
C.
Access Doors
1. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete
with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall
be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent
surfaces.
2. Frames: 16-gauge steel, with a 1 inch wide exposed perimeter flange for units
installed in unit masonry, precast or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile or wood
paneling.
a. For installation in Masonry, Concrete, Ceramic Tile, or Wood Paneling : 1 inch
wide exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.
Page 2 of 4
b. For full-Bed Plaster Applications : Galvanized expanded metal lath and

exposed casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Examine the Contract Drawings and Specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.
B.
Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.
C.
Provide templates as required to related trade for location of support and anchorage
items.
D.
Preparation for Joint Sealers.

1. Thoroughly clean surfaces, removing foreign matter such as dust, oil grease, water,
surface dirt and frost. Materials must be applied to the base surface.
2. Prior to any priming and sealing, joints shall be masked by masking tape or other
approved means to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces.
3. Immediately prior to application of materials test adhesion of materials, to each
substrate material and apply primer to any surface sharing poor adhesion.
4. Where required support material with damming materials specified herein. Where
sealant materials require damming provide duct tape or compatible backer rod.
3.03
INSTALLATION, ERECTION AND APPLICATION
A.
Erection of Support and Anchorage

1. Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment
and elevation to support and anchor electrical, plumbing and HVAC materials and
equipment.
2. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
B.
Installation of Access Doors

1. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports, with face panels
plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
2. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
Page 3 of 4
3. Location
a. Locate access doors in hung ceilings, walls, furred spaces, partitions and other
components of the structure, where required to service fire dampers, smoke
detectors, duct access doors, controls, valves, cleanouts and other items
installed under this Division of the specification.
b. Contractor shall coordinate the exact location and quantity with Mechanical
and Electrical requirements. Access doors are not required in suspended
acoustical lay-in tile ceilings unless specifically shown.
3.04
A.
Inspect seal after 48 hours for complete adhesion, and seal and correct any deficiencies.
B.
Follow manufacturers installation instructions precisely, including 4-point field quality

control check which consist of foam color, foam cell structure, snap time, and free
foam density.
C.
Inspect seal after 24 hours. Remove damming materials to inspect under site.
D.
Correct any deficiencies by adding foam or sealant. Re-inspect after 24 hours.
3.05
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Clean excess cured sealant from nonporous surfaces with commercial solvent such as
naphtha mineral solvents, following instructions on container label.
B.
Clean spills of liquid components with high-flash mineral spirit solvent, following
instructions on container label. Trim excess foam with sharp knife or blade.
C.
Remove equipment, materials and debris. Leave area in undamaged, clean condition.
END OF SECTION
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 15051 WELDING
WELDING
SECTION 15051
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED WORK
A.
Division 15: Mechanical
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
This section covers the standard of shop welding and erection welding of mechanical
equipment, steel structure, framework, supports and piping.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
Reference Standards
The latest editions of the following standards and recommendations shall apply in
applicable parts.
1. American Standards
a. American Welding Society (AWS)
AWS B 1.0
Guide for the non-destructive inspection of welds.
AWS B 3.0
Welding procedure and performance qualification.
AWS D 10.4
Recommended practices for welding austenitic chromiumnickel stainless steel piping and tubing.
AWS D 10.9
Qualification of welding procedures and welders for piping

and tubing.
b. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI / AWS B4.0
ANSI B 31.3
Standard methods for mechanical testing of welds.
Chemical plant and petroleum refinery piping.
c. International Institute for Welding (IIW)

IIE XV-50 - 56E
Rules for welded constructions.
Page 1 of 3
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
1. All electrode rode types, and sizes shall be given indicating the intention of use.
B.
Qualified Staff
1.
The name, certificates of standard of welding obtained, and picture of each welder to
be used in a list indicating the level of welding the person is intended to be used for.
A simple, clearly shown, overall identification system to indicate the individual
capacity of experience.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
OPERATORS
A.
Each operator shall wear an identification system to indicate their level of experience.
Operators shall be certified welders or from an approved governmental institute.
Records of the welding procedures and welder performance qualification tests for work
done shall be maintained by the Supplier for review.
The method and procedure adopted for welding in workshops and at the site shall be
approved before production starts.
The applicable parts of the following documents from the American Welding Society
shall apply:
AWS B 3.0
AWS D 10.9
ANSI / AWS B 4.0
B.
Processes
1. Carbon Steel
Manual shielded, metal-arc, submerged arc, gas metal -arc, flux-cored arc, gas tungsten
arc, and other applicable welding processes and methods may be used in the
construction and fabrication of welded carbon steel equipment shall as far as possible
be prefabricated in the workshop. Use electrodes for steel 6010 root pass and 7018
filler pass, and for copper use 15% silver electrodes for copper brazing, and non lead on
antimony rod for solder.
For the welding of carbon steel piping, ANSI Code B 31.3 shall apply.
Page 2 of 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
The Standards and practices referred to are applicable.
B.
Reference is also made to the relevant system and/or material specification.
3.02
TESTS
Contractor shall execute X-ray test at random as requested by the Engineer for 50
welds. If tests fail Contractor shall redo the X-ray test after re-welding till the Engineer
is satisfied.
END OF SECTION
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 15060 PIPES & PIPES FITTINGS
PIPES & PIPES FITTINGS

SECTION 15060
1.01
RELATED WORK
A.
Division 15 - Mechanical
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
This section covers the general piping and fittings supply and installation required for
the works.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
Reference Standards
The latest edition of the following standards:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. ASTM A53B Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Ordinary Use, Specification
for Black and Hot Dipped Zinc Coated.
b. ASTM B88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Standards as specified herein.
3. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS): Standards as specified herein.
4. American Welding Society (AWS): Standards as specified herein.
5. American Petroleum Institute (API): Standards as specified herein.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
Descriptive literature for each of the actual proposed material to be used
including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Operating Pressure Ranges

Pressure Losses.
Fluid Flows.
Test Reports.
Certificates of approval.
Shop Drawings
Shop drawings for each of the actual proposed systems shall include the
following:
1. Working or manufacturing drawings.
2. Calculations
Page 1 of 24
3. Installation details
4. Connections to other services
5. Accessories available indicating those included
6. System diagrams.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1
"Structural Welding Code--Steel".
B.
Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".
1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping".
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
3. Submit welder certificated signed by the Contractor certifying that welders comply
with the requirements specified above.
1.06
WORK INCLUDED ELSEWHERE
A.
B.
Section 15405: Soil, Waste, and Roof Drainage Piping Systems.

Sections related to External Site Utilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
PIPES
Service
Pipe Material
1.
Condensate drain Water

Pipes
Pressure UPVC - 10 bar
2.
Chilled Water
Seamless black welded steel pipes schedule 40 to

ASTM A53 TYPE S-with welded joints
3.
Underground Cold Water.
UPVC - 16 bar
4.
Domestic Water (Hot &

Cold) at floor levels
Polypropylene pipes for cold water

Polypropylene pipes with aluminum layer for hot
water and hot water return
5.
Domestic Water Cold,

inside shafts and mechanical
rooms
Pressure UPVC schedule 80
6.
Wet Standpipe System.
Black seamless steel medium weight with

Victaulic mechanical pipe coupling
Page 2 of 24
7.
Irrigation Water Pipes
Pressure UPVC - 16 bar, and HDPE irrigation pipe
8.
Refrigerant Pipes
Copper Type L.
9.
Fire Water Pipes ( Indoor)
Black seamless steel medium weight with

Victaulic mechanical pipe coupling
10
Fire Water Pipes

(Underground)
UPVC 16 bar
11.
Water Tank over flow and

drain pipes.
Pressure UPVC - 10 bar for overflow

Galvanized Steel Schedule 40, Seamless for drain
12.
FM200 Fire Protection
Black malleable Steel Seamless Class 300, Sch.80.
13.
Pool Pipes
UPVC Class E. (1) 16 bar
14
Expansion Pipes
Schedule 40 Black Mild Steel, Seamless
15
Drainage Soil and waste in

shafts and technical floors
UPVC plastic pipes
16
Rain water pipe in shafts

And technical floors.
UPVC plastic pipes
17
Drainage Soil and waste in

toilets
UPVC sound insulated where needed
18
Drainage pipes for parking

Drains.
-Vent pipes inside shafts
and in toilets
UPVC plastic pipes
19
Drainage pipes for laundry

And kitchen special
equipment (where
mentioned on the drawings
Cast Iron pipes
B.
Sizes
1. Unless otherwise specified pipework of 65 mm nominal bore and over shall be
welded, while 50 mm nominal bore and below the pipework shall be screwed.
Page 3 of 24
2.02
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Copper Piping
a. Pipe work shall be Type K hard temper copper tubing conforming to ASTM B
88, or table Y to BS 2871 with PVC coating or tape.
b. Copper fittings shall be streamlined wrought copper solder type of pattern to suit
requirements (ANSI B 16.22).
c. Flanges for copper pipes shall be cast bronze with raised ground face and bolt hole
spot faced. Flanges shall be rated for 1.5 MPa water working pressure.
d. Gaskets shall be of a material suitable for the fluid, temperature, and pressure for
which they will be used.
e. Lead-and antimony based solders should not be used for potable water system.
Brazing and silver solders should be employed. Use 15 % silver rods for brazing.
B.
Galvanized Steel Piping

a. Galvanized steel pipe fittings for 50 mm and smaller.
a. ANSI B16.3, 1MPa, galvanized malleable iron, threaded.
b. Threads, ANSI Bz.1.
b. Galvanized steel pipe fittings for 65 mm and larger.
a. ANSI B16.9, standard weight galvanized.
c. Flanges for galvanized steel pipes: ANSI B16.5, class 150.
d. Gaskets shall be of material suitable for the fluid temperature and pressure for
which they are used.
e. All fittings shall comply with Standard of pipes.
C.
Black Steel Piping

a. Black steel pipes shall be welded steel medium weight conforming with DIN 2440,
BS 1387 medium class or equivalent international standard for steel pipes
b. Pipe fittings (tees, elbows, crosses, reducers, unions, flanges, etc,...) shall be of the
same weight and quality as the pipe.
Each black steel pipe shall conform to the following requirements:
c.
Pipes and fittings up to 2" shall be suitable for threaded connections.
d.
Fittings up to 2" shall be black malleable iron, banded with threaded
connections.
e.
Pipes and fittings larger than 2" shall be suitable for grooved mechanical
coupling connections (Victaulic).
Page 4 of 24
f.
Pipe wall thickness and weight for medium class pipes shall be as follows:
Pipe Size
(inches)
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
2 1/2
D.
Thickness
(mm)
2.65
2.65
3.25
3.25
3.25
3.65
3.65
Weight of Plain End Pipe

Kg/m
1.22
1.58
2.44
3.14
3.61
5.10
6.51
UPVC Pressure Piping

Supply and install all pressure UPVC pipes and fittings as specified herein.
a.
All pressure UPVC pipes shall be of extruded unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride
to BS 3505 class E or approved equal International Standards. Fittings shall be
of same material and pressure as pipe.
b.
All joints shall be of the rubber ring pressure joint.
E.
UPVC Non-Pressure Pipes

Supply and install all UPVC pipes as specified herein.
Each UPVC pipe shall conform to the following requirements:
a.
Plastic pipes shall be extruded unplasticized PVC (UPVC) conforming to the
following British Standards or approved equal, for non-pressure drainage
pipes:
Pipes 32mm to 50mm diameter: to BS 5255. for above and
underground pipes
Pipes 82mm to 160mm diameter installed above ground: to BS 4514.
Pipes 110mm and 160mm diameter installed underground: to BS 4660.
Pipes larger than 160mm diameter: to BS 3506.
b.
Pipe fittings shall be UPVC of the same weight and quality as the pipe.
c.
All pipes and fittings shall be marked with the Kite Mark of the standard to
which they are manufactured.
d.
Unless specifically stated otherwise, pipes and fittings for drainage works shall
be suitable for rubber ring pressure joint. Sealing rings to be rubber to BS 2494
Part 2.
Page 5 of 24
F.
Polypropylene Pipes and fittings.

a. Polypropylene pipes and fittings to be to DIN 8077/78 PN20 for pipes and to DIN
16962 PN25.
b. Joints shall be made by electric fusion welding as per manufacturers
recommendations.
G.
Aluminum Reinforced Polypropylene Pipes and fittings.

a. Polypropylene pipes and fittings to be to DIN 8077/78 PN20 for pipes and to DIN
16962 PN25 for fittings mechanically stabilized through an integrated aluminum
layer and to be used for hot and hot water return pipes.
b. Joints shall be made by electric fusion welding as per manufacturers
recommendation
H.
CPVC Pipes and Fittings

Supply and install all CPVC pipes as specified herein.
Each CPVC pipe shall conform to the following requirements:
a.
CPVC pipes shall be Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (PN 20) conforming to DIN
8087 or to ASTM F441 schedule 80.
b.
Pipe fittings (tees, elbows, crosses, reducers, unions, flanges, etc,...) shall be of the
same weight and quality as the pipe.
c. Pipes and fittings shall be suitable for solvent connections.
I.
Cast iron drainage Pipes and Fittings

Supply and install all cast iron pipes as specified herein.
Each cast iron pipe shall conform to the following requirements:
a. Cast iron drainage pipes and fittings are to be BS 416 medium class for above ground
and BS 437 medium ground or to ASTM A 74 Service class, no-hub system, factory
coated internally and externally by dipping in bitumen base solution.
b. Joints to be made by means of stainless steel coupling with elastomeric seals to BS 2494
and stainless steel bolts and nuts.
2. Mechanical Joints:
When making a mechanical joint a check shall be made to ensure that the depth of
entry mark is indicated on every spigot before insertion into the socket, so that the
spigot enters the socket within 13/25 mm of the bottom of the socket.
Page 6 of 24
The spigot end of the pipe shall be chamfered to half the wall thickness and made
with suitable hand tools provided by the manufacturer
When making a mechanical joint care shall be taken to ensure that the seal ring is
not misplaced.
Due allowance shall be made for the control of thermal movement.
3. Solvent Joints:
When making a solvent joint the spigot and sockets shall be wiped clean and
thoroughly degreased with cleaner to remove oil, grease, etc,. after which the spigot
and socket shall have solvent adhesive applied.
The sockets and spigots shall be assembled as quickly as possible after applying the
adhesive and within forty seconds after which it shall be held together for up to five
minutes.
Special care shall be taken to prevent dirt and rubbish entering the open ends of
pipes during erection. Wrought iron screwed caps or plugs, or plastic covers only
shall be used. Wood, rag or paper plugs shall not be used. Failure to comply with
this instruction shall mean that the Engineer shall have the right to order the
pipework to be dismantled for as far as considered necessary and the pipework to
be cleaned internally. Such work shall be carried out by the Contractor and all cost
shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor is reminded that the valve fitted to the open end of disconnected
pipes is not considered satisfactory to prevent the entry of rubbish. The open end
shall be capped, plugged or crimped.
2.03
PIPE FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES
A.
General
1. Refer to individual piping system sections for required pipe fittings and specialties
not covered herein.
2. Fittings whether black, galvanized, copper or brass shall be compatible with the
pipe work system they are connected to.
3. Iron fittings shall be generally of the malleable iron type: while steam and
condensate services shall use wrought iron fittings.
B.
Elbows, Tees, Reducers

1. These fittings shall comply with ASTM and ANSI B16 as described in relevant
sections of specifications. The wall thickness shall at least be as specified for the
straight pipes.
2. All fittings shall be factory made.
Page 7 of 24
3. Unless otherwise stated, elbows shall be long radius bends with a radius of 1.5
times the nominal size, and shall be smooth and not made of welded segments.
4. Tees up to and including an outside diameter of 323.9mm shall be of the pressed
type.
5. Unless otherwise specified, reducers shall be made with a length L = 3 (D-d),
where L is the construction length, D the outer diameter of the large end and d that
of the small end. Unless otherwise stated, the wall thickness of a reducer shall be
the same as that of the adjacent large straight pipe.
C.
Flanged Joints
1. Flanges shall, unless otherwise stated be welding neck over 100mm pipe or slip on
weld for 100mm pipe and under, with raised faces complying with ANSI B16-5.
Screwed flanges can be used, but welded flanges shall be preferable.
2. The material of the flange shall be compatible to the pipe and service the flange is
connected to.
3. Galvanized flanges are to be screwed wherever possible. If this is not possible,
black steel flanges are to be welded to the pipe work in the normal way and before
final fitting; the whole prefabricated section shall be proprietary hot dipped in a
galvanized bath depositing the amount of zinc specified for the galvanized tube.
4. Corrugated brass rings for flanged joints shall match the pair of flanges they are
gasketting and shall be used between the flange faces to form the seal.
D.
Blank Flanges and Gaskets

1. Blank flanges shall comply with ASTM & ANSI B16-5 and shall be of the same
material as the connecting pipe work.
2. All flanges shall be gasketed whatever the size or system.
E.
Bolts and Nuts

1. Bolts, nuts and washers for flange connections shall be of hot dip galvanized steel.
2. Bolts and screws shall comply with ANSI B 18.2.1 specification ASTM A449.
3. Nuts shall comply with ANSI B 18.2.2.
4. The length of the thread protruding from the tightened nut in bolt couplings shall
be equivalent to at least half and at most once the bolt diameter.
5. Washers shall be placed under both nuts and bolt heads.
Page 8 of 24
F.
Unions
1. Unions in steel pipe other than steam piping shall be malleable iron and have
female pattern, brass to iron seat, and ground joint, for 65mm and smaller, and
flanged connections for larger than 65mm. Unions shall be rated for minimum of
1.5 MPa water working pressure. Threaded unions for steam & condensate pipes
shall be used for pipes up to 32 mm only.
2. Unions in copper piping shall be cast bronze, female pattern, brass to brass seat and
ground joint threaded end connections for 50mm and smaller, and flanged
connections for larger than 50mm. Unions shall be rated for minimum of 1.0 MPa
water working pressure.
2.04
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Mechanical Installation System

1. All installation material used for supporting and fixing mechanical pipe systems
should be of a modern flexible type that gives a tested and reliable supporting
solution without the need for welding, drilling or subsequent galvanizing for
corrosion protection.
2. The system should provide for easy access and disassembly for future maintenance.
3. The Contractor should provide shop drawings and load calculations to verify the
suitability of the system for critical load applications as per the engineers
requirement.
4. The system should consist of the following components:
a- C-channels should be used as the main item for supporting pipe and duct and
runs and structures. C-channel should be made in accordance with British
Standards of width 41 mm, and height of channel shall be selected according to
load calculation, made of cold rolled steel strip of thickness 2.5 mm steel grade
ST32-2 as per DIN 10025. The steel is Sendzimir galvanized to a thickness of
20 microns. The channel in ward side should include fine serrations that insure
strong friction hold of the assemble nuts and accessories. The channel inward
side should be slotted for greater flexibility and should include longitudinal
swaging to increase rigidity and stiffness. Double channels connected with
tubular rivets shall be used where greater strength and stiffness is required.
Supporting distance and calculation of pipe loads for pipe nuts should be
verified by channel design in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
b- C-channel accessories as recommended by the channel manufacturer should be
used for assembly of various channel structures as appropriate for the
application. These accessories include fixing nuts with serration, angles,
brackets and pipe ring saddles.
c- Pipe Ring Clamps: Galvanized, pre-engineered pipe ring clamps should be

used for fixing all pipes to channel system or directly to the concrete structure.
Page 9 of 24
The contractor should verify that the pipe supported weight does not exceed
the recommended maximum load of the clamp as provided by the
manufacturer. The clamps should consist of two half rings suitably connected
with welded on connection nut for fixing the clamp to the threaded rod. Where
copper pipes, hot water and chilled water steel pipes are used, the rings should
provide with a pre-fitted rubber inlay with suitable temperature resistance
characteristics for the application.
d- Pipe Hangers for Sprinkler Fire Fighting Systems: Galvanized band hangers
and screw clamping pipe rings should be used for supporting fire-fighting
system. The system should be approved for loading as per UL, FM regulations
for Fire Fighting Systems.
e- Threaded Rods used should be manufactured as per DIN 976 of Steel Grade
4.6, galvanized and used to support pipe duct ring clamps onto the C-channel
or directly to concrete anchors depending on the application. The threaded
rods, nuts and flat washers used should have a clean thread and flawless
galvanized condition.
f- Concrete Anchors: Internally threaded Anchors used for fixing threaded rods
and pipe clamps should be made from galvanized steel, anchors should have a
flared end for accurate setting flush with the surface, and should have an
intelligent expansion selection that adapts to suit strength of the base material.
Concrete stud anchors should be used for fixing C-channels to the concrete
suitable for through in-place fattening with reliable fixing. All Concrete
anchors used should be provided with full load characteristics and used in
accordance with manufacturer recommendations with regards to application
and setting details. Concrete Anchors should also be fire rated to verify that
they can withstand the required loads within the fire integrity limits of the
supporting building structure.
g- For riser pipes, Anchor Fixed Point Clamps should be used to support the
weight of the riser pipe. Fixed Point Clamps should be used in location as
recommended by supporting system manufacturer and approved by the
Engineer.
B.
Pipe Hangers, Upper Attachments

1. Individual or continuous preset concrete inserts.
2. Beam clamps and anchor bolts may be used for steel construction.
3. Self-drilling expansion shells for 75 mm pipe and smaller may be used in existing
concrete structures. See special details for larger piping.
C.
Hanger Rods
1. Galvanized solid steel, all thread rods, with lock-nuts.( 10mm dia. Per pipe)
2. For trapeze supports submit calculation for threaded hager rod diameter with at
least 8 times load factor.
Page 10 of 24
D.
Pipe Hangers, Lower Attachments

1. Lower attachments for individual runs of pipe shall be as follows, unless indicated
otherwise:
a. steel piping up to 125 mm: steel clevis;
b. steel piping 150 mm and larger, not subject to thermal expansion: steel clevis;
c. steel piping 150 mm and larger, subject to thermal expansion: pipe roller
support;
d. copper tubing, all sizes: copper-plated steel clevis, except where hanger is
installed around the outside of insulation, not in contact with pipe, where steel
clevis hangers may be used;
e. cast iron pipe, all sizes: steel clevis.
E.
Vertical Pipe Supports

1. At intermediate floors use extension pipe clamps.
2. At top of risers, use hangers as specified above.
3. At base of risers, use stiff-leg pipe support immediately adjacent to elbow. For cast
iron soil or storm riser use solid concrete block.
F.
Trapeze Hangers
1. Where numerous pipes are run in parallel to one another, they may be supported
from a trapeze type hanger arrangement. Rollers supports shall be used to support
each run of piping on trapeze hangers to permit independent movement of
individual pipes.
2. Piping supports shall consist of channels, fittings, pipe brackets, pipe rollers, pipe
clamps, post bases, stud nuts, etc., as required to properly support and hang piping.
G.
Stiff-legs or Stanchions
1. Stiff-legs or two-leg stanchion supports shall be provided in cases where support
from overhead structure is not possible. Pipe rollers shall be provided for pipe
rigidly supported from floor.
H.
Alignment Guides
1. Guides to be constructed with steel base and T-bar with Teflon or graphite plates
bonded to the steel components to allow minimum static friction and selflubrication for unlimited movement. Units shall be factory painted. Guide base
shall be welded to the pipe; like F & S "Unislide", Elcen, or equal.
Page 11 of 24
I.
Flexible Ball Joints

1. Units shall be carbon steel construction, screwed, flanged, or welded connection as
required, suitable for temperatures of 274 degrees C and pressure of 8.3 MPa;.
Provide for 15 degrees angular flex and 360 degrees rotation.
J.
Anti-Vibration Suspension Hangers

1. Combination type, shall have a double-deflection neoprene element in series with a
steel coil spring; deflection of 8 mm; steel coil spring shall be selected from a 25
mm static deflection series with a minimum additional travel of 12 mm; spring
diameter shall be large enough to permit 15 degree angular misalignment of the rod
connecting the hanger to the upper attachment without rubbing the hanger box.
K.
Spacing of Pipe Supports

1. Spacing Support Schedule:
The maximum spacing for pipe supports shall be as
follows:
NOMINAL
HORIZONTAL (m)
BORE mm
STEEL
10-12
15
20-32
40-50
65-80
100 &
above
1.8
2.4
2.4
2.5
2.5
COPPE
R
1.0
1.2
1.8
2.4
2.5
2.5
VERTICAL (m)
UPVC
STEEL
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.2
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
COPPE
R
1.2
1.8
2.4
2.5
2.5
2.5
UPVC
0.8
1.0
1.5
1.7
1.7
Hangers and supports shall in no case be less than one (1)

hanger per 2.5 m and at every change indirection.
2. The spacing of pipe group supports shall be based on the smallest nominal bore
pipe using the hanger, in accordance with the spacing support schedule above.
Alternatively intermediate supports can be given to a particular pipe, if conditions
permit.
2.05
PASSIVE FIRE PREVENTION SYSTEM
A.
All openings through fire rated walls, ceilings and floors due to penetrations
of mechanical installations as well as those due to construction joints,
should be sealed with fire rated products suitable for the specific application
as specified hereunder.
B.
The product shall be capable of stopping the passage of fire, smoke, air and
water through wall, floor and ceiling penetrating, cladding and expansion
joints. The product shall exhibit the minimum designed fire resistant
properties.
Page 12 of 24
C.
The products shall be obtained from an approved, established and proven

firm and quantities shall be applied strictly in accordance with the written
instructions of the manufacturer, international standards such as UL, FM or
BS, and to the approval of the Engineer.
D.
The recommended treatments for various applications shall be as follows:

1.
Metal pipe bare or insulated: the annular space around the pipe shall be
packed with fire rated high density backing material such as RockWool
and the ends shall be filled and sealed with fire rated intumescent
mastic, or Elastic sealant according to UL, FM, or BS and manufacturer
data to attain the required rating. The size of the circular opening shall
be maintained as the barest minimum as recommended by the mastic
manufacturer.
2.
Non-metal pipe and conduit crossings less than 75 mm in diameter :

The annular space around the pipe shall be packed with fire rated foam
or high density RockWool as backing material. The ends should then be
filled and sealed with intumescent, graphite based, fire rated mastic with
expansion pressure of minimum 6 bar, depth as per standard to attain
the required fire rating. The circular opening shall be maintained strictly
as the barest minimum recommended by the mastic manufacturer. For
non metal pipes/conduits equal or more than 75mm in diameter, the
pipe/conduit shall have fire stop jacket installed flush on wall or floor or
inside sleeve with fire rated mortor to fill the free volume of the sleeve.
Page 13 of 24
2.06
PIPE SLEEVES
A.
General
1. Sleeves for all pipes passing through floors, walls, partitions, (except where floors
and walls are a part of fire-rated assembly) concrete beams, girders, and any other
building construction shall be provided in types as described below, and of
adequate diameter to allow minimum of 19mm clearance all around between sleeve
and pipe. When pipe is insulated, insulation shall pass continuously through sleeve
with 19 mm clearance between insulation and sleeve.
2. Pipes passing through fire-rated walls, partitions, or floor shall be sealed, smoketight, with a fire proof compound. Insulation shall not pass through the sleeve as
specified above. Fill inner space with Rockwool insulation with fire rated
compound up to the rating of the wall.
3. Allow 50 mm of steel sleeve above F.F.L, and flush with walls.
B.
Pipe Sleeves Material

1. Galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe when installed in:
a.
b.
c.
d.
concrete or masonry walls and concrete bases.

beams with poured concrete fireproofing.
concrete floors and mechanical equipment room floors.
concrete floors with metal under deck (tack weld to deck).
2. 18-Gage Galvanized Steel when installed in:

a. plaster or dry wall.
b. air plenums.
2.07
FLASHING
A.
Steel Flashing: 26 gauge (0.50) galvanized steel.
B.
Lead Flashing: 24.5 kg/m2 (5lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead for waterproofing, 5kg/m2 ( 1
lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead to sound proofing.
C.
Safes: 24.5kg/m2 (5lb/sq.ft.) sheet lead or 0.20 mm (8mil) thick neoprene.
D.
Caps: Steel, 22 gauge (0.80 mm) minimum, 16 gauge (1.50 mm) at fire resistance
structures
2.08
SEALANTS
A.
Sealant for Pipe Sleeves

1. All sealants materials shall be a single compounds, primer less, non-sagging type in
neutral color.
2. Polysulfide: one part, gun grade.
Page 14 of 24
3. Acrylic Latex: one part, gun grade, paintable, with a temperature range from -17 to
+82 degrees C.
4. Butyl: one part, gun grade, suitable for both horizontal and vertical joints.
5. Fire rating compound similar to wall rating and as described under paragraph 2.05
of this section.
2.09
COMPENSATORS
A.
General
1. All compensators shall be selected for the function it is to perform and the
suitability for the fluid type; pressure and temperature to be conveyed.
2. The compensator shall be the same size bore as the pipework it shall be connected
to, and shall have flanged connections for ease of maintenance.
B.
Isolating Compensators
1. This type of compensator shall be to isolate a treated vibrating piece of equipment
from the pipework system. The compensator shall not allow for any expansion and
contraction movement nor misalignment of interconnecting flanges.
2. The single neoprene rubber convolution and rubber facing flange in a single
molding shall have a mild steel backing flange.
3. The compensator shall be capable of a working pressure of 1.5 MPa and a
temperature range of -15 to 90C.
4. This type of compensator shall be suitable for vibration and noise control on
LPHW, chilled water and HWS systems.
C.
Axial Compensators
1. This type of compensator shall absorb movement under strict guiding in an axial
direction only. No side thrusts can be permitted.
2. The stainless steel convolutions of the number required to accommodate the
determined movement shall be protected internally and externally by a heavy mild
steel sleeve for physical protection against damage.
4. Large expansion compensators capable of up to 200mm shall be considered to keep
the number of compensators to a minimum.
5. This type shall be suitable for LPHW, steam, condensate, chilled water, HWS in
long straight runs such as crawlways and service tunnels.
D.
Angular Compensators
Page 15 of 24
1. This type of compensator, similar to the axial, has a hinged restrain in one plane
only. When used in a controlled condition with more than one compensator
together with natural pipe movement it shall allow for large movement with
minimum thrust upon the anchor points.
2. The stainless steel convolutions shall be protected with an internal lining.
4. This type of compensator shall be suitable for LPHW, steam, condensate, chilled
water, and HWS where the pipework can have natural 90 bends incorporated
between anchor points.
E.
Articulated Compensator
1. This type of compensator is a purpose made unit containing two axial compensator
units contained within a set of hinged tie bars which together with natural pipe
curving movement permits a controlled angular expansion movement with
minimum internal pressure on the axial compensator and the least external thurst
upon the anchor point.
2. The stainless steel convolutions shall be protected with an internal lining.
4. This type of compensator shall be suitable for LPHW, steam, condensate, chilled
water, and HWS where the pipework can have natural 90 bends incorporated in a
limited space with little thrust upon pipe anchors, in cases such as equipment
rooms adjacent to equipment connection.
2.10
THERMAL EXPANSION FIXED POINT SYSTEM
A.
Where metal chilled pipes are subject to thermal expansion, particular attention should
be given and pipe runs should be studied and designed to compensate for the expansion
forces and reduce the stress on the pipes and supporting system.
B.
The contractor should provide sufficient shop drawings and load calculations to verify
the suitability of the system for critical thermal applications run as per the engineers
requirement. Allowance for free thermal expansion distance at pipe bends should be
marked.
C.
The following components should be used to control thermal expansion :

1. Slide Guides : Use side and Roll Connectors with integrated sliding components on
all pipe runs subject to high thermal movement. The guide should be used in
accordance with manufacturer load limits and movement limits. The slides should
be resistant to operating temperatures of the supported pipes.
2. Anchor fixed Point Pipe Clamps : Where necessary and according to the thermal
study, use fixed point for a flexible and reliable fixing system against axial thermal
expansion forces. The anchor points should be used strictly in accordance with the
Page 16 of 24
manufacturer recommendations and loading characteristics and in accordance with

the calculated expansion forces provided by the thermal study.
3. Expansion compensators : For critical application and if expansion movement
cannot be taken up by free movement of the pipe bends, expansion compensators
or bellows of the axial and/or angular type should be used in conjunction with the
fixed anchor points and in accordance with the thermal study. Expansion
compensators should be used in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
2.11
ACCESSORIES
A.
Safety or Relief Valves

1. The relief valves shall be set to a maximum of 0.3 bar above the working pressure
of the line in which they are fitted or as indicated on drawings. Safety and relief
valves shall be suitable for the operating condition of the system.
2. They shall be of the totally enclosed spring loaded type with padlock.
3. Safety valves and relief valves shall have a full bore discharge connection. Where
any law point occurs in the discharge run, it shall be fitted with a 22 mm size
copper waste pipe carried clear of the insulation for drainage. The discharge and
waste pipes shall be run to visible safe positions to be agreed..
4. Relief valves shall be ASME approved and labeled, size, capacity and setting as
indicated.
B.
Temperature and Pressure Test Pugs

1. Provide temperature and pressure test plugs as described in Section 15990.
Page 17 of 24
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
General
1. Installation instructions contained in this Section pertain to most systems. For
specific requirements for installation of each system, refer to individual system
specification sections.
B.
Piping Installation Generally

1. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings,
etc. unless otherwise indicated. Under slab piping shall be kept to the absolute
minimum.
2. Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to
permit proper installation.
3. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal or bent piping
will not be permitted.
4. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joints etc. where possible and such that any
removable ceiling panels may be removed for access above ceilings.
5. Protect all piping from entrance of dirt or other foreign materials during the
construction period. At the completion of the project, all dirt and foreign matter in
piping shall be removed completely.
6. Piping passing through exterior building walls shall be caulked weather tight.
7. Provide drain lines from all relief valves and condensate pans and run drain line
full size to the nearest floor or equipment drain.
8. All water piping shall have draining points at all low points. For mains, risers and
branch lines there shall be at least a 20 mm drain valve with a threaded hose
connection for other points a15 mm drain valve and hose and hose connection
shall be provided.
9. Water piping shall be securely anchored to insure proper direction of expansion
and contraction.
10. Expansion loops or expansion joints shall be provided as indicated and required,
and shall be cold sprung.
11. Verify existing grades, inverts, and topographic conditions prior to any trenching,
excavation, or installations.
12. Horizontal piping shall slope uniformly without sags or humps to provide for
complete drainage of systems and elimination of air.
Page 18 of 24
13. High points in closed piping systems shall be vented by Automatic air vents.
Drainage piping shall slope as required by code or as indicated. Steam and
condensate shall slop down in direction of flow 12 mm per 500 mm unless
otherwise indicated. Slope water piping up in the direction of flow 12 mm per 500
mm.
14. Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site, worked into
place without springing or forcing, and shall clear all windows, doors and other
openings. Cutting or other weakening or building structure to facilitate piping
installation is not permitted; install to permit free expansion and contraction
without damage.
15. Swing joints at run outs to equipment and risers. Provide expansion loops at all
other points for flexible piping systems.
16. Drain piping from pump glands, relief valves, condensate drain pan etc., to spell
over open sight drains, floor drains, or other acceptable discharge points
terminating drain line with plain end ( unthreaded ) pipe.
17. Provide necessary temporary connections, valves, oversize flushing connections,
pumps, etc., as required to properly clean and test systems.
18. Coordinate piping installations with ductwork, structure, lighting, electrical conduit
and all other materials and equipment.
19. Use flexible pipe connectors for all inlet and discharge final connections to pumps
(except in line pumps) and other vibration producing equipment.
20. Provide flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment having 50 mm and larger
connections.
21. Reduction in pipe sizes except in drainage pipe, shall be made using eccentric
reducer couplings installed with the level side up on water piping and level side
down on steam and condensate piping.
22. Provide unions adjacent to each valve at the final connection to each piece of
equipment of plumbing fixture having 50 mm and smaller connections and where
otherwise indicated.
23. Wherever wells are installed in piping for thermometers, pressure gages, probes,
etc., pipe size shall be increased by one pipe diameter to accommodate same.
24. Provide air chambers at the top of all hot and cold domestic risers, at the end of
each water header in utility spaces, at the end of each branch line, and at the top of
all branches to fixtures. Provide shock absorbers at each solenoid valve or piece of
equipment that has a quick closing type valve. Air chambers shall be a minimum of
two pipe sizes larger than the terminating pipe and shall be equipped with an
accessible drain valve and air recharging petcock or installed at least 600 mm
above fixture to permit recharging by draining air chamber.
Page 19 of 24
25. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections and take - off
from mains. Changes in direction and branch connection in welded piping shall
conform to Section 15051 Welding.
26. Connect dissimilar piping material using dielectric unions or insulating flanges.
C.
Hangers and Supports

1. Approved hangers and stiff leg supports shall be installed in quantity and size as
required to carry the weight of pipe, contents, and insulation and shall be arranged
to prevent vibration transmission to the building and allow for pipe movement. All
supports and hangers shall be factory fabricated. Site fabricated supports and
hangers are not approved.
2. Support on pipe work requiring a vapor barrier shall be installed on the outside of
the insulation. Approved material shall be provided between the pipe and the
support to give adequate support and thermal isolation. The vapor barrier will
cover the chock.
3. Hangers spacing shall be as per clause 2.03 J1 of this section.

4. Hangers shall be supplied with lock nuts in sufficient number and location to lock
all rod adjustments permanently at the adjusted height. Two lock nuts shall be used
unless the nut tightens against a threaded socket. Minimum rod diameters shall be
as follows:
NOMINAL PIPE SIZE
ROD DIAMETER
12 mm through 50 mm
60 mm and 75 mm
100 mm and 125 mm
150 mm
200 mm through 250 mm
300 mm
9 mm
12 mm
15 mm
19 mm
22 mm
25 mm
5. Location of hangers shall be coordinated with light fixtures as shown on reflected

ceiling plans. Piping shall not be supported from ductwork, duct supports, or other
piping. Hanger rods shall not penetrate ductwork
6. Provide all necessary supplementary steel for support and attachment of hangers,
and pipe , and duct supports in shafts and between building structural members.
7. Piping at pumps, tanks, etc., shall be supported independently so that pipe weight
will not be supported by equipment. Each piece of pipework system shall be
supported so that no stress shall be imposed on equipment connections or flexible
joints to equipment.
8. Provide anchors, guides, and bracing as indicated to prevent lateral movement
9. Where an excessive number of fittings or accessories are installed between
hangers, provide additional hangers or adequate support.
Page 20 of 24
10. Rods for trapeze hangers supporting several pipes shall be sized for the equivalent
load.
11. Hangers rods shall be attached to structural members of the building.
12. Provide additional hangers or anchoring devices necessary for support of piping at
corners, tops of risers, etc.
13. Anchors shall consist of rigid members clamped or welded to the pipe to prevent
pipe movement at that point. Attach anchors to structural members of the building.
D.
Joints
1. Any leaking joints shall be completely disassembled and remade with new
materials.
2. Caulked joints in drainage piping shall be made using spun oakum to within 25 mm
of hub and the remaining space filled with poured pure pig lead and swigged.
3. Ends of all copper tubing and the interior of the cup of the fitting shall be
thoroughly cleaned and polished prior to the application of the flux and solder. The
flux shall not be used as a substitute for proper joint preparation.
4. All pipes shall be carefully reamed. Threaded pipe shall have full length clean cut
threads.
5. All sockets and pipe ends of PVC shall be cleaned and solvent cement applied for
full circumferential cover.
E.
Pipework Expansion
1. The contractor shall supply and fix expansion devices, anchors and guides to
adequately allow for the expansion and contraction of the pipework. The minimum
number considered necessary are shown on the contract drawings...
2. Whenever possible, such as brunch take-offs, natural expansion shall be used
within the configuration of the pipework system.
3. Pipe work expansion shall be carefully controlled to prevent damage to the
pipework system, equipment, structure, etc.
4. Special consideration shall be given to steam, condensate, LTHW and hot water
services.
5. Chilled water and cold water pipework generally where installed in the services
building , main services duct, equipment rooms and other areas where relatively
high ambient temperatures may occur , and where movement cannot be absorbed
naturally, shall incorporate flanged joints of the type which allow expansion,
contraction and some measure of lateral movement. These joints shall be a
mechanical pipe coupling consisting of a center sleeve, and flanges wedge shaped
rubber sealing rings and nuts and bolts. The main components shall be constructed
from high quality malleable or cast iron for sizes up to 80 mm diameter and steel
Page 21 of 24
above this size. All nuts and bolts shall be galvanized. Sealing rings shall be
suitable for the liquid type, temperature and pressure range. Sizes up to 345 mm
diameter shall be supplied preassembled. Larger sizes shall be supplied unfitted for
ease of handling. Coupling shall allow for a setting regularity of + 6 up to 600
mm + 5for 600 mm to 750 mm and 4 for 750 to 900 m. Each coupling shall allow
for a repeated maximum pipe movement of 9.5 mm and sufficient couplings shall
be installed on this basis.
6. All expansion devices shall be suitable insulated to prevent accident to personnel,
but does not restrict the movement of the pipework
7. All expansion devices and natural expansion pipework systems shall be installed
with 50 % cold draw of the total movement.
8. Anchor points shall be provided as shown on the drawings. The anchor shall be
capable of resisting the maximum stresses that be applied. The contractor shall
ensure that the structure, that the anchor is attached to, shall also be capable of
withstanding the same stresses.
9. The method of anchoring the pipework to a secured point shall be :
a.
Mild Steel
Welding
b.
Cast Iron
Two wrought iron stirrups acting as

clamps, bolted, with sufficient thread for
tightening, to a secured cast iron chair
c.
Copper
A wide copper strap, undersized to give

sufficient grip, when bolted together
around the pipe shall be attached to the
secured point.
10. Care shall be taken when installing and positioning guides to ensure that the
amount of free play in the pipeline is kept to an absolute minimum and that the
resulting thrust of expansion is taken up in the designed manner. Means for
Lubrication shall be provided where necessary. Guides for pipework over 50 mm
shall be of the type incorporating reinforced PTFE in order to allow reduced
frictional resistance to movement. Guides and skid supports shall be provided in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and shall form part of the
submission.
3.02
VIBRATION CONTROL
A.
General
1. All vibrating equipment connected to the pipework system shall be isolated to
eliminate transmission of noise and vibration.
B.
Noise Criteria
1. Each piece of mechanical equipment selected shall be evaluated for quietness.
Particular care shall be taken to evaluate acoustical performance as well as
Page 22 of 24
mechanical function. Sound pressure level within spaces shall not exceed the NC
curves indicated.
C.
Piping Insulations
1. All piping 65 mm and larger specified with vibration isolation shall have anti vibration hangers. Static deflections as follows:
a. First three hangers away from any spring isolated piece of equipment shall
have hangers with same static deflection as equipment isolators.
b. All others shall have 25 mm static deflection.
2. All piping 50 mm and smaller shall have isolators as follows:
a. First three hangers away from any spring isolated piece of equipment shall
have hangers with same static deflection as equipment isolators.
b. For insulated piping outside equipment rooms isolators are not required.
3. Install temporary anchors as required to permit readjustment of springs in risers

and to fix direction of pipe movement and final operating deflection of springs
4. Provide permanent limit stops to prevent excessive vertical motion in risers in
event system is drained and to prevent excessive lateral motion.
3.03
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
Locate all equipment that must be serviced, operated, or maintained, in fully accessible
positions. Minor deviations from the drawings may be allowed for better accessibility
at written approval.
B.
Allow ample space for removal of parts that may require replacement or service in the
future.
C.
Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.
3.04
MECHANICAL CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, or patching of his work which
may be required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive, or
be received, by work of other trades. Cutting of structural members shall not be done
without written approval.
B.
Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the contractor, as
determined by the Engineer. Contractor shall not endanger any work, persons, or
construction by cutting, digging or otherwise.
C.
Place sleeves through all walls, floors, and ceilings during the initial construction
where it is necessary for piping to go through. When this is not done, do all cutting and
Page 23 of 24
patching required for the installation of the work. Any damage caused to the building
by this cutting and patching, shall be corrected at no additional cost.
D.
Patching of all openings for new installations and all openings resulting from the
removal or relocation of any installations shall be done by craftsmen skilled in the
particular trade effected, with materials of like type adjoining openings.
END OF SECTION
Page 24 of 24
SECTION 15100 VALVES
VALVES
SECTION 15100
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
complete installation of Valves and related work as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein.
B.
1. Types of valves specified in this section include but not limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Gate Valves.
Globe Valves.
Butterfly Valves.
Valve Box
Double regulating Valve
Check Valves
Float Valves
Strainers
Air Vents..........
2. Valves furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of

equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.
C.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010.
2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications,
industry standards listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and
requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
B.
Tests: Test valves in accordance with the appropriate section of the specification
describing each system.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with requirements specified under Submittals in

Section 15010.
1. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for
materials and equipment specified herein for approval; obtain approval before
ordering materials.
Page 1 of 10
1.04
A.
Exercise proper care in the handling of work so as not to injure the finished surfaces,
and take proper precautions to protect the work from damage after it is in place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Valve ratings shall exceed respective system operating pressures.
B.
All valves shall be line size, except control valves or calibrated orifice flow indicating
valves, which shall be sized to achieve proper flow control and mid-range flow
readings, respectively.
C.
Valves and specialties specified in this Section are of a general nature and are
appropriate for most systems. For special use valves and specialties refer to the
individual system sections.
D.
All cast iron valve bodies used for water service shall be internally and externally
epoxy resin coated.
E.
Control and regulating valves shall be of the globe type.
F.
All valves must be rated for minimum of 16 bars at 192C fluid temperature.
2.02
GATE VALVES
A.
For Water Use:

1. Valves up to 50 mm size shall have ASTM B62 bronze bodies with PN16 pressure
rating. They shall have threaded inlet and outlet connection and shall have the
capability of being repacked while under pressure.
2. Valves for 65 mm size and larger shall be non rising stem, inside screw and yoke
type with cast iron body and bronze trim. Cast iron shall conform to ASTM A126,
Class B. Valve shall have solid wedge bronze disc, steel hand wheel, and flanged
inlet and outlet. Valve shall be rated at PN 16 water working pressure and have the
capability of being repacked while under pressure.
3. The rubber on wedges and in sealing rings etc. shall be of a synthetic quality which
can withstand storage for at least five years and shall be suitable for the water
qualities specified PN16.
4. Valves installed on pressure UPVC & CPVC pipes shall be of PVC.
Page 2 of 10
2.03
GLOBE VALVES
A.
For Water Use

1. Generally the valves shall be suitable for water at a working pressure of PN16
2. Valves for 50 mm size and smaller shall be of the screwed in bonnet type with a
renewable disc and threaded ANSI B2.1. The body and bonnet shall be bronze to
ASTM B62. The disk shall be a composition plug type. The gland to be capable of
being repacked while under normal pressure.
3. Valves for 65 mm size and larger shall be outside screw with integral yoke, bolted
bonnet, rising stem with plug type disc, and flanged to ANSI B16.5. The body and
bonnet shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A126 Class B. The fully guided
disc shall be of bronze. The replaceable seat shall be of bronze. The stem shall be
of manganese bronze and the packing in the gland shall be renewable and suitable
for the application.
2.04
CHECK VALVES:
A.
For Water Use

1. Valves for 50 mm size and smaller shall be horizontal swing check, Y - pattern
with a bronze body and trim. Valve shall have bronze disc, threaded inlet and
outlet, and shall be rated for PN16 water working pressure
2. Valves for 65 mm size and larger shall be horizontal swing check type, non-slam
design having iron body and bronze for brass trim. Valve shall have bronze or
brass disc, and flanged inlet and outlet and shall be rated for PN16 water working
pressure.
2.05
BALL VALVES:
A.
Valves shall be bronze ball type with threaded ends, Teflon stem packing seals, Teflon
seats, T handle for 25 mm and smaller, insulated operating lever for 30 mm and
larger, and blowout proof silicone bronze stem. Valves shall be rated for PN16.
2.06
BUTTERFLY VALVES:
A. Valves shall be designed for minimum of 0.68 MPa differential pressure with the down
stream flange removed through 300 mm size. Factory test data of differential pressure
rating is required. Valves shall have cast iron body, conforming to ASTM A126 Class
B body, tin bronze disc, in accordance with ASTM B30 copper alloy and EPDM seals.
Shafts design shall be 416 stainless steel. All valves shall have extended necks for a
minimum of 50 mm insulation. Valves 63 mm through 150 mm shall be provided with
lever operators and memory stop. Valves 200 mm and larger shall be driven by a worm
gear operator or screw driven operator with position indicator. Operators shall be fully
enclosed in cast iron housing, be watertight, and require no more than 150 N rim pull.
Operators shall be designed to withstand, without damage, an input torque of 1.3 KN.
Valves shall be rated for PN16.
Page 3 of 10
2.07
CHAINWHEEL OPERATORS:
A.
Babbitt adjustable sprocket rims of manufacturers recommended size with chain

guides and rust-proof chain length shall be as required to drop to approximately 1800
mm above finished floor. Intended for use on rising stem valves.
2.08
VALVES BOXES
Supply and install, wherever shown on the drawings and as specified herein, all
valve boxes.
Size and number of valves in each valve box shall be as shown on drawings.
Each valve box shall be of masonry wall construction or metallic wall
construction encased within masonry.
Each valve box shall conform to the following requirements:
2.09
a-
Depth shall conform to site conditions and pipe inverts.
b-
Valve boxes located outside shall provide a minimum cover of 30cm over
pipes passing through.
c-
Indoor valve boxes shall have a steel cover matching space internal finish.
d-
Outdoor valves boxes shall be provided with a heavy duty cast iron cover,
lockable.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES (PRV)

Pressure reducing and regulating valves shall be of the self-contained, direct acting,
spring loaded, diaphragm bars type, suitable for inlet pressure of up to 20 bars. PRV
shall be capable of maintaining same outgoing pressure irrespective of fluctuation of
inlet pressure. PRV shall be fitted with 2 pressure gauges.
The valves shall be of a design which permits the complete replacement or inspection
of any part without removal of the valve body from the pipe.
The valve body shall be of bronze, with threaded ends. The valve trim shall be of
bronze and all trim in direct contact with water shall be of bronze or stainless steel. The
valve seat shall be of the removable type and shall be of stainless steel. The diaphragm
shall be of synthetic rubber. The valve shall be provided from the factory with the
correct spring for the outlet pressure range specified. The valve shall be provided with a
means for adjusting the outlet pressure within the range of the spring.
The valve shall be suitable for installation in any position.
Page 4 of 10
2.10
DOUBLE REGULATING VALVES

Double regulating valve shall be of the Y-pattern bronze globe valves for 50 mm and
below and cast iron for 65 mm and above. It shall have a characterized throttling disk
with sufficient authority to regulate flow in a circuit incorporating a Flow Measurement
Valve. The valves shall have a unique device which enables the disk to be locked in
position to control flow at a pre-determined rate. An Allen key (3mm) shall be
supplied for lock adjustment. Tight closure of the valve shall be assured by use of a
PTFE disc insert. The valves shall be rendered 'tamper proof'. An in-built drain valve
shall be used for draining, back filling or air venting. Valves to be PN16.
2.11
FLANGES AND GASKETS

Flanges shall be class 300 flat faced forged carbon steel, weld neck to ANSI B16.5.
Gaskets shall be non asbestos to ANSI B16.21 and dimensions to suit ANSI B16.5
class 300, flat faced compressed sheeting 1.6 mm thick.
Stud bolts shall be to ASTM A193 grade B7, threaded full length complete with 2 nuts
ASTM A194 grade 2 H. Bolts & nuts to be galvanized steel.
2.12
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

-
This valve shall be used on domestic hot water lines wherever applicable.
Temperature and pressure relief valve shall be self-closing type with test lever and
screwed connections.
Valve shall be suitable for a pressure of 75 to 150 psi (520 to 1030 Kpa) service
and shall be supplied with temperature relief set at 210 oF (100 oC).
Valve shall be AGA and ASME rated.
2.13
BACK FLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Provide backflow preventers as indicated, of the reduced pressure principle type,

consisting of assembly including shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on
inlet.
B.
Backflow preventers to include test cocks and pressure- differential relief valve located
between two positive seating check valves.
C.
Construct backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE Standard 1013.
Page 5 of 10
2.14
SECTION VALVES AND SPECIALTIES
A.
Combined Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves: diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass

body valve, with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without
system shut-down, and non-corrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity,
and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure
and have the capability for field adjustment.
B.
Safety relief valve designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the
requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body
shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber, 1.5
MPa working pressure and 121 C maximum operating temperature. Select valve to
suit actual system pressure and kCal capacity. Provide with fast fill feature for filling
hydronic system.
2.15
ORIFICE FLOW MEASURING PLATES

Orifice flow measuring plated shall be supplied and installed in the pipelines in
the positions where required and advised by the Engineer for flow
measurement included in the unit rate of pipe run. Plates to be of the same
pressure rating as valves installed on the line.
The orifice plates shall be complete with carrier ring containing upstream and
downstream tapings drilled through the ring to communicate with the upstream
and downstream side of the orifice. The orifice plate shall be constructed from
stainless steel to a thickness sufficient to prevent distortion by the differential
pressure across it.
The orifice plate shall be located in the pipeline such that there is no valve head
or any other restriction which could cause abnormal flow conditions for at least
12 pipe diameters upstream and 6 pipe diameters downstream of the plate.
The carrier shall be suitable for installation between flanges suitable for the
system in which they are installed. The hydraulic pressure drops across the
orifices shall not exceed the figures given on the schematic drawings.
2.16
WATER STRAINERS
Strainers shall be located at inlets to control valve arrangements and pump sets
and generally as detailed on the drawings.
The strainer shall be simplex or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
Each strainer shall be provided complete with a stainless steel screen AISI 304
as follows:
Application
In pipework 15 mm to 50mm nominal bore on inlets to all
Perforation
Size mm
0.8
Page 6 of 10
control valves
In pipework 65 mm to 100 m nominal bore
1.2
In pipework 125 mm nominal bore and above.
1.6
Cold water Applications, HWS and LTHW:

Strainers up to 50 mm shall be Y type of bronze or gunmetal construction in
PN16, accordance with ASTM B62.
Strainers over 50 mm shall be of cast iron construction PN16 to ASTM 126
with flanged connections to the same minimum rating as a pipelines in which
they are installed.
Units up to 150 mm shall be provided with a yoke closure or similar quick
opening cover. Over 150 mm units shall have bolt down covers and each cover
provided with a lift eye.
2.17
AUTOMATIC AIR VENT

Automatic air vents shall b e installed in accessible positions and shall be of
aluminum bronze construction with brass spindle nickel alloy valve and seat,
brass float and integral lock shield isolating valve. Operating pressure PN16
and temperature up to 120 in all cases the air vent shall be preceded by a lock
shield pattern stop valve and the discharge from the air vent shall be 10 mm
copper pipe. Automatic air vents shall be provided on each service with the
exception of HTHW and MTHW, at the highest point of the service within
each plant area and on each vertical distribution riser.
Discharge pipe shall be collected over a covered tundish and the outlet piped to
the nearest drain gully. Discharge pipes shall be labeled according to the
service
2.18
EXPANSION DEVICES
Expansion devices on copper pipework shall be manufactured with
convolutions of single wall 18/8T1 stainless steel, argon arc welded to a
stainless steel ring with a M.S. backing flange. All internal parts in contact
with the fluid shall be stainless steel and the ends shall be flanged to BS 4504.
Expansion devices on steel pipework size 50 mm and below shall be
manufactured with convolution of single wall 18/18T1 stainless steel, argon arc
welded to heavyweight mild steel end flanged to BS4504.
Expansion devices on steel pipework size 65 mm and above shall be
manufactured with convolutions of heavy wall hot formed Cr-Mo steel welded
to mild steel end flanged to BS 4504.
All expansion devices shall be provided with internal sleeves. External sleeves
shall be provided on devices in plant-rooms and underground ducts. Pressure
Page 7 of 10
rating of expansion devices shall be as per valves and accessories installed on

line.
Angular compensators shall be restrained longitudinally by means of hinged tie
bars, the hinges shall be located at the center of movement of the allow single
axis of movement.
Articulated bellows shall be of the fully articulated type with belows used in
sets of two with intermediate pipe of mild steel to BS 6129 . The bellows shall
be restrained lengthwise with ball ended tie bars allowing off set movements in
all directions at right angles to the axis.
Each Gimbal shall have a double linked tie bar system to enable one end of the
unit to take an angular movement in any direction in relation to the other end.
Gimbal units shall be used in sets of two to provide the necessary movement.
The Specialist Manufacturer shall advise the required length of interconnecting
pipework based on the pipework layout and the movement required.
Before finalizing his working drawings the Contractor shall consult with and
take advice from the Specialist Manufacturer to confirm that the allowance for
expansion made in the contractors engineering drawings is compatible with the
final selection of expansion devices.
The Contractor shall also allow in his tender for all expenses incurred by the
specialist manufacturer in attending site to inspect and monitor the installations
during the construction stage and to ensure all expansion joints are installed in
an acceptable manner before operation of the systems commence.
2.19
FLEXIBLE PIPEWORK CONNECTIONS

On pipework connections to heating (excluding pipeline pumps here natural
attenuation of noise and vibration is adequate) and hot water pumps , E.P.D.M.
synthetic rubber connectors shall be installed. The connectors shall be
corrosion protected steel wire reinforced with mild steel backing flanges
behind rubber raised faces.
On chilled water, cold water services and pump chillers E.P.D.M. synthetic
rubber connectors shall be installed. The connectors shall be nylon cord
reinforced with mild steel backing flanges behind raised faces.
All synthetic rubber connectors shall be restrained with tie bars.
The pipework installations shall be electrically continuous up to and including
the plant and equipment. The contractor shall provide and install earth bonding
across all flexible joints including those on plant and equipment.
The Contractor shall fit these items so that they are readily accessible. They
shall not be concealed.
2.20
AUTOMATIC FILTERS
Automatic filters shall be RainBird Model AF 150-LSS with 1 Y filter or
approved equal. Filters shall have automatic backwash.
Page 8 of 10
2.21
WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR

Supply and install water hammer arrestors where shown on drawings.
Each water hammer arrestor shall be complete as specified herein:
a.
Copper shell with brass adaptor.
b.
Elastomer bellow.
c.
Hydraulic displacement fluid.
d.
Pressurized insert gas pneumatic displacement chamber.
e.
15 mm NPT threaded connection
f.
Isolating ball valve.
2.22
FLOAT VALVES
Float valves shall be of all bronze construction including levers and arms, with PVC
float and suitable for a cold water working pressure of 10 bars. Float valves shall have
screwed inlets.
Float valves shall be of the full bore, equilibrium ball type, designed to close tight
against maximum pressure when half submerged. They shall have renewable synthetic
rubber valve discs and balancing piston buckets.
2.23
AUTOMATIC, DYNAMIC BALANCING VALVES

An automatic dynamic balancing valve shall be installed on all AHUs and FCUs shall
be capable to maintain a specific flow rate independent of pressure fluctuations within
the hydronic system. The valve shall utilize a specific flow rate cartridge below its
pressure differential range and shall act as a fixed orifice.
Once in the operating pressure differential range, the effective open orifice area of the
cartridge shall be automatically adjusted to the point where the specified flow rate will
be delivered (as the pressure differential increase the open area closes and as it decrease
the area opens).
When the pressure differential is exceeded, the valve again becomes a fixed orifice
device; it shall prevent from actually closing the ports located at the top of the cup.
This ensures that no part of the system is starved or shutdown.
Automatic dynamic balancing shall be of bronze body (CuZn39PbZ) with stainless
internal parts with a working pressure of 1600 KPA and with standing up to 120C.
Page 9 of 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Floor plans and flow diagrams are intended to be complimentary since not all valves
can be shown on the floor plans. In general, flow diagrams and details show valving
arrangement and floor plans show locations when possible.
B.
All water valves which regulate flow shall be globe, ball or butterfly type and valves
that are either open or closed shall be gate, ball or butterfly type. Steam valves
for all purposes shall be globe type and for condensate gate type . For valves for use on
medical and non-medical gases, air and vacuum systems refer to Sections 15310 and
15320.
C.
Provide shut-off valves in each supply branch from mains and at each supply
connection to equipment. Provide a balance valve at each return branch to mains at
each return connection from equipment, and in the bypass line of a three-way control
valve.
END OF SECTION
Page 10 of 10
SECTION 15140 - PUMPS
PUMPS
SECTION 15140
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 15050:Basic Materials and Methods.
B.
Section 15200:Noise, Vibration & Seismic Controls
C.
Section 15401:Water Piping System.
D.
Section 15530:Fire Protection System.
E.
Section 15606:Oil Storage Tanks and Piping.
F.
Section 15803:Cooling System.
G.
Section 15990:Instrumentation
H.
Section 15991:Testing and Commissioning.
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
This section covers the manufacture and supply of various pumps required for the
mechanical services.
B.
Fire pump fabrication, installation, and testing shall be in conformance with latest
NFPA Standards.
C.
Centrifugal, rotary, and reciprocating pump fabrication, installation, and testing shall
be in conformance with HIE.35.01, E.37.01, and E.39.01 respectively.
D.
The selection of pump type and pump drive shall be based on each specific application
requirements. Pump drivers shall be selected to be non- overloading over the whole
range of the Q-TDH curves, considering temperature variation of the fluid being
pumped.
E.
Pump Q-TDH curve shall be progressively dropping from shut-off head to run out. It
shall be such that it provides stable operation for the pump when operating at any point
on the curve. Shut - off head shall approximately be 25 to 35 percent above the rated
head.
F.
Pumps shall be capable of parallel operation.
G.
Constant speed pumps shall have the first critical speed at 25% below, or above, the
running speed. Variable speed pumps shall have the first critical speed at 25 % above
the maximum speed.
Page 1 of 29
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
Reference Standards
The following codes and standards are intended to provide an acceptable level of
quality for materials and products. The Contractor may propose alternative codes and
standards provided they give an equivalent degree of quality as the referenced codes
and standards and are submitted for review and approval in advance of their use.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
ANSI
B15.1
Safety standards for

transmission apparatus.
mechanical
power
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a.
A36
Structural Steel.
b.
A48
Gray Iron Castings
c.
A53
Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped Zinc-Coated,

Welded or Seamless.
d.
A108
Steal Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard

Quality.
e.
A120
Pipe Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized), Welded and Seamless for Ordinary
Uses.
f.
A276
Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and

Shapes.
g.
A278
Gray Castings for Pressure Containing Parts for

Temperatures up to 650F (345C).
h.
A296
Corrosion -Resistant, Iron-Chromium, IronChromium-Nickel, and Nickel-Base Alloy

Castings for General Application.
j.
A395
Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure Retaining Castings

for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
k.
A536
Ductile Iron Castings.
l.
B62
Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
m.
B148
Aluminum-Bronze Sand Casting.
n.
B584
Copper Alloy
Application.
Sand
Casting
for
General
Page 2 of 29
3. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

a.
E101
Vertical Tubing Pumps - Line shaft and

submersible.
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a.
20
Centrifugal Fire Pumps.
5. Hydraulic Institute (HI):

a.
E.35.01
Centrifugal Pumps.
b.
E.37.01
Rotary Pumps.
c.
E.39.01
Reciprocating Pumps.
6. International Organization for Standardization ( ISO):

a.
Refer to ISO 2585.
7. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE).
8. American Petroleum Institute:
a.
Standard API 610.
9. MEMA
10. NEC
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data on pumps, including but not limited
to, pump characteristics and performance curves.
B.
Pump Characteristics Curves:

1. Submit for each pump specified, copies of the characteristic curves of the proposed
pump. Such curves shall be plotted on 216 mm by 276mm graph paper. For each
pump (or pumping unit where overall efficiency is specified) the following
characteristic curves shall be shown as ordinates plotted against the rate of flow of
the pump:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Total Dynamic Head.

Pump Efficiency.
Brake Horsepower.
Net Positive Suction Head.
Power Input to Electric Drive Motor.
Page 3 of 29
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
Overall Efficiency of Pumping Unit.

Total Inertia.
Tests Reports
Certificates of Approvals.
Operation & Maintenance Data.
Recommended Spare List.
2. Indicate the limits of the range of rate of flow at which the pump can successfully
operate on such curve when the operable range differs from the complete range
shown. Approval of the characteristic pump curve shall in no way be construed to
be permissive to proceed with the manufacture of the pump. Upon receipt of an
approved pump curve, the Contractor shall submit, if he has not previously done
so, all other drawings, material lists and other information specified, requested
and/or necessary to coordinate the pumping installation with the balance of the
work and to show complete compliance with all details of the Contract Documents.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1. Submit drawings and information necessary for final design of foundations,
structural supports, connected piping and valves, pump drip and drainage piping,
electrical connections, starting and protective equipment and auxiliary equipment.
2. Submit for all pumping units, a dimensioned and scaled assembly outline drawing
or drawings of the complete pump, drive and all associated equipment furnished.
Such drawing or drawings shall show plan, elevation and any other view or section
requested.
3. For all pumping units a scaled cross-sectional drawing of the assembled pump
showing full details and materials of construction shall be submitted for approval.
For pumping units powered by motors rated at 20 horsepower or less, catalog cuts
may be submitted to supplement the outline and cross furnished with steel base
plates, sub-bases and similar components, detailed dimensioned drawings giving
full information thereon shall be submitted for approval. Steel components shall be
at least 9.5 mm thick and no undrained pockets will be permitted.
1.05
A.
Deliver all hardware in manufacturers original protective packaging.
B.
Inspect hardware at time of delivery for shipment damage and for compliance with
specification.
C.
When damaged equipment or hardware that will require repair or replacement, or

equipment that does not comply with Specification is found, immediate action shall be
taken to repair or replace equipment, so that the projects performance and schedules
are not impaired.
D.
Store hardware as recommended by manufacturer to prevent damage and deterioration.
Page 4 of 29
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of general use centrifugal

pumps with characteristics, pipe sizes and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
Electrical Standards: Provide electric motors and products which have been listed and
labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standards.
C.
Certification, Pump Performance, Provide pumps whose performance under specified

conditions, is certified by the manufacturer. Contractor is to submit certificate of origin
with shipment certificate to the engineer.
D.
All pumps shall be assembled in country of origin. Local assembly is not acceptable.
E.
All pumping units shall be designed and built for twenty-four hour continuous service
at any and all points within the specified range of operation, without overheating,
without cavitation, without excessive vibration or strain and requiring only that degree
of maintenance generally accepted as normal for the specific type of pump required.
All parts and components of all pumping units shall be designed and built for
interchange ability so that replacement parts may be installed without any additional
fitting or machining. Upon request, or if hereafter specified, the manufacturer shall
submit evidence that the tolerances and finishes on the detail drawings so permit, and
the manufacturer's shop is equipped with the necessary machinery, jigs, fixtures and
gauges to assure such interchange ability.
F.
Failure to successfully comply with the requirements of the previous paragraphs will
constitute grounds for disqualification of the pump manufacturer. Poor performance of
similar pumping equipment now in operation under the specified conditions of service
and pump rating constitute grounds for disqualification of the pump manufacturer,
supplier or both, unless such poor performance has been corrected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
General
1. All goods and products covered by these specifications shall be factory tested and
assembled and not locally assembled.
2. Pumps shall be made of materials meeting specific application requirements, and in
accordance with specifications detailed below.
B.
Pump casing shall be made of any one of the following materials and as described in
each pump specifications.
1. Gray iron casting conforming to ASTM A48 or A278. Class of castings shall be as
specified in the documents.
Page 5 of 29
2. Composition bronze or ounce metal casting conforming to ASTM B62.

3. Stainless steel casting conforming to ASTM A296.
4. Ferritic Ductile Iron casting conforming to ASTM A395.
C.
Pump shaft shall be made of either of the following materials as described in each
pump.
1. Stainless steel conforming to ASTM A276, Type 316 L.
D.
Impeller and impeller seal ring shall be made of any one of the following materials and
as described in each pump specifications.
1. Gray iron casting conforming to ASTM A48 or A278.
2. Bronze casting conforming to ASTM B584 or B184.
3. Stainless steel casting conforming to ASTM or A296.
E.
Tubing and pipe shall conform to ASTM A53 or A120, and in any case, shall be
suitable for the service under consideration.
F.
Base plate shall be made of either of the following materials and as described in each
pump specifications.
1. Gray iron casting conforming to ASTM A48.
2. Structural steel conforming to ASTM A36.
G.
Commercial prelubricated, or water, grease, or oil-lubricated bearings shall be used

according to application requirements.
H.
Mechanical or packing seals suitable for specific application shall be used.
J.
All other pump parts shall be made from material compatible with pumps basic
material and suitable for the liquid being pumped.
K.
The pumps shall be equipped with drains and vents, with copper pipes for draining and
aerating the pumps to the floor drain. Waste oil shall be conducted to a waste oil
collector located on the base plate.
L.
The suction and discharge flanges for the pumps shall comply with ANSI B16-5.
M.
The electric motors shall, unless otherwise stated, be squirrel cage induction type, as
specified generally in Section 16150 but with Class F insulation and shall be suitably
rated for the duty as shown in the schedules.
N.
The pumps shall, unless otherwise stated, be suitable for temperatures up to 100C and
a working pressure up to 1.0 MPa in an ambient of 50C.
Page 6 of 29
2.02
FABRICATION
A.
All like parts of same type pumps fabricated by the same manufacturer shall be
interchangeable.
B.
Whenever possible the pumps shall be manufactured such that it shall be possible to
disassemble the rotor assembly with minimum disassembly of other parts such as
suction and discharge nozzles, bearing supports, etc. being left in place.
C.
All castings shall be clean without defect.
D.
All foundry and machine work shall be in accordance with good practice for the class
of work involved.
E.
All parts shall conform to the required dimensions and shall be free from defects that
will prevent proper functioning of the pump.
F.
Assembly of parts shall be well fitted and smoothly operating.
G.
All internal parts, such as impeller, requiring surface treatment shall be sprayed with a
primer in accordance with pump manufacturers standards practice.
H.
Pump sets shall be assembled as completely as possible as a unit including base plate,
driver, couplings and guards, lubrication, seal flush, etc. by the supplier, as the
requirement allows. Seal flush systems shall be equipped with appropriate controls,
strainers and filters as recommended by the manufacturer.
J.
Pump exterior shall be sprayed with a primer and shall be painted to meet specific
application requirements in accordance with pump manufacturers standard practice.
2.03
WATER PUMPS
A.
General: Provide electric motor driven, volute type centrifugal pumps as indicated on
drawings. Equipped with insulated, quiet, TEFC, when installed outside, or drip proof,
for indoor installation, ball bearing type motor of rotation speed, hp rating and power
characteristics indicated; factory aligned and couple motor to pump. Provide pumps
rated for capacities, pressures and suction/discharge heads as shown on drawings, with
flanged pipe connections, with dynamically balanced enclosed type impellers locked to
pump shafts and shall be rated for 80C water temperature and shall be close-coupled
or with flexible coupling as indicated on drawings.
Domestic Booster pumps shall be centrifugal vertical type multi stage pump complete
with control panel.
Chilled water pumps shall be centrifugal, split case type, single stage, horizontal, and
as specified..
The pumps shall be of cast iron bronze fitted construction. The volute and bearing
brackets are to be cast iron the impeller of bronze and the pump shaft of stainless steel.
The pumps shall employ a mechanical seal, with a carbon seal ring and ceramic seat.
The motor shall be resilient mounted equipped with oil lubricated journal bearings or as
Page 7 of 29
B.
Pump characteristics: The Contractor shall provide pumps according to the capacities
and schedules as shown on drawings. The pump shut-off pressure shall not be less than
25% higher than the design load. The speed shall not exceed 1450 RPM unless
otherwise specified on drawings.
C.
Equip pumps with sleeve bearings and force-feed lubrication systems, and protect
pump shafts internally with non-ferrous sleeves, Provide bearing bracket assemblies of
the type which can be removed without disturbing piping or motors.
D.
All pumps shall be connected to building control system as indicated under electrical
section.
2.04
END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMP

Type: horizontal, base mounted, end suction, single stage, centrifugal type, directly
connected to motor through a heavy duty flexible coupling, with heavy gauge coupling
guard.
Base: pump and motor to be mounted on common steel base adequately reinforced
against deflection, with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole.
Bearings: pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty grease lubricated
ball bearings mounted in heavy iron frame with adequate supports to base for
maximum rigidity.
Pump casing: high tensile strength close grain cast iron with smooth waterways,
register fitted and bolted to bearing frame for permanent alignment, with bronze wear
rings and tapped and plugged bottom drain and top vent connections.
Impeller: bronze, enclosed type, fitted to shaft with key and locked in place.
Shaft: one piece stainless steel, sized to carry axial and radial thrust with minimum
deflection.
Mechanical seal: Ni-resist face, carbon washer and stainless steel metal parts.
Electric motor: totally enclosed, fan cooled, squirrel cage, induction type, with
permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings.
Manufacturers to be proposed by Tenderer as part of his Tender, in all cases to be
approved by Consultant.
2.05
IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
Description: In-line, centrifugal, single-stage, bronze-fitted, split case design; rated for
860kPa minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 107C
include the following:
1. Casing: cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller
than 65mm and threaded gate tapings at inlet and outlet connections.
a. Connection Option: Include unions, instead of threaded companion flanges, at
connections for casings that are not available with threaded companion flanges.
Page 8 of 29
2. Impeller: ASTM B584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Shaft and Sleeve: stainless steel shaft with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
4. Seals: mechanical DUNA-N type. Include carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless steel
spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
5. Pump bearings: Oil lubricated, bronze journal and thrust type.
6. Motor bearings: Oil lubricated, sleeve type.
7. Coupling: flexible, capable of absorbing torsion vibration and shaft misalignment.
8. Motor: resiliently mounted to pump casing.
9. Manufacturers to be proposed by Tenderer as part of his Tender, in all cases to be
approved by Consultant.
2.06
VERTICAL MULTI STAGE PUMP

-
General
Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings vertical multi stage centrifugal
pumps of capacities as indicated in the capacity schedule and/or shown on the
Drawings.
Each pump shall be of the type specified and shall be directly coupled to an electric
motor.
Pump casing shall be of stainless steel, with smooth water ways and fitted with
stainless steel wear ring. Impeller shall be stainless steel, enclosed, accurately
machined and statically and dynamically balanced. Shaft shall be one piece stainless
steel with stainless steel sleeve of ample size to carry any axial and radial thrust.
Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal of extra hard carbon and ceramic type. Pump
ball bearings shall be of ample size to withstand all axial and radial thrust.
Each pump, for water supply application, shall be complete with the following;
Electric control panel complete with circuit breakers, starters, automatic electric
alternators, indicating lights and selector switches. Panel shall be made of sheet
steel of dust and rust proof type with lockable door. Panel is to be from the same
pump manufacturer.
Float switches, installed in both domestic water reservoirs, and control cables
between the float switches and the electric control panel.
Pump speed shall be as shown in the pump schedule.
Page 9 of 29
Method of Control of Pumps used for Water Supply application
2.07
One pump shall act as a standby (as indicated in the pump schedule)
A low water level float switch installed in the lower water tank shall prevent either
of the pumps to run dry if the lower tank is empty.
A float switch installed in the roof water tank with two predetermined levels. The
high level when reached shall stop the pump automatically and the low level when
reached shall start the pump automatically.
An electric alternator shall alternate the duty and standby pumps on every cycle. In
case of failure of duty pump to start, the standby shall be automatically started.
SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE SUMP PUMPS

Supply and install all sewage sump pumps wherever shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
Sump pumps shall be submersible direct connected with a guide rail system, duplex
assembly complete as specified in the following clauses:
1. Pumps
Each pump shall be of the non-clog, centrifugal, submersible, type designed for
pumping raw sewage suitable for continuous operation and shall be suitable to transfer
water at 120C complete with:
a. Stainless steel casing.
b. Open channel type stainless steel (316) non-clog impeller able to pass solids up
to 75mm diameter ( 3").
c. Stainless steel shaft (316).
d. Mechanical seal.
e. Water cooled, totally enclosed electric motor, rated for continuous duty. Motor
speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm. Motor to have thermal overload protection
and moisture sensing probes, pump and motor bearings shall be heavy duty,
permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings guaranteed for a minimum of
100,000 hours continuous operation. Include a 3 conductor waterproof power
cable of length required, but not less than 6m with grounding plug and cable
sealing assembly for connecting at pump.
f.
Oil casing.
g. Cables and floats fixing frame.

h. One check valve and one gate valve at pump outlet.
j.
Air tight access cover and frame.

Page 10 of 29
k. Level regulators of the pear-shaped type.

l.
Guide rail with stainless steel chain.
Sump pumps shall be installed in a concrete pit to be constructed by the Concreter with
checker plate cover over each pump.
The Contractor shall coordinate his piping with the Concreter and shall install all pipes
connected to the sumps pit in accordance with the layouts shown on the drawings.
It shall be his responsibility to coordinate and determine pipes inverts and locations of
pipe connections to the pit.
Control panel to be factory tested and assembled.
2. Controls
An automatic operating and control panel shall be provided for sump pumps operation.
Pumps shall be monitored by the BMS system. Control voltage not to exceed 24 Volts.
The panel shall be of light alloy construction, perfectly sealed against dust and water
and shall house pumps starters, breakers, floats, relays, interlocks, pilot lights, cables,
wires, etc,... to obtain to following results:
a. At low water level in the collecting pit, controls shall be inoperative.
b. When water level rises to the first normal level in the collecting pit, the lead
pump shall start.
c. When water level rises to the second normal level in the collecting pit, the
second pump shall start.
d. When water level drops to the first level, the last pump to start shall stop. The
first pump shall keep on running until water level drops to the low water level
setting.
e. An automatic alternating relay shall alternate pumps lead role after each cycle.
f. Should the water level rise to the alarm preset level or drop to the alarm preset
low level, controls shall act to operate an alarm bell which shall remain in
operation until put off manually. Alarm shall be indicated on the central alarm
panel and BMS.
Level switches shall be of the heavy duty sealed mercury tube type condensate
complete with twin core PVC insulated cable and shall be of a type intended
for use with domestic sewage.
3. Capacity
Capacity of each sump pump shall be as shown on the drawings.
Page 11 of 29
2.08
SUBMERSIBLE DRAINAGE SYSTEM

Drainage type submersible pumps shall be similar to submersible sewage pumps with
strainer installed on suction side of pump.
2.09
Gate valve and check valve at pump discharge.
Pumps shall be designed of material to withstand 120 degree C water temperature.
MAIN FIRE PUMPS

Supply and install main fire pump wherever shown on drawings and as specified
herein.
a.
Type: Horizontal end suction, centrifugal OR horizontal split case , pump

directly coupled to an electric motor through heavy duty flexible coupling.
Pump and motor shall be mounted on steel base plate with drip rim, drain
tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole. Pumps shall be factory assembled and
tested.
b.
Standard: pump and accessories is to be listed Under Writers Laboratories

and meet requirements of NFPA pamplet No. 20, FM approved.
c.
Capacity and Pressure to be as shown on the drawings. Pump is to deliver not

less than 150% of rated capacity at pressure not less than 65% of rated
pressure. Shut-off pressure is not to exceed 120% of rated pressure.
d.
Unit to be complete with pump, driver, controller and accessories from

factory.
e.
Casing: cast iron, minimum tensile strength 35000 psi, designed for working
pressure of as scheduled and hydrostatically tested at factory to not less than
17kg/cm2.
f.
Impeller to be vacuum cast bronze, enclosed type, dynamically balanced,

keyed to shaft and held in place with bronze threaded shaft sleeve.
g.
Shaft sleeves: to extend entire length of seal boxes to protect shaft and key
locked and threaded to tighten with rotation of shaft. Teflon gaskets to be
provided between impeller hub and shaft sleeves to protect pump shaft.
h.
Bearings: pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty, grease

lubricated ball bearings mounted in machined moisture proof and dust proof
cast iron housing and bolted to pump casing with register fits to ensure
permanent alignment. Grease seals and water slingers to be provided to
protect bearings from contamination. Bearing housings to be designed to
flush lubricant through bearing. Easily accessible grease fittings to be
provided for positive bearing lubrication.
i.
Shaft to be high strength steel accurately machined to give true running

rotating element.
j.
Mechanical seals: carbon washer, Ni-resist face and stainless steel parts.
Page 12 of 29
k.
Electric motor: totally enclosed, fan cooled, squirrel cage, induction type
with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor speed is not to
exceed 2900 rpm.
l.
Accessories: pump to be supplied complete with the following:

Lifting lugs
Coupling guard
Tapped holes in suction and discharge flanges for pressure gauge
connections.
Suction and discharge pressure gauges, with minimum 100 mm reading in
psi and kg/cm2 and having range equal to twice rated design working
pressure of pump and complete with gauge valves, eccentric tapered reducer
at suction inlet, eccentric tapered reducer (increaser) at discharge outlet,
Relief valve, factory set to open at pressure slightly greater than rated design
working pressure of pump, with capacity to pass all water discharged by
pump without developing excessive pressure on system.
Casing relief valve sized to prevent overheating of pump when operating at
shut-off, factory set to open just higher than rated design working pressure of
pump and lower than shut-off discharge pressure
Automatic air release valve on casing vent,
Test header manifold to include bronze or cast-iron exposed type valve
header with nozzle outlets and round brass escutcheon plate, hose valves
straight way pattern bronze, ball drip valve.
m.
Fire Pump Controller

Fire pump controller shall be FM approved and UL listed specifically for
electric-motor-driven fire pump service, and shall meet the requirements of
NFPA 20. It shall be a combination Fire Pump Controller and Power
Transfer Switch.
Each pump shall have its own controller and transfer switch.
The fire pump controller shall include the following components, all other
devices necessary for the proper operation of the controller and compliance
with NFPA20 shall be provided:
Voltage Surge Arrester

Isolating Switch (with operating handle outside the panel)
Circuit Breaker (with operating handle outside the panel)
The isolating switch and the circuit breaker shall be interlocked such that the isolating
switch can neither be opened nor closed while the circuit breaker is closed.
Page 13 of 29
Locked Rotor Over Current Protection

Motor Contactors for Wye-Delta Starting
Visible Indicators of the following:
Power Available
Phase Reversal
Pump Running
Pump Failed To Start
Voltage Free Contacts (one NO & one NC) for indicating the following:
Loss of any phase at the terminals of the motor contactor
Pump Running
Phase Reversal
Pump Failed To Start
Loss Of Control Power
Pressure Switch
Second Pressure Switch (with a NO/NC contacts for remote indication of drop of pressure
below the starting pressure)
- Pressure Recorder
- Manual Start/Stop Push Buttons
- Minimum Running Period Timer
- Sequential Start Timer (to prevent the pumps from starting simultaneously)
- Remote Start Circuit
- Motor Current & Voltage Readout (on all three phases)
- Control Circuit Transformer (fed from two electric power phases feeding the fire pump)
Wye-Delta starting shall be of the closed transition type to prevent current
surges and disturbances to be fed back to the main power source. The
controller shall incorporate a mechanical and electrical interlock to prevent the
Wye connecting contactor to be energized at the same time as the Delta
contactor.
The power transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held.
It should be rated not less than 115 percent of the motor full-load current and
also suitable for switching the locked rotor current. A means for safe
(nonelectrical) operation of the power transfer switch shall be provided.
Power transfer to the emergency power supply shall be initiated by any of the following
signals:
-
Voltage on any phase at the load terminals of the circuit breaker falls below 85% of motor
rated voltage.
Phase reversal of the normal source power.
Transfer to the emergency source shall be inhibited until there is adequate voltage and
frequency to serve the fire pump load. Means shall be provided to prevent higher than normal
inrush currents when transferring the fire pump motor from one source to the other.
The fire pump power transfer switch shall include the following components, all other devices
necessary for the proper operation of the installation and compliance with NFPA20 shall be
provided:
- Emergency Power Isolating Switch
- Emergency Power Circuit Breaker
- Visible Indicators of the following:
- Emergency Power Available
Page 14 of 29
n.
Emergency Power Phase Reversal

Position of the Power Transfer Switch (2 indicators)
Voltage and frequency Sensing Devices for the emergency power source
Re-Transfer Timer
Delay Starting Timer for the generator
A Momentary Test Switch to simulate a normal power source failure
Voltage Free Contacts (one NO & one NC) for indicating the following:
Emergency Power Isolating Switch in open position
Alternate Source Generator Command (disabled if the Emergency Power Isolating Switch
is open)
Power Transferred To Emergency Power (mechanically operated by the transfer switch
mechanism)
Load Shedding Signal During Pump Start-up Only
Control sequence and panel board of fire pumps: Fire pumps shall start manually by a
star delta reduced voltage start controllers located in control panel. The control panel
shall be factory designed and fabricated. UL/FM approved. Controller shall include all
accessories & controls not mentioned here to meet NFPA requirement & UL listing.
The motor start electric motor controller designed to meet NF standards for automatic
connection in star/delta for reduced voltage start complete with all control devices,
alarms, functions and operations.
All electrical components shall be contained in a free standing, sheets steel, rain-right
enclosure with lockup front access door. Automatic operation can be initiated by any of
the following demand signals.
-
Low pressure m piping system

Flow switch
Fire detection/alarm switch
Remote start signal
Jockey pump shall pressurize the system and fulfill small demands. Upon increase of
demand and drop in pressure, the duty pump will come into operation first, then if
pressure continues to drop, second pump shall start. Pump will retire according to
increase in system pressure. An alternator shall interchange between the duty pumps and
standby pump. If duty pump fails standby pump shall come into operation automatically.
Low level switch located in fire water tank shall stop pumps and give alarm if tanks are
empty.
Controller door sets shall be interlocked mechanically when the main switch is on
position.
Manual operated spring assisted closing air circuit breaker.
Manual protection by magnetic type over current release unit which trips the circuit
breaker.
Stalled rotor protection with definite trip time 90 seconds at 600% of full load current.
Short circuit protection with instantaneous trips at 1200% of motor full load current.
Page 15 of 29
Normal setting at 300% of motor full load current with trip time in excess of 60 seconds.
Auto closing heavy duty line, start and run contactors rated at least 115% of motor full
load current. Push button operated for local, manual or remote start.
Lever operated mechanically for emergency direct on line start.
Control panel enclosure shall be NEMA ICS 6, Type 2 drop-off.
Panel shall be complete with push button operated for local, manual or remote electric
start.
Panel board shall be equipped with auto-stop control with wiring terminals at clearly
marked connector rail and external cable connection shall be through bottom fitted cable
glazed plate.
Performance Test: pump to be completely tested at factory with positive suction pressure
and with a 4.5m suction lift. Certified performance curves for both conditions to
submitted for approval prior to shipment.
2.10 JOCKEY FIRE PUMP
Supply and install jockey fire pump wherever shown on drawings and as specified
herein; conformity with NFPA Standards requirement is required. Pump shall be UL/FM
approved.
a. Type: Vertical multistage , centrifugal, directly coupled to motor.
b. Construction: casing to be cast iron. designed for working pressure of 17kg/cm2 and
hydrostatically tested at this pressure at factory. Impeller to be bronze, double
suction, hydraulically balanced design, dynamically balanced, keyed and bolted to
stainless steel shaft.
c. Construction: pump to have internal sealing water passages, removable chromeplated cast iron channel rings, mechanical seal with carbon washer, Ni-vesist face
and stainless steel parts, water slingers to protect bearings and 'O' ring gaskets to
prevent leakage.
d. Electric Motor to be close-coupled to pump, totally enclosed, fan cooled squirrel
cage, induction type, with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings. Motor
speed is not to exceed 2900 rpm.
e. Starter: totally enclosed, wall mounted, direct-on-line, with no-volt and overload
protection in each phase and suitable for automatic operation.
Page 16 of 29
2.11
DIESEL ENGINE DRIVEN FIRE PUMP

A-
General
*
The diesel internal combustion engine driving the fire pump shall be of
the compression ignition type, and shall be specifically listed for fire
pump service. Diesel Pump shall be to NFPA & UL listed.
The Engine rating shall be corrected for altitude and ambient

temperature.
The Engine shall have a brake horsepower rating not less than 20%
greater than the maximum brake horse power required to drive the
pump at its rated RPM.
The Engine shall be connected to horizontal shaft pumps by means of

flexible coupling and shall be connected to vertical shaft pumps by
means of a right angle gear drive with suitable universal joints.
The diesel fire pump shall be complete with a diesel tank having 3
hours operation capacity.
B-
C-
Instrumentation and Control

*
The Engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor capable of

regulating engine speed within a range of 10% between shut off and
maximum load conditions of the pump. The governor shall be set to
maintain rated pump speed at maximum pump load.
Engine shall be provided with an over speed shutdown device. It shall

be arranged to shutdown the engine at a speed 20% above rated engine
speed and for manual reset.
Engine shall be provided with (lubricating) oil pressure gauge, and

(cooling water) thermometer, both placed on a panel secured to the
engine at a suitable point.
Engine shall be provided with a speed-sensitive switch to signal engine

running and crank termination.
Engine Starting Methods

*
Engine shall be started electrically from storage batteries.
Engine shall be provided with two storage battery units.
Each battery unit shall have capacity sufficient to maintain cranking

speed recommended by the engine manufacturer through a 6 minute
cycle.
Batteries shall be furnished in a dry charge condition, with electrolyte

liquid in a separate container. Electrolyte shall be added at the time the
engine is put in service, and the battery given a conditioning charge.
Page 17 of 29
D-
E-
Batteries shall be recharged by two means. One by the generator and

the other shall be on automatically controlled charge taking power
from an alternating current power source.
Engine Cooling
*
The engine cooling system shall be of the closed circuit type, including
a circulating-pump driven by the engine, a heat exchanger, and a
reliable engine jacket temperature regulating device. The coolant shall
comply with recommendation of the engine manufacturer.
The cooling water supply for the heat exchanger shall be from the
discharge of the pump, taken off prior to the pump discharge valve.
A water jacketed (cooled) exhaust manifold shall be used to dissipate

heat and to avoid hazard to operator or to flammable material adjacent
to the engine.
Engine Drive Controller

Supply and install engine Drive controller panel completely assembled, tested
and wired at the factory before shipping and shall be marked "Fire Pump
Controller".
The panel shall be securely mounted in an enclosure which will protect the
equipment against mechanical injury and falling drops of water.
A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently attached to the inside of
the enclosure showing exact wiring for the controller, including a legend of
identifying numbers of individual component.
The Controller shall be of the manual and automatic control type and shall be
complete with the following:
-
Pilot light to indicate that controller is in the "Automatic" or "Manual"

positin.
Separate pilot lights and a common bell indicated trouble caused by:
Low oil pressure in the lubrication system.

High engine jacket water temperature.
Failure of engine to start automatically.
Shutdown from over speed.
Individual battery failure.
An automatic warning shall be given visually and audibly at the guard

control room or where instructed by the Engineer to indicate the
following:
Operation of controller into a pump running condition.

Turning of controller main switch to "off" or "manual"
position.
Trouble on the controller or engine.
Page 18 of 29
2.12
Pressure switch having high and low calibrated adjustments and

responsive to water pressure in the fire system.
Two position selector switch marked "Auto-Manual".
A weekly program timer to automatically start the pump at least once a

week to assure dependable operation of the engine and its controller. A
solenoid drain valve on the pressure control line shall be the initiating
means.
Low level float switch, in the fire storage reservoir to be

interconnected with the controller to prevent pumps from starting dry
and initiate an alarm in case water level drops to the level of the float
switch.
SURGE TANK
Provide surge tank as shown on the drawings, constructed for 1000 Kpa working
pressure, and 1500 Kpa test pressure of black steel stamped with U symbol and
supplied with National Board From U-1 denoting compliance with ASME boiler and
pressure vessel code. Provide fittings and connections to related equipment in
accordance with tanks manufacturers recommendations. Tank diaphragm shall
withstand 10 deg. C up to 120 deg C and specified pressure above . Surge tank shall
be coated with anti corrosion paint and enamle finish.
2.13
COLD WATER HYDRO-PNEUMATIC PRESSURE SET (BOOSTER SET)

Supply and install all Cold water hydro-pneumatic pressure sets wherever
shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
Each Cold water pressure set shall be pneumatic, packaged type, triplex or
duplex type as shown on drawings, complete with pneumatic pressure tank,
interconnecting piping, fittings, controls, specialties and control panel all
mounted on the same steel frame with heavy gauge steel protective casing, and
all factory assembled and tested.
Field assembled pumps and panels are not approved.
Each Cold water pressure sets shall be complete as specified in the following
clauses:
1. Pumps
Each pump shall be centrifugal; vertical split case, single or multistage, silent type,
complete with flexibly coupled electric motor and couplings. The pump and motor
assembly shall be mounted on a steel bed plate with an approved vibration isolator.
Pumps construction shall be stainless steel 304, impeller Laser weld, stainless steel
shaft and mechanical seal.
Pumps shall be flexibly coupled to the electric motor thru a flexible coupling.
Motor speed not to exceed 2900 rpm and as indicated on equipment schedule.
Page 19 of 29
Each pump shall include:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Casing drain and vent plugs.

Gauge tapings.
Drip Chamber or tray with drain connection.
Gate valve and strainer at its suction.
Silent check valve and globe valve at its discharge.
Pressure switches.
Pressure gauge and gauge cock at its discharge.
Reinforced type flexible connectors at pump's suction and discharge.
2. Hydro-Pneumatic Pressure Tank

Each pressure tank shall be cylindrical or spherical, closed type, constructed in
compliance with an approved international code for unfired pressure vessels.
Each pneumatic pressure tank shall include:
a. An inert gas chamber.
b. Flexible butyl or neoprene membrane separating the inert gas chamber from
water, and suitable for drinking water applications.
c. Air recharge valve if tank is not permanently charged at factory.
d. Pressure gauge and gauge cock.
e. Gate shut-off valve.
3. Capacity
Capacity of each Cold water pressure set shall be as given in the schedules of
capacities and/or the Bills of Quantities.
Cold Water Pressure Set Operation and Control
Control panel to be factory tested and assembled.
Supply and install for each Cold water pressure set a system control and control panel
which shall include all necessary pressure switches, pressure regulating valves,
instruments, operating relays, safety relays as well as cables, wires, etc,... connecting
it to the corresponding pump and storage tank or reservoir to obtain the following
functions:
a. When line pressure drops, the pump shall operate and remain in operation until
flow stops or the pressure switch reaches its high limit setting. A minimum
run-time relay, adjustable type shall be provided to prevent frequent on/off
operation. If pressure drops below a preset value, the second pump shall
operate.
Page 20 of 29
b. When suction water level drops to 100 mm above top of suction pipe, the pump
shall stop by the action of a low level float switch; it shall not be able to run
even if other controls call for its operation.
After water level rises to 150 mm above suction pipe, controls shall allow
pump operation again.
c. If operating pump fails to start the second pump shall operate automatically.
d. An automatic sequencing control shall be provided to operate pumps in a
rotational sequence after each cycle.
e. Panel shall be provided with OFF-MANUAL-AUTO selector switch to allow
the system to be stopped and/or put on manual or automatic operation.
f.
Panel shall be provided with an alarm buzzer and switch which shall be put in
operation in case of fault.
g. For each function specified with the panel, a pilot light shall be provided to
indicate the status of the particular function. Pilot lights colors shall be selected
in accordance with the function to be indicated.
h. A delay relay shall be incorporated within the panel to prevent immediate startup upon re-establishment of power after power failure.
j.
Booster set shall be monitored by the building management system.
2.14
ROTARY GEAR PUMPS
A.
Pumps to be of the monoblock rotary gear type with suction and discharge connections
screwed ANSI parallel thread. Casing and gears to be of cast iron construction with the
drive shaft in high tensile steel. Generally s clause 2.01.
B.
The shaft shall be supported by PTFE impregnated carbon bearings and sealed by
either PTFE impregnated packing or carbon faced mechanical seal. The pumps shall be
fitted with an integral relief valve for protection from excessive pressure.
C.
The pump unit shall be close-coupled driven through a flexible coupling.
D.
Gear pumps shall be applied to oil supply systems.
E.
Oil pumps shall be UL Listed and explosion proof type.
2.15 HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP (chilled water pumps)
Description: horizontal, base mounted, horizontally split case, double suction, single stage,
centrifugal type, directly connected to motor through heavy duty flexible coupling and with
heavy gauge coupling guard.
Base: Pump and motor to be mounted on common cast iron base reinforced against deflection,
with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes, and grouting hole.
Page 21 of 29
Pump Casing: Bronze, high tensile strength alloy, designed for working pressure of 2000 kPa,
fitted with easily removable bronze wear rings dowelled to casing. Casing to be divided at
horizontal centerline and the 2 halves accurately machined, dowel aligned and bolted together.
Suction and discharge nozzles to be in-line piping design, cast integrally with lower half of
pump casing to allow rotating element to be removed without disconnecting suction and
discharge flanges.
Impeller: Bronze, enclosed, double suction type, fastened to shaft by stainless-steel key and
screw locked adjustable shaft sleeves.
Shaft And Shaft Sleeves: Shaft to be high strength steel, sized to carry axial and radial thrust
with minimum deflection and protected against corrosion from water by full length bronze shaft
sleeves. Teflon gaskets to be provided between impeller hub and shaft sleeves to prevent
pumped water corroding shaft.
Mechanical Seal: Ni-resist face, carbon washer and stainless steel metal parts.
Bearings: Pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty grease lubricated ball
bearings for both radial and thrust loads, mounted in machined moisture proof and dustproof
cast iron housings bolted to pump casing with register fits to ensure permanent alignment.
Bearing housing supports to be cast integrally with lower half of pump casing. Bearings to
have grease seals and water slingers to protect bearings from contamination and easily
accessible grease fittings for positive bearing lubrication.
2.16
VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING SYSTEM FOR CHILLED WATER PUMPS

Supply and install wherever shown on drawings horizontal split case pumps ,with number
and capacities as shown on drawings.
Contractor should check & filter all harmonic disturbances for equipment, which might be
interfering with frequency drive of chilled water pumps
a)
Variable Speed Pumping Package

Pumping package shall include:
*
*
*
*
*
Pumping Skid (complete with valves & fittings as per detail drawing)
Pump Control Panel
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Sensor Transmitters
Sequence of Operation
Pump base shall be floating slab installed on spring isolators to prevent vibration
when pumps are running at low frequencies.
b)
References
A. Hydraulic Institute
B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
C. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
D. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. Inc.
Page 22 of 29
G. NEC - National Electrical Code

H. ISO - International Standards Organization
I. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
c)
Submittals
i)
ii)
d)
Submittals shall include the following:

1.
System summary sheet
2.
Sequence of operation
3.
Shop drawing indicating dimensions, required clearances and

location and size of each field connection
4.
Power and control wiring diagrams
5.
System profile analysis including variable speed pump curves and

system curve. The analysis shall also include pump, motor and
AFD efficiencies, job specific load profile, horsepower and
kilowatt/hour consumption.
6.
Pump data sheets
Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be

accepted.
Quality Assurance
i)
The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer. An

assembler of pumping systems not actively engaged in the design and
construction of centrifugal pumps shall not be considered a pump
manufacturer. The manufacturer shall assume "Unit Responsibility" for the
complete pumping package. Unit responsibility shall be defined as
responsibility for interface and successful operation of all system
components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer.
ii)
The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the

design and construction of variable speed pumping systems.
iii)
All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at
the factory prior to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors
connected to AFD output and it shall test all inputs, outputs and program
execution specific to this application.
iv)
The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards

Organization per ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at
time of submittal.
v)
Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories as a

manufacturer of packaged pumping systems.
Page 23 of 29
vi)
e)
f)
Bidders shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to

packaged pumping systems. Any deviations from this specification shall be
bid as a voluntary alternate clearly defined in writing. If no exceptions are
noted, the supplier or contractor shall be bound by these specifications.
Manufactured Units
i)
Furnish and install as shown on the plans a Variable Speed Pumping

System.
ii)
The control system shall include, as a minimum, pump & motor assemblies,
the programmable logic pump controller, adjustable frequency drive(s),
suction and discharge piping, valves and additional equipment as specified
or as required to properly execute the sequence of operation. Furnish field
installed remote sensor/ transmitters as indicated on the plans.
iii)
System shall require only suction and discharge connections and a single
point power connection with all interface connection to existing Building
Management System of the Hospital.
iv)
All components shall be mounted on a structural steel base suitable for

grouting. The base shall be large enough to support the system's pumps,
piping and control panel. All welded pressure bearing piping must be
fabricated with full penetration welds. Qualification of the welding
procedures and performance of the welders shall comply with the
requirements of ANSI/ASME B31.1 and ASME code, Section IX.
v)
Provide pumps as indicated on the pump schedule. Pumps and motors shall
be furnished as specified in respective sections of this document.
vi)
Pressure gauges shall be furnished for system supply and return headers.
Gauges shall be installed to be clearly visible from front of control panel.
Components
i)
Pump Logic Controller

1.
The Technologic pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by

and bear the label of Underwriter's Laboratory, Inc. (UL). The
controller shall be specifically designed for variable speed
pumping applications.
2.
The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards

against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
*
*
*
*
Motor overload
Pump flow surges
Hunting
End of curve
Page 24 of 29
3.
The pump logic controller shall capable of accepting 4 analog

inputs from zone sensor/transmitters indicated on the plans. The
controller shall scan each analog input a minimum of once every
500 milliseconds. It will then select the analog signal that has
deviated the greatest amount from its set point. This selected signal
will be used as the command feedback input for a hydraulic
stabilization function to minimize hunting. Each input signal shall
be capable of maintaining a different set point value.
4.
The pump controller shall be capable of controlling all pumps in

parallel with one pump as standby.
5.
The controller shall be field expandable to control up to 3 pumps in

parallel and one standby and accept up to 16 analog inputs.
6.
The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportionalintegral-derivative control function. The proportional, integral and
derivative values shall be user adjustable over an infinite range.
7.
The pump logic controller shall be self prompting. All messages

shall be displayed in plain English. The operator interface shall
have the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
8.
Multi-fault memory and recall

On-screen help functions
LED pilot lights and switches
Soft-touch membrane keypad switches.
The readout shall be two lines of forty 0.50" brightly lit fluorescent
characters capable of displaying the following values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Differential pressure in PSIG

Pressure in PSIG
Temperature in degrees F or C
Differential temperature in degrees F or C
Kilowatt consumption
Wire to water efficiency calculation
All read outs shall be interfaced with the BMS for remote reading
by BMS.
9.
The following communication features shall be provided to the

BAS:
a.
b.
c.
d.
ii)
Remote system start / stop

Failure of any system component
Process variable
AFD speed
Adjustable Frequency Drive
Page 25 of 29
1.
The adjustable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation

(PWM) type, microprocessor controlled design.
2.
The AFD, including all factory installed options, shall have CSA
approval.
3.
Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 ventilated for installation as a wall

mounted or free-standing unit, depending on the amp rating. A
hand-off-automatic switch and speed potentiometer shall be
mounted on the front of the enclosure.
4.
AFD shall utilize a diode bridge rectifier to convert three phase AC

to a fixed DC voltage. Power factor shall remain above 0.95
regardless of speed or load. AFDs employing power factor
correction capacitors shall not be acceptable.
5.
Insulated gate bipolar transistors shall be used in the inverter

section to convert the fixed DC voltage to a three phase, adjustable
frequency, AC output. A DC line reactor shall be provided to
minimize harmonic and current distortion of the input power line.
6.
The following customer modifiable adjustments shall be provided:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Accel time: 0.1 to 1800 seconds

Decel time: 0.1 to 1800 seconds
Minimum frequency: 0 HZ
Maximum frequency: 100 HZ
Analog input filter: 0.1 to 10 seconds
Analog outputs: 10 to 1 gain
Volts / Hertz ratio
7.
Speed reference signal shall be customer selectable for 0-10 VDC

or 4-20 mA.
8.
The AFD shall be suitable for elevations to 3300 feet above sea
level without derating. Maximum operating ambient temperature
shall not be less than 104 degrees F. AFD shall be suitable for
operation in environments up to 95% non-condensing humidity.
9.
The AFD shall be capable of displaying the following information

in plain English via a 40 character alphanumeric display:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
10.
Frequency
Voltage
Current
Kilowatts per hour
Fault identification
Percent torque
Percent power
RPM
All AFDs shall be warranted for a period of 24 months after

shipment. This warranty shall cover parts and labor.
Page 26 of 29
iii)
Sensor / Transmitters
Provide 16 field mounted differential pressure sensor transmitters as
indicated on the plans. Unit shall transmit an isolated 4-20mA dc signal
indicative of process variable to the pump logic controller via standard two
wire 24 DC system. Unit shall have stainless steel wetted parts with two
0.25" male NPT process connections. It shall be protected against radio
frequency interference and shall have a watertight, NEMA 4 electrical
enclosure capable of withstanding 2000 PSI static pressure with a 0.5" NPT
conduit connection. Accuracy shall be within 0.25% of full span.
iv)
Sequence of Operation
1.
The system shall consist of a Technologic pump logic controller,

multiple pump/AFD sets with manual and automatic alternation and
pump staging.
2.
The pumping system shall start upon the closure of customer's

contact when the pump logic controller Mode of Operation selector
switch is in the REMOTE position.
3.
When the pump logic controller selector switch is in the LOCAL

position, the pumping system shall operate auto-matically.
4.
Sensor/transmitters shall be provided as required and shown on

plans.
5.
Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump

logic controller, indicative of process variable condition.
6.
The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the

independent, engineer/user determined set points.
7.
When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump
speed shall remain constant at the optimum energy consumption
level.
8.
The Technologic pump logic controller shall continuously scan and

compare each process variable to its individual set point and control
to the least satisfied zone.
9.
If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the
pump logic controller shall initiate a timed sequence of events to
stage a lag pump .
10.
The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s)

decelerating until they equalize in speed.
11.
Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change

speed together.
Page 27 of 29
12.
When the set point criteria can be safely satisfied with fewer
pumps, the Technologic pump logic controller shall initiate a timed
destage sequence and continue variable speed operation.
13.
As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic
controller shall send the appropriate analog signal to the AFD to
speed up or slow down the pump/motor.
14.
When in the "AUTOMATIC" mode, the pump(s) shall operate

through the AFD(s) being controlled by a signal generated by the
pump logic controller.
15.
In the event of a system differential pressure failure, due to a pump,

AFD, overload fault, the pump logic controller shall automatically
initiate a timed sequence of events to start the remaining
pump/AFD set(s) in the variable speed mode. A message on the
display shall indicate the fault, pump/motor, or AFD. Subsequent
failures shall initiate a timed sequence of events to the variable
speed mode as available.
16.
In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process

variable signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program.
Alternative zone sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the
scan/compare program for control.
17.
The zone number corresponding to the failed sensor/transmetter

shall be displayed on the operation interface of the pump logic
controller.
In the event of failure of any pump or its AFD, the standby pump
shall operate automatically. A message on the display shall indicate
the fault , pump/ motor or AFD with remote signal to BMS.
18.
In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals,

the AFD shall maintain 100% speed, reset shall be automatic upon
correction of the zone failure.
19.
PUMP, AFD, OVERLOAD fault shall be continuously scrolled

through the display on the operator interface of pump logic
controller until the fault has been corrected and the controller has
been manually reset.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
SHOP TESTING
A.
Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with Hydraulic Institute test
codes as described in HI E.35.01, E.37.01, and E.39.01. In addition, each pump shall be
tested at five points of operation from shut-off head to run out condition including the
guaranteed pumps performance point.
Page 28 of 29
B.
All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the design pressure.
There shall be no leakage during the one hour test period.
C.
The manufacturer shall submit certificate including test data to show that the pump
meets performance specifications.
3.02
INSPECTION
A.
The Contractor shall inspect each pump prior to installation to verify that pumps are in
conformance with these specifications.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Pumps shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturers written instructions.
B.
If flexible coupling is used between the pump and its driver, shafts shall be so
supported and aligned as not to produce undesirable stresses and noise during normal
operation.
C.
If oil or grease lubricated bearings are supplied with the pump, the oiler shall be filled
with the specified lubricating oil or bearings shall be pre-lubricated with specified
grease prior to start-up.
3.04
TESTING
A.
Field testing of the pumps shall be performed at the time of overall system start -up and
testing. Installed pumps shall meet the performance specifications. See Section 15991.
END OF SECTION
Page 29 of 29
SECTION 15175 TANKS
TANKS
SECTION 15175
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
complete installation of Plumbing Equipment and related work as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Water storage tank.

Water Softeners.
Expansion Tanks.
Chemical Feed pot.
Hypochlorinators.
Filters.

1. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010.
2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards, reference
specifications listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and
B.
Qualifications
1. The Contractor shall provide the equipment specified, or equipment of the same
standard of construction and performance as produced by one of the listed
manufacturers.
2. Approval of the manufacturer does not necessarily constitute approval of its
products as equal to those specified. Immediately after the awarding of the
contract and prior to the start of construction, submit to the Engineer for approval a
complete written summary of the proposed manufacturer's equipment.
C.
Test
1. Factory Tests
a. Before shipment, the manufacturer shall test components hydrostatically at
150% of rated design pressure for ability to withstand maximum design
pressures and for tightness.
Page 1 of 9
SECTION 15175 TANKS
b. Conduct factory performance test on actual pumps to be furnished. Furnish

sufficient lead notice to Engineer to permit witnessing of test. Furnish
certificate of test.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 15010.

1. Product Data
a. Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for materials
specified herein for approval; obtain approval before ordering materials.
b. Data shall include manufacturer's technical product data, including installation
instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured piping
specialty. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of
pipeline strainer. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's figure number,
size, location, and features for each required piping specialty.
2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for work specified herein for approval.
a. A complete detailed set of construction and erection drawings for equipment
including vibration isolators and bases indicating dimensions, materials of
construction and methods of assembly.
b. Complete capacity and performance data including items indicated in the
equipment schedules and specifications.
B.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of
manufactured piping specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in
maintenance manual in accordance with requirements of Section 15010.
1.04
A.
Deliver materials and handle so as to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and the
damage of materials.
B.
Store materials and equipment where designated and assume responsibility and security
for materials and equipment. Take precautions for protection from detrimental
conditions.
Page 2 of 9
SECTION 15175 TANKS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS/EQUIPMENT
A.
Chemical Feeder Pot

The unit shall be of a quality construction with dished ends for safe operation at
pressure and shall be supplied complete with all valves and funnels all factory
assembled. The feeder unit shall be supplied with a stand and shall be pressure tested
with a certificate from the factory.
Chemical feeder pot shall be similar to Houseman dosage pots or approved equal.
B.
C.
Expansion tank
1.
Provide compression tank (expansion tank) as shown on the drawings,

constructed for 930 Kpa working pressure, stamped with U symbol and
supplied with National Board from U-1 denoting compliance with ASME
boiler and pressure vessel code. Provide fittings and connections to related
equipment in accordance with tanks manufacturers recommendations. Tank
shall be insulated externally. Insulation shall be same type used for exposed
ductwork, specified hereinbefore. Tank diaphragm shall withstand 10 deg. C
up to 120 deg C suitable for heating and chilled water systems.
2.
Refer to drawings for tank support.
Concrete Water Tanks

Supply and install in each compartment of the basement reservoir the followings:
a. Balancing piston type float valve with shut-off valve.
b. Low level float switches assemblies as required and as necessary for the control of
the relevant systems.
c. High water level alarm float switches connected to central alarm panel, located in
the maintenance block.
d. Drain valve.
e. Drain and overflow to nearest drain provision or as shown on the drawings and
vent pipes with insect copper mesh screen.
f.
All pipes into the water tank shall be located in place before concreting and shall be
provided with no-leak flanges welded to the pipe.
g. Contractor shall supply all material and labor to treat concrete water tanks with
internal lining, non toxic, solvent free epoxy paint, and two epoxy resin system
with water proofing capabilities minimum thickness 200 micron. Material used
shall be suitable for potable water and accordingly will not contaminate water.
h. Water tanks shall be monitored by BMS with all necessary controls.
Page 3 of 9
SECTION 15175 TANKS
D.
Polypropylene Water Tanks
Each tank shall be of the open cylindrical type fabricated from polyethylene and shall be
provided with screwed cover of the same thickness. Polyethylene used in manufacturing
shall be US FDA approved.
Each tank shall be provided with welded 5 x 5 cm x 5 mm thick structural angle support
with legs of the same angle size. The legs shall have 10 x 10 cm x 10 mm thick steel sole
plates welded on to them.
Each tank shall be complete with:
a.
Access cover.
b.
Float valves with shut off valves
c.
Level float switches assemblies as required and as necessary for the control of
the relevant systems.
d.
High water level alarm float switches connected to alarm panel.
e.
Drain valve.
f.
Drain and overflow pipes to nearest drain provision or as shown on the
and vent pipes with insect copper mesh screen.
g.
E.
drawings
Inlet shut-off valve
Hypochlorinator
1.
One hypo chlorinator (HC) consisting of:

a.
Chemical Injection Pump: positive displacement diaphragm-action type,

with parts exposed to chemicals made of corrosion resistant plastic or
special rubber compound, electric motor driven, complete with suction
strainer, ball check valve, injection nozzle for screwing water pipe, antisiphon device and necessary lengths of suction and delivery tubing all of
corrosion resistant plastic materials. Capacity of feeder shall be
recommended by specialist.
Hypochlorite dosing set consisting of:
Chemical dosing pump, positive displacement, rated at 1.6 L/hr at 60 psi
discharge pressure.
Solution tank.
Electrical mixer
Electrical switch
Lot Interconnecting Hoses
Page 4 of 9
SECTION 15175 TANKS
In-line static mixer

b-
Translucent polyethylene storage tank, for sodium hypo-chloride

solution, with a minimum capacity as specified on the Drawings.
Tank shall have a molded fiberglass cover of recesses for the mounting
and installation of feeder, agitator, and liquid level switch assemblies.
Tank shall have clearly marked 5 gallons (20 lit) graduations.
Connecting PVC valves and fittings and polyethylene tubing.
F.
2-
Hypochlorinator shall operate automatically to maintain an accurate control of

residual chlorine in the water by constantly testing a water sample for chlorine
residual and automatically adjusting the chlorine dosing apparatus to maintain
the residual chlorine in the water. Chlorine system shall be complete with
chlorine residual analyzer, chlorine residual controller, chlorine residual
recorder, hypochlorinate solution metering pump, hypochlorite tanks, tubing
and accessories.
3-
Chlorine residual analyzer shall have an acetate reagent buffer solution system
with a constant head reagent feed system utilizing a control valve to meter
reagent into the sample cell.
4-
Chlorine residual controller shall be wall mounted and have in addition to set
point adjustment for setting the frequency of corrective action when a
difference exists between set point and measured residual chlorine.
5-
Chlorine residual recorder wall mounted solid state type requiring no ink and
incorporating a 30 day strip chart, an indicator strip for 0 to 2 PPM range and a
front clear glass cover with high and low level alarm contacts to actuate a
remote visual and audible alarms.
DOMESTIC WATER CHEMICAL TREATMENT

Domestic water chemical treatment shall consist of 100 liters tank and dosing pump
with back pressure of 15 bars complete as specified for hypocholrinator.
G.
MULTI MEDIA FILTER

The filter shall be of the pressure high flow rate, super sand filter type.
-
Capacity
Filter installed a head of softener shall have the capacity indicated on the Drawings
and/or specified in the schedule of Equipment at a filter and backwash rate of 11
gpm/ft2 of filter area.
Materials
Tank shall be made of composite or heavy gauge reinforced fiberglass construction
or composite having a vertical cylindrical shape with dished and flanged heads
Page 5 of 9
SECTION 15175 TANKS
suitable for a working pressure of 15 bar. All pipe connections to the tank shall be
flanged except for pipe sizes 1 1/2" (40 mm) and smaller which shall be screwed.
Tank shall have a manhole complete with cover, gasket, bolt and yoke located on
the top.
Tank shall be designed in accordance with ASME Section VIII DIV- 1 or
equivalent International Standard. Tank shall have a baffle to promote even
distribution of the effluent over the filter bed, and shall be equipped with a suitable
under drain.
The effluent laterals shall be 150 mm apart and shall have 27/64 (11mm) diameter
orifices every 150 mm.
The effluent laterals shall be of corrosion-resistant pipe with orifices directed
downwards. The effluent header shall be of schedule 80 steel.
Tank supports shall be of the adjustable jacklegs.
Internal finish lining shall be smooth, dust free, without pin holes or voids and
completely nontoxic.
Filter media shall consist of sand, gravel and rocks layers. Sand shall be of hard
durable grains of uniformly graded silica sand free from foreign materials,
limestone or clay. Sand shall be of 0.39mm. Effective size with uniformity coefficient of 1.2 to 1.4 Gravel and rock shall consist of clean, hard, rounded stones
with an average specific gravity of not less than 2.5 and should be free from shale,
mica, clay and other impurities.
Valves shall be of the butterfly type complete with companion flanges, gaskets and
bolts. A multiport valve can be used for backwashing. Filter shall be automatic
backwash or manual type as indicated on drawings.
H.
SAND FILTER:
The sand filter is used to remove turbidity and suspended solids, the filter
shall be vertical sand pressure filter. It shall have the following
characteristics:
Tested pressure:
10.2 Bar.
Service pressure: 1.5 Bar to
7.2 Bar.
Tank shells: #283, hot rolled carbon steel, 6mm thick, butt welded
inside and outside.
Working temperature range: 5 C
to 50 C.
Internal lining: special coating for drinking water
application.
Media type: multimedia, consisting of a number of media distinctly
layered.
The internal distribution system - filter internal equipment in contact with water
shall consist of 16 bars high impact UPVC piping, without any metal supports or
Page 6 of 9
SECTION 15175 TANKS
bolts, ideally designed to provide uniform distribution and collection of water

over the entire area.
The over drain is fabricated from stainless steel, for uniform distribution of
water and quick removal of waste at minimum head loss.
Normal accessories: Bronze backwash sight glass, screened tank drain,
automatic internal air release, 3/4" manual air release valve, pressure gauges.
Side mounted valves: Valves are UPVC rated at PN 16. The filtration system
shall include the following functions: Service", "Backwash", "Re-circulate",
"Shut-off".
I.
ACTIVE CARBON FILTER

The activated carbon filter is used to remove residual chlorine, odor and color,
the filter shall be vertical type. It shall have the following characteristics:
Tested pressure:
10.2 Bar.
Service pressure: 1.5 Bar to
7.2 Bar.
Tank shells: #283, hot rolled carbon steel, 6mm thick, butt welded
inside and outside.
Working temperature range: 5 C
to 50 C.
Internal lining: special coating for drinking water
application.
Media type: granular activated
carbon.
Supported
media: gravel.
The internal distribution system - filter internal equipment in contact with water
shall consist of 16 bars high impact UPVC piping, without any metal supports or
bolts, ideally designed to provide uniform distribution and collection of water
over the entire area.
The over-drain is fabricated from stainless steel, for uniform distribution of water
and quick removal of waste at minimum head loss.
External painting: The filter shall be painted with two coats of zinc primer, one
coat of polyurethane intermediate coating, and two coats of polyurethane heavyduty exterior resistant paint. Both internal and external steel surfaces are sand
blasted before paint application.
Normal accessories: Bronze backwash sight glass, screened tank drain,
automatic internal air release, 3/4" manual air release valve, and pressure gauge.
Side mounted valves: Valves are UPVC rated at PN 16. The filtration system
shall include the following functions:"Service", "Backwash", "Re-circulate", "Shutoff".
Page 7 of 9
SECTION 15175 TANKS
PART 3 - GENERAL
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be

performed to insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of
work implies acceptance of job site conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure

the completeness of the work required under this Section.
B.
Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in

the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the
work of related trades, so as not to delay job progress.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Construct apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for the

conditions encountered during continuous operation.
B.
Where corrosion can occur, appropriate corrosion-resistant materials

and assembly methods use including isolation of dissimilar metals
against galvanic interaction.
C.
Where components are or may come in contact, although the materials

may basically be similar, use hardness differentials of at least 50
Brinell to prevent seizure and reduce wear.
D.
Grout base plates completely to provide a rigid non-deflecting support.
E.
Provide OSHA approved sheet metal guards over couplings.
F.
Pipe vents, bleeds, gland and base drains, and blow off connections to
nearest floor drain using copper tubing.
G.
Provide nameplates; attach to unit showing the following information:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
Maker's name, date of manufacture, size and type.

Rated capacity, design and operating pressure ratings.
Rated horsepower, full load amperes.
Voltage, number of phases, frequency.
Temperature rise or class of insulation.
Other information, as applicable, as noted herein or directed by Engineer.
Provide direction arrow indicating direction of rotation of pump, where

pumps are included in assembly.
Page 8 of 9
SECTION 15175 TANKS
3.04
A.
Field Tests
1. Perform field test to demonstrate the ability of the equipment to meet contract
requirements.
2. Should any part of the apparatus or system fail to meet the contract requirements,
adjust, repair or replace any defective or inoperative parts and, on completion,
again conduct the complete performance tests.
3. Refer to appropriate sections for additional required test data.
B.
Include results of factory and field tests in the Instruction Manual as

described in the appropriate sections.
END OF SECTION
Page 9 of 9
SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 15190
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
complete installation of Mechanical Identification and related work as indicated on the
B.
1. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is indicated on
drawings and/or specified in other Division 15 sections.
C.

1. Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010
2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050
3. Mechanical identification furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, is
specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.
4. Refer to other Division 15 sections for identification requirements at central station
mechanical control center; not work of this section.
5. Refer to Division 16 sections for identification requirements of electrical work; not
work of this section.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials and work shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications and
industry standards listed below and specified herein and to applicable codes and
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under Submittals
in Section 15010.
1. Samples: Submit samples of materials specified herein for approval; obtain
approval before ordering materials. Sample shall include samples of each color,
lettering style and other graphic representation required for each identification
material or system. Provide mockup type sample installation for review and
approval by Engineer.
2. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's latest published literature for
materials specified herein for approval; obtain approval before materials are
delivered to the site. Data shall include manufacturer's technical product data and
installation instructions for each identification material and device required.
Page 1 of 7
3. Maintenance Data: Along with product data and schedules, submit manufacturers
in maintenance manuals for maintaining identification work specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
Mechanical Identification Materials: Provide manufacturer's standard products of

categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15
sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is
Engineer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.
B.
Plastic Pipe Markers

1. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted, semi-rigid snap-on,
color-coded pipe markers as directed by the Engineer
2. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent
adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers with arrow tape
banding both ends to indicate flow direction as directed by the Engineer
3. Insulation: Furnish 25 mm thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each
plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subject to fluid
temperatures of 50 degrees C or greater. Cut length to extend 50 mm beyond each
end of plastic pipe marker.
4. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any),
provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each
location; fasten by one of the following methods:
a. Snap-on application of pretension semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
b. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive arrow tape, not
less than 20 mm wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, lap tape 40 mm.
5. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 150 mm and larger (including insulation if
any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3
times letter height (and of required length); fasten by one of the following methods:
a. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).
b. Tape to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive arrow tape, not
less than 40 mm wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, lap tape 80 mm.
c. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with
manufacturer straps or power lock.
6. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted nomenclature which best describes
piping system in each instance, as selected by Engineer in cases of variance with
name as shown or specified.
Page 2 of 7
7. Lettering
a. Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown,
and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.
b. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either
integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both
directions), or as separate unit of plastic.
C.
Plastic Duct Markers

1. Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded duct markers.
Conform to the following color code:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Green: Cold air.

Yellow: Hot air.
Yellow/Green: Supply air.
Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.
2. Nomenclature: Include the following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
Direction of air flow.

Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.)
Duct origin (from).
Duct destination (to).
Design cfm.
Plastic Tape
1. Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive)
vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.
2. Width: Provide 40 mm wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters
(including insulation, if any) of less than 150 mm, , 65 mm wide tape for larger
pipes.
3. Color: As directed by the Engineer
E.
Valve Tags
1. Brass Valve Tags: Provide (19) gauge polished brass valve tags with black filled,
stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in (6 mm) high letters and sequenced
valve numbers ( 15 mm ) high, and with (4 mm ) hole for fastener.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Provide ( 40 mm ) diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.

Fill tag engraving with black enamel.
Provide plain stamped tags.
Provide color anodized and engraved aluminum tags.
2. Etched Aluminum Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard 1 m thick etched

aluminum valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in (6 mm ) high letters and
Page 3 of 7
sequenced valve numbers (13 mm ) high, and with (4 mm ) hole for fastener.
Provide (40 mm ) square black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise
indicated.
3. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with
printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately (5 mm )
high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately (10 mm ) high, and with
(4mm) hole for fastener. Provide (32 mm ) square white tags with black lettering.
4. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass (plated steel)
chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for
proper attachment of tags to valves; manufacture specifically for that purpose.
5. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1.6 mm thick engraved
plastic laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers
corresponding to concealed valve. Include 3 m center hole to allow attachment.
F.
Valve Schedule Frames: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display
frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of
extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.
G.
Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs

1. Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in the sizes and thicknesses
indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording
indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated; punch
for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of
substrate.
a. Thickness: 1.6 mm, except as otherwise indicated.
b. Thickness: 3 mm , except as otherwise indicated.
c. Thickness: 1.6 mm for units up to 129sq.cm. or 200 mm length; 3 mm for
larger units.
2. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent
adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
H.
Lettering and Graphics

1. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical
identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or
scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper
identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
Page 4 of 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to
site conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.
B.
Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work
of related trades, so as not to delay job progress.
C.
Where applying identification to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other

covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to
installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
3.03
INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
A.
Ductwork Identification
1. Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with duct markers;
or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of
flow, in black or white (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color).
2. In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling
system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into
concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 30 feet
spacings along exposed runs.
3. Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and
housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance
and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information.
4. Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar
concealment, install plasticized tags for identification in lieu of specified signs, at
Engineer's option.
B.
Piping System Identification

1. Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to
receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow:
a. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated underMaterials" in
this section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot
non-insulated pipes.
b. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous
color-coded painting of piping is provided.
Page 5 of 7
2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to
view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts,
tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations.
a. Near each valve and control device.
b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units;
mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.
c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter
non-accessible enclosures.
d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of
concealed piping.
e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
f.
Space intermediately at maximum spacing of 15m along each piping run,

except reduce spacing to 7.5m or less in congested areas of piping and
equipment.
g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately

spaced markers.
C.
Valve Identification
1. Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system;
exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing
fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shutoff valves at
plumbing fixtures, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of
end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each
piping system. Prepare and mount valve tagging schedules for the following
systems:
2. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or,
if not otherwise indicated, where directed by Engineer. Where more than one
major machine room is shown for project, install mounted valve schedule in each
major machine room, and repeat only main valves which are to be operated in
conjunction with operations of more than single machine room.
D.
Mechanical Equipment Identification

1. Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each
major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified
herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the
following general categories of equipment and operational devices:
a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
b. Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units.
Page 6 of 7
c. Pumps, compressors, condensers and similar motor-driven units.

d. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators and similar equipment.
e. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers and mixing boxes.
f.
Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
g. Tanks and pressure vessels.

h. Strainers, filters, water treatment systems and similar equipment.
2. Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1" height is needed for proper
identification, because of distance from normal location of required identification,
stenciled signs may be provided in lieu of engraved plastic, at Engineer's option.
3. Lettering Size: Minimum 6 mm high lettering for name of unit where viewing
distance is less than 0.6 m, 13 mm high for distances up to 1.8 m , and
proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering
2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering.
4. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to
distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements,
indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper
operations.
5. Optional Use of Plasticized Tags: At Engineer's option, where equipment to be
identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar concealment, plasticized
tags may be installed within concealed space to reduce amount of text in exposed
sign (outside concealment).
3.04
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by
work of this division or other divisions.
B.
Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 15200 NOISE, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

SECTION 15200
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Sound Noise Levels

Attenuators
Vibration Control
Machinery Bases
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
Division 15 Mechanical.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
General
1. Acoustic and vibration transmission control shall be applied on all work to obtain
the limits specified in the acoustic specification report.
2. Work included:
a. All duct systems and associated equipment will be attenuated to prevent both
transmission noise and breakout from the equipment at any part of the system.
b. All rotating plant will be adequately isolated from the main structure of the
building to prevent the transmission of vibration.
c. All pipework will be suitably installed to prevent undue strain upon equipment
it is connected to and isolation of rotating equipment is also required to prevent
the transmission of vibration.
3. All systems and equipment shall be selected and installed to meet the required
noise criteria specified herein. Where items are not covered then ASHRE Guide
shall be taken as the reference.
B.
Noise Control Generally

1. System Description
a. Systems shall be installed on the basis of noise control to produce the results
set out in the schedule below.
b. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be designed and arranged to
maintain these criteria.
c. Where sound characteristics of selected equipment gives excessive noise then
attenuation treatment shall be applied to achieve the desired criteria. Where
Page 1 of 7
silencers are scheduled on the drawings the Contractor shall be responsible for
any adjustment in size required the meet the desired criteria, based on
equipment finally selected.
2. The Back-ground noise level inside the building

The values of the back-ground noise level will be represented by the noise Rating
noted NR. All the mechanical equipment, including plumbing, ventilation,
elevators and air-conditioning should be designed and installed to meet with the
noise rating levels specified in the acoustic specification report.
For ventilation, noise levels shall be measured at 1.5 meters from room air outlets at an
angle of 45 degrees with a sound level meter having an Octave band analyzer. Noise
levels shall be corrected according to the referenced reverberation time.
3. In-Duct Attenuation
a.
C.
Purpose made attenuators shall be provided in the positions indicated on the

drawings. The attenuators shall reduce the sound level produced by the fan to
an acceptable level in the occupied spaces. The attenuator shall have
adequate strength and cohesion to resist erosion by the air flow and shall not
produce dust. The acoustic infill shall be free from odor and proof against
rot, damp, vermin. Adhesive shall be compatible with the sound absorbent
material and shall be non - flammable.
Vibration Control Generally

1. System Description
a. All equipment and plant shall be so designed that it does not, in itself, vibrate
excessively, particularly if its natural frequency is below 20 Hz. The apparatus
shall be mounted upon resilient mountings such as cork, rubber or springs,
loaded close to the maximum and designed to transmit the least energy to the
base without permitting excessive oscillation of machines.
b. Select equipment with minimum out-of-balance forces, use control devices to
isolate equipment, piping and ducting as necessary.
c. All rotating parts of equipment shall be balanced to best commercial tolerances
before leaving the factory.
1.04
REFERENCES
A.
The latest editions of the following standards shall apply :

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM )
a. ASTM E477 : Testing Duct Liner Materials and prefabricated Silencers for
Acoustical and Airflow performance.
Page 2 of 7
2. ASHRAE Handbook : Systems - Chapter 35 Sound and Vibration Control. This

shall be referred to for items not specifically covered in this section.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
1. Description literature for each of the actual proposed equipment to be used
including:
a. Capacity.
b. Insertion Losses.
c. Pressure Losses.
d. Fluid Flows.
e. Test Reports.
f.
B.
Certificates of approval.
Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawing for each of the actual proposed equipment shall include the
following:
a. Working or manufacturing drawings.
b. Calculations.
c. Installation details.
d. Accessories available indicating those included.
e. Pictures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
ATTENUATORS
A.
Construction
1. The attenuator casting shall be constructed from not less than 1.6mm thick mild
steel, galvanized after manufacture, with all joints continuously welded. The
internal splitters shall be manufactured from perforated galvanized sheet steel not
less than 0.5 mm thick, with aerodynamically shaped leading and trailing edges.
Each splitter shall be secured to the casing by sealed rivets or Pk screws. The
acoustic fill shall be an inert, non - combustible, non-hygroscopic and vermin proof
mineral wool or fiberglass packed to a density of not less than 70kg/m3 and shall
be sealed and protected from particle migration by an impervious membrane
Page 3 of 7
B.
Performances
1. Attenuator performance should meet at least the following criteria:
Straight Silencers
Length
(mm)
Dynamic Insertion /loss (dB)

Octave Band Center Frequency ( Hz )
63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K
900
1200
1500
1800
5
5
6
7
7
9
11
13
14
18
22
26
20
25
31
36
22
27
32
37
19
23
26
30
14
16
19
21
9
10
11
12
5
6
6
9
11
11
18
22
23
25
31
33
27
32
34
23
26
38
16
19
19
10
11
11
7
7
9
13
14
17
26
29
34
36
40
45
37
41
47
30
33
37
21
23
26
12
12
14
Elbow Silencers
Effective Length ( mm )
1200
1500
1600
1800
2000
2400
2. Internal lining of ductwork shall be applied where necessary to achieve the required
level. The lining shall be minimum 15 mm thick and 25kg/m3 density otherwise as
described for attenuators above with minimum thermal conductivity of 0.055
W/mC.
3. Where internal duct lining is to be applied the duct sheet metal sizes shall be
increased to compensate and thus maintain the net free airway sizes noted on the
drawings as duct sizes.
4. Internal duct lining shall have a factory bonded PVC coating fixed to the insulation
with a synthetic rubber base adhesive which is flame retardant when dry.
2.02
REHEAT BOXES CASING NOISE
A. The sound power level of the noise radiated from the casings of the boxes shall not
exceed the levels stated in the acoustic specification report.
B. Sound power levels are dB re 10 - 12 watts and are based upon terminal boxes
operating with 500 pa inlet air static pressure.
C. Sound power levels shall be determined from reverberate room laboratory test in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 36B-63. Supporting test data shall be submitted
showing conformance with the above specification.
Page 4 of 7
2.03
VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICES
A.
General : Select control devices in accordance with Schedule in Part 3. For each item of
isolated equipment, supply and install devices for equal deflection, ensure that
equipment is leveled and that there is adequate clearance under for cleaning.
B.
Isolating Compensators: Where equipment is located on vibration isolation mounts or

hangers, isolating compensators shall be used, such that the vibration isolation of the
equipment shall be bridged out. See Section 15060.
C.
Spring Mounts:
1. Where specified shall generally be of the unhoused steel compression type having a
height to diameter ratio not above 2.0 in the loaded condition and providing means
for leveling the equipment. Housed type spring mounts may be used only if the
design is submitted and approved.
2. The spring design shall be such that the operating deflection does not exceed 2/3rds
of the maximum available deflection.
3. Each mount shall incorporate a ribbed neoprene pad at least 8mm thick, to provide
isolation of acoustic frequencies . Holding down bolts are not to be used.
4. The number and location of spring mountings shall be such that the supported
equipment does not move or rock excessively under starting and normal operating
conditions.
D.
Ribbed Neoprene Pads : Where specified these to be 8 mm to 10mm thick ribbed or

waffle patterns of approximately 40 diameter. Pads are to be sized for a resultant load
of about 350 kpa and to achieve this loading any necessary bearing feet or pads are to
be added to equipment. Where multiple layers of pad are specified or used each layer
shall be separated by a 20 gage steel shim.
E.
Neoprene Mounts : These shall be of Rubber in Shear mounts in which the rubber
material is molded to steel inserts and is loaded in a composite of compression and
shear. These mounts shall be supplied only by manufacturers who provide complete
load deflection data and guarantee that data. The mounts shall by design and
management be fail safe . The rubber material shall be used where resistance to oil,
solvents etc., so dictates.
F.
Generally springs shall be suitable for apparatus having a rotational speed of up to 12

revs. Resilient pads shall be so disposed that they are equally compressed whatever the
vibration or loading.
G.
Where cork is used the Contractor shall supply the material and be responsible for its
correct positioning. All other ant vibration mountings shall be supplied and fixed by the
Contractor.
Page 5 of 7
2.04
MACHINERY BASES
A.
Provide at least 100mm high concrete bases for all equipment .Each base shall
comprise a concrete filled four sided welded galvanized surrounded of 50mm x 50mm
x 1.6mm MS angle with return edges fitted with rag-lugs for building in. Accurately
position each surrounded before filling with concrete and cove to floor finish. Submit
shop drawings of all surrounded and bases.
B.
Integrally mount each driving and driven piece of equipment on a suitable steel or cast
iron bedplate or in a fabricated frame and isolate as a single unit.
C.
Where inertia base is specified in the schedule mount the inertia base on the machinery
base specified above. The inertia base shall be of rigid steel and concrete construction
of equivalent weight to the machine and motor assembly, the whole mounted on spring
and neoprene pad assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EQUIPMENT CONSIDERATION
A.
Fans
1. Flexible collar connections between fans and ductwork shall be correctly aligned.
2. Centrifugal fans and motor assemblies shall be mounted on a rigid common inertia
base, the whole mounted on spring and rubber vibration isolation mounts.
3. For all fans having motor size 7.5 kw or larger, bases shall be of steel and concrete
weighing as much as the fan motor assembly. Bases shall be sufficiently rigid to
resist any twisting or bending forces, and any dynamic forces, without creating
vibration of the base of any other member of the assembly.
4. All holding down bolts shall be installed so as to avoid bridging of isolation.
B.
Pumps
1. All pumps shall be selected for the highest efficiency consistent with the specified
duty, but it is generally desirable that the pump impeller diameter should not
exceed 0.90 of the maximum impeller diameter capacity of the pump housing to
reduce the possibility of tonal effects. Departure from this to be made only with the
approval of the Engineer. The motor and pump assembly shall be mounted on a
rigid steel and concrete inertia base of equivalent weight to the pump-motor
assembly, the whole mounted on spring isolation mount selected for at least 90%
isolation efficiency but in any case having a minimum deflection of 25mm.
2. Pump bases shall be designed to support the weight of elbows, valves and other
fittings without creating undue stress on the pump assembly.
Page 6 of 7
C.
Refrigeration Equipment
1. The whole assembly shall be isolated from the structure on pads providing at least
90% isolation efficiency at rotational speed.
2. Ensure that the movement of the equipment during start-up or running is not
excessive and if this cannot be met supply the equipment with an inertia base.
3.02
PIPING
A.
All valves, including control valves, shall be adequately sized to prevent unduly high
local velocities and cavitations effects.
B.
Layout piping for flexibility in each of three planes. All piping connected to spring
mounted equipment and up to a distance of 50 diameters shall be supported on hangers
having spring and rubber in series and providing at least 25mm static deflection.
C.
All other pipe supports or hangers shall incorporate an isolating medium such as felt,
ribbed rubber, or high density fiberglass between pipe and hanger or hanger and
structure. This applies to all piping installed in horizontal runs or vertical risers.
D.
At pipe suspension point : fit pipe with 75mm to 100mm length of rigid fiberglass pipe
lagging of appropriate size and then provide oversized clamping bracket to hold pipe
firmly without crushing the insulation unduly. For small copper pipes under 25 mm
diameter , use wrapping of hair-felt or similar of minimum 15mm thick.
E.
Springs to be capable of an additional 50% travel after normal loaded condition takeup.
F.
Where uninsulated pipelines penetrate masonry walls and floors between equipment
rooms and riser ducts, riser ducts and ceiling spaces etc., they shall be isolated from
direct contact with the structure be sleeving with high density fiberglass, felt or other
approved material. Care shall be taken to provide a full acoustical seal at such
penetrations.
G.
Power leads, earth wires, and service pipes shall be provided with flexible connections
at convenient points close to the machine.
3.03
FIXING OF INTERNAL DUCT LININGS
A. Fix lining on the inside of the duct with adjacent sides overlapping at the corners.
B. Lining shall be secured by impaling it over stud-welded rust-proof pins or spot-welded
sheet metal split lugs at not less than 300mm centers with a minimum of two rows of fastenings
per duct side.
C. Washers shall be fitted over the pins or lugs and applied flush to the face of the insulation
without depressing the surface more than 3mm.
END OF SECTION
Page 7 of 7
SECTION 15250 INSULATION
INSULATION
SECTION 15250
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
The work includes the supply and fitting of insulation for:

1. Pipe Work.
2. Ductwork.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
Division 15 Mechanical.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide insulation as indicated and specified.
B.
Work included:
1. The following piping systems shall be insulated:
a. Domestic hot water systems (including hot water return).
b. Chilled water supply and return.
2. The following duct systems shall be insulated:

a. High and low pressure supply air ductwork ( both exposed and concealed ).
b. Air conditioning plenums, housings, and cold sections that are not factory
insulated.
c. Return air ductwork.
d. All Fresh air ductwork.
e. All toilets exhaust and Kitchen hood exhaust ducts.
3. The following equipment shall be insulated:
a. Hydronic system air separators (chilled water only).
b. Hydronic system expansion tanks (chilled water only).
c. Heat exchangers, converters and water tanks
Page 1 of 8
d. Chilled water pump housings.

C.
Work Not Included:

1. The following ductwork systems shall not be insulated:
a. General space exhausts air ductwork.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping shall be tested before insulation is applied.
B.
All insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere jacket or facing to the
insulation, (installed indoors), shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by
procedure ASTM E-84, not exceeding flame spread of 25, and smoke developed of
150. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, comments, tapes and cloths for fittings
shall have similar component ratings.
C.
Installers Qualifications:
1. Use only applicators regularly engaged in the business of insulating mechanical
systems.
D.
Application details shall be in accordance with the insulating material suppliers

recommendations except where a higher standard is specified herein.
E.
To ensure the correct specification and thickness of insulation has been applied, The
Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer, cut one of the sections from the finished
covering. If defects are revealed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense remove the
whole of the covering and provides and fix new insulation to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
1.05
REFERENCES
A.
Referenced Standards:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
a. E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.06
DEFINITIONS
A.
Concealed refers to insulation:

1. Above ceilings.
2. Enclosed in equipment casings or metal enclosures.
3. In partitions, pipe shafts, or furred spaces.
4. In unfinished spaces, providing that it is at least 2.5 m above floor , and further
providing that it is at ;east 1.25 m from any equipment.
Page 2 of 8
B.
Exposed refers to insulation in view, in finished spaces.
C.
Exterior Refers to outdoors.
D.
Interior Refers to indoors.
1.07
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide submittals identified in the following paragraphs:

1. Submit product data on insulation materials, mastics, adhesives, and accessories
defining insulation values, installation methods, flames spread/smoke develop
rating, and certificates indicating that the insulation materials meet the specified
requirements.
2. Submit samples of each type of insulation material specified in this Section.
Samples shall be as follows:
a. Pipe Insulation: mean pipe diameter, 150mm long.
b. Duct Insulation: 300 mm square by listed thickness.
c. Equipment Insulation: 300 mm square by listed thickness.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Supply and install all insulation and lagging wherever specified in this Book of
Specifications in accordance with the requirements of this section.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to
those specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
All duct insulation shall be tested in accordance with test methods BS476 pt 6 Fire
Test on Building Materials and Structures, Method of Test for Fire Propagation for
Products.
All duct insulation shall be tested in accordance with test methods ISO 5659-Smoke
Density and Toxicity with Additional Gas Analysis. The insulation must comply with
the Standard in terms of smoke density (Dm <200) and combustion gas concentrations
must not exceed those specified in the Standard.
Test certificates form an independent testing authority shall be submitted.
All duct insulation should be accompanied by Manufacturers Test Certificate.
Product shall be resistant to attack of algae, bacteria, vermin and the growth of moulds
and fungi.
Before installing insulation, build mock-ups for each type of insulation and finish listed
below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mock-ups
Page 3 of 8
according to the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed
Work:
1.
Include the following mock-ups:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
One 10-foot (3-m) section of rectangular straight duct.

One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
One branch takeoff.
One transition fitting.
Four support hangers.
2.
Build mock-ups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application

details for insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3.
Build mock-ups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mock-ups will
be constructed.
Obtain Architect's approval of mock-ups before starting insulation application.
Maintain mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mock-ups when directed.
Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at
time of Substantial Completion.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.

Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may
begin on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
2.02.
a.
Provide insulation for the following services:

- Fresh air and apartments exhaust ducts inside shafts and exposed on
roof.
- Kitchen exhausts ducts running above false ceiling.
- Refrigerant suction and liquid lines.
- Condensate drains pipes.
- Domestic hot water supply and return pipes.
b.
Concerning the fresh air ducts inside floors and the Air conditioning ducts, preinsulated ducts will be specified, refer to section: 15801-2.11
DUCT INSULATION (CROSSLINKED POLYOLEFIN FOAM)

Physically cross linked, closed cell Polyolefin foam with factory applied, 9um
reinforced aluminum foil and factory applied acrylic adhesive backing.
Density: 25 Kg / m3 (foam core only)
Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.032 W/mK at mean temperature
23C
Moisture absorption: Non hygroscopic
Water Vapor permeability (ASTM E96): Better than 8.19 X 10-15 Kg/Pa.s.m
Minimum Service Temperature: - 80 C
Page 4 of 8
Maximum Mean Duct Service Temperature: 90 C

Maximum Service Temperature: 1000 C
Fire Rating:
Class 0 to BS476
Complies with ASTM E84 (25/50)
Smoke Density and Toxicity
Meets ISO 5659 (1994) - Smoke Density and Toxicity Dm <200
Combustion gases CO, HCL, HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the maximum
allowable concentrations of the Standard.
Fittings:
The same material is to be used for insulating the flanges (150mm width). Refers to
manufacturers installation instructions for flanges
All joints to be sealed with 75mm wide foil tape.
Same material or approved foam gasket to be used on all hangers supporting the ducts.
Refer to manufacturers installation instructions.
Adhesive:
Factory applied acrylic adhesive G60 supplied with the insulation
(Factory applied)
Vapor Barrier or Coatings:
No additional vapor barriers or coatings are to be used
Thicknesses (recommended):
Normal indoor ducts Conditioned Area:
12-mm
Normal indoor ducts Non-conditioned Area:
12-mm
Outdoor ducts
25-mm
Insulation Finish:
Insulation finish shall be executed as follows:
a.
On air-conditioned air ducts, insulation shall be protected against humidity by

an approved type, factory applied vapor barrier of aluminum foil laminated
onto Kraft paper and reinforced with glass yarn mesh.
Vapor barrier shall be properly held in place by sealing tapes and adequate
number of non-corrodible bands.
b.
Finished insulation surface shall present neat, uniform and straight

appearances, whether concealed or exposed to view.
c.
All insulation exposed on roof or to weather agents shall be provided over and
above the Specification requirements with additional water proofing and
weather proofing material in 3 layers, plus a final outer jacket of aluminum
construction 0.8mm thick.
Page 5 of 8
d.
2.03.
All pipes running exposed on roof shall be insulated with rigid pipe insulation.
All pipes insulation shall be finished by a factory applied vapor barrier of
aluminum foil laminated on to Kraft paper and reinforced with glass yarn
mesh. All joints to be sealed with sealing tape and held in place by adequate
number of non-corrodible bands.
ACOUSTIC DUCT LINER

All supply, return and exhaust air ducts shall be lined internally with fiber glass duct
liner up to a minimum length of 3 meters from their connections with the air handling
units and fans.
Duct acoustic liner shall have one surface covered with heavy coating of black
pigmented neoprene layer.
Whenever acoustic liner is specified for ductworks, the duct dimensions shown on the
drawings are understood to be the net internal dimension resulting AFTER the liner is
installed.
2.04.
PIPE INSULATION (TUBE CROSSLINKED POLYOLEFIN FOAM)

Physically crosslinked, closed cell Polyolefin foam with factory applied, reinforced
aluminum foil in preformed, pre-slit tubes.
Density: 25 Kg / m3 (foam core only)
Thermal Conductivity (ASTM C518): Maximum 0.032 W/mK at mean temperature
23C
Moisture absorption: Non hygroscopic
Water Vapor permeability (ASTM E96): Better than 8.19 X 10-15 Kg/Pa.s.m
Minimum Service Temperature: - 80 C
Maximum Service Temperature: 1000 C
Fire Rating:
Class 0 to BS476
Complies with ASTM E84 (25/50)
Smoke Density and Toxicity
Meets ISO 5659 (1994) - Smoke Density and Toxicity Dm <200
Combustion gases CO, HCL, HF, NOx, HBr, HCN and SO2 to be within the maximum
allowable concentrations of the Standard.
Adhesive:
Seal all longitudinal and end to end joints with suitable contact neoprene (rubber) based
contact adhesive.
Seal all joints with 75mm aluminum foil tape.
Refer to manufacturers installation instructions.
Vapour Barrier or Coatings:
No additional vapor barriers or coatings are required or to be used.
Thicknesses:
Page 6 of 8
Chilled water piping (indoor): Conditioned Area

Chilled water piping (indoor): Non -Conditioned Area
Chilled Water piping (outdoor):
2.05.
15 mm
20 mm
25 mm
INSULATION ON COLD EQUIPMENT

Voids between insulation and equipment to be filled with blanket insulation and cover
with removable 1mm galvanized sheet metal casing panel lined with 50mm thick rigid
board insulation. Vapor seal closure joints on metal casing with vapor barrier coating.
2.06. INSULATION ON HOT EQUIPMENT, SMOKE PIPE AND BREECHING

Material is to be Rockwool density of 100 kg/cm2 and thickness of 10 cm suitable for
high temperature. Edges of Rockwool to be butted tightly and secured with 1.5 mm
thick galvanized annealed steel wire, or 15 mm x 0.04 mm galvanized steel bands, at
300 mm centers. Cover insulation with 50 mm hexagonal mesh wire tightly stretched in
place with edges tied together and covered with 7/10 mm galvanized sheet. Provide
cleanout doors with angle frames and insulate in same manner as equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION:
A.
Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installation of the materials and
equipment to be insulated to verify that all such work is complete to the point where
this installation may properly commence.
B.
Verify that all insulation may be installed in accordance with all governing codes and
regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturers
written instructions.
C.
Verify that equipment surfaces are thoroughly clean and dry.
3.02
TESTS
A.
Do not install insulation until specified tests have been conducted on the system to be
insulated and results approved.
3.03
QUALITY
A.
Particular attention shall be given to the finished appearances of all thermal insulation
and cladding which must present a neat and symmetrical appearance running true in
line with pipe layouts. Any rough, irregular or badly finished surfaces shall be removed
and replaced to the satisfaction.
B.
All pipework shall be insulated separately, adjacent and parallel pipes shall not be
married together with insulating materials.
C.
Thermal insulation materials and their finishes shall be asbestos free. Canvas jackets
shall be non-combustible and flame-resistant.
D.
For painting and identification of the finished insulation refer to Sections 09900 and
01086.
Page 7 of 8
E.
Due allowance shall be made in all insulation applications to cater for movement due to
expansion and the Contractor shall provide and fix the necessary space piece to ensure
that the insulation is continuous where pipework passes through walls, floors, pipe
brackets etc. and other thin fire divisions.
F.
The Contractor shall ensure that particular attention shall be paid to sealing the
insulation against water or water vapor ingress at all flanges, expansion joints, valves,
anchors and pipe supports.
END OF SECTION
Page 8 of 8
SECTION 15310 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

SECTION 15310
GENERAL
1.1 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES
The Contractor is responsible for the quality and the satisfactory operation of the
installations entrusted to him, as well as for compliance with the performance
stipulated in this document.
Consequently, for his own account and under his own responsibility, he must carry out
all calculations and select the necessary materials and equipment.
Apart from the required performance definitions, this document and the relevant
drawings also provide many indications resulting from the studies carried out by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall review these studies and check the corresponding indications.
The same applies to equipment selection, for which the information given in this
document must be deemed as indicative, only and defines only the minimum
requirements.
1.2 SCOPE DESCRIPTION
The contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, tools, supplies, equipment,
transportation, supervision, technical, professional and other services, and shall
perform all operations necessary and required to satisfactorily complete all the
necessary engineering, procurement services, construction work and commissioning for
the fire protection systems and equipments for the project.
1.3 BASIC DESIGN CRITERIA
Refer tender Drawings and Documents.
1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS
All the systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with the applicable Local
Civil Defense Codes and Standards. They shall be particularly in accordance with the
following NFPA /BS EN/Vds standards:
NFPA 10, Standard for Installation of Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
Page 1 of 43
NFPA 20, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire
Protection
NFPA 22, Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
NFPA 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and
their Appurtenance
NFPA-25, Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water
Based Fire Protection Systems
NFPA-70, National Electric Code
NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 92A, Standard for Smoke Control Systems
NFPA-101, Life Safety Code
NFPA-110, Standard for Emergency and Stand by Power systems
NFPA-170, Standard for Fire Safety Symbols
NFPA 204, Standard for Smoke and Heat Venting
NFPA-220, Standard for types of Building Construction
NFPA-221, Standard for Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation Lightning Protection Systems
NFPA-2001, Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing systems
NFPA 5000, Building Construction & Safety Code
OSHA, Code of federal regulations, Title 29, Part 1926
BS EN 54 Standard for installation of Fire Alarm System.
1.5 SCOPE OF WORK:
This specification covers the suppy. Delivery and complete installation on site and
in full working order of the equipment specified in this document and/or shown on
the drawing
Full particulars, performance curves and illustrations of the equipment, complying
as closely as possible with this specification, shall be provided with the tender, but
any deviations from the specification must be fully and clearly indicated in the
tender submission schedules.
The Contractor shall provide and install:
The complete fire pumping station, including the firewater pumps (pumps,
diesel engines drive, engines drive controllers, skid, diesel underground storage
Page 2 of 43
& pump,...), the jockey pump (pumps, electric drive, electric drive controllers),
the piping & hanging, the valves, check-valves, relief valves, fittings, the
instrumentation, the storage fire water tanks and feeding controllers (valves &
controllers).
The firewater mains (sprinkler, standpipe & hydrant), including the piping, the
fittings, the hanging, the block-valves & the hydrants.
The wet sprinkler systems, including the control valves, the piping, the
hanging, the heads, the instrumentation.
The hose reels (standpipes, hose connections, external hose streams).
The portables extinguishers
Clean agent fire suppression system for the rooms mentioned in the drawings.
The marking of all the safety equipment
The Contractor shall be responsible for all the following aspects of the provided
systems:
The checking of the tender drawings and any calculations supplied with the
drawings. The Contractor shall check each drawing and satisfy himself that the
design is correct for the equipment offered and will meet all applicable rules
and regulations
The provision of any additional information required by the Contractors
installation engineers which are particular to the equipment being supplied e.g.
fabrication drawings, equipment data sheets, commissioning instructions etc.
The provision of drawings and equipment data related to the systems as
required by the Engineer
The supply of all required equipment and other fixtures associated with the
systems
Painting
Shop testing of equipment and provision of inspection facilities
Certification
The provision and fittings of suitable wall boxes, transits and plates where pipe
work or cable passes through walls, etc...as well as fire rating reinstatement
materials
The supply of as built drawings and as built calculations
The provision of scaffolding, ramps and any other equipment required to
enable the systems to be installed, tested and commissioned correctly
Page 3 of 43
A demonstration to key personnel in the use and testing of the systems and
equipment supplied
Operating and maintenance manuals.
1.6 MATERIALS
The Contractor shall supply all materials necessary to make up effective and
operable fire protection, detection and alarm systems, voice alarm system and
emergency & exit lighting systems for the facilities indicated in the drawings and
in the present specification, and particularly :
all the necessary pipe work, valves, equipment and instrumentation required for
the facilities
all electrical cable between panels, junction boxes, sensors, call points, pressure
switches, alarm bells, flashing lights, ... and generally all the cable (and their
supports) required for the facilities. Cables passing through fire walls shall not
modified the fire rating of the wall (reconstitution of fire rating with approved
sealant materials by the Contractor)
local alarms indicating actuation of the systems
All detectors, fire signalling and alarm cabling shall be installed by the
Contractor using materials in accordance with international standards.
All emergency lights, exit lights with directional arrow marks & pictograms as
required,central battery panels, addressable monitoring panel, interface
modules, phase monitoring relays and interconnecting cabling shall be installed
by the contractor using the materials in accordance with International
standards.
The main electrical supply to the Contractors equipment will be by others.
All instrumentation and electrical equipment will be enclosed to suit the Hazard
Class of the area. The Hazard Class of each area is indicated on the Hazardous
Area Layouts.
Hazardous Area Certificate will be required for each item supplied within the
Hazardous Area.
The Contractor shall define in the quotation the full specification of every system
proposed (pipe work, cables, equipment,)
1.7 QUALITY OF MATERIALS
Only materials of first-class quality shall be used and all materials shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
Wherever applicable, the system and material is to comply with the relevant
International Standards of NFPA codes or British Standards /Vds /LPCB
specifications.
Page 4 of 43
1.8 APPROVAL LISTING OF MATERIALS

The equipment shall have been tested and, where applicable, shall have been
granted a certificate of approval or listing for the intended service. UL listed ,FM
approved,BS Kite mark,Vds approved equipment shall be used where possible.
Where equipment is offered without the above approval or listing, these items
shall be listed with the type of certificate or approval granted indicated.
The Contractor shall supply only proven and established equipment which is
suitable for the duty.
The Employer reserves the right to call for either substitute or alternative units, or
to nominate manufacturers or models for any class of equipment.
1.9 SUBMITTALS
The installing contractor shall submit the following design infromation and
drawing for approval prior to starting work on this project.
1.9.1
Product Data: submit manufacturers technical product

Field installation layout drawings having a scale of not less than (1:100m)
detailing the location of all equipments, pipe runs including pipe sizes and
lengths, controls and other accessories.
Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door holders,
special sealing requirements and equipment shutdown.
Separate layouts, or drawings, shall be provided for each level, (i.e.; room,
under floor, and above ceiling) and each system for mechanical and electrical
work.
A separate layout or drawing, shall show isometric details of clean agent
storage containers, mounting details and proposed pipe runs and sizes.
Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and include
point-to-point conduit runs and a description of the method(s) used for detector
mounting.
A complete sequence of operation shall be submitted detailing all alarm
devices, shutdown functions, remote signaling, and agent discharge for each
system.
Submit drawings, calculations and system component data sheets for approval
to the local Fire Prevention Agency, and all other Authorities Having
Jurisdiction before starting installation. Submit approved plans to the
Architect/Engineer for record.
Page 5 of 43
1.9.2
Drawings
1.9.2.1 Shop Drawings

The Sub-Contractor shall provide shop drawings for each system floor wise in
detail as required by the engineer in charge and Authority having jurisdiction. It
is the contractor responsibility to co-ordinate with other services while
preparing the shop drawings and obtains approval from the engineer in charge.
1.9.2.2 As Built Drawings
Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4)
copies of system "As-Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show
actual installation details including all equipment locations as well as piping
and conduit routing details. Show all room or facilities modifications, including
door and/or damper installations completed. One (1) copy of reproducible
engineering drawings shall be provided reflecting all actual installation details.
These drawings shall be as accurate and complete as possible.
COMMISSIONING AND TESTING
1.10
Discharge tests shall be carried out on Site at the discretion of the Employer.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employers insurers or their
nominated representatives.
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary tools and equipment for testing
and commissioning activities.
1.11
PROTECTION SYSTEMS APPROVAL

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to submit the protection systems
design, to obtain the Authority approval prior to the commencement of work
and to implement the Authority requirements. The Contractor shall also submit
the As Built drawings to the Authority and make necessary arrangements for
Final Inspection & testing and obtain the Final NOC and approval from the
concern Authorities.
FIRE FIGHTING.
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS.
2.1.1
General:
Fire extinguishers shall comply with NFPA-10 for installation.
The classification of fire extinguishers shall consist of a letter that indicates the
class of fire on which a fire extinguisher has been found to be effective, preceded
by a rating number (Class A and Class B only) that indicates the relative
extinguishing effectiveness.
Page 6 of 43
The distribution of fire extinguishers shall comply with the prescribed requirements
of NFPA-10, as shown on the drawings and the specific requirements of the local
Civil Defence Authorities.
Cabinets housing fire extinguishers shall not be locked.
Portable fire extinguishers shall be maintained in a fully charged and operable

condition, and kept in their designated places at all times when they are not being
used.
2.1.2
Definitions
The type of extinguisher needed depends on the right type of fire that may occurs in
the room or building.
According to NFPA 10, several classes of fire have been defined:
I. Class A Fires: Fires in ordinary combustible materials, such as wood, cloth,
paper, rubber, and many plastics.
II. Class B Fires: Fires in flammable liquids, combustible liquids, petroleum
greases, tars, oils, oil-based paints, solvents, lacquers, alcohols, and flammable
gases.
III. Class C Fires: fires that involve energized electrical equipment where the
electrical non-conductivity of the extinguishing media is of importance. (Where
electrical equipment is de-energized, fire extinguishers for class A or B fires can
be used safely.)
IV. Class D Fires: Fires in combustible metals, such as magnesium, titanium,
zirconium, sodium, lithium, and potassium.
V. Class K Fires: Fires in cooking appliances that involve combustible cooking
media (vegetable or animal oils and fats.)
a. Building presenting class B or C fire hazard shall be equipped with a
regular number of class A extinguishers dedicated to the building
protection, and shall also be equipped with adding class B or C
extinguishers.
b. According to these definitions, all parts of the buildings shall be
equipped with class ABC type extinguishers. In the meantime, rooms
such as Storages, Workshops and other rooms housing electrical
equipments, shall be equipped with adding class C extinguishers.
2.1.3
ABC Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher:
ABC Dry powder fire extinguishers shall be manufactured in accordance with BS

EN 3 standards and shall be operated by means of a lever operated valve provided
with a safety pin which shall allow a controlled partial discharge. The cylinder
shall have minimum working pressure of 14bar. The temperature shall range from
-20 to 60 degree. The extinguisher must have a plastic base. It must be coated
inside by electrostatic PVC resin to resist corrosion. The cylinder shall be made
special cold rolled steel sheet with Argon/CO2 welding process and the suction
Page 7 of 43
tube shall be made of PVC material.. All extinguishers shall carry instructions for
use in English and Arabic.
The Dry powder fire extinguishers shall have LPCB approval/KITE mark approval
and having Local Civil Defense approvals.
Multipurpose Dry Chemical Extinguishers (Class A, Class B, and Class C Fires).
The capacity of the extinguisher shall be 4Kg and shall have a fire rating of 21A
and 113B Rating as shown in the drawings.
2.1.4
Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguisher:
Carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN

3 standards and shall be operated by means of a lever operated valve provided with
a safety pin which shall allow a controlled partial discharge. The cylinder shall be
made of high grade seamless steel and shall have high gloss polyester finish. The
cylinders shall be tested to 250 bar.
The temperature range for safety operation shall range from -20 to 60 degree. The
extinguisher shall be electroplated PVC resign coated to resist corrosion. The
suction tube shall be Aluminum. The CO2 fire extinguisher capacity shall be of 2
Kgs and the rating shall be 55B as shown on the drawings. All extinguishers shall
carry instructions for use in English and Arabic.
The Carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall have LPCB approval/KITE mark
approval and or manufactured complying with BS EN3 standards and having
Local Civil Defenc approvals.
Typical applications are electrical & electronic equipments, food preparation
areas, laboratories, and printing or duplicating areas, telephone equipment Rooms,
Engine Rooms, Control Rooms, Paint spray Booths, Flammable liquid storage
areas etc,. Since the agent is discharged in the form of a gas/snow cloud, it has a
relatively short range of 3 ft to 8 ft (1 m to 2.4 m). This type of fire extinguisher is
not recommended for outdoor use where windy conditions prevail, or for indoor
use in locations that are subject to strong air currents because the agent can rapidly
dissipate and prevent extinguishment. The concentration needed for fire
extinguishment reduces the amount of oxygen (air) needed for life safety when the
discharge is in a confined area (space).
Carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN
3 standards and shall be operated by means of a lever operated valve provided with
a safety pin which shall allow a controlled partial discharge. The cylinder shall be
made of high grade Aluminum Alloy AA6061 and shall have high gloss polyester
finish. The cylinders shall be tested to 250 bars.
The temperature range for safety operation shall range from -20 to 60 degree. The
extinguisher shall be electroplated PVC resign coated to resist corrosion. The
suction tube shall be Aluminum. The CO2 fire extinguisher capacity shall be of 2
Kg - rating 34B & C or 5 Kg Rating 55B as shown on the drawings. All
extinguishers shall carry instructions for use in English and Arabic.
Page 8 of 43
The Carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall have LPCB approval/KITE mark
approval and or manufactured complying with BS EN3 standards and having
Local Civil Defence approvals.
Typical applications are electrical & electronic equipments, food preparation
areas, laboratories, and printing or duplicating areas, telephone equipment Rooms,
Engine Rooms, Control Rooms, Paint spray Booths, Flammable liquid storage
areas etc,. Since the agent is discharged in the form of a gas/snow cloud, it has a
relatively short range of 3 ft to 8 ft (1 m to 2.4 m). This type of fire extinguisher is
not recommended for outdoor use where windy conditions prevail, or for indoor
use in locations that are subject to strong air currents because the agent can rapidly
dissipate and prevent extinguishment. The concentration needed for fire
extinguishment reduces the amount of oxygen (air) needed for life safety when the
discharge is in a confined area (space).
2.2 EXECUTION:
1. Fire extinguishers shall be conspicuously located where they will be readily
accessible and immediately available in the event of fire. Preferably they shall
be located along normal paths of travel, including exits from areas.
2. Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view.
3. Portable fire extinguishers other than wheeled types shall be securely installed
on the hanger or in the bracket supplied or placed in cabinets or wall recesses.
The hanger or bracket shall be securely and properly anchored to the mounting
surface in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Wheeled-type fire
extinguishers shall be located in a designated location.
4. Fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 lb (18.14 kg) shall
be installed so that the top of the fire extinguisher is not more than 5 ft (1.53 m)
above the floor. Fire extinguishers having a gross weight greater than 40 lb
(18.14 kg) (except wheeled types) shall be so installed that the top of the fire
extinguisher is not more than 31/2 ft (1.07 m) above the floor. In no case shall
the clearance between the bottom of the fire extinguisher and the floor be less
than 4 in. (10.2 cm).
5. Fire extinguishers shall be installed in a 1.2 mm thick, stainless steel, polished
finish cabinets where required in finished rooms / office areas and as shown on
the drawings and shall be confirmed with the Architect.
2.3 STANDPIPE AND HOSE SYSTEMS:
2.3.1
FIRE HOSE REELS: Automatic Type.
The hose reel drum shall be made of stainless steel with the cabinet supported
with reinforced support arm, which shall be chrome plated and swing through
180 degrees. Welding of any part on cabinet front shall not be allowed. The
reels shall comply with BS EN 671 and comprise a reinforced rubber hose,
25mm. diameter x 30m long, coiled on a revolving drum. The outer end of a
hose shall be fitted with a jet / spray / shut-off control nozzle. The inner end
of the hose shall be connected through the reel to the water supply.
Page 9 of 43
The reels shall incorporate a valve that automatically turns on the water supply
when more than approximately 3 mtr of hose is unreeled, and shuts off again
when the hose is re-wound onto the reel. A manual shut-off valve of the wheel
type shall also be installed on the service pipe to each hose reel.
The hose nozzle shall be, (JET/SPRAY/SHUT OFF) type nozzle.
Each hose reel shall be installed and tested to BS 5274 and shall deliver not less
than 0.4 l/s when the two top-most reels are in use simultaneously providing a
jet of approximately 6 mtr. in length. Pressure reducing devices shall be
provided whenever necessary to limit the pressure as per local athority remotest
point requirenment.
An instruction plate shall be supplied with each reel indicating the method of
use in English and Arabic.
The hose reels shall be of a make, approved by the Ministry of the Interior Civil
Defense Department, and shall be supplied through an authorized agent.
Brief operating instructions should be clearly displayed on or by each hose reel
in both English & Arabic languages. e.g.
TO OPERATE
RUN OUT HOSE
TURN ON LOCK AT NOZZLE.
The hose reels shall be suitable for working pressures up to 4.5 bar (65psi) and
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
2.3.2
LANDING VALVES:
Landing valves shall be of a type acceptable to the Fire Brigade use inside
buildings as shown on the drawings. Landing valves shall be UL listed and FM
approved or should have a BSI KITE Mark , install built in pressure reducing
landing valve where the pressure exeeds the 12 bar, with 65mm diameter bore
fitted with 65 mm. instantaneous female coupling to conform to BS 336 and a
blank cap secured by a suitable length of chain.
The valve shall be of brass / Gunmetal construction with approved finish.If the
landing valve is Ul listed then the outlet coupling must be quick instantanious
with local fire services and should have BSI Kitemark.The installation of the
coupling should be done by an certified installer.
Landing valves shall be installed inside the cabinet as shown in the drawing, at
a height above floor level between 750 mm and 1100 mm. The outlet shall be
installed to give clearances of not less than 150 mm on both sides and below
the valve and not less than 200 mm clearance above the hand wheel.
2.3.3
FIRE HOSE & NOZZLE:
Fire Hose and Nozzles and shall be of UL / FM approved or should have BS

Kitemark.
Page 10 of 43
Fire hose shall be of synthetic re-inforced rubber lined, 65 mm diameter and 30

m long equipped with brass chrome plated male coupling for the connection
with the landing valve, and female coupling for the connection 65 mm chrome
plated adjustable diffuser nozzle. The fire hose unit shall include the landing
valve specified above, and shall have minimum working pressure of 12 Bar
and bursting pressure of 35 Bar.
2.3.4
FIRE HOSE CABINETS:
Cabinet shall manufacture by ISO9001 manufacturing company and duly

certified e.g. LPCB,UL and others.
Fire hose cabinets, valves, hose and accessories shall be approved by and shall
be conformance with the requirement of the Authority Having Jurisdiction and
provided where shown on the drawings in accordance with this Specification.
The Fire Hose Cabinet back box shall be made of 1.2mm thick electrogalvanized sheet for recessed type cabinets and shall be made of 1.2mm thick
stainless steel , door shall be wood to steel finish and architrave shall be made
of 2mm thick stainless steel, Stainless steel shall be polish finish type, the
finish of the polish shall be decided upon the approval of the Architect.
The cabinet shall be either wall-mounted type or recessed type as shown on the
drawings.
The fire hose cabinet in different locations of the building shall include the
following of the specified hereafter. The contractor shall furnish a certificate
from the original manufacturer of reel and cabinet.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
2.3.5
Automatic Fire Hose Reel

Landing Valves, Fire Hose and Nozzle
2 kg CO 2 Fire Extinguisher
9 Liters Water Fire Extinguisher.
INLET BREECHING VALVE:
The unit shall be of UL listed / FM approved make or shall have BSI kite mark
approvals.
The inlet breeching piece shall be of horizontal pattern having a 150 mm
flanged outlet
and four 65 mm instantaneous male inlets complete with
blank caps and chains. A non-return (check) valve shall protect the inlet. The
coupling shall comply with BS 336. The inlet connections shall be of suitable
type of local fire brigade department / Local Civil Defense.
The breaching piece shall be equipped with a 25 mm drain valve to drain the
riser. The valve should be kept strapped and padlocked closed.
All parts including valve body, chain and caps shall be brass / gunmetal,
polished chrome plated finish.
Page 11 of 43
2.3.6
INLET BREECHING VALVE CABINET:
Cabinet shall manufacture by ISO9001 manufacturing company and duly certified

e.g. LPCB,UL and others.
The inlet breeching unit shall be housed in an approved 1.2 mm stainless steel
polished finish/Mild steel powder coated, type, flush box with wired glass
glazed front panel and:
(a) Conspicuously indicated by the words: FIRE BRIGADE SPRINKLER
SYSTEM or STANDPIPE SYSTEM INLET in block letters on the inner
face of the glass, both on English and Arabic.
(b) Fastened only by means of a spring lock, which can also be operated from
the inside without the aid of a key after the glass has been broken.
(c) Made large enough for hose to be connected to inlets even if the door
cannot be opened and the only means of access is by breaking the glass.
The box shall be built into the structure with a fall of one in 12, from the rear of the
base to the front of the base. Construction material for the cabinet shall be polished
finished stainless steel.
2.4 EXECUTION/ INSTALLATION.
Standpipe and hose systems shall be installed in accordance with NFPA-14 and
Authority having jurisdiction requirements and as shown on the drawing.
The Fire protection contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate his work with
all other
trades and shall be completely familiar with and shall make
allowance for conditions which affect the fire protection installation.
The Fire hose cabinets shall be mounted securely in the concrete block walls,
shimmying the back box and mortaring tightly in place.
Provide a pressure guage with a isolation cock with inspectors test plug on top
and bottom of the each stand pipe risers.
Chrome plated nipples shall be provided in between the landing valve and hose
connection. Chrome plated escutcheons shall be provided where pipes
penetrate the cabinet.
A waterflow switch shall be provided in each standpipe riser and interfaced to
fire alarm
system for monitoring and to locate the section of waterflow
during fire fighting operation.
A drain valve and piping, located at the lowest point of the standpipe piping
downstream of the isolation valve, shall be arranged to discharge water at an
approved location.
2.5 CLEANING AND TESTING
Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered, stored and maintained in
closed storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All
fittings, valves and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and
stowed in suitable racks. All such stored items shall be maintained under
Page 12 of 43
weatherproofed cover to be supplied by the MEP sub-contractor until they are

ready for incorporation in the works. Particular care shall be taken to ensure
that electrical equipment and components are kept clean and dry.
Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests, the
entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During
the flushing out, provision shall be made to exclude any items of plant, which
could be damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be
carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The fire protection system shall be tested in accordance with the NFPA codes
and the relevant standards, with particular reference the requirements set forth
in this section:
All testing shall be performed under the work of this section. All services
required for testing shall be a responsibility of the work of this section. The
MEP sub-Contractor shall notify the Engineer of all tests, 48 hours prior to
testing.
If the systems are tested in sections, the connection to the previously tested
section shall be included.
All tests that may be required by the local fire authorities shall be performed
under the work of this section, in the presence of their representative, if so
required.
All leaks shall be corrected and the system re-tested until no leaks are found, at
no cost to the client.
Functional tests of all water flow alarms are a responsibility of the works of this
Section.
When the various systems are completed, operation tests shall be run on all
equipment to demonstrate proper operating conditions. These tests shall be run
under the observation of the inspector and the clients operating engineer. The
clients operators shall be instructed during this period. Operation tests shall be
performed under the work of this section.
Should any piece of equipment or apparatus of any material or work fail in any
of these tests, it shall be immediately removed and replaced by a perfect
material, and the portion of the work replaces shall again be tested under the
work of this Section.
SPRINKLER SYSTEM:
3.1 HAZARD CLASSIFICATION:
The sprinkler system shall be designed as per NFPA-13 Installation of Sprinkler
System requirements. Spacing of sprinklers shall suit the hazard of the occupancy
as shown in the drawing.
Page 13 of 43
3.2 SUBMITTAL DATA.

a. Submitte system layout drawings ,component Shop drawings,specification and
hydraulic calculations for consultanta review prior to commencing installation.
b. Submitte data shall be certified correct and bear the contractor engineers
certification prior to submission to the consultant.
c. Upon completion of installation , modify the system calculation and submit
hydraulic design data base on as built system.
d. Obtain all the approvals before proceeding with the work.
GENERAL
All sprinklers shall be of UL listed / FM Approved .
The sprinkler heads shall be of the spray pattern installed in an upright position or
pendant position as may be required. Sprinkler in false ceilings shall be concealed
to ceiling and to architects approval.
The design Criteria for all sprinklers such as K-factor, type and operating
temperature shall be submitted for approval.
A set of spare sprinkler heads shall be provided and located in a cabinet in the fire
pump room together with sprinkler spanners for use in removing and installation
of the heads as recommended in NFPA-13 and local authority requirements.
The sprinklers and lines shall not be spaced too close together in order to prevent
an operating sprinkler from wetting and hereby delaying operation of adjacent
sprinklers.
In locations where sprinkler heads are liable to be operated or damaged by
accidental blows, stout metal guards should protect them; care being taken to
ensure that the normal operation of the sprinkler head in the event of fire is not
thereby impeded.
The contractor shall supply set of spare sprinkler heads in each type / temperature
range and located in a cabinet in the fire pump room together with sprinkler
spanners for use in removing and installation of the heads as recommended in
NFPA-13 and local authority requirements.
Finish of sprinklers shall be to the approval of the architect.
3.3 SPRINKLER CONTROL VALVES:
3.3.1 ALARM VALVES:
It should be UL 753 listed conforming to NFPA-13. Retarding device of approved
design to obviate false alarms due to mains pressure variations where necessary or
where indicated.
Page 14 of 43
.Alarm valves shall be complete with Water Motor Alarm Gong, all required
auxiliary valves and drains and with pressure switch for wiring into the building
electric alarm system.
Alarm check valves shall be iron body bronze trim for minimum175psig(12bar)
working pressure complete with electric pressure switches, test and alarm bell
connections. Pressure gauges and all other ancillaries.
3.3.2 WATER MOTOR ALARMS:
The sprinkler system shall be fitted with an approved water motor alarm, which
shall be located at a distance not exceeding 21m from the alarm valve, and at a
height not to exceed 6m above the alarm valve.
The pipe work and fittings used shall be to the sizes determined by the NFPA-13
The pipe work shall be arranged to drain through a fitting having an orifice not
exceeding 3 mm in diameter. The orifice plate may form an integral part of the
fitting but shall be manufactured from a non-ferrous material to prevent the hole
from becoming blocked by corrosion or foreign matter.
A 15 mm test valve shall be installed on the installation side of each alarm valve.
3.3.3 ELECTRIC ALARM PRESSURE SWITCHES:
The electric alarm pressure swithch should be UL 753 Listed.It shall be installed
in the system as per NFPA 13 and they shall be mounted on a vertical branch pipe
at least 300 mm long.
The pressure switch may be of the diaphragm bellows operated type, and shall be
sufficiently sensitive to operate when only one sprinkler is discharging. The
pressure switch shall be provided with volt free contracts to facilitate monitoring
by a Building Management System, and wired to the main fire alarm panel.
3.3.4 PRESSURE GAUGES:
Pressure gauges shall be fitted to meet the requirements of the LPC. Pressure
gauges shall conform to BS 1780 or equivalent International Standard. The
maximum reading of the scale shall be 150% of the maximum system pressure and
each scale shall have divisions not exceeding 0.2bar.
3.3.5 AUTOMATIC ZONE CHECK (ZONE CONTROL
VALVE)ASSEMBLY:
A zone control valve set shall UL, FM Approved and it is to be provided for each
sprinkler system zone as shown on the tender drawings, and shall comprise:
Butterfly valve shall have UL 1091 .It shall be fitted with factory installed UL/Fm
apporved tamper switch.
Flow alarm switch shall be UL listed and FM approved for the size of the pipe in
which it is installed as a paddle type water flow indicator. Shall be fixed after the
butterfly valve, on the main supply pipe and before any connection is taken off.
Page 15 of 43
Inspector test and drain connections.

Dial pressure gauges suitable for the water pressures shall be fitted so arranged
that it can be easily removed for testing and checking without shutting down the
water supply.
Provide UL listed automatic zone check assembly to support monitoring,
controlling, inspection, testing & maintenance of each zone in sprinkler system,
where shown in the drawing as sprinkler zone control valve assembly or automatic
zone check assembly:
They consist of following:
1. Re-circulating Pump.
2. Two sets of valve, elbows and pipes to facilitate the circulation of the
water around water flow monitoring switch.
3. Vane-type water flow monitoring switch (WFMS).
4. Electrical box enabling control of motor and monitor of WFMS, local /
remote as required.
When actuated they shall perform the following:
Test mode actuation: When activated in test mode, the pump shall circulate the
water, within the sprinkler riser, around WFMS to stimulate the flow of one
sprinkler head in operation. The electrical box shall control and monitor, motor and
WFMS respectively, as required.
Fire mode actuation: When fire occurs, the sprinkler burst and water starts flowing
to control / extinguish the fire. This leads to flow equal to or more than one
sprinkler through the WFMS actuating it. The fire alarm panel / flow monitoring
panel performs monitors / controls required in the fire condition when the WFMS
actuation signal reach them.
They shall have following features in the system:
1. Insure the testing of WFMS as per the requirements of BS5306 Part-2
& NFPA 25 without activating the fire pump and opening of test/drain
valve.
2. Installed in such a way that the test shall be conducted from a central
control room, through single push button and the individual WFMS
status can be read from main fire alarm panel or separate flow
monitoring panel.
3. Have the future (contacts and relays) facilitating the connection to
BMS, for automatic actuation, once in 3 months which records the
status as required.
3.3.6 ISOLATING VALVES OS & Y TYPE :
Isolating valves shall be UL 262 Listed and shall be fitted to the installation in
order to shut the valve, the spindle must turn clockwise. The hand wheels of all
Page 16 of 43
stop valves shall be clearly marked to indicate which direction the wheel is to be
turned to close the valve.
An indication shall also be provided which shows whether the valve is open or
shut.
Each main stop valves shall be installed with a tamper / supervisory switch and
interconnected to the building fire alarm system or secured open by a padlock or
riveted strap.
3.3.7 DRAIN LINES
All drain lines from test valves, drain down points etc., shall discharge over
suitable and proper drain vent. Each drain vent shall be connected to a 50 mm
drain line, which shall discharge over a suitable gully.
3.3.8 EXECUTION/INSTALLATION.
The Protection Area of Coverage per sprinkler (As) shall be determined as the
multiplication of the distance between sprinklers upstream and downstream, and
the perpendicular distance between a sprinkler and another on the adjacent branch
line.
Installation for hydraulically calculated system with concealed pendent and
upright sprinklers shall be, according to NFPA 13 latest edition and local authority
requirements.
Complete Sprinkler system shall be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and
Authority having jurisdiction requirements and as shown on the drawing.
The Fire protection contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate his work with all
other trades and shall be completely familiar with and shall make allowance for
conditions which affect the fire protection installation.
The Zone control valve assembly locations and access panels shall be mounted
securely and provided with proper sign boards.
Provide a pressure guage with a isolation cock with inspectors test plug on top of
the each sprinkler pipe risers.
3.3.9 CLEANING AND TESTING
Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered, stored and maintained in
closed storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All
fittings, valves and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stowed
in suitable racks. All such stored items shall be maintained under weatherproofed
cover to be supplied by the MEP sub-contractor until they are ready for
incorporation in the works. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical
equipment and components are kept clean and dry.
Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests, the
entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
Page 17 of 43
All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the
flushing out, provision shall be made to exclude any items of plant, which could be
damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The fire protection system shall be tested in accordance with the NFPA codes and
the relevant standards, with particular reference the requirements set forth in this
section:
All testing shall be performed under the work of this section. All services required
for testing shall be a responsibility of the work of this section. The MEP subContractor shall notify the Engineer of all tests, 48 hours prior to testing.
The fire protection piping System shall be tested hydrostatically for not less than 2
hours and at one time of the system pressure without any leaks or as directed by
the local fire department.
If the systems are tested in sections, the connection to the previously tested section
shall be included.
All tests that may be required by the local fire authorities shall be performed under
the work of this section, in the presence of their representative, if so required.
All leaks shall be corrected and the system re-tested until no leaks are found, at no
cost to the client.
Functional tests of all water flow alarms are a responsibility of the works of this
Section.
When the various systems are completed,
equipment to demonstrate proper operating
under the observation of the inspector and
clients operators shall be instructed during
performed under the work of this section.
operation tests shall be run on all

conditions. These tests shall be run
the clients operating engineer. The
this period. Operation tests shall be
Should any piece of equipment or apparatus of any material or work fail in any of
these tests, it shall be immediately removed and replaced by a perfect material, and
the portion of the work replaces shall again be tested under the work of this
Section.
Cost to repair any damages to the building construction occasioned by pipe leaks
or defective materials shall be become under the works of this section, at no cost to
the client. All corrective work shall commence immediately after damage occurs.
PIPES, FITTINGS AND SUPPORTS.
4.1 PIPING
1. Pipes and fittings shall be in conformance with the following specifications unless
specified otherwise by the Authority having jurisdiction. Obtain approval of local
Authorities before proceeding with the work.
2. Pipe shall be seamless, black steel, schedule 40.
Page 18 of 43
3. When pipes are assembled by screwed fitting or by cut-grooved groove, the

minimum thickness for a pressure up to 20.7 bars.
4. Diameters
Minimum diameter is DN25
5. Pipes bendings
a. Schedule 40 Steel pipes bending is allowed if bending are executed with no
defaults, no diameter reduction and no significant deviation in the pipes circle
symmetry.
The bending minimum radius must be:
6 pipe diameters for a diameter < 2 , and
5 pipe diameters for a diameter > 2 .
6. Pipes marking and identification

i. Firewater pipes in black steel shall be marked to indicate its
destination.
7. Pipes Drainage
a. For sprinkler system, pipe drainage shall be accomplished by sloping pipe to
low point
with auxiliary drain as per NFPA13.
8. Special Requirements
Full flanges or plugs, according to the diameter shall be installed on the collectors
extremities to flushing rinsing of the pipes
4.2 PIPE FITTINGS.
1. Fittings for piping 50mm and small shall be UL listed and FM approved
threaded ductile iron with 300 psi pressure rating, ANSI B 16.4.
2. Fittings for piping larger than 50 mm shall be mechanical grooved fittings and
mechanical joints. Fittings, gaskets and mechanical couplings shall be UL
listed and FM approved. The fittings shall be suitable for 300 psi working
pressure.
3. Pipes welding shall not be carried out on site.
4. The black steel fittings shall be UL Listet and FM approved.
5. Unions and Couplings
Screwed unions shall not be used for pipe grater than DN40. For pipes above,
flanges will be used.
6. Reducers and male/female reducers
A one-piece reduced fitting must be used for each pipe diameter change.
Reduced sleeve for the pipe continuity, and
Male/female reducer for a direction change with reduction (T shape + reducer)
Page 19 of 43
4.3 SUPPORTS:
1. Pipe hangers and supports must be in accordance to NFPA13.
2. Pipes supports shall be designed to maintain their integrity in case of fire
exposure.
3. All underground piping / valves shall be supported with Concrete Anchor
Thrust blocks as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide calculation for the
Engineers approval.
4. All Above ground piping / equipments hangers, supports and sway braces shall
be fabricated in accordance with ANSI B 31.1. The Hangers, rod supports and
supporting devices and accessories shall be capable of supporting at least twice
the live loads of the product being supported. All hangers, supports and
accessories shall be UL listed and FM approved make.
5. Hangers shall be adjustable clevis type, of yoke and lower U strap design with
cross bolt and manufactured from galvanised steel. Cross bolt shall have a
double locking nuts. Vertical adjustable supporting rod shall have a load nut
below the yoke and a locking nut above the yoke.
6. Concrete anchors shall be factory made cadmium plated alloy steel expansion
shield type.
7. Concrete inserts shall be factory made galvanised malleable iron, poured in
place type, screwed or toggle style.
8. Riser clamps shall be galvanised steel bands shaped to tightly fit O.D. of the
pipe, secured with bolts and nuts.
9. Piercing of load supporting system is not permitted.
10.The supporting structure can be directly attached to equipments if the
equipment supplier certifies this supporting feasibility;
11.The welding of pipes on the supports of the pipes is not permitted;
12.Pipes supporting system must be reinforced in order to reduce any movements
resulting from nozzles reaction and therefore preserve the system performance
and integrity if battering ram is used;
13.The maximum length for a non-supported DN 25 pipe is 0.8 meter;
14.When possible, loop-type clamps will be used
15.If spring hangers are used, they shall be installed and located in accordance
with NFPA 13 specifications.
16.The Contractor shall take into account the problem of dilatation (of his systems
but also of the buildings) and shall make the coordination with the others
Contractors to solve the support problems.
Page 20 of 43
FIRE WATER PUMPSETS:

5.1 GENERAL:
1 Electric Main Fire pump
1 Diesel Stand By Fire pump
1 jockey pump
Each system shall be design to insure the maximum pumping capacity even if 1
pump fails.
The total supplying of all the necessary equipment for the firewater production
(including pumps, engines driven, controllers, instrumentation, piping, valves,
relief valves, ) is included in the Contractors scope of work.
The supplying and installation of the day fuel tank of the engines is included in the
Contractors scope.
The fuel tank (and all the fuel installation) shall be in accordance with NFPA
standards & Environmental legislation of local Authorities
The air supply system of the diesel engines drive (automatic opening, venting
panels, ..) is included in the Contractors scope.
The fire pumps, motor, engine and controllers shall be UL listed or FM approved,
built in the country where the agreement is made.
The fire pumps and engine driven shall be in accordance with NPFA 20 (curves,
starting, protection, ).
The problem of surge (hammer effect) shall be taken into account in the design. A
surge analysis shall be conducted and specific surge pressure control system shall
be installed.
Over-pressure system shall also be installed.
The contractor shall provide fully certified hydraulic calculations for exact sizing
of the pumps.
The pumps shall be furnished with a full set of bench test certificates proving
acceptability for the design points of this installation.
5.2 PRODUCTS:
5.2.1
FIRE PUMPS:
Fire pumps shall be UL or ULC listed or FM approved and manufactured by an
approved manufacturer. Each pump shall have a capacity as shown in pump
schedule, adjusted as necessary to suit the hydraulic calculations.
Page 21 of 43
The pumping unit shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., and shall be
fully approved by the Associated Factory Mutual Fire Insurance Companies. The
pumping unit shall meet all requirements of the National Fire Protection
Association Pamphlet No. 20.
The pumps shall also deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure of
not less than 65% of rated pressure. The shutoff pressure shall not exceed 140%
of the rated pressure at rated capacity.
5.2.1.1 FIRE PUMPS TYPE:
Each fire pump shall be of horizontal split case centrifugal single stage or
multistage construction, specifically labeled for fire service and capable of
proving the required flow and pressure of the entire development. The pump shall
be connected to the combined sprinkler/standpipe system. The suction supply for
the fire pump shall be from a storage tank at a maximum pressure of 20 kPa and a
minimum pressure of 0 kPa. The pump casing shall be cast iron and rated to
withstand twice the working pressure.
5.2.1.2 PUMP CONSTRUCTION:
The pump construction shall be cast iron casing, Bronze impeller, Stainless Steel
shaft and gland packing.
Note: The pump shall also deliver not less than 150 % of the rated capacity at a
pressure of not less than 65 % of the rated pressure. The shut off pressure shall not
exceed 140 % of the rated pressure at rated capacity.
5.2.1.3 PUMP DISCHARGE & HEAD:
The pump discharge & head shown on the drawing schedule is an estimate. The
fire protection contractor shall select a pump discharge and head to satisfy the fire
protection system requirements resulting from the system hydraulic calculations.
5.2.1.4 FIRE PUMP ACCESSORIES:
The Fire and Sprinkler Pumps shall include the following accessories, as required
by NFPA standards:
1. Flow Metering Device, shall be of the Venturi type. Pilot and annular devices
will not be acceptable- One metering device shall be provided for each pump. or
as shown on the drawings. Pipe water back to the storage tank.
2. Discharge tee.
3. Necessary isolating valves with supervisory switches.
4. Air release valve and fittings.
5. Discharge pressure gauge.
Page 22 of 43
6. Main relief valve, pilot operated, enclosed relief valve overflow cone and
discharge tee with elbow (diesel drive only).
7. Main relief valve with discharge pipes to water tank.
8. Pump casing relief valve.
9. Pressure recorder as required by NFPA 20.
5.2.2
ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE:
On installations where the Fire Pump is to be operated electrically, the electric

motor shall be a horizontal, open drip-proof type, wound for 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz
(cycle) current The motor shall be of such capacity that 115% of the full-load
ampere rating shall not be exceeded at any condition of the pump load for UL
Listed fire pump.
With an ambient temperature not exceeding 40 deg. C, the motor shall be designed
for a temperature rise not exceeding 60 deg. C when carrying fully rated-load
continuously, and shall be capable of operating continuously with an overload of
15% without stress or excessive rise in temperature. The locked rotor current shall
not exceed the values specified in NFPA Pamphlet No. 20.
Bearings shall be anti-friction ball or roller type.
5.2.3
CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRIC DRIVE:
The Fire Pump motor control shall be UL listed and FM Approved. It shall be
completely assembled, wired and tested by the control manufacturer before
shipment from factory, and shall be labeled 'Fire Pump Controller". The controller
shall be located as dose as practical and within sight of the motor, preferably
mounted on the pump skid.
The controller shall be so located or protected that it will not be injured by water
escaping from the pump or connection. The controller shall be of the combined
manual and automatic auto transformer type. And shall be complete with:
1. Disconnect switch - externally operable, quick-break type.
2. Circuit breaker - time delay type with trips in all phases set for 300% of the
motor full load current3. Motor starter, capable of being energized automatically through the pressure
switch or manually by means of an externally operable handle. Motor starter shall
be of the autotransformer type.
4. Pressure switch, of adjustable type.
5. Running period timer - set to keep motor in operation, when started
automatically, for a minimum period of one minute for each 10 HP motor rating,
but not to exceed 7 minutes.
Page 23 of 43
6. Pilot lamp - to indicate circuit breaker closed and power available.

7. Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
8. Alarm relay - to energize an audible or visible alarm through an independent
source of power to indicate circuit breaker open or power failure.
9. Manual selection station - a two position station shall be provided on the
enclosure marked "Automatic" and Non-automatic".
10. Means shall be provided on the Controller to operate an alarm signal
continuously while the pump is running.
11. Provisions for power supply at 220 V for diesel pump battery chargers.
12. Control equipment shall meet all requirements of NFPA No. 20.
13. Tank Accessories
5.2.4
DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE:
Diesel engine shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service.
The engine shall be of the self contained open type, mounted on a suitable base
with the following minimum plus any others that may be necessary by NFPA-20
and local CD requirements.
1. Dual battery set sized to NFPA -20 requirements with electrolyte shipped in
separate containers, rack and cables.
2. Dual battery charger of proper type for batteries used ( included in UL Listed /
FM Approved controller ). Power to battery charger shall be supplied from
electric pump control panel. Wiring from control panel to battery chargers
shall be by the contractor.
3. Electric starter with suitable generator and voltage regulator.
4. Engine water pump.
5. Heat exchanger cooling system.
6. Water cooled or ceramic blanketed exhaust manifold.
7. Lubricating oil pump and filter.
8. Speed governor.
9. Fuel injection system.
10. Air cleaner.
11. Drive plate
12. Fuel Pump
13. Proper instrument panel, complete with engine run warning light, water
temperature gauge, oil pressure gauge, ammeter, totalizing type tachometer and
hour meter.
14. Residential Grade Muffler.
15. Cooling water line for the engine heat exchanger assembly.
16. Flexible exhaust connectors.
Page 24 of 43
All engine wiring for automatic operation shall terminate in a proper junction box
to permit connection to control panel.
5.2.4.1 FUEL SYSTEM :
A suitable fuel system for the diesel engine shall be furnished. It must be in
accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No.20 and shall include above surface day
storage tank, flexible hose connectors, combination vent, flesh arrestor and fill cap.
5.2.4.2 SILENCER ( MUFFLER ) :
The silencer shall be for turbo-charged engines, sized and selected to
accommodate the allowable pressure drop of the engine.
The silencer shall provide an average attenuation of 20-25 Db (a).
The silencer shall be designed by HEAVY DUTY APPLICATIONS, with
noise attenuation across the entire audible range of the frequency spectrum 63
through 8000 Hz. The silencer shall consist of a series of chambers connected
by non-resonant tubes. The entire silencer shall be manufactured from plate
steel and be of a completely welded design. The heavy plate ensure longer
silencer life and better resistance to damage. The heavy plate shall prevent
shell radiated noise. There shall be no spot welds or press fits used.
Silencer inlet and discharge shall be flanged, manufactured from minimum
10mm thick plate and drilled to ANSI 70 kg. Silencers shall be either and
in/end out and side in/end out configurations to suit installation.
Provide 12mm drain connections. Prior to shipping, the silencers shall be
thoroughly cleaned and coated in a high temperature 650C aluminum paint.
5.2.4.3 DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE CONTROLLER :
Automatic Diesel Drive Engine Control Panel : The automatic engine control panel
shall be approved for fire pump service and shall meet the requirements of NFPA
Pamphlet No. 20. The panel shall be of the floor mounted type, and enclosed in
moisture and dust tight housing. A combination manual and automatic type
controller with Manual-Off-Automatic selector shall be provided and a 240 volt
single phase power failure relay or a pressure switch, which will ( when the system
pressure drops ) activate all electric circuits to automatically start the engine.
Should the engine fail to start after the required cranking cycles, the controller shall
disconnect the starting circuit and activate an alarm system using lights and buzzer
or bell. Low oil pressure and high jacket-water temperature shall also be
indicated by a suitable alarm system. The engine shall not shut down if either of
these conditions occurs during an operating cycle.
The engine shall be started automatically by the Controller at least once a week,
adjustable, and operate a minimum of 30 minutes ( adjustable ). An appropriate
timing arrangement shall determine the day and hour of this test.
Page 25 of 43
Starting the engine by fire alarm relay, deluge valve relay or remote push-button
station shall be included in the Controller circuit.
A remote alarm panel shall be furnished as per NFPA Pamphlet No. 20.
Pressure recorder (7 day drive) shall be provided within the control panel.
Fire Pump Controller shall be a diesel engine type, Controller approved and listed
by the Underwriters Laboratories for fire pump service, carry the labels of both UL
and CSA and meet the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association
Standards No. 20, as presently required by UL.
The controller shall be a Bulletin #500 diesel engine fire pump controller Model
FPD, as manufactured by Tornatech Inc., or approved equal, wired and tested by
the manufacture, rated for ( 12 or 24 ) V.D.C., with 240 volts, 50 Hz AC Input and
supplied in a floor mounting EEMAC 12 enclosure, complete with dripshield
suitable for pump room environment.
The controller shall incorporate the following:
1.
Each charger shall be completely independent of the other charger and

equipped with its own individual power transformer, rated for a maximum
continuous charge current of 10A. The charger shall be of solid state electronic
design, with semi-conductor type rectifier, and include the following
supervisory and safety features:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Current limiting in every charging mode

Over current shut-off
Automatic selection of bulk or charge by sensing battery voltage
Trickle charge limited to less than 500MA
Reverse voltage shut-off
Dead cell detection
Over and under voltage alarm
In case of battery failure, the charger shall initiate an alarm and provide a
signal to prevent the use of the defective battery during the start attempt cycle.
2.
Relays: All relays shall be equipped with manual test buttons, status ON
OFF indicators, be of the plug in type and shall meet all voltage and current
requirements.
3.
Remote Alarm Circuit: A total of five ( 5 ) standard alarm contacts, rated at 10

A, 125 V shall be provided and wired to the field terminal block, to indicate the
following engine conditions :
a.
b.
c.
d.
SPDT contact : Engine Running

1 N/O contact : Contact shall close when main switch
in Auto-position
1 N/O contact: Contract shall close when main switch
is in OFF or Manual position.
SPDT contact: Engine trouble. This shall be a
common alarm contact indicating the following conditions.
Page 26 of 43
Engine over speed, engine fails to start, low oil pressure, high
coolant temperature.
4.
Description of Operation: A four positions main switch shall provide selection

of three starting method and one OFF position.
I. OFF position shall shut down engine and alarms under any condition.
II. AUTO position: a water pressure switch mounted inside the controller shall
provide the engine start on water pressure drop. The automatic starting
circuit shall alternate the two storage batteries after each start attempt. The
attempt to start cycle shall consist of six cranks and five rest periods of 15
seconds duration. In the event of one battery failure, the starting cycle shall
lock itself to the remaining battery. In case of engine failure, the controller
shall stop any further cranking and energize the ENGINE FAIL TO START
alarm. A manual stop pushbutton shall enable engine shut down, but only
after all starting causes have returned to normal. The automatic Weekly
Exercise cycle shall also be operational in the auto-position. This cycle shall
be programmed on the 7 day time clock. A short opening of the water
solenoid valve shall create a momentary pressure drop and cause automatic
engine start. At the end of the programmed Exercise cycle, engine shall shut
down automatically. A manual test switch located on the time clock shall
allow for manual test operation of the weekly exercise cycle. The 7 day time
clock shall hold its time on A/C power failure and not require resetting.
III. TEST Position: Engine shall start in the same manner as the above exercise
cycle start. Turning main switch to Auto or Off position shall shut down
engine.
IV. MANUAL Position: Start pushbutton Battery 1 or Battery 2, shall
override all automatic starting circuits, and allow for direct manual engine
start.
V. Safety Shut Down: Engine over speed condition shall shut down engine
without time delay and lock out until manually reset.
The controller shall provide the following additional safety features:
Engine shut down in case of low oil pressure or high coolant
temperature during exercise, test or optional AC failure operation only.
5.2.5
ANNUNCIATOR AND OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL :

A central annunciator and operators control panel shall be provided on the
inner door located behind a breakable glass cover. This control panel shall
incorporate all alarm and status pilot light indicators, voltmeters and ammeters
for battery chargers and the 4 positions main switch, manual start pushbuttons,
the combination Lamp test / Charger Reset Pushbutton and the optional
NORMAL-SILENCE selector switch for pump room alarms.
1.
Annunciator: The annunciator panel shall feature extra long life light
bulbs, rated at 14 V for a 12 V and 28 V for a 24 V system.
Page 27 of 43
The following annunciating points shall be provided with the basic

controller package: Charger 1 failure; Charger 2 failure; Battery 1
failure ; Battery 2 failure ; AC power on, Exercise cycle ; Engine high
coolant temp. ; Engine low oil pressure; Engine fail to start; Engine
over speed ; Engine run ; Main switch auto and Pressure switch failure.
Manual lamp test shall be provided.
2.
Engine Connections: All circuit provided for engine interconnection

shall be rated at 10 A.
3.
Enclosure: The enclosure shall be lockable EEMAC 12/NEMA 12

heavy duty 14 gauge steel enclosure, dust tight, moisture resistant and
drip proof, complete with gasketted window to allow emergency
access to the operators control panel, for wall / floor mounting.
The controller shall be supplied including the following options:
Option No.1
AUTOMATIC LOW LEVEL STOP after

minimum water level in the fire tank is
reached.
Option No.2
SEQUENCE START TIMER ( adjustable )

operation to delay operation of diesel pump
for a maximum of 60 seconds.
Option No.3
PROVISION FOR REMOTE AND DELUGE

VALVE START CIRCUIT RELAY. Remote
contacts to be N/C and must open for start
signal (Fail safe circuit).
Option No.4
SILENCE SWITCH AND COMMON

ALARM CONTACT STOP for the following:
LOW FUEL LEVEL
WATER RESERVOIR LOW
WATER RESERVOIR EMPTY & PUMP

SHUT DOWN
5.2.6
JOCKEY PUMPS:
The Jockey pump capacity and pressure shall be as indicated in the pump schedule
on the drawings.
Pump shall be constructed as follows:
Type
Rotation
Motor
: Vertical multi-stage motor driven,

: Counter-clockwise, viewed down
: TEFC
Page 28 of 43
Motor bracket
: Cast type, connecting motor to pump
Diffuser cases
: Pressure containing, flow directing
Impellers
: Stainless steel
Shaft, l
: Stainless steel,
Pump discharge
: Flanged type
Control
: Definite purpose type, magnetic starter
In NEMA II enclosure, with reset button
Pump controller shall be factory pre-wired and tested. Pressure switch shall sense
low pressure in the fire pump system. Set cut-in pressure 5 PSI above main fire
pump cut-in pressure. Set cut-out pressure at system pressure. Provide minimum
run timer to operate the pump for a minimum of 3 minutes.
Across the fine start, H-O-A selector switch.
Control panel to contain a fusible 3-pole disconnect switch, magnetic motor
contractor and thermal overload relays with external reset Enclosure to be wall
mounted with hinged door.
5.2.7
ELECTRONIC WATER LEVEL INDICATOR:
Electronic water level indicator shall provide remote reading of water level into the
pump control panel. An alarm facility shall be provided for connection to the fine
pump control panel to indicate low water level and to provide a signal to shut down
the pumps if the tank is empty.
Fire pump (Diesel and electric) shall have performance; as indicated on the
drawings
5.3 EXECUTION:
1. The fire pumps shall be provided with a supervised isolating valve, flow meter
and throttling valve on the test piping. Test piping shall discharge water to the fire
water tank through a galvanized steel diffuser pipe.
2. Each pump, whether diesel or electric driven shall be complete with suction and
discharge pressure gauges, circulation relief valve, dosed relief cone, automatic air
release valve, drain valves coupling guard and its own control 'panel.
3. Provide remote annunciation panel for each pump which shall be located in the
Managers office and shall provide the following features: diesel and electric pump
status indicating rights and trouble tight for each pump. Wiring between control
panel and remote control panel shall be by division 15 installed in conduit as
described in section 16434.
4. Batteries shall be furnished in a dry charge, condition with electrolyte liquid in a
separate container. Electrolyte shall be added and the battery given a conditioning
charge at the time that the engine is put into service. Batteries shall be located so as
to be readily accessible for servicing and at least 300 mm above floor level.
Page 29 of 43
5. The electric motor driven unit shall have the pump. electric motor and control
panel mounted on a common base. The entire unit will be factory tested prior to
shipping.
6. The automatic engine control panel and the electric motor driven unit control
panel shall be specifically designed for fire pump service. All wiring between
pump, pump devices and controller shall be factory wired and tested. Wiring
between controller and the building fire alarm system shall be by Division 16.
Power wiring for the electric fire pump will be by Division 16.
7. The control panels shall be securely mounted in an enclosure which will protect
the equipment against mechanical injury and fading drops of water. All switches
required to keep the controller in the "automatic" position shall be within the
locked cabinet. Emergency access to the switch shall be by breaking the glass
panels.
8. A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently attached to the inside of the
each enclosure showing exact wiring for the controller, including a legend of
identifying numbers of individual components. AH wiring terminals shall be
plainly marked to correspond with the wiring diagram furnished.
9. Wiring elements of the controllers shall be designed on a continuous-duty basis.
All wiring leading from the panel to the engine and to the batteries shall have
adequate carrying capacity. Such wiring shad be protected against mechanical
injury by metal conduit
10. Each operating component of the controllers shall be marked to plainly indicate
an identifying number referenced to the wiring diagram. The markings shall be
located so as to be visible after installation.
11. Complete instructions covering the operation of the controllers shall be
provided and conspicuously mounted on the controllers.
12. Prior to shipment, the electric pumps and control panels shall be thoroughly
shop-tested as a unit by the pump manufacturer. A characteristic curve showing the
pump performance based upon the results of the shop test shall be submitted to the
Consultant prior to shipment, and shall include the performance of the pump and
engine at the set-governor's speed. Absence of these test reports, indicating that the
complete unit has been tested in the factory by the driver, will be ample grounds
for the rejection of the equipment. The contractor shall include in his price the cost
and expenses of having one representative of the Owner from Abu-Dhabi witness
the complete factory test prior to shipment
5.4 CONTROL
1. The electric fire pump shall be the lead fire pump. The other diesel fire pump
shall be backup fire pump and will only operate if the lead fire pump cannot
maintain system pressure.
2. The Jockey pump shall maintain the system pressure.
Page 30 of 43
5.5 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS;

1. The field acceptance test results shall be as good as the manufacturer's certified
shop test characteristic curve for the pump being tasted within the accuracy limits
of the test equipment.
2. OVERHEATING: The pump shall operate at peak load conditions without
objectionable heating of the bearings or of the prime mover. The operating pump
speed shall be the speed at which the pumping unit would be expected to operate
during a fire.
3. The engine shall not show signs of overload or stress and its governor shall
properly regulate the speed.
5.6 CONTROLLER
1 The automatic controller shall be put through not less than ten automatic and ten
manual operations.
2 A running interval of at least five minutes at full speed shafts is allowed before
repeating the starting cycle.
3 Automatic operation of the controller shall start the pump from all the provided
starting features, such as pressure switches, valves, etc.
4 The pump shall be in operation not less than one hour (total time) during the
foregoing tests.
The pump, driver, and all controls and necessary attachments, specified herein,
shall be purchased under a unit contract Field wiring of remote panels, installation
and wiring of water level indicators and fuel piping and wiring from the main
storage tank to the local tank shall be provided by the Contractor. The pump
manufacturer shall assume unit responsibility and shall provide the services of a
qualified Engineer to supervise the installation and alignment of equipment Field
tests shall be conducted in the field to satisfy Local Authorities having Jurisdiction
of satisfactory operation of pump driver and controller. The pump manufacturer's
engineer shall be at the job site, supervising the test. The control manufacturer shall
have their representative at the Job site to train operators in the use of the controls.
Spare parts and tools necessary for two years operation, as recommended by the
manufacturer, shall be provided as a part of the contract for the engine. A list of
these spares shall be included in the offer.
Provide and install water relief valve and test discharge piping and all discharging
water back; to the fine water tank.
Provide and install all water cooling piping, valves, and controls for the engine,
silencer and gear box cooling heat exchangers.
Contractor shall provide exact head calculations based on shop drawings before
final selection of pumps.
Page 31 of 43
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

(Novec 1230)
6.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS :
6.1.1
SCOPE:
This specification outlines the requirements for a Total Flood Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System with automatic detection and control. The work described in
this specification includes all engineering, labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary, and required, to complete and test the suppression system.
6.1.2
APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND PUBLICATIONS:
The design, equipment, installation, testing and maintenance of the Clean Agent
Suppression System shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements set
forth in the latest edition of the following codes and standards:
1) NFPA No. 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
2) NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code
3) NFPA No. 72 - Standard For Fire Alarm System
4) Factory Mutual Approval Guide
5) U.L Listings
6) Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
The standards listed, as well as all other applicable codes and standards, shall be
used as "minimum" design standards. Also to be considered are good engineering
practices.
6.1.3
REQUIREMENTS:
The clean agent Suppression System installation shall be made in accordance with
the drawings, specifications and applicable standards. Should a conflict occur
between the drawings and specifications, the specifications shall prevail.
6.1.4
INCLUSIONS / EXCLUSIONS:
The Specialist contract shall include the following materials / works in their scope
but not limited to:
1. Design & Engineering of clean Agent fire suppression system;
2. Prepare workshop drawing and technical submittals;
3. Perform Flow calculation;
4. Clean Agent gas storage cylinders filled with gas and all hardware accessories;
Page 32 of 43
5. Gas cartidge actuators and release interface modules .

6. Cylinder Manifold and discharge piping;
7. Discharge Nozzles;
8. Gas low pressure switch & Gas discarge pressure switch;
9. Fire Detection and Alarm system c/w Ionisation smoke detectors, optical
smoke detectors, manual release, Auto / Manual selector switch, Abort unit,
First stage Alarm bell, second stage Alarm sounder, strobe horn, Gas discharge
warning sign and associated cabling etc;
10. Gas release control panel;
11. Interlock wiring and conduit for shutdown of HVAC, dampers and/or electric
power supplies, relays or shunt trip breakers.
12. Providing Drop curtains for any permanent openings;
13. Integrity Test and Functional test;
14. Training to the client representatives;
15. Provide As Built drawings and Operation & Maintenance Manuals.
The work listed below shall be provided by others, or under other sections of this
specification:
1) 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC power supply to the control panel.
2) Connection to local/remote fire alarm systems, listed central alarm station(s) or
sprinkler preaction/deluge valve actuation;
3) Sealing of openings to maintain the protected room enclosure as Air tight.
6.1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
6.1.5.1 MANUFACTURER:
1) The manufacturer of the Suppression System hardware and detection
components shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and
manufacture of similar types of suppression systems and who can refer to similar
installations providing satisfactory service.
2) The name of the manufacturer, part numbers and serial numbers shall appear
on all major components.
3) All devices, components and equipment shall be new, standard products of the
manufacturers latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended.
4) All equipment shall be U.L listed and/or FM approved.
5) Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed alike.
Page 33 of 43
6.1.5.2 INSTALLER:
1) The installing contractor shall be trained by the supplier to design, install, test
and maintain Suppression Systems.
2) When possible, the installing contractor shall employ a NICET certified special
hazard designer, level 2 or above, who will be responsible for this project.
3) The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the
installation of automatic Clean Agent, or similar, fire suppression systems in strict
accordance with all applicable standards.
4) The installing contractor must have a minimum of eight (8) years experience in
the design, installation and testing of Clean Agent, or similar, fire suppression
systems.
A list of systems of a similar nature and scope shall be provided on request.
5) The installing contractor shall maintain, or have access to, a Clean Agent
recharging station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability to
recharge the largest Clean Agent system within 24 hours after a discharge. Include
the amount of bulk agent storage available.
6) The installing contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the
Clean Agent system
equipment so that immediate replacement parts are
available from inventory.
7) The installing contractor shall show proof of emergency service available on a
twenty-four hour, seven-days-a-week basis.
6.1.5.3 SUBMITTALS:
1) The installing contractor shall submit the following information for approval to
the local Fire Prevention Agency, owners Insurance Underwriter,
Architect/Engineer, and all other Authorities Having Jurisdiction before starting
installation:
a) Field installation layout drawings having a scale of not less than 1/8 = 1-0
or 1:100m detailing the location of all agent storage tanks, pipe runs, including
pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s), detectors, manual pull stations, abort
stations, audible and visual alarms, etc.
b) Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door holders,
special sealing requirements and equipment shutdowns.
c) Separate layouts, or drawings, shall be provided for each level, ( i.e.; room,
underfloor, and above ceiling) and for mechanical and electrical work.
d) A separate layout or drawing shall show isometric details of agent storage
containers, mounting details and proposed pipe runs and sizes.
Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and include pointto-point conduit runs and a description of the method(s) used for detector
mounting.
Page 34 of 43
Internal control panel wiring diagram shall include power supply requirements and
field wiring termination points.
Graphic Annunciator wiring schematics and dimensioned display panel illustration
shall be provided. (Optional device)
Complete hydraulic flow calculations, from a U.L. listed computer program, for all
engineered Clean Agent systems.
Calculation sheet(s) must include the
manufacturers name and U.L. listing number for verification. The individual
sections of pipe and each fitting to be used, as shown on the isometrics, must be
identified and included in the calculation. Total agent discharge time must be
shown and detailed by zone.
Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply taking into
consideration the power requirements of all alarms, initiating devices and auxiliary
components under full load conditions.
A complete sequence of operation detailing all alarm devices, shutdown functions,
remote signaling, damper operation, time delay and agent discharge for each zone
or system.
System component datasheets.
6.2 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS :
6.2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION:
A) The system shall be a Total Flood Clean Agent Suppression System supplied &
installed by an Authorised by the manufacturer.
B) The system shall provide a clean agent minimum design concentration of 7.2
%, by volume, in all areas and/or protected spaces, at the minimum anticipated
temperature within the protected area. System design shall not exceed the NOAEL
value of 9.0%, adjusted for maximum space temperature anticipated, unless
provisions for room evacuation, before agent release, are provided.
C) The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include all mechanical and
electrical installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage
containers, clean agent agent, discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release
and abort stations, audible and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and
controls, shutdowns, alarm interface, caution/ advisory signs, functional checkout
and testing, training and all other operations necessary for a functional, U.L.
Listed and/or F.M. approved Clean Agent Suppression System.
D) Provide two (2) inspections during the first year of service. Inspections shall
be made at 6 month intervals commencing when the system is first placed into
normal service.
E) The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the
protected spaces against agent loss and/or leakage during the 10 minute "hold"
period.
F) The system(s) shall be actuated by a combination of ionization and/or
photoelectric detectors installed at a maximum spacing of 250 sq. ft. (23.2 sq. m)
Page 35 of 43
per detector, in both the room, underfloor and above ceiling protected spaces. If
the air flow is one air change per minute, photoelectric detectors only shall be
installed at a spacing not to exceed 125 sq. ft. (11.6 sq. m) per detector. (Ref.
NFPA No. 72 - current edition)
G) Detectors shall be wired in Sequential Detection method of operation, standard
Cross-Zoned detection, or Single Detector Release, using either a Class "A" or
Class "B" wiring arrangement. No other detection / wiring arrangements will be
acceptable.
H) Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows:
1) Actuation of one (1) detector, within the system, shall:
a) Illuminate the "ALARM" lamp on the control panel face.
b) Energize an alarm bell and/or an optional visual indicator.
c) Transfer sets of 5 Amp rated auxiliary contacts which can perform auxiliary
system functions such as:
1) Operate door holder/closures on access doors.
2) Transmit a signal to a fire alarm system.
3) Shutdown HVAC equipment.
d) Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.
2) Actuation of a 2nd detector, within the system, shall:
a) Illuminate the "PRE-DISCHARGE" lamp on the control panel face.
b) Energize an predischarge horn or horn/strobe device.
c) Shut down the HVAC system and/or close dampers.
d) Start time-delay sequence (not to exceed 60 seconds). System abort sequence
is enabled at this time.
f) Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.
3) After completion of the time-delay sequence, the Clean Agent system shall
discharge and the following shall occur:
a) Illuminate a "SYSTEM FIRED" lamp on the control panel face.
b) Shutdown of all power to high-voltage equipment
c) Energize a visual indicator(s) outside the hazard in which the discharge
occurred.
d) Energize a "System Fired" audible device. (Optional)
Page 36 of 43
4) The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices

located at each hazard exit. Operation of a manual device shall duplicate the
sequence description above except that the time delay and abort functions SHALL
be bypassed. The manual discharge station shall be of the electrical actuation type
and shall be supervised at the main control panel.
6.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
6.3.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The Clean Agent System materials and equipment shall be standard products of
the supplier's latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended. When
one or more pieces of equipment must perform the same function(s), they shall be
duplicates produced by one manufacturer.
1) All devices and equipment shall be U.L Listed and/or FM approved.
6.3.2
CLEAN STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION:
Each system shall have its own supply of clean agent.

The system design can be modular, central storage, or a combination of both
design criteria.
Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.
3) Each supply container shall be located within the hazard area, or as near as
possible, to reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
4) The clean agent shall be stored in Agent Storage Containers. Containers shall
be super-pressurized, with dry Nitrogen, to an operating pressure of 360 psi @ 70
F. (2482 kpa at 21 C). Containers shall be of high-strength alloy steel
construction and conform to NFPA 2001.
5) Containers shall be actuated by Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA) wired to a
Agent Release Module (ARM), located at each agent container.
6) Each container shall have a pressure gauge and low pressure switch to provide
visual and electrical supervision of the container pressure. The low pressure
switch shall be wired to the control panel to provide an audible and visual
"Supervisory" alarm in the event the container pressure drops below 288 psi (1986
kpa). The pressure gauge shall be color coded to provide an easy, visual indication
of container pressure.
7) Each container shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically operates
when the internal temperature exceeds 150F. (66C).
8) Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided, within the manufacturers
guidelines, to distribute the clean agent throughout the protected spaces. The
nozzles shall be designed to provide proper agent quantity and distribution.
a) Nozzles shall be available in pipe sizes 3/8 thru 2.0 (BPS 10mm thru 50mm).
Each size shall be available in 180 and 360 distribution patterns.
Page 37 of 43
b) Ceiling plates, can be used with the nozzles to conceal pipe entry holes through
ceiling tiles.
9) Distribution piping, and fittings, shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements, NFPA 2001 and approved piping standards and
guidelines. All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals using
good, accepted practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be adequately
supported and anchored at all directional changes and nozzle locations.
a) All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with suitable solvents to
remove burrs, mill varnish and cutting oils before assembly.
b) All pipe threads shall be sealed with Teflon tape pipe sealant applied to the
male thread ONLY.
6.4 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS :
6.4.1
CONTROL PANEL :
The control panel shall be a SHP (Single Hazard Panel) Control Panel.
The SHP Control System, and its components, shall be UL listed and FM
approved for releasing service and be suitable for clean Agent release service.
The SHP Control System shall perform all functions necessary to operate the
system detection, actuation and auxiliary functions, as outlined.
The SHP Control System shall be capable of providing 7AH or 18AH battery
standby power supplies.
The SHP Control System shall be microprocessor based with hardware and
software integration designed to guarantee reliability.
The SHP Control System shall support Cross Zoned, Sequential, Single Detector
Release and Manual Release detection/actuation methods.
The SHP Control System shall provide the following capabilities and functions:
a) Three (3) Class B (Style Y) indicating appliance circuits rated for 2.0 amps @
24 VDC.
b) Four (4) Class B (Style A) initiating circuits
c) Optional Class A (Style D) module for initiating circuits
d) Eight (8) Status LEDs plus alpha-numeric display for troubleshooting: AC
normal; alarm; pre-discharge; release; supervisory; trouble; alarms silenced and
system abort.
e) Programmable pre-discharge and discharge timers
f) Resettable and continuous auxiliary output power
g) Five (5) optional Abort types
Page 38 of 43
h) Intelligent Transistor protection to prevent noise spikes and microprocessor

failure from inadvertently activating release outputs
i) A dedicated Disarm switch for release outputs
j) Dedicated alarm and trouble contacts programmable for alarm, trouble, predischarge, discharge, abort, supervisory or waterflow functions, depending on
panel configuration.
k) Two (2) Form C relays, rated at 5 amps, are provided on the SHP panel
board. Installation of the optional SRM4 Relay Module (P/N 10-2176) will
provide four (4) additional 5 amp relays.
l) Multiple input power source - 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
m) 2.6 amp @ 24 VDC power supply to operate high current draw horns and
strobes. Capable of allowing expansion to 8 amp external power supply for a total
of 10.6 amps of available power.
n) Available in either Red or Gray finish
6.4.2
DETECTORS:
The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and the guidelines of NFPA No. 72 current edition.
6.4.2.1
IONIZATION DETECTOR
The ionization fire and smoke detector shall continuously measures the products
of combustion in the air, and gives a proportional output. It shall meet the
requirements of EN54 part 7.
The detector shall be a dual-chamber type fully compensated for temperature,
humidity and barometric changes. The radioactive source shall be less then 1
micro-curie of Americium 241, and shall comply with all Atomic Energy Agency
requirements.
A light emitting diode (LED) on the base must illuminate when a detector is in
alarm.
6.4.2.2
OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR
The optical smoke detector shall continuously measure the smoke level in the air,
and gives a proportional output. It shall comply with the requirements of EN54
part 7.
The detector shall be an optical light scattering type sensitive to visible smoke and
be stable under all environmental conditions. The internal test and calibration
circuits shall use the same optical elements as the smoke sensing circuits, to
ensure reliability.
A light emitting diode (LED) on the base must illuminate when a detector is in
alarm
Page 39 of 43
6.4.3
MANUAL RELEASE (ELECTRIC):
The electric manual release switch shall be a dual action device which provides a
means of manually discharging the Suppression System when used in conjunction
with the Fike SHP Control System.
The Manual Release switch or Manual Pull station shall be a dual action device(s)
requiring two distinct operations to initiate a system actuation.
Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions, shall cause the
system to discharge, and shall cause all release and shutdown devices to operate in
the same manner as if the system had operated automatically.
A Manual Release switch shall be located at each exit from the protected hazard
and shall have an advisory sign, provided at each location.
6.4.4
ABORT STATION :
The optional Abort Station shall be the "Dead Man" type and shall be located next
to each manual switch.
The Abort Station shall be supervised and shall indicate a trouble condition at the
SHP Control Panel, if depressed, and no alarm condition exists.
"Locking" or "Keyed" abort stations shall not be permitted.
The Abort Station shall be located adjacent to each manual station.
6.4.5
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARMS:
Alarm audible and visual signal devices shall operate from the SHP Control Panel.
The Alarm Bell, Alarm Horn and Horn/Strobe devices shall operate on 24 volts Dc
power to allow supervision of the circuit wires.
The alarm bell and horn shall deliver a minimum sound level of 92 decibels at a
distance of 3m.
Horn and strobe light are to operate simultaneous from one power supply with
flash rate of 1-3 flashes per second minimum over the listed input voltage range.
A Strobe device shall be placed outside, and above, each exit door from the
protected space. Provide an advisory sign at each light location.
6.4.6
MANUAL ACTUATOR:
Manually operated actuator shall be provided for independent means of operation
of clean agent system. The unit shall activate the system without the need for
external power or stored energy, therby providing a fail safe method of activation.
6.4.7
LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR:

The liquid level indicator shall be installed in the clean agent storage container to
provide means of verifying the weight of agent in a container without having to
Page 40 of 43
remove the container and weigh it on a calibrated scale. The device shall enable
the inspector to determine the weight of agent with the container safely secured in
its installed position.
6.4.8
CAUTION AND ADVISORY SIGNS:
Provide signs, as required, to comply with NFPA 2001 and the recommendations
of the equipment supplier:
Entrance sign: (1) required at each entrance to a protected space.
Manual Discharge sign: (1) required at each manual discharge station.
Flashing Light sign: (1) required at each flashing light over each exit from a
protected space.
6.5 SYSTEM AND CONTROL WIRING:
All system wiring shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.
All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or conduit, and
must be installed and kept separate from all other building wiring.
All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring.
Runs of conduit and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported,
installed parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions.
The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Color
coded wire shall be used. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall
be free from shorts, earth connections (unless so noted on the system drawings),
and crosses between conductors. Final terminations between the SHP control
panel and the system field wiring shall be made under the direct supervision of a
factory trained representative.
All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workmanlike
manner, to conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725, and Article 760,
except as otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in NFPA 72
- current edition. Wiring installation shall meet all local, state, province and/or
country codes.
The complete system electrical installation, and all auxiliary components, shall be
connected to earth ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
6.6 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT:
After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be
checked out, inspected and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and NFPA
standards.
All containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and
installation.
Page 41 of 43
All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity and
resistance to earth.
The complete system shall be functionally tested, in the presence of the owner or
his representative, and all functions, including system and equipment interlocks,
must be operational at least five (5) days prior to the final acceptance tests.
a) Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures, and test values recorded.
b) All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and
visual devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall function
as required and designed.
c) Each SHP control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble
condition into the system.
6.7 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS:
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational
training to each shift of the owners personnel. Each training session shall include
system SHP Control Panel operation, manual and abort functions, trouble
procedures, supervisory procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency
procedures.
6.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE:
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation
and maintenance instruction manuals, four (4) copies for each system, to the
owner. All aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be detailed,
including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description
of the system design, sequence of operation and drawing(s) illustrating control
logic and equipment used in the system. Checklists and procedures for emergency
situations, troubleshooting techniques, maintenance operations and procedures
shall be included in the manual.
6.9 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4)
copies of system "As-Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show
actual installation details including all equipment locations (i.e.: control panel(s),
agent container(s), detectors, alarms, manuals and aborts, etc.) as well as piping
and conduit routing details. Show all room or facilities modifications, including
door and/or damper installations completed. One (1) copy of reproducible
engineering drawings shall be provided reflecting all actual installation details.
6.10
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
1) At the time "As-Built" drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are
submitted, the installing contractor shall submit a "Test Plan" describing
procedures to be used to test the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a
step-by-step description of all tests to be performed and shall indicate the type and
location of test apparatus to be employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the
operational and installation requirements of this specification have been met. All
Page 42 of 43
tests shall be conducted in the presence of the owner and shall not be conducted
until the Test Plan has been approved.
2) The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed
and intended. All circuits shall be tested: automatic actuation, solenoid and
manual actuation, HVAC and power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices
and manual override of abort functions. Supervision of all panel circuits,
including AC power and battery power supplies, shall be tested and qualified.
3) A room pressurization test shall be conducted, in each protected space, to
determine the presence of openings which would affect the agent system
concentration levels. The test(s) shall be conducted using the Retro-Tec Corp.
Door Fan system, or equivalent, with integrated computer program. All testing
shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001.
4) If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result
in leakage and/or loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be
responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the
general contractor or his sub-contractor or agent. The general contractor shall be
responsible for adequately sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or
leakage. The installing contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the
protected space(s) have been adequately and properly sealed.
THE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM INSTALLING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE
RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SUCCESS OF THE ROOM PRESSURIZATION
TESTS. If the first room pressurization test is not successful, in accordance with
these specifications, the installing contractor shall direct the general contractor to
determine, and correct, the cause of the test failure. The installing contractor shall
conduct additional room pressurization tests, at no additional cost to the owner,
until a successful test is obtained. Copies of successful test results shall be
submitted to the owner for record.
5) Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be placed into
service.
6.11
SYSTEM INSPECTIONS:
The installing contractor shall provide two (2) inspections of each system,
installed under this contract, during the one-year warranty period. The first
inspection shall be at the six month interval, and the second inspection at the 12
month interval, after system acceptance. Inspections shall be conducted in
accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and the recommendations of NFPA
2001.
Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) operation shall be submitted to the
owner upon completion of each inspection.
6.12
WARRANTY:
All system components furnished, and installed under this contract, shall be guaranteed against
defects in design, materials and workmanship for the full warranty period which is standard
with the manufacturer, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of system acceptance.
Page 43 of 43
SECTION 15401- DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

SECTION 15401
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A.
The work described in this section of the specification is related to the hot, cold,
Brackish and soft water distribution systems.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 15010: Basic Mechanical Requirement.
B.
Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods.
C.
Section 15060: Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
D.
Section 15100: Valves.
E.
Section 15250: Insulation.
F.
Section 15991: Testing and Commissioning.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
Refer to Individual Materials for Specified Reference Standards.
B.
Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC).
C.
American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE) Manual.
D.
American Water Works Association (AWWA) Standards as specified in the section.
1.04
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
A.
The hot and cold water systems comprise of a system of pipework, valves fittings and
appurtenances providing hot, cold and water to the various plumbing fixtures situated
throughout the buildings. The work includes recirculation hot water and specialties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
WATER SERVICES.
A.
See section 15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings for Water Service Piping Materials and
Installation.
Page 1 of 10
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
Copper Piping
Refer to Section 15060 Paragraph 2.02 A.
B.
Galvanized Steel Piping

Refer to Section 15060 Paragraph 2.02 B.
C.
Black Steel Piping.

Refer to Section 15060 Paragraph 2.02 C.
D.
UPVC Pressure Piping

Refer to Section 15060 Paragraph 2.02 D.
E.
Accessories
1. Flexible pipe connectors shall have a stainless steel bellows with a woven flexible
bronze wire reinforcing protective jacket. Connectors shall be minimum of 300 mm
in length with thread male or flanged ends as required for proper installations.
Sweat end connections re not acceptable. Connectors shall be rated for 2 MPa
water working pressure, 120C operating temperature and suitable for up to
maximum 20 mm misalignment.
2. Shock absorbers shall be elastomer bellows type, with stainless steel shell, glycerin
hydraulic displacement fluid and pressurized argon pneumatic displacement
cushion. Shock absorbers shall be individually sized as required for equipment
served.
F.
Valves and Specialties

1. Hose bibs shall be polished chrome faucet with flange, indexed lever handle, 20
mm female inlet and 20 mm hose thread spout, single for concealed piping.
2. Wall Hydrant
a. Loose-key operator, lock type Packing nut, stainless steel stem, cast brass body
to fit one modular brick course and 20 mm hose threaded spout with vacuum
breaker. Wall hydrants shall be located on the exterior ground floor of all
buildings at an average interval of approximately 30 meters.
b.
Exposed surfaces shall be polished chrome plated.
3. Float valves for use on incoming supplies to cold water storage tanks shall be cast
brass or gunmetal up to 75 mm dia. And cast iron with bronze seats for 100 mm
dia. and above.
Page 2 of 10
G.
Electrical Hot Water Storage Tanks

Supply and install all electric water heaters wherever shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
Electric water heater shall be of the cylindrical type suitable for either vertical or
horizontal mounting as shown on the drawings.
Each electric water heater shall be complete as specified herein:
a.
Welded steel shell galvanized after fabrication and constructed in accordance

with an approved international code for unfired pressure vessel, designed for a
working pressure of 150 psig and hydrostatically tested to 300 psig at the
factory. The tank shall be glass lined with vitreous porcelain enamel tank liner.
b.
Stove enameled finished and 2" thick insulated metal outer jacket.
c.
Electric immersion type heater element. Number of stages is to be as given in

the schedules of capacities. Heater element shall be removable without
draining the tank.
d.
Adjustable type temperature control thermostat.
e.
Dial type immersion thermometer.
f.
Magnesium anode rod.
g.
Terminal box with protective cover.
h.
Pilot light to indicate if heater is ON or OFF.
j.
Gate valve and check valve at water inlet and gate valve at outlet connections.
k.
Pressure and temperature relief valve for protection against excess pressure and
high temperature as well as loss of water from the shell.
Alternatively, a combination shut-off, drain and pressure temperature relief
valve may be used.
l.
Automatic air vent.
m.
Steel supports.
.
All pipe work and accessories required for its installation and satisfactory
operation.
Page 3 of 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATIONS
A.
See Section 15050: Basic Materials and Methods, for general piping installation
instructions.
B.
Supplies and Trim

1. All supplies, hardware, trim traps, etc. to fixtures and equipment shall be chrome
plated brass if exposed to view.
C.
Vacuum Breakers
1. Vacuum breakers shall be furnished and installed on all faucets and valves which
have provisions for hose connections and water supplies to equipment or devices
that have inlets below the overflow rim.
D.
Underground Piping
1. No underground or under slab water piping within building shall be permitted
unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings.
E.
Joints
1. Joints shall be made using 95-5 Tin- Antimony solder ASTM B-32. Joints for
underground ( if any ) shall be made using a brazing compound containing silver
alloys having a melting point of 520C or higher. Wrought copper and bronze
fittings shall be to ANSI B16.22.
F.
Flushing of pipework Systems

Prior to the chemical cleaning or treatment of any pipework system, the entire system,
sectionally or as whole, shall be subjected to a full bore rapid flush to ensure the
complete removal of any loose foreign material. This shall also apply to pipework
systems where chemical cleaning is not called for. Flushing shall be carried out without
circulating water through any filter, pump, coil, heat exchanger etc., and the Contractor
shall be responsible for providing temporary by-pass connections where necessary to
enable this to be achieved. The Contractor shall also be responsible for providing
temporary fill and drain points on each system and for making whatever temporary
arrangements that may be necessary to have adequate raw water available at the fill
points and for the removal of flushing water from the drain points.
Temporary drain points for flushing shall not be less than 65 mm diameter in pipework
of 65 mm nominal bore or larger and pipeline size in pipework of less than 65 mm
nominal bore.
Page 4 of 10
If flushing of a system is carried out on a Sectional basis, it shall be done in such a

manner that foreign material cannot be introduced into a section of pipework already
flushed.
The contractors proposals and timing for flushing out of pipework should be submitted
to the Engineer.
The entire flushing operation of a system shall e carried out of the satisfaction of the
Engineer, and in accordance with the AwwA No. B300 recommendation.
G.
Chemical Cleaning of LTHW

All pipe systems shall be chemically cleaned internally prior to commissioning and to
the Engineer agreed programme. The systems shall first be treated to remove corrosion
products, followed by a further treatment to inhibit corrosion.
The Contractor shall provide suitable tapping points for chemical introduction and all
necessary drainage/flushing connections etc.
The Contractor shall allow in his tender for discharging the effluent including diluting
the discharge to meet the local Authoritys requirements and all charges levied by the
local Authority.
The Contractor shall ensure tat the pipework system installed under this Contract is
totally isolated from any other or existing systems before chemically cleaning out.
The Contractor shall also include for the full duty to be treated such that sufficient
protection remains to prevent corrosion occurring for a period of 6 months from the
date of handover.
Any equipment liable to deterioration due to the cleaning operation shall be removed
from the pipeline and the necessary temporary make-up pieces installed.
The Contractor shall also include for providing water heaters, circulator and bypass
lines etc., where necessary.
H.
Buried Pipework Carrying Water

The pipework shall be laid to a depth of not less than 900 mm from finish ground level
to the crown of the pipe.
Pipework shall be anchored by means of thrust blocks as required at all changes of
direction, valves and stop ends. The pipework shall be given adequate bedding and side
support, avoiding pockets or voids.
The Contractor shall check the sizes of thrust blocks against his proposed installation
drawings and gain approval from the Engineer for any variations proposed before
proceeding with the installation.
Where concrete thrust blocks on UPVC pipework are provided these shall incorporated
a flexible membrane interposed between the concrete and the unit to protect against
abrasion.
Page 5 of 10
The trench shall not be opened up too far in advance of pipe laying and shall be
backfilled as soon as possible.
The width of the trench at the crown of the pipe shall be as participle but not more than
the outside diameter of the pipe plus 300 mm to allow for proper compaction of side
fill.
Care shall be taken to ensure that the bed of the trench will support the pipeline so as to
prevent localized loss of gradient or bridging and projections shall be removed to
prevent point loading of the pipe, all pockets or voids shall be graded with granular
material.
Free draining coarse sand and/or granular material maximum particle size 22 mm to be
used as side fill material free of large objects, and capable of being compacted
sufficiently to provide adequate support for the pipe.
The pipework side fill shall be firmly compacted between the side on the pipe and side
of trench.
Before backfilling is carried out any temporary packing shall be removed.
The thickness of granular bedding under the barrel of the pipe shall not be less than one
third of the diameter, and a minimum of 100 mm thick.
Where soft spots occur in the bottom of the trench the thickness shall be increased as
necessary to give a suitable bed.
The granular bedding shall be thoroughly compacted in layers not more than 150 mm
thick to give a uniform bed, true to gradient, on which the pipe is to be laid and placed
directly on the bedding.
Bricks or other hard materials shall not be placed under the pipes for temporary
support.
Further bedding material shall be placed around the pipe and thoroughly compacted in
65 mm layers, by careful tamping up to the crown of the pipe eliminating all cavities
under the two lower quadrants of the pipe.
To enable easy identification of the main, a warning tape shall be laid along the length
of the pipe.
The backfilling shall proceed in layers not exceeding 300 mm thickness each layer
being thoroughly compacted.
Heavy mechanical hammers shall not be used until the fill has reached a depth of 300
mm above the top of the pipe.
The maximum particle size shall not exceed 22 mm but the presence of a particle
between 22 mm and 40 mm is acceptable providing the total quantity of such particles
is a very small fraction of the whole.
If particles over 40 mm are present the material shall not be acceptable and be rejected.
Page 6 of 10
The route of the pipeline shall be permanently marked with an electronic traceable
indicator tape laid 300 mm above the crown of the pipe.
3.02
PRESERVATION OF WATER QUALITY
A-
General
All parts of hot and cold water circuits in contact with the water shall have clean
disinfected surfaces before being installed.
Materials specified and used shall be proof against the following hazards :
Dezincification or galvanic action
Chlorine treatments
Imparting taste or odor to the water
Contamination of water by lead, copper or other elements in excess of standards laid
down by the EEC.
Bacterial growth due to nutrients in pipework materials, jointing materials, pastes and
compounds, fluxes, solders, thread sealant tapes, gaskets, grommets, tap washers, O
rings, gland packing, valve seats, filters, hoses, greases, lubricants, protective coatings
or linings.
All materials and fittings shall be an approved type as tested and listed by the U.K.
Water Research Centre as suitable for potable water and not capable of promoting
bacterial growth.
Pipework circuits for cold water shall be run below or away from hot pipes to
minimize heat gain and keep water temperature below 20C to prevent the colonization
of Legionnella bacteria.
Backflow prevention devices or air gaps shall be provided and specified herein based
on BS 6700 and to BS 6281 Parts 1,2 and 3 and BS 6282 Parts 1,2,3 and 4 as
appropriate.
B-
Disinfecting of Hot and Cold Water Systems

Disinfecting shall be carried out following satisfactory flushing pressure testing and
setting to work prior to handover.
The whole of each system including systems, vessels, pipework, shall be disinfected
with chlorine by a specialist organization certified to BS 5750 Part 1 for this type of
work or the Water Undertaking as agreed with the Engineer.
The producers shall follow DOH Code of Practice The Control of Legionella in
Health Care Premises and BS 6700 as outlined in the following clauses.
Flushing and disinfection shall not be a substitute for a high degree of cleanliness
during installation.
Page 7 of 10
C-
External Mains Chlorination

The Contractor shall include for chlorination of pipework under pressure from the
mains, to be carried out in accordance with the requirements to the local Water
Undertaking.
The chlorination shall be through suitable valved filling points located at one end of the
system, for the introduction of the chlorine solution and shall be generally to the
Department of Health Code of Practice The Control of Legionella in Health Care
Premises.
The chlorine shall be introduced by means of chemical dosing apparatus connected
upstream until a concentration of not less than 20 ppm can be measured along the pipe
run of new mains.
The main shall be static for not less than 24 hours before flushing through with fresh
water until chlorine cannot be detected above that in the Water Authority and mains.
Wash-out valves and valved filling points shall be included in the installation.
The Contractor shall include for existing mains supplying new distribution systems to
be chlorinated. Any insertions or repairs at junctions into an existing pipeline shall be
disinfected by immersion in a solution of sodium hypochlorite containing 1000mg/1 of
free available chlorine.
D-
Distribution Pipework Chlorination

Chlorination shall be generally to the Department of Health Code of Practice The
Control of Legionella in Health Care Premises.
The mains supply to storage cisterns shall have been satisfactory chlorinated as
necessary, and all cisterns cleared of all visible contaminants before services within
buildings are treated.
The capacities of the systems shall be calculated to determine amounts of chlorine to be
added.
All water shall be drained off and all draw off points closed and all isolating valves
opened except on cistern outflow.
After flushing, the system shall be filled with water and the servicing valve on the
supply to the cistern shall be closed.
Following this the capacity of the system shall be assessed and a calculated quantity of
sodium hypochlorite of known strength shall be added to the cistern to give a free
residual chlorine concentration of 50 ppm to the cistern water content. The chlorinated
water shall be drawn around the system by successively opening each draw-off fitting.
Page 8 of 10
Working away from the cistern, and closing it when chlorinated water at 40-50 ppm is
discharged, the concentration being determined by calorimetric methods. The cistern
shall be refilled and chlorinated as above during these operations, to maintain a residual
chlorine level of 50ppm in the cistern at all times. The contact time shall commence
when the entire system is filled with chlorinated water, together with the cistern to
overflow level.
It is essential that the internal coatings of cisterns are thoroughly cured before
disinfection take place and care must be taken not to exceed 5 ppm chlorine
concentration.
The above procedures shall apply to cold water services and to the secondary circuits
of hot water systems before heat is applies and with the water cold. Care shall be taken
not to use excessive amounts of chlorine which may affect pipework or other materials.
Records shall be kept of all procedures, checks, tests and witnessing.
E-
Prevention of Water Stagnation

Regular draining off of water and re-filling with potable water shall be allowed for
after chlorination.
Draining down and re-filling shall be on a routine basis twice weekly until handover.
F-
Water Quality Tests

The Contractor shall allow for all systems to have been satisfactory set to work and
disinfected before water samples are taken.
Analysis of both hot and cold water supplies shall be allowed for taken from
representative sampling points at draw off and storage positions with the system at
working temperatures.
Water quality tests shall include for all samples to be tested in accordance with the
DoH/DoE Report No.71 - The Bacteriological Examination of Water Supplies, or any
method approved and employed by the Public Analyst.
All the samples shall be tested for E.Coli and chemical analysis including copper and
lead content. The quality of potable water at outlets, ( as sampled ) and as supplied by
the Water Authority, to be generally to EC Directive, 15th July 1980, 80/778/EEC
Quality of Water intended for Human Consumption . Potable water from a borehole
supply must comply with DoE Circular 25/84 and EC Directive 80/778/EEC.
The Contractor shall provide for samples to be taken and analyzed initially as a
reference point as agreed with the Engineer.
Samples shall be taken from:
Main supply on site
Storage cisterns (Hot/Cold)
Selected hot and cold outlets (to be agreed with the Engineer) in each department
Page 9 of 10
The Contractor shall allow for the tests to be carried out by the Public Health Authority
Laboratory Service or the local Water Undertaking as agreed with the Engineer.
Two sets of tests shall be included, the first after setting-to-work and disinfecting and
the second in conjunction with the handover date and the date for occupation of the
premises.
G-
Legionnaires Diseases Precaution

Legionnaires Disease precautions shall be in accordance with the requirements of the
Department of Health Code of Practice - The control of Legionella in Health Care
Premises ( HMSO) - Clause 2210 - 2207, Commissioning and Testing.
The length of HWS system dead legs shall be revised to 5.0 meters.
The Contractor shall include for taking water samples for Legionella bacteria normal
hot and cold water systems. The method for taking samples shall be in accordance with
the Public Health Laboratory Service requirements.
The Contractor shall provide for the tests to be carried out by the Public Health
Laboratories on samples taken from representative sampling points when the systems
are at working temperatures and conditions.
Temperature of the water (hot or cold) at the sampling points shall be recorded at the
time of taking each sample.
Water samples for analysis shall be taken from three hot and three cold outlets, the
location of the outlets to be determined by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide for the samples and their analysis to be carried out prior to
Practical Completion and the Engineer notified of the results.
H-
Analysis Reports
All test reports shall be discussed with the Engineer and the Medical Officer for
Infection Control and where results are not satisfactory, suitable remedial action shall
be agreed upon and undertaken by the Controller.
If the results are found to be unsatisfactory due to poor workmanship and/or use of
unacceptable components, all remedial work shall be carried out at the Contractors
expense.
END OF SECTION
Page 10 of 10
SECTION 15405 -SOIL, WASTE AND ROOF

DRAINAGE PIPING SYSTEM
SOIL, WASTE AND ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING SYSTEMS

SECTION 15405
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A.
The work described in this section of the specification is related to the soil, waste and
ventilating pipework installation and the storm drainage system.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 15140: Pumps.
B.
C.
Section 15060: Pipe & Pipe Fittings.
D.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
Refer to individual materials for reference standards.
B.
Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC).
C.
American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE) Standard as specified in this section.
1.04
PIPE SERVICES SCHEDULE
A.
Rain water pipes inside shaft and at floor level shall be UPVC type.
C.
Soil and waste at floor levels should be UPVC.
D.
Soil and waste pipes inside main shaft and basement ceiling level to be UPVC.
F.
Drain pipes under basement slab to be UPVC.
G.
Condensate drain pipe and water tank overflow to be Pressure UPVC 10 bars.
H.
.
Sump pump discharge to be Pressure UPVC 16 bars
1.05
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Building shall have a comprehensive system of soil, waste, anti-siphon ventilation and
rainwater pipework so designed as to convey all soil, waste and rainwater to the main,
city sewage and rainwater storm holding tank.
Page 1 of 17

1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with the provisions of ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping for materials,
products and installations.
B.
Provide listing / approval stamp, label or other marking on piping made to specified
standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
CAST IRON PIPES.

Roof Drains
1.
Roof Drain (Type RD)

Provide roof drains of size as indicated on drawings, including features, as specified
herein.
Roof drain shall be cast iron, large sump, elevated dome type, side or bottom discharge
or angle type side discharge as required and approved by the Engineer, complete with
lightweight, shock resistant, aluminum elevated dome strainer, non-puncturing flashing
clamping collar with integral gravel guard and perforated extension sleeve for up to 50
mm thick roof insulation and bottom inside caulking outlet of same size as rainwater
pipe.
2.02
UPVC DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPES
A.
UPVC sewage and vent pipes shall be extruded unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
conforming to the following European Standards for non pressure drainage pipes:
-
Pipes 32 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm & 75mm installed above ground to EN 1329.
Pipes 100 mm and above installed above ground to EN1401-SN4.
Pipes 100 mm and above installed underground to EN1401-SN4.
Pipes 100 mm and above installed underground deeper than 7 m to EN1401SN8.
Pipes shall be European make suitable for rubber ring pressure joint. Sealing
rings to be rubber to EN681.
Fire stop jackets shall be installed on all PVC pipes penetrating floor slabs or
fire rated walls.
Pipe fittings shall be UPVC of the same weight and quality as the pipe.
Lubricant shall be as recommended by pipe manufacturer.
Page 2 of 17

All underground UPVC pipes shall be encased with reinforced concrete

150mm thick.
Contractor to provide all accessories and supports of UPVC system to suite high rise
building applications and to provide all accessories to protect installation from the
seismic action defined for this project.
B.
Floor Drains
1.
Floor Drains - Type FD

Supply and install all floor drains wherever shown on the drawings and as specified
herein where floor drains are connected to PVC pipes.
Each floor drain shall be constructed of heavy duty UPVC and shall conform to the
following requirements:
2.
a)
Integral trap with cleaning plug , similar to the detail..
b)
Adjustable level, heavy duty, large grate area, chrome plated brass strainer,
200mm x 200mm fixed onto the drain body with cover.
c)
d)
Floor drains shall have UPVC traps of minimum water seal of 7 cm.
Floor drains shall have a built in rodding eye.
Catch basin for parking area.

Catch basin shall be constructed of concrete 450 x 450 dimensions and shall conform
to the following requirements:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
3.
Heavy duty ductile iron grates 300 mm x 300 mm with frame.

Integral flashing flange.
Internal epoxy coating.
GRP or PVC perforated basket.
Side outlet pipe, min 10 cm concrete sediment.
Trench drain
Trench drain shall be constructed of concrete and shall conform to the following
requirements:
a)
c)
c)
d)
e)
C.
Heavy duty ductile iron grates

Internal epoxy coating.
Vitrified clay gully trap.
GRP or PVC perforated basket.
Side outlet pipe, min 10 cm concrete sediment.
Clean-Outs
Page 3 of 17

Supply and install all clean-outs wherever shown on the drawings and as specified
herein.
Each clean-out shall be of the same material and dimension as the pipe shall conform to
the following requirements:
2.03
a.
For pipes exposed or in false ceilings, clean-outs shall consist of a threaded cap
screwed onto pipe end.
b.
Floor clean-outs shall consist off capped wide elbows ending under a chrome
plated bronze tile 20 x 20cms with screwed cover.
RAIN WATER PIPES

Wherever indicated on drawings, rain water pipes shall be as indicated in paragraph
1.04
2.04
UPVC CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE

UPVC pipes shall be extracted unplasticized polyvinyl chloride conforming to the
following European Norm. All pipes shall be of European origin.
Pipes 32mm, 40mm & 50mm installed aboveground to EN 1329. Pipes shall be
European make with solvent cement joints or rubber joints. Pipe fittings shall be of
UPVC of same weight and quality of pipe. Fire stops shall be provided on pipes
penetrating fire rated walls and slabs.
2.05
CLEANOUTS
The cleanouts shall be of the same material and dimensions as the pipes to be cleaned
and shall be placed under the floor slabs or extended through to terminate flush with
the finished floor.
Cleanouts on concealed piping shall be extended through and terminate flush with the
finished floor.
Cleanouts shall be installed at each change of direction greater than 45.
They shall be also provided at or near the foot of each vertical soil and waste stack.
Cleanouts shall be installed such that the cleanout opens in a direction opposite to the
flow of the drainage line or at right angles thereto.
Floor cleanouts with covers shall be formed with a "Y", "F" or 45 elbow fitting of the
same material and size as the pipe accommodated and provided with an adapter and a
threaded brass plug.
Floor cleanout type FCO shall have cover plate and frame 20 x 20cm chrome plated
brass. The cover shall be threaded to the frame to ensure an air tight closure.
Page 4 of 17

Floor cleanout type FCO-1 shall be of UPVC with nickel bronze washed out and as
approved by the Engineer.
Ground cleanout GCO-1 shall be of UPVC with PVC lockable air tight cover 200 x
200 mm.
Ground cleanout GCO-2 shall be of cast iron with coated cast iron lockable cover.
2.6
OIL & GREASE INTERCEPTORS

Supply and install all grease interceptors wherever shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Install cast iron soil pipes and fittings according to CISPI latest edition of cast iron soil
pipe and fittings hand book volume I chapter IV, installation of cast iron pipe and
fittings.
B.
Pipework shall be installed to the routes and diameters indicated on the drawings and
where exposed shall run in parallel lines when grouped together to obtain a neat and
satisfactory appearance.
C.
Open ends of pipework left during the progress of work shall be blanked off with a
temporary plug or cap to prevent the entry of any foreign matter.
D.
Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate Y - branches
, Y - branched with 1/8 bends, and long sweep 1/4 ,1/5, 1/6, 1/8, and 1/16 bends. Use
long turn double - Y branch and 1/8 - bend fittings where 2 fixtures are installed back
to back or side by side and have a common drain. Where different sizes of drainage
pipes and fittings are connected use standards increases and reducers.
E.
Branches on waste and soil pipe work must be swept in with the direction of flow.
F.
Pipes shall be spaced in ducts in a manner which will permit subsequent access to any
pipe for maintenance or removal without disturbance to the remaining pipes.
G.
Long radius bends shall be provided at the connection of all soil and rain water stacks
to the underground drain, with an access pipe above floor level.
3.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPE INSTALLATION

-
All pipes shall be installed in straight parallel lines.
Pipes shall be spaced to permit their installation, maintenance and insulation.

Page 5 of 17

3.03
Concealed pipes shall be installed in such a way as to permit their maintenance

and inspection.
All pipes shall be so installed as to ensure easy and even flow of the water to
and from all equipment and fixtures.
Pipelines shall be installed in a manner to allow for easy air escape and
system draining. It shall be endeavored to obtain this naturally by gravity.
However, where this cannot be met, provision should be made to ensure quick
and positive drainage and noiseless air discharge.
Drain pipes shall be joined together in a manner satisfying perfect running

condition.
Vent pipes shall not be trapped and shall be graded to drip back to waste or soil
line.
All vents for waste and soil stacks shall extend above the highest point of the
roof and shall be equipped with a vent head and cap as specified.
Free discharge outlets of rain water drains shall be done in 45 or 90

combination of bends as found necessary by the Engineer.
Sleeves shall be supplied and installed wherever pipes cross slabs, walls,
partitions, etc.
Connection of PVC underground pipes to manholes shall be made by means of

a suitable manhole lining to ensure adequate bonding to the concrete.
Cleanouts shall be placed at all changes in direction whether shown on the

drawings or not.
In case of welding work to be done in proximity of PVC pipes, special care

shall be taken to avoid damaging the pipes.
CONDITIONS FOR PIPE ASSEMBLY

-
Before installation, all pipes shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and shall be
reamed smooth after cutting. All trenches shall be cleaned up.
Pipes shall be carefully cut by hacksaw or by special pipe cutting machine.
Steel pipe ends shall be cleaned and smoothed on edge to avoid all roughness
and unevenness before welding or threading.
Threading shall be done for the total length of joint or accessory with a reliable
threading machine.
Page 6 of 17

PVC pipes when cut shall be debarred and chamfered according to the
instructions of the manufacturer to ensure a proper and easy assembly.
All changes in pipe size shall be made with fittings. Eccentric reducing fittings
shall be used to prevent pocketing.
Change in direction of piping shall be made with long radius fittings.
The exposed ends of incomplete or unconnected work shall be plugged.

Plugging shall be perfect with gate valves, counter flange plugs or thread
plugs.
All piping subject to expansion and contraction shall be installed with

expansion bends, swing joints made up of fittings or other approved methods
or devices. Branch lines from lines subject to expansion and contraction shall
have a swing joint at the point of connection with the main. Expansion joints
shall be installed even if not shown on the drawings or count for in the bill of
quantities.
3.04
JOINTING
Cast Iron
The spigot of the pipe shall be centralized in the receiving socket by tightly caulking
sufficient turns of white jute gasket into the annular space formed . The gasket shall be
caulked to leave a depth of annular space unfilled relative to 2/3rd total depth of socket.
At no point during the operation shall caulking material be allowed to protrude within
the pipe. Where the axis of the two pipes are included one to the other the joint shall in
no part be less than 4.7 mm in thickness.
B.
An alternative procedure for pipe jointing shall be thru the use of compression joints
with neoprene rubber gaskets conforming to specified standards.
UPVC
-
Solvent weld joints shall be made with the proper solvent cement furnished by
the manufacturer for that purpose. Both, the inside of the socket and the outside
of the spigot end of the pipe shall be roughened using sand paper. All grease
and dirt shall be removed from the surface with a special cleaning fluid
supplied by the manufacturer. Immediately after cleaning, solvent cement shall
be applied and pipe pushed into the socket up to the shoulder without turning.
Rubber ring joints shall be made with the proper sealing ring furnished by the
manufacturer for that purpose. After the spigot end has been lubricated, it shall
be pushed fully into the socket and then pulled out by about 3mm per meter of
pipe length (but in no case less than 1cm) to allow for longitudinal thermal
expansion.
Cleaning and lubrication shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. No oil

or grease should be used.
Page 7 of 17

3.06
FIXING
A.
The contractor shall be responsible for determining the nature of the materials to be
fixed to and for marking out positions of fixing for the cutting of cavities where
required. Where cast iron, galvanized steel and PVC pipes are fixed in a vertical plane
they shall be plumb or in alignment with the structure, and provided with sufficient
fixing to ensure a rigid installation on completion. Spacing of fixtures shall be in
accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. At changes of direction in the vertical
plane, fixings shall be located on the sockets of the bends. Where pipes are located
against walls they shall be provided with sufficient clearance from same to permit
maintenance and painting. Pipes laid horizontally or to gradients shall be fixed as
shown as on the spacing chart and around the socket of pipe. All pipework shall be
symmetrical and correctly aligned as required. The pipes shall be installed to true
gradients free from high spots or depressions. Failure to comply with this requirements
shall render the contractor liable at his own expense to any alteration, removal or
replacement that is required.
B.
Spacing
1. The contractor shall provide supports at the spacing outlined in the following table.
Material Pipe size
mm
Interval for Horizontal

Pipes m.
Interval for Vertical

Pipes m.
GS
GS
GS
GS
GS
GS
GS
CI
UPVC
UPVC
2.00
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
1.5
1.2
1.8
2.500
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
1.5
2.4
3.0
32
40
50
65
80
100
150
All
65/50/40
75 & above
2. At changes in direction in the pipe run additional supports shall be provided

adjacent to each side of the change of direction, On pipe runs that extend from
floor to ceiling a minimum of one additional mid-way support shall be provided
irrespective of greater distances specified in the table.
3. Hangers on PVC pipes shall be design which does not clamp the pipe tightly but
permits axial movement.
4. Support but do not rigidly restrain PVC pipes at end of branches and at change of
direction or elevation. Vertical piping shall be maintained in the straight alignment.
Support trap arms in excess of 900 mm in length as close as possible to the trap.
C.
Brick or Block work Walls.

1. Where pipes are to be fixed against brick or block work walls they shall be secured
thereto by bituminous coated 25 mm wide by 4.7 mm thick cast iron two piece
brackets for securing to the socket of the pipe with tails for building into structure.
Page 8 of 17

The bracket band around the socket of the pipe shall be secured together by means
of 8 mm hexagonal headed brass bolts, nuts and washers. The bracket tails shall be
set into the structure of a depth to give clearance behind the pipes barrel when
fixed 40 mm from the face of the finished wall. Where pipes are to be fixed
against walls where building in is not permitted they shall be secured thereto by
brackets of mild steel. The tails of the brackets shall be turned out at right angles
and drilled to receive bolt or screw fixings plugged into wall.
2. Where pipes 50 mm and under are to be fixed to walls and partitions fixing shall be
by means of two piece brass clip split pattern bracket of the appropriate size. The
walls shall be drilled and plugged and the clip secured with dome headed black
japanned screws of the required size.
3. Where pipes 50 mm are to be fixed to walls and partitions fixing shall comprise
mild steel trice drilled and counter sunk back plate for screw fixing to structure
incorporating female boss short extension rod and two piece brass ring clip of the
appropriate diameter with securing brass screws and boss for extension rod. The
walls shall be drilled and plugged as required and the ring dip backplate secured
thereto by means of black japanned screws. On completion the pipe shall be fixed
so that a clearance of 25 mm is provided to future finished surfaces.
D.
Duct Fixing
1. Where pipes are to be fixed in ducts in conjunction with other pipes, the contractor
shall provide angle iron bearers of approved size to bridge the duct cavity. The
pipes shall be fixed to the angle bearers by means of brackets as before described
but having welded boss on the back face to receive screwed extension rod tail. The
angle bearer shall be drilled to the correct size to pass the extension rod which shall
then be double bolted thereto. The burring out of holes in the angle bearers will not
be permitted.
2. Where pipes are to be fixed in ducts to angle iron bearers the pipe shall be fixed by
means of two piece ring pattern brass clip with threaded boss. The angle iron
support shall be drilled to the correct size to receive the extension rod which shall
be a maximum of 150mm long of the appropriate diameter for the pipe brackets,
threaded both ends and secured to the angle support with nut and luck nut. The pipe
fixing ring shall be threaded onto the extension rod and on completion the
extension rod bracket shall be square to the pipe.
E.
Suspended Pipes Concrete Floors

1. Where pipes are to be suspended below slabs where floor screeds are to be formed
they shall be supported by means of hangers comprising 100 x 100 x 6 mm mild
steel plate set at structural slab level with 9.5 mm extension rods double bolted or
welded thereto of the required length for suspension. The rod shall be complete
with adjusting and locking nuts for adjustment of gradient and threaded end for
insertion into the welded boss of the pipe bracket.
2. Where pipes are to be suspended from ceilings and soffits the pipes shall be fixed
by a bracket comprising ring clip, extension rod and backplate.
3. The backplate shall be of the screw fixing pattern with A.S.P.T. female boss for
extension rod. The structure shall be drilled and plugged and required and bracket
Page 9 of 17

secured with dome headed black japanned screws of suitable size. The extension
rod shall be of sufficient diameter for the duty and of the required length for the
application, with threaded end s to receive backplate ring clip. The ring clip shall
be two piece patterns.
4. Where more than one pipe is required to be supported from one extension rod,
Approval of the Engineer to the method proposed is to be obtained.
5
Where pipes are to be suspended below slabs where screeds are to be formed they
shall be supported by means of hangers comprising 100 x 100 x 5 mm mild steel
plate set at structural slab level with extension rod double bolted thereto or welded
to the required length for suspension.
6. The extension rod shall have threaded end to receive two piece pattern ring clip.
3.07
CUTS IN PIPES
A.
Cut length to tubes shall be made by means of wheel type cutters or sharp hacksaws to
give a clean true square face to the pipe. Irregularities to cut faces are to be filed
smooth and the internal burr removed by means of a burring reamer. Reductions to the
true bore of the pipe are to be made good by the insertion of a metal turn - pin.
B.
Cut lengths to cast iron pipes shall be made by means of wheel type cutting tools to
give a clean true square face to the axis of the pipe. Exposed metal shall be coated to
the axis of the pipe. Exposed metal shall be coated with tar based solution applied
before installation of the pipe.
3.08
SOUND INSULATION
A.
Where pipework due to its location is required to be insulated against sound

transmission a.0.25 mm thick strip of rubber shall be inserted between the inner face of
the pipe clip and the galvanized steel pipe. 50 mm thick Rockwool 50 kg/m3 shall be
wrapped around the pipe with cartoon and cotton canvas on top not less than 272g/m2
and painted with two coats of heat resistant water paint. A coat of primary paint shall
be applied of the color requested by the Engineer. The strip shall be trimmed in a
workmanlike manner.
3.09
PAINTING
A.
The contractor shall paint all pipe supports of mild steel to prevent corrosion with one
coat of red oxide primer.
3.10
CO - ORDINATION
A.
In areas such as false ceilings, builders work ducts, floor ducts, trenches and where
different services are run in close proximity, the contractor shall ensure that his
services do not prevent the installation of other services.
B.
In this respect the contractor will be deemed to have consulted other trades and all
relevant drawings issued by the consultant and sub - contractors. The contractor shall
not install any services in these areas until routing has been agreed with other trades.
Page 10 of 17

3.11
PROVISION OF ACCESS.
A.
Access points as before described are to be provided at the base of the soil pipes
immediately prior to connection with the drainage system and elsewhere as required to
be in such position that all times the location is accessible to ensure necessary
clearance of the system. Where working is in confined ducts the contractor shall be
responsible for determining this position in relation to any other service .
3.12
PROTECTION OF WORKS
A.
Both during and on completion of the works the contractor is to be held responsible for
the full protection of his works and freedom from blockages and obstructions.
B.
Prior to commissioning tests, grease felt washers to access doors shall be regreased and
the whole installation presented as new for testing.
3.13
PIPE SLEEVES
-
Provide all pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs with sleeves having an
internal diameter at least 2" larger than the outside diameter of the pipe for
uninsulated lines or of the insulation for insulated pipes.
Install sleeves through interior walls and partitions flush with finished surfaces;
sleeves through outside walls to project 15 mm. on each side of the finished wall;
and floor sleeves to project 50mm. above finished floors.
Set sleeves in place before pouring concrete or securely fasten and grout in with
cement.
Sleeve construction:
Interior Partitions - galvanized sheet iron.

Interior & Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors-galvanized steel pipe.
Fill the space between outside of pipe or insulation and the inside of the sleeve or
framed opening with fibrous asbestos in interior walls and floors and pack with
oakum, seal with lead and watertight mastic or asphalt in exterior walls.
Sleeves in fire rated wall shall be of galvanized steel pipe 2 sizes bigger with fire
resistant seal as wall rating.
3.14
PIPE ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS
General
The accessories shall be of the same standard as the pipes on which they are fitted, they
shall be flanged, threaded or welded depending on the type and the diameter of the pipe
and the location in which the pipes are installed.
For PVC pipes, all fittings shall be made of PVC from the same series and by the same
manufacturer of the pipes.
Page 11 of 17

B.
Clamps for PVC Pipes

PVC pipes shall be supported with galvanized steel clamps with rubber pad as
recommended by the pipes manufacturer.
Anchorage of the PVC pipe work shall be provided by using clamps with an in-laid
plastic strip to ensure a firm hold after each group of fittings immediately following the
last coupling, and using loose clamps between the fittings.
Horizontal lines shall be supported at intervals of 10 times the outside pipe diameter.
Vertical lines shall be supported at no more than 2 meters interval.
C.
D.
Connection to Equipment and Control Valves

-
Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment and control valves
to facilitate dismantling. Arrange connections so that the equipment being served
may be removed without disturbing the piping.
Install all supply piping, pumps and other equipment including gate valves and
strainers therein, at line size with the reduction in size being made only at the outlet
piping from the control valve at the full size of the tapping in the equipment served.
Hangers, Supports, Anchors and Guides - General

-
Support, anchor and guide all piping to preclude failure or deformation. Construct
and install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and accessories to the approval of the
Engineer. Do not use wire, tape or metal bands. Supports shall be designed to
support weight of pipe, weight of fluid and weight of pipe insulation.
Fasten piping securely to the structure without overstressing any portion of the
supports or the structure itself. Secure pipe supports, anchors and guides to
concrete by means of inserts or if greater load carrying capacity is required by
means of steel fishplates embedded in the concrete.
Arrange hanger to prevent transmission of vibration from piping to building and

supports.
Uninsulated copper or brass pipe and/or tubing shall be isolated from ferrous
hangers or supports
Support piping and tubing at intervals indicated in the schedule hereinafter and at
all changes in direction. Maximum deflection shall not exceed 3 mm.
Clearance for application of specified Vapor sealed insulation without cutting

pipeline covering or fitting covering in installation of pipe hangers and fittings
shall be provided.
Furnish pipe hangers and supports complete with rods, bolts, lock nuts, swivels,
couplings, brackets and all other components and accessories, to allow installation
to freely expand and contract.
Page 12 of 17

Hangers shall be formed steel clevis type, unless otherwise specified, with
adjustable attachment to hanger rod. For copper or brass pipe, use plastic sheathed
hangers. Pipe hangers shall fit over vapor sealed insulated piping.
Where pipe exceeds maximum loading recommended for clevis type hanger,
provide steel pipe clamps.
Provide trapeze hangers where several pipes can be installed parallel and at the
same level. Trapeze shall be of steel channel sized to support load and drilled for
rod hanger at each end. Provision should be made to keep the lines in their relative
position to each other by the use of either clamps or clips.
Use roller supports, where provision for expansion is required. Rollers shall have
cast iron adjustable bases.
For hanger rods on piping 10 mm thru 50 mm inclusive use 10 mm rods, and for
piping 65 mm thru 125 mm use 16 mm rods, and for piping 150 mm thru 300 mm
use 22 mm rods.
Provide additional steel members required for hanging piping systems in areas with
special conditions, or where vertical or horizontal structural steel supports are
required other than those provided in the structure.
C-type hangers on sprinkler piping shall have lock nuts.
Provide lateral bracing for supporting rods over 450mm. long braced at every
fourth hanger with diagonal bracing attached to slab or beam.
Floor supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from floors with cast-iron
rests, with pipe nipples to suit. Fasten to floor. Where provision for expansion is
required, provide pipe roll stands, without vertical adjustment. Provide concrete or
steel pipe piers, fasten stands to piers.
Wall supports - provide for supporting horizontal piping from wall with steel JHook for pipe located close to wall and not larger than 80 mm pipe. For greater
loads, up to 680 Kg maximum loading provide welded steel bracket.
Vertical piping supports - support cast-iron soil pipe at every floor and at base of
stack, other pipes at every floor unless shown otherwise. Use steel extension pipe
clamps. Refer to manufacturer's rated maximum loading for each size pipe. Bolt
clamps securely to pipe, rest clamp-end extension on building structure. Place pipe
clamps at ceiling below, support clamp and extension from inserts where pipe
sleeves extend above floor.
Pipe-covering (insulation) protection saddles.
Provide hanger shields to protect vapor sealed pipe insulation within mechanical
equipment rooms at each support point by a 360o insert of high density, 100 psi,
waterproofed calcium silicate encased in a 120o sheet metal shield. Insert
thickness shall be same as insulation. Shield length shall equal nominal pipe
diameter, minimum but shall not be shorter than 100mm. and need not be longer
than 300mm. if bearing load causes no discernible deformation. Insert shall extend
25mm. Beyond sheet metal shield. 100mm. shields shall be 26 gauge minimum.
Page 13 of 17

Shields 130 to 230mm. long shall be 20 gauge minimum. Shields longer than
230mm. shall be 16 gauge.
Provide penetration shields to encase insulated pipes penetrating fire walls or floors
in a 360o, 24 gauge minimum sheet metal hanger shield with insert of high density,
100 psi. waterproofed calcium silicate the same thickness as insulation and further
enclosed within the sleeve, sized for maximum 25mm. spacing between sleeve and
insulation shield, pack annular space between sleeve and shield on both ends with
double neoprene coated asbestos rope. Install an escutcheon plate to completely
cover the wall penetration opening and fit snugly over the pipe insulation shield.
Insert shall extend at least 25mm. beyond penetrated surface and escutcheon.
Provide oversize hangers with blocking the same thickness as the insulation to
pitch vapor sealed insulated pipes accurately at time of insulation.
Except for fire protection systems, maximum horizontal spacing for pipe hangers
are as follows:
3/4" and 1" (20 and 25 mm) steel pipe

2.5 meter
1 1/4"-2" (32 and 50 mm) steel pipe 3.0 meter
2 1/2"-4" (65 and 100 mm)steel pipe 4.0 meter
5"-6" (125 and 150 mm) steel pipe 5.0 meter
8" (200 mm) and above steel pipe 6.0 meter
Up to 1 1/4" (32 mm) copper pipe 2.0 meter
1 1/2" (40 mm) and over copper pipe
3.0 meter
2 1/2" (65 mm) and smaller PVC pipe
1.2 meter
3" (80 mm) and over PVC pipe
1.8 meter
Vertical spacing - PVC pipe twice as those of horizontal spacing. - Other pipes - at
every floor level.
E.
Hangers on PVC pipes shall be of design which does not clamp the pipe tightly but
permits axial movement.
Support but do not rigidly restrain PVC pipes at end of branches and at change of
direction or elevation. Vertical piping shall be maintained in the straight alignment.
Support traps arms in excess of 900mm in length as close as possible to the trap.
Cleaning of Piping Systems

-
Plug all opening ends of piping, valves and equipment except when actual work is
being performed to minimize accumulation of dirt and debris.
After installation is complete, place temporary screens at connections to all

equipment and at automatic control valves where permanent strainers are not
provided.
Prior to the performance of tests, flush out all piping that is

hydrostatic test with clean water.
Remove dirt and debris collected at screens, strainers and other points from the
system.
to receive a
Page 14 of 17

The Contractor shall disinfect water piping before it is placed in service. The
Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials necessary to do the work of
disinfecting and shall perform the work in accordance with the procedure outlined
in AWWA Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains Designation C 601-68. The
dosage shall be such as to produce a chlorine residual for not less than 10 ppm after
a contact period of not less than 24 hours. After treatment, the piping shall be
flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine content does not exceed 0.2
ppm. During the disinfecting period, care shall be exercised to prevent
contamination of water in steel main.
3.15.
MANHOLE
A.
Manhole Construction
Manholes shall be constructed of class "B" concrete as shown on the drawings.
The base (where required) shall be of precast class "B" reinforced concrete.
The shaft shall be constructed of poured reinforced concrete to suit the required depth.
The top shall be of class "B" reinforced concrete. An opening suitable for the cover
shall be left in the top around which the radial concrete bricks or concrete ring are built
for proper adjustment of levels. Bricks shall be fully bedded in mortar and the inside
surface of joints finished flush and clean.
The benching shall be formed in the bottom of manholes in class "B" concrete. "U"
channels shall be formed with bottom flush with inside surfaces of pipes and sides
extending the full height of the largest pipe and then sloped back at a minimum fall of
10%. The benching and channels shall be finished with 2 cm thick rendering composed
of 1/2 cement/sand mortar, and surface hardened with two coats of sodium silicate
solution brushed on. The finished diameter of channels shall be the same as the
diameter of pipes entering or leaving the manhole.
The paint for the manhole and trenches interior shall be coal tar epoxy resin.
B.
Frames, Covers & Gratings

The Contractor shall furnish and set level and to the proper grade, a ductile iron frame
and cover or frame and grating of the form and dimensions shown on the Drawings and
suitable for heavy load installation. The concrete masonry shall be neatly and
accurately brought to the dimensions of the base of the frame. The frames shall be
thoroughly embedded in mortar. All covers and frames shall be heavy duty quality.
Manhole covers shall have double seal with air lock and shall be suitable for outdoor
installations.
All castings for frames, covers, and gratings shall be of ductile iron. All castings shall
be made accurately to dimensions and shall be machined to provide even bearing
surfaces. Covers and gratings must fit the frames in any position and if found to rattle
under traffic, shall be replaced. Filling to obtain tight covers will not be permitted. No
Page 15 of 17

plugging, burning-in or filling will be allowed. All castings shall be carefully coated
inside and out with coal tar pitch varnish of approved quality.
3.16
TRENCH GRATE & FRAME

Supply and install wherever shown on drawings trench grates and frames as hereinafter
specified.
Grating in parking areas and ramps shall be ductile iron, heavy rectangular, sectional
bar pattern, suitable for car parking. Grate openings shall be laid in wide dimensions in
a steel frame with flat bar anchors and nailing clips.
Grating in kitchen shall be of stainless 316 L with stainless steel frame 316L. Frame
and grating shall be 100 mm wider than the inner dimension of the trench.
3.17
TESTING OF THE WORK
A.
On completion of the soil and waste pipe works or section of the work as may be
required the contractor shall arrange the testing of the works and witnessing of the
tests.
B.
The tests shall comprise an air test as set out in the Uniform Plumbing Code, and
described below.
C.
Where the testing is to be carried out in sections the contractor shall retain on site a
drawing indicating sections tested and recording dates on which the tests took place
duly witnessed.
D.
The contractor shall be responsible for providing all skilled and unskilled labor
necessary to carry out tests and ensure that all supplies and instruments are available.
E.
Water Test
a. Apply the water tests to every part of each drainage system. Test each system
in its entirety or in sections. Tightly close openings in the piping.
b. If testing the system in sections, tightly plug each opening, except the highest
opening of the section being tested, and fill each section with water. Test
every section with a head of water equivalent to the greatest floor-to-floor
distance between floors with a minimum of at least a 10 foot head of water.
c. Keep the water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15
minutes before inspection starts.
d. There shall be no leakage.
F.
Smoke Test
a. After connecting fixtures, perform a smoke test on the sanitary and laboratory
drainage systems.
b. Fill traps with water, then produce a thick, penetrating smoke with one or more
approved smoke machines and inject into the entire system. As the smoke
Page 16 of 17

appears at the stack openings on the roof, tightly close such openings and apply
a pressure equivalent to a 1 inch water column.
c. Maintain pressure of 1 inch water column for at least 15 minutes before
inspection starts.
d. Inspect traps. There shall be no leakage.
G.
Correct defects detected by any test and retest.
3.18
PROTECTION
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing and replacing plumbing materials and
equipment, whether or not installed, which are damaged due to freezeups, until the
systems are approved by the Engineer and turned over to the Employer.
END OF SECTION
Page 17 of 17
SECTION 15435-DOMESTIC WATER CONDITIONS
DOMESTIC WATER CONDTIONS

SECTION 15435
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SCOPE
A.
The work described in this section of the specification is related to water softening
equipment
B.
The contractor shall prior to the ordering of any equipment obtain two separate samples
of the water to be supplied to the site. These samples shall be sent to a laboratory for a
water analysis to establish all characteristics and a copy of the analysis shall be forward
to the consultants.
C.
It shall be the contractors responsibility to verify all equipment specified for water
treatment for size, flow rates and produce.
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The water softening plant shall be designed, manufactured, tested, certified and
stamped in accordance with the requirements of ASME code, Section VIII Div. I,
Unfired Pressure Vessel Code or any other similar international society.
1.04
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM D 859: Silica in Water and Waste Water.
B.
ASTM D 1125: Electrical Conductivity and Resistivity of Water
C.
ASTM D 1126: Hardness in Water.
Page 1 of 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SOFTENING UNIT
A.
General Description
System to comprise two composite vessels, filled with softening grade strong cation
resin and support gravel media. Softeners shall be duplex type with one brine tank and
feeder pump.
Vessels to include top screen, bottom distributor and riser tube.
Control valves shall be top mounted type, brass bodied, 5 cycles programmable, with
inlet and outlet connections and to include water meter with setting range up to 375
m3. Brine tank assembly should include top opening HDPE tank, inclusive of brine
well, salt grid, safety brine valve (float valve), air check and removable cover.
Vessels will be operated in parallel as duplex type one duty and other standby and shall
alternate automatically during regeneration.
B.
Design Parameter
The operating feed water temperature will vary between a maximum of 25 Degrees
centigrade and minimum of 18 Degrees Centigrade.
Feed Water hardness is in the range of 200-300 ppm as Ca CO3 and Feed water TDS is
in the range of 500 1000 mg/l.
Required system capacity is 5.7 L/S, 2 softeners each 5.7 L/S. softeners shall operate
as duty standby and shall alternate automatically.
The systems total exchange capacity to be verified by the Contractor.
Design should be based on a duplex parallel system.
The total flow will be per one softener and each softener vessel with option to operate
one or two shall operate independently.
Regeneration of the resin will be initiated for each softener by a separate impeller
based water meter, which will send the signal to the control valve through a mechanical
signal.
System should be configured to automatically exclude hard water passage during the
non -service cycles.
System and piping configuration should allow for partial blending of product (soft)
water with feed (hard) water.
System to include safety brine valve in the brine tank to avoid brine tank overflow due
to power outages.
C.
Assembly
Page 2 of 4
System to be completely assembled, piped, wired and tested at site as a complete

packaged duplex unit. Steel parts and other components subject to corrosion to be
treated with epoxy paint as necessary.
2.02
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATION:
A.
Composite Tanks:
Tanks to be of composite material, 4 inch threaded top opening complete with base.
Operating pressure 0 - 10 bars.
Operating temperature 1- 50 degrees centigrade
Minimum Fatigue testing 250, 00 cycles between 0 - 10 bar.
B.
Control Valves:
Valves to have fully adjustable cycles, type, meter initiated, include water meter,
electromechanical control type, brass bodied.
Valves should be equipped with the appropriate drain line flow controllers and brine
line flow controllers
Operating pressure range: 1.8 -8.5 bars
Working temperature range: 1- 43 degrees centigrade
C.
Brine Tank Assembly:

Rotary molded, high-density polyethylene (HDPE), inclusive of top cover, polypropylene
salt grid, slotted brine well and brass safety brine valve (float valve).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EQUIPMENT
A.
The water softening equipment shall be a factory made skid mounted unit, which shall
be installed in the location indicated on the drawings within the space allocated, and the
manufacturer shall supervise the installation and his instructions followed.
B.
Damage Repair
1.
Prior to installation, the water softening plant shall be inspected for any
damage during shipping or storage.
2.
Any damaged sections of pipework shall be cut out and replaced with new
pipework of the same material. The outer coasting shall be inspected and any
defects made good.
Page 3 of 4
3.02
A.
Hydraulic Test
B.
1.
As soon as is participle after the installation, the complete water softening

equipment and pipework shall be flushed clean and subjected to a hydraulic
test.
2.
The system shall be filled with water and subjected to 1.5 times the normal
work in pressure of the system. This pressure shall be maintained for 2 hours
without leakage before acceptance.
3.
A further test to ensure that all pumps, vessels, timers, and controls are
operational and meet the duty and requirements of the drawings shall be
initiated once the hydraulic test has proved satisfactory.
4.
After all tests are complete; the equipment shall be drained down, cleaned and
left ready for commissioning.
Commissioning
1.
On commissioning, the equipment shall be tested to ensure that all functions

are working correctly, i.e. regeneration, vessels change over and water quality.
The pumps, meters and by-pass controls shall be checked and re-set if
necessary, to the correct levels and duties on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 15450- PLUMBING FIXTURES & TRIM
PLUMBING FIXTURES & TRIM

SECTION 15450
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SCOPE
A.
Work in this section of the specification describes the various plumbing

fixtures and their installation.
B.
All sanitary items supply & installation to be in main contractors scope. The
MEP contractor shall provide only the services connection for these fixtures in
coordination with the main Contractor.
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 15401: Domestic and Soft Water Piping Systems.
B.
Section 15405: Soil, Waste, Rainwater Piping Systems.
C.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Western Water Closets.

Lavatory Basins - Wall Mounted
Lavatory Basins Counter Top
Showers
Bidets
Cleaners Service Sink
Kitchen Sink
Drinking Fountain
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Sanitary fittings throughout the buildings will be white vitreous china of

matching design.
B.
Where vitreous china is not available white glazed fireclay fittings shall be
used, e.g. shower trays, laboratory sinks and cleaners sinks.
C.
All taps, valves and sprays shall be made of good quality cast brass and
chromium plated. All hand held sprays in whatever location shall be fitted with
backflow (anti- vacuum) preventers.
GENERAL REQUIREMENT
A.
Each plumbing fixture mentioned in this section shall be provided with

individual chrome plated angle valve or chrome plated in wall valve as
Page 1 of 4
required to isolate the individual fixture for maintenance, complete with

chrome plate escutcheon and copper pipe with all accessories.
B.
2.03
All sanitary fixtures shall be from one brand and supplier.
Model Selection
Sanitary fixture model shall be selected by the interior decorator in coordination
with the Client
2.4
HOSE BIBB TYPE HB

To consist of chrome plated metal bibcock, 15 mm male back inlet connection and 15
mm male, hose thread outlet, Grohe No. 30012 or approved equal, with 15 mm chrome
plated metal hose coupling female threaded, Grohe No. 13914 or approved equal.
2.5
LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER TYPE SD-1

Wall mounted heavy gauge stainless steel with concealed fixing wall plate similar to
"Bobrick" model B2113 or approved equal.
2.6
LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER TYPE SD-2

Suitable for deck mounting on a counter top, complete with polyethylene container,
chrome plated brass body valve and 150 mm long spout, similar to "Bobrick" B-822 or
approved equal.
2.7
TOWEL PAPER DISPENSERS TYPE TPD

Stainless steel, surface mounted with sloping top, refill indicator slots, and a pivot type
door hinge, 290 x 375 x 100 mm, Bobrick No. 262 or approved equal.
2.8
HAND DRYER TYPE HD

Exposed, wall mounted type, with ribbed aluminum cover, electrically operated by
push-button and provided with 1850 watts capacity heater. Drying time not to exceed
60 seconds. Hand dryer to be VDE approved, provided with radio and TV interference
suppressor, protected against overheating and malicious treatment, supplied complete
with mounting rails and similar to Siemens model TH 4210 or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Set plumbing fixtures tight, level, and rigid on proper grounds. Use setting
compound under all settings surfaces.
B.
Provide required trim including supplies, loose-keyed stops, wastes, traps, and
floor and wall escutcheon plates.
Page 2 of 4
C.
Protect fixtures after they are set .Thoroughly clean them at the completion of
the project.
D.
General Plumbing Criteria
1. Headers supplying flush valve fixtures shall run full size to last fixture.
2. Shut off valves shall be supplied in the furring for each fixture or to banks of two
or more fixtures, where required for proper system control, entrances of buildings
and to all equipment and controls.
3. Concealed valves shall be provided with access plates.
4. Install unions on one side of all valves, equipment connections and elsewhere as
shown or required for ease of service and / or installation, unless flanged are
indicated.
E.
Caulk around all plumbing fixtures with white silicone epoxy type, nonhardening compound, where fixtures meet floor or wall as required to present a
finish appearance. See Section on Sealants and Caulking.
F.
Set shower receptors and janitor receptors in a leveling bed of cement grout
and lead pan.
G.
The installation and connection of all sanitary fixtures shown on the drawings
or provided later shall satisfy the following specifications:
Ample application of petroleum jelly shall be applied to all surfaces of exposed

chrome plated piping, valves and fittings and stainless steel fixtures immediately
after installation.
Concealed brackets, hangers and plates shall have a shop coat of paint.
All exposed piping and trim shall be chrome plated and fully protected during
installation. Strap or padded wrenches shall be used on chrome pipe fittings and
valves.
All exposed metal parts in the sanitary blocks shall be chrome plated.
All exposed valves in the sanitary blocks shall be chrome plated of the recessed
type.
Plumbing fixtures shall be complete with all required trimmings, including faucets,
waste plugs, traps, supplies, stop valves, escutcheons and casings and all necessary
hangers, plates, brackets, anchors and supports.
All fixtures shall be individually trapped.
All fixtures shall be equipped with chrome plated angle valves, whether specified,
shown on drawings or not.
Page 3 of 4
Fixtures shall be set in a neat, finished and uniform manner making the connection
to all fixtures at right angles with the walls, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
Roughing for this work must be accurately laid out so as to conform to the finished
wall material.
Fixtures are not to be set until so directed by the Engineer.
The location and disposition of all items shall be as indicated on the relevant
drawings.
It is to be noted that all fixtures mentioned below shall be approved for shapes and
colors before ordering.
END OF SECTION
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 15480- POOL AND FOUNTAIN EQUIPMENT
POOL AND FOUNTAIN EQUIPMENT

SECTION 15480
PART I - GENERAL
1.01
General
The swimming pool system to be in the scope of specialist Contractor, the Mechanical
Contractor shall be responsible to provide all service provisions necessary for
connections and proper work in coordination with the Pool Specialist Contractor.
The term Contractor throughout this section refers specifically to the Pool
Specialist Contractor
Contractor shall provide all equipment and necessary accessories and fittings for
swimming pool and fountain equipment.
Scope of work shall include the following:
*
*
*
*
*
*
Install sand filters in place and pipe filters to system.

Install swimming pool and fountain peripheral piping, clean and/or replace
damaged and sealed piping.
Install chemical metering units and controls and provide necessary chemicals
for system operation for one (1) month.
Install pool circulating pumps.
Install step ladders and diving board and all pool accessories.
Verify operation of equipment.
Approved Manufacturers:
Hayward
Wascop
Jacuzzi Pool Equipment
Swimquip
Culligan
or approved equal.
1.02
Design Conditions
For equipment specification refer to equipment schedule on drawings.
Guarantee in writing that when pool and fountain equipment are operated in
accordance with manufacturers instructions water will be crystal clear, sparkling
bright, free from suspended matter and completely sterilized at all times.
Water to be Clear: when pool and fountain are in use water is to be sufficiently clear
to permit a 150 mm diameter black disc on a white background placed on the bottom
of the pool to be clearly visible from the side walls of the pools at all distances up to
10m measured from a line drawn across the disc.
Water to be Sterile: when pool and fountain are in use not more than 15% of samples
of water taken covering any considerable period of time are to contain more than 200
bacteria per milliliter or are to show positive test in any of five 10 ml samples of the
water. Primary fermentation tubes showing gas should be confirmed.
Free Residual Chlorine in water at all times shall not be less than 0.7 ppm and not
more than 1.5 ppm.
Page 1 of 12
pH of Water: at all times shall not be less than 7.2 and not more than 7.8.
Piping
*
Piping Around Pool & Inside Plant Room.

-
Pressure UPVC pipe and fittings for pool & waterfall.
Pressure CPVC pipe and fittings for Jacuzzi.
Heated pool and jacuzzi shall have its pipes insulated with fiber glass
blanket 32mm thick 32 kg/m3 wrapped with aluminum foil, cartoon,
canvas and foster layer 2mm thick.
Chlorinator Booster Pump and Water Sample Piping

Pressure UPVC pipe and fittings.
Chemical Feed Piping

Pressure UPVC pipe and fittings.
Pipe Connections Through Walls of Plant Room

Shall be installed with no-leak flanges.
Valves
Plastic, ball or butter fly valve, PN10.
Strainers
Basket type with stainless steel screen & stainless steel body (SS316) as shown
on drawings.
PUMPS
Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings pool recirculation pumps of
capacities as indicated on drawings.
Unless otherwise noted each pool & water fall pump shall be the centrifugal
end suction type, flexibly coupled to a drip proof electric induction motor, and
both mounted on a common steel base plate. Small pumps where noted on
drawings shall be inline centrifugal pump directly coupled to a drip proof
electric induction motor.
The casing of the pump shall be of good quality cast iron with renewable wear
rings, bronze impeller, high tensile stainless steel shaft, and flanged suction and
discharge connections.
Pump shall have mechanical shaft seal for continuous operation. Pump ball
bearings shall be of ample size to withstand all axial and radial thrust.
Each pump shall be complete with basket type strainer and gate valve at inlet,
check valve and globe at outlet and pipe flexible connection at inlet and outlet.
Unless otherwise noted pump speed shall not exceed 1450 RPM.
Page 2 of 12
This pump shall be used for vacuum cleaning of the pool also and to withstand
100C continuous water temperature when selected for heated pool.
The pump shut off pressure shall not be less than 25% higher than the design
load.
APPROVED MANUFACTURER
GRUNDFOS
BELL & GOSSETT
AURORA PUMPS
(USA)
(USA)
(USA)
PART II - PRODUCT
2.01
A-
Swimming Pool & Jacuzzi

Components and Accessories
a)
Filters
Filters: high flow rate, sand filter, pressure type, designed for specified filtration
rate and operating pressure. Filters shall be hydrostatically tested at the factory
to specified test pressure. Quality of filtrate is to be guaranteed to be in the 2
micron range.
Filters: cylindrical, vertical type with diameter and straight sidewall height as
specified under Design Premise to allow a deep media structure. Filter heads
shall be dished to a radius equal to the diameter of the shell.
Filters: shall be designed with efficient influent and underdrain systems to
ensure uniform water flow through the filtering and backwash operations and to
prevent migration, mounding or channelling of the filter bed. Minimum
freeboard of 300 mm is to be provided between top of filter bed and influent
water distribution system. Influent and underdrain systems are to be fabricated
from corrosion resistant materials.
Filter Shell and Heads

Shall be fabricated from heavy gauge reinforced fiber glass construction having
a vertical cylindrical shape with dished flanged heads.
Face Piping and Valves

Shall be provided and arranged for operations of filtering, backwash and rinse.
Face piping is to be flanged, black steel or ductile iron pipes. Valves are to be
either flanged cast iron gate valves with bronze trim or butterfly valves of the
wafer type. Valves are to be of same size as face piping.
Automatic Flow Controllers

Shall be provided to limit filtering, backwash and rinse flow rates to the
maximum values recommended by the manufacturer.
Page 3 of 12
Accessories
Filters shall be complete with the following accessories and appurtenances:
Standard size manhole on top dished head with boiler type cover.
Four jack type supports individually adjustable for filter level adjustment, of
adequate strength to carry the filter and contents.
Automatic air release valve on top dished head.
Gauge panel of cast bronze with two 100 mm minimum diameter dial pressure
gauges connected with copper tubes to the filter inlet and outlet connections.
Filter drain valve.
Substantial lifting lugs.
b)
Filter Media
Shall be as recommended by the filter manufacturer and as supplied by him
specifically for the filters. Components are to be shipped separately in clearly
marked bags.
Filter Media: provide clear instructions for field application of filter media in
the filters.
Filter Media: shall be graded rock and gravel to fine sand from bottom up
applied in layers of thickness as per manufacturers recommendations.
Rock and Gravel: shall consist of clean, hard, rounded stones with an average
specific gravity of not less than 2.5, free from shale, mica, clay, sandstone,
sand, loam or other impurities. Gravel is not to have more than 2% by weight of
thin, flat or elongated pieces.
Sand: shall consist of hard, durable grains of rounded or subangular silica sand,
free from clay, loam, dirt and organic matter. Not more than 1% may be flat or
micaceous particles. Sand is to meet the screen requirements given in the
following table and have an effective size of 0.35 to 0.45 mm and a uniformity
coefficient of 1.45 to 1.69.
Sand Screen Requirements
Sieve No.
U.S.
16
20
30
40
50
Tyler
14
20
28
36
43
% Retained on
Successive Screens
0-6
3-23
24-40
43-25
22-6
% Passing Through
Successive Screens
94-100
71-97
31-73
6-25
0-3
Page 4 of 12
c)
Hypochlorinator
1.
One hypochlorinator (HC) consisting of:

i-
Chemical Injection Pump: positive displacement diaphragm-action type,

proportional type, with parts exposed to chemicals made of corrosion
resistant plastic or special rubber compound, electric motor driven,
complete with suction strainer, ball check valve, injection nozzle for
screwing water pipe, anti-siphon device and necessary lengths of suction
and delivery tubing all of corrosion resistant plastic materials. Capacity of
feeder shall be recommended by specialist.
Hypochlorite dosing set consisting of:
Chemical dosing pump, positive displacement, rated at 1.6 L/hr at 60 psi
discharge pressure.
Solution tank.
Electrical mixer
Electrical switch
Lot Interconnecting Hoses
In-line static mixer
ii- Translucent polyethylene storage tank, for sodium hypo-chloride solution,

with a minimum capacity as specified on the Drawings.
Tank shall have a molded fiberglass cover of recesses for the
mounting and installation of feeder, agitator, and liquid level
switch assemblies.
Tank shall have clearly marked 5 gallons (20 lit) graduations.
Connecting PVC valves and fittings and polyethylene tubing.
2-
Hypochlorinator shall operate automatically to maintain an accurate control of

residual chlorine in the water by constantly testing a water sample for chlorine
residual and automatically adjusting the chlorine dosing apparatus to maintain
the residual chlorine in the water. Chlorine system shall be complete with
chlorine residual analyzer, chlorine residual controller, chlorine residual
recorder, hypochlorinate solution metering pump, hypochlorite tanks, tubing
and accessories.
3-
Chlorine residual analyzer shall have an acetate reagent buffer solution system
with a constant head reagent feed system utilizing a control valve to meter
reagent into the sample cell.
4-
Chlorine residual controller shall be wall mounted and has in addition to set
point adjustment for setting the frequency of corrective action when a
difference exists between set point and measured residual chlorine.
5-
Chlorine residual recorder wall mounted solid state type requiring no ink and
incorporating a 30 day strip chart, an indicator strip for 0 to 2 PPM range and a
front clear glass cover with high and low level alarm contacts to actuate a
remote visual and audible alarms.
Page 5 of 12
6-
Ozonator Unit
Ozonator shall be as manufactured by prozone water purification system type
PZ or approved equal and shall be UL/UR approved. Ozonator shall generates
ozone and injects its into the return line. Ozonator shall be complete with all
necessary PVC pipes, injectors and all other accessories as recommended by
supplier.
7)
Brominator
Shall be complete as specified for Hypochlorinator but to feed powdered
sodium hypochloride.
8)
Pool Water Heat Exchanger

Plate type heat exchanger shall be of stainless steel 316 and consist of a plate
pack of calculated number of embossed plates 0.6 mm thick each plate with
perimeter gaskets clamped securely between two thick stainless steel plates by
means tie rods. Plate heat exchangers shall be designed, built and tested in
accordance with ASME Code. Heat exchanger shall be of the replaceable plates
type. Plate type heat exchanger shall be complete with all valves and supports as
detailed on drawings. Heat exchangers shall be insulated as described in section
15250. Water heater shall be used to cool water.
9)
Acid Feeder AF-1

Acid feeder shall be complete as specified for hypochlorinator but suitable for
feeding caustic soda or HLC dilute as required by water analysis.
10)
Surge & Compensation Tanks

Compensation tank shall be of 316 L stainless steel sheet metal thickness as
shown on drawings complete with all valves, controls, access cover, overflow,
and drain, installed on support complete as detailed on drawings.
Tank shall be tested for leaks before installation.
11)
Pool Fittings
General
Pool fittings shall be all plastic, heavy duty to withstand corrosion and the
action of chlorine. Pool fittings shall have color as requested by Engineer to suit
pool tiles color.
Wall Inlet Fittings (IF)

Round adjustable louver type with outer face fixable in any position for
regulating flow of water into the pool, with 50 mm I.P.S. female threaded
connection. Hayward Model SP-1419 or approved equal.
12)
Floor inlets (FI)

Floor inlets shall be fully adjustable white body and flush diffuser plate
Hayward Model SP1425.
Page 6 of 12
13)
Automatic Filter Kit

Automatic filters shall be RainBird Model AF 150-LSS with 1 Y
filter or approved equal. Filters shall have automatic backwash.
Vacuum Fittings (VF)

Round type with flush plug removable by hand for insertion of vacuum hose of
pool cleaner, FIP wall inlet with 50 mm I.P.S. female threaded pipe connection
on one end and a 50 mm I.P.S. female threaded hose connection on other end.
Hayward Model SP-1022 or approved equal.
No-Leak Flanges
Heavy PVC pipe pool with center flange and gussets, with 50 mm I.P.S. female
threaded pipe connections at both ends. To be fitted to inlet and floor fittings
and vacuum fittings within concrete wall of pool.
Main Drains
MD-1
Concrete pit with granite grating 300 x 300 to match pool finish as approved by
the Engineer. Grating free area is 40% with 160 mm drain pipe.
MD-2
Heavy duty body and flush vortex plate, white, 63 bottom connection and plug
similar to Hay ward Model SP-1045 or approved equal.
Gutter Drains
GD-1/ GD-2
63 FIP plus socket connection and grate similar to Hayward Model SP-1019 colors
Air Blower
Air blower for Jacuzzi shall be similar to hydro-air industries or approved equal.
Blower shall be 3HP, 415V, 50Hz.
Hydro-jet Inlet Fittings

White cycolac body, complete with removable air nozzle Hayward model No. SP1430 or approved equal, permanent installation type with air vent and valve box SP1012 and 20mm diameter air supply pipe.
Wall Inlet Initial Fill

Plastic type Hayward Model SP-14235 or approved equal.
Air Duct (AD)

Air ducts shall be Aqua air duct, PVC, complete with special tee, elbo and end caps.
Page 7 of 12
Cup Anchors
For attaching life line or racing lane ropes shall be embedded, flush type, with
integral no-leak flange, gussets, anchor and bronze eye bolt of 9.5 mm
minimum diameter.
Wedge Anchors
For securing ladders and life guard chairs shall be embedded, flush type, with
integral anchor flange and webs. They are to have cast bronze inwardly tapering
body with removable bronze locking wedge and stainless steel draw bolt and
washer. They are to be suitable for use with 48 mm O.D. tube or 40 mm I.P.S.
pipe.
Escutcheons
Shall be used with each wedge anchor to be specially designed for use with the
wedge anchor. They are to be cast bronze with polished chrome finish, and
fitted with locking screws.
B)
Pool Side Accessories

*
Ladders
48 mm O.D. corrosion resistant stainless steel tube, polished to give a brilliant
finish, complete with anti-skid steps, chlorine resisting white rubber buffers,
stainless steel escutcheons, and rounded, corrosion resistant metal fixing
screws.
C)
Pool Cleaning Equipment

*
Supply Loose and hand to Employer in original containers after it is tested and
proved as working satisfactorily.
Vacuum Cleaner
Solid cast bronze with corrosion resistant finish, 450 mm working width, with
curved head and adjustable wheels, suitable for use with a 50 mm vacuum hose.
It shall be complete with 15 m of 50 mm white, corrugated, floating, flexible
plastic hose with formed polyethylene ends, and a 4.8 m long x 32 mm diameter
anodized aluminum telescopic handle complete with bolts and wing nuts.
Hose to Wall Fittings

To connect vacuum hose to vacuum fitting shall be solid aluminum with 50 mm
I.P.S. male thread one end and 50 mm sleeve other end.
Telescopic Handles
Anodized aluminum consisting of two concentric tube sections that can
telescope from 2.4 m to 4.8 m, with a positive locking device. They shall be 32
mm diameter, fluted for added strength. Inner tube to be 29 mm diameter drilled
for two 6 mm mounting bolts on 76 mm centers, complete with bolts and wing
nuts.
Algae Brushes
Page 8 of 12
150 mm long x 76 mm wide, consisting of two dense rows of 25 mm long

stainless steel wire bristles permanently set in a strong synthetic moulded back.
Rear bristles shall be at right angles to the back and front bristles inclined
forward. A die cast aluminum handle holder with two punched holes is to be
securely attached to the back.
*
Wall Brushes
450 mm long with curved ends, consisting of four dense rows of 29 mm long
nylon bristles permanently set in a strong moulded synthetic back reinforced
with an extruded aluminum section. A die cast aluminum handle holder with
two punched holes shall be securely attached to the back.
Leaf Rake
Synthetic fiber mesh screen set in a plastic covered aluminum frame with an
aluminum tube handle attachment and 25 mm O.D. anodized aluminum fluted
handle.
D)
Sundries
*
Strainers
Strainers on pump suctions shall be straight, in-line, flanged type, specially
designed for swimming pools. Size 100 mm with cast iron body and stainless
steel basket, suitable for a working pressure of 2 kg/cm2 (30 psig). It shall have
quick opening cover lid, positively sealing O-ring, yoke type cover clamp with
threaded tightening bolt and 40mm I.P.S. drain plug.
Flow Meters
Orifice type with direct reading manometer with indicating fluid other than
mercury, complete with 150 mm orifice flanges, orifice plate, piping to orifice
flanges and by-pass piping. It shall be suitable for measuring flows up to 500
U.S. gpm.
Flow meters shall be as manufactured by Meriam Model MS-37, or approved
equal.
Backwash Sight Glass Indicators

Heavy cast bronze with clear plastic or pyrex cylinder with bottom 50 mm male
threaded connection for easy removal.
Test Kits
Obtain from equipment manufacturer those kits necessary for running tests to
determine conformance of equipment performance with Contract requirements.
Water Quality Test Kit

For checking pH alum and residual chlorine of pool water, shall be complete
with two 9-color standard chlorimeters, test solutions, operating instructions and
carrying case. The pH and chlorine residual shall be tested on different slides.
Water Quality Test Kit
Page 9 of 12
Shall be as manufactured by Taylor, Model H, professional test set, or approved

equal.
E)
Chemical Feeding Systems

Provide hypochlorinator and ozonator units. Hypochlorinator system shall consist of
solution metering pumps, solution tanks tubing and accessories.
Page 10 of 12
PART- III EXECUTION

3.01
Workmanship
A-
General
Qualified Engineer or Senior Technician: engage from the equipment manufacturer
to supervise installation, start-up equipment, make necessary adjustments,
calibrations and tests in accordance with manufacturers instructions, and instruct
and train Employers personnel.
*
Embedded Pool Fittings and Piping

Installation: install all pool fittings and piping embedded under pool and in
concrete walls of pool and plant room during concreting.
Installation: a member of setting crew shall be present during concreting to
check grade and alignment of embedded fittings and pipework and to correct
any displacement before concrete has hardened.
Installation: lay embedded fittings and piping to proper elevation, line and
grade, and support and anchor during concreting.
Installation: adequately coat and plug fittings and piping to prevent damage
and ingress of concrete.
Earth Metal Fittings by connecting to pool reinforcing steel with copper wire
welded to fitting and reinforcement.
No-Leak Flanges: provide on pipe connections to inlet and drain fittings and
vacuum fittings within concrete pool wall.
Pipe Connections Through Plant Room Walls: to have no-leak flanges fitted
centrally in wall.
Equipment
Install in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Strainers: provide on suction of each pump.
Flow Meters: install on supply branch pipe to each filter from the pump to
indicate filtering and backwash flow rates.
Backwash Sight Glass Indicators: install on backwash pipe from each filter
to provide a visual check of backwash flow.
Chemical Feeders: of 15 mm pipes with block valves on each feeder.
Pool Side Accessories

Earth Metal Accessories by connecting them to pool reinforcing steel with
copper wire welded to accessory and reinforcement.
Page 11 of 12
B-
Tests
Hydrostatically Test pool piping as specified in Section 15950 - Testing &
Balancing to a pressure of 15 kg/cm2 applied for 24 hours.
*
Water Quality
Make chemical and bacterial analysis in accordance with procedures
recommended in the Standard Methods of the Examination of Water,
Sewage and Industrial Wastes of the American Public Health Association
insofar as these methods are applicable to swimming pool water.
*
Performance Tests
Carry out tests as necessary and as directed to demonstrate that equipment
meets the design requirements as noted on the Drawings and/or as specified.
3.02
PUMPS
A.
Shop Testing
Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with Hydraulic

Institute test codes as described in HI E.35.01, E.37.01,and E.39.01. In
addition, each pump shall be tested at five points of operation from shut-off
head to runout condition including the guaranteed pumps performance
point.
All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the design
pressure. There shall be no leakage during the one hour test period.
The manufacturer shall submit certificate including test data to show that
the pump meets performance specifications.
Inspection
The Contractor shall inspect each pump prior to installation to verify that pumps
are in conformance with these specifications.
C.
3.03
Installation
-
Pumps shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturers written

instructions.
If flexible coupling is used between the pump and its driver, shafts shall be
so supported and aligned as not to produce undesirable stresses and noise
during normal operation.
If oil or grease lubricated bearings are supplied with the pump, the oiler
shall be filled with the specified lubricating oil or bearings shall be prelubricated with specified grease prior to start-up.
Approved Manufacturers
AQUARIUS
WATER MASTER
EBD
EMCO
Or approved equal.
END OF SECTION
Page 12 of 12
SECTION 15486-FUEL GAS, LPG SYSTEM
FUEL GAS, LPG SYSTEM

SECTION 15486
1.01
PART 1 - GENERAL
a.
Drip legs: to comprise minimum 150 mm long nipple and cap connected to
bottom outlet of tee of same size as riser.
b.
Thread sealant: Scotch Brand No. 48 manufactured by 3M or approved equal.
c.
Valves 50 mm diameter and under to be plug type, semi-steel body with disc,
seat diaphragm and packing, resistant to action of LPG, 175 lb WOG rating,
wrench-operated with square head and with position of gate clearly indicated
on head. Each size of valve to be supplied complete with three operating
wrenches from factory.
d.
Valves over 65 mm diameter to be heavy duty ductile iron, globe type,

designed for LPG service, with spring loaded TFE chevron packing for
effective seal against leakage. Valve disc to be slip joint construction to stop
rotating when it touches body seat. Seat disc to be TFE.
e.
Valves 50mm diameter and under to be screwed, as manufactured by

Rockwell-Nordstrom Fig. 142 or approved equal.
f.
Valves over 65 mm diameter to be flanged, as manufactured by RockwellNordstrom fig. 143 or approved equal.
g.
Valves 50 mm diameter and under to be screwed, as manufactured by Fisher

No. N300T or approved equal.
h.
Flanged valves to be drilled to American 125 lb cast iron standards.
i.
Malleable iron threaded fittings shall be to ANSI B1603 class 150, standard
pattern for threaded joints, threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
j.
Steel fittings shall be ASTM A234, seamless or welded for welded joints.
k.
Wrought copper fittings shall be ANSI B16.22 stem lined pattern.
l.
Unions shall be ANSI B16.39 class 150 black malleable iron female patterns,
brass to iron seat; ground joint.
m.
Dielectric unions: ANSI B16.39, class 250, malleable iron and cast bronze with
threaded or soldered end connections.
n.
Solenoid valves shall be aluminum body, 240 volts AC, 50 Hz, class B
continuous duty molded coil Nema-4 enclosure electrically open and closed,
daul coils, normally closed UL listed and FM approved.
o.
Gas line pressure regulators, single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion resistant gas
pressure regulator with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator with threaded
ends for 50mm and smaller.
Page 1 of 5
p.
Gas pressure regulator installed on tank main pipe feeding building shall be
single stage type, designed to reduce tank pressure down to 10 psi water
column and to obtain pressure at appliances of 280 mm water column. It is to
have die cast aluminum alloy body and spring case, internal relief valve and 6
mm tapped and screened vent on low side. Relief valve to be factory set to start
to discharge at approximately 711 mm water column. Regulator seat to be
synthetic rubber, replaceable without disconnecting regulator from the line.
Regulator to be complete with mounting brackets. Obtain from one of the
following:
Fisher Controls Co.
Rockwell Mfg. Co.
q.
(U.S.A.)
(U.S.A.)
LPG Tank Fill Alarm Station

Tank alarm system shall be a buzzer/light combination actuated by high level
switch in LPG tanks.
Unit shall have ABS high in pact gray housing with polycarbonate transparent
cap, complete with bulb and clamp.
Unit shall be CE approved similar to Werma Model 481 or approved equal.
Fuel Gas Tank Monitor

Tank monitor shall be an integrated design electronic tank condition monitor
for fuel oil storage tank interfaced with the BMS and shall consist of the
following:
-
Capacitance sensing, 2 probe design, electronic level transducer for tank

top mounting, similar to simplex model TC-1.
Remote control panel located in Generator's room including power supply,

logic board, gauge, indicators and controls.
The sensor and control panel shall be interconnected via a 4-wire cable.
The indicator/controller module includes a direct reading, low level alarm,
rupture alarm indicators, output relays, power available and refill reminder
indicators.
Control power shall be 115 VAC, single phase 50 hertz with all necessary
transformers.
Tank monitor shall include the following alarms:
-
Low level alarm.

High level alarm.
Two user specified alarms from external inputs (e.g. tanks leak, line leak).
Field adjustable alarm, close on level drop.
Field adjustable alarm, close on level rise.
Page 2 of 5
Refill reminder.
Panel enclosure shall be NEMA 3R suitable for indoor or outdoor installation.

Tank monitor and related accessories shall be simplex model TC-4 or approved
equal.
s.
Level Switches in LPG Tank

Level switches installated in LPG tank all on one stem to give signal to BMS
and alarm station shall be of the type suitable for fuel gas with 2 level switches
as indicated on drawings. Mounting and stem material shall be of brass, float
shall be of polysulfone or polypropylene. Switches shall give signal for:
1.
Low level alarm
2.
High level alarm.
Grip rings shall be of copper and collar of brass Stem size shall be 5/16 inches
diameters of the adjustable type with length suitable for day tank height.
Level switch shall be UL listed, Thomas products LTD level and flow switches
mode 4000 or approved equal.
Low level switch and high level switch in LPG tank shall be as described
above but shall give low level signal to BMS and high level signal to give
alarm that tank is over filled with fuel oil by tanker and a signal to BMS.
Approved Manufacturer
-
Automatic Controls:
Honeywell.
Barber-Colman Co.
Johnson Controls Inc.
I.T.T Controls.
Thomas Products LTD
Simplex
Instruments:
March Instruments Co.
or approved equal.
1.02
GAS TANK
*
Tank shall be suitable for LPG services, designed and constructed in

accordance with ASME Code for unifired pressure vessels or other approved
international society and with NFPA No. 58 requirement.
Tank shall have a design working pressure of 1580 Kpa and test pressure of
2340 Kpa at factory.
Page 3 of 5
Tank shall be constructed of welded fire grain high strength steel. Tank shall
be painted at factory with one coat anti-corrosion primer and 2 coats flat white
machine epoxy enamel.
Tank shall supplied complete with filter valve, service valve, internal safety
relief valve, liquid level gauge, drain plug, pressure gauge, magnetic float
gauge and rain cap on relief valve vent pipe.
Filter valve, service valve and pressure gauge shall have special hood to protect
them from mechanical damage.
1.03
Regulators shall be provided with necessary strainers and vents and securely
mounted to tank.
High pressure piping between tank and regulators to be extra strong black
seamless steel.
Tank welds to be X-ray controlled with test certificate submitted from certified
welders and government officials.
WORKMANSHIP
a.
Standards execute workmanship in strict accordance with the standards of the

National Fire Protection .Association of the U.S. NFPA No. 54, 'Installation of
Gas Appliances Gas Piping 1969'. or approved equal international society.
b.
Install pipework at slope of not less than 9% with horizontal lines sloping
toward risers and from risers to appliances.
c.
Install pipework overhead and close to walls. Do not bury under buildings or
conceal in walls.
d.
Branch pipes are to be taken off from top or sides of horizontal lines.
e.
Changes in direction: make with fittings only. Do not bend pipes.
f.
Prohibited fittings: do not use unions. bushings, running threads or swing joints
made by combination of fittings.
g.
Flanged joints: use new gaskets only. If joint is broken and remade, destroy
used gasket so that it cannot be re-used.
h.
Outlets to appliances: locate far enough from floor. walls, slabs and ceilings to
permit proper use of wrenches without straining piping. Make with rigid pipe
only. Do not use hose of any kind.
j.
Mark valves clearly with metal tag to identify gas piping system.
k.
Drip legs: provide at bottom of all risers in locations readily accessible for
cleaning and emptying.
Page 4 of 5
1.04
1.05
1.06
TESTING
a.
Gas tightness: test piping by filling with air or inert gas such as carbon dioxide
or nitrogen. Do not use water or oxygen. Apply pressure from pressurised
cylinder or with air pump. Measure pressure with mercury manometer or
inclined gauge calibrated in increments not greater than 0.1 psi (0.07 g/mm2)
Isolate pressure source during test
b.
Gas tightness: test piping to 1 1/2 times normal working pressure or30 psig (10
g/mm2), whichever is greater. There is to be no drop in shut-in pressure for
two hours. Test for leaks by applying soap solution to joints. fittings and
valves. Do not use flame to look for leaks
COMMISSIONING
a.
Check for gas tightness: prior to turning on gas, close all shut-off valves at
appliances. Check that all openings are capped or plugged and that pipe work
is complete.
b.
Check for gas tightness: turn on gas, attach manometer calibrated in increments
of 2.5 mm water column to appliance outlet and open main shut-off valve
momentarily. No discernible drop in pressure is to occur during 3 minutes.
Should pressure drop he noted, identify cause, make necessary repairs and
repeat tests until perfectly tight system is assured.
c.
Purge system after checking for tightness by disconnecting pilot piping of

appliances at outlet of pilot valve. Do not purge piping into combustion
chamber of appliance. Do not purge piping into confined spaces or areas where
there are sources of ignition unless precautions are taken to perform this
operation safely by ventilation of space. Control of purging rate and
elimination of hazardous conditions
GAS DETECTION SYSTEM

Supply and install two stage gas detection system in kitchen areas to shut down on gas
supply in case of excessive gas leakage. Gas detection system shall be complete but not
limited to the following main accessories:
-
Alarm sounder.
Gas detectors.
Battery.
Control Panel.
Electric gas shut off valve.
All equipment and accessories shall be UL listed.

In case of detection of slight gas leakage alarm shall be sound. If excessive gas leakage
indicated gas supply shut down. Gas detection system shall be as manufactured by
Notifier or approved equal. Gas detection system shall be interlocked with BMS system
and fire alarm system.
END OF SECTION
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 15540 HEATING PLANT
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a.
Equipment to have factory applied finish coat of machinery enamel unless

otherwise specified.
b.
Warranty: equipment is to carry manufacturer's warranty against defects in

materials and workmanship for a period of one year after shipment.
c.
Furnish equipment supplier with all necessary data such as available electric
current characteristics, maximum and minimum ambient temperatures and
humidity, altitude, water quality and other particular site conditions so that
manufacturer will supply equipment to specifically suit Site conditions
particularly for necessary derating in capacity for altitude and temperature,
necessary class of insulation for electric motors, special construction for water
quality, high temperatures and humidities, sandy environment etc.
d.
Electric motors are to conform to the specification for electric motors given under
"Electrical Works for Mechanical Systems" and with requirements given under
equipment specifications for particular motor driving that equipment.
e.
Equipment is to be supplied from factory complete with all necessary accessories

and components that are standard items of manufacturer or as recommended by
him for good, safe and efficient operation of equipment irrespective of whether
these are specified or not.
f.
Pumps are to be selected so that their operating point falls nearest to the point of
maximum efficiency obtained from manufacturer's published data. Do not select
pumps to operate near the end of their curve.
g.
Horsepower ratings of electric motors of pumps are to ensure non-overloading

throughout the capacity range of pump.
h.
Shop drawings for pumps: submit the following for approval, for each pump prior
to shipment:
certified performance curves showing job number, customer, customer order
number, pump designation number shown on the Drawings, date of manufacture,
model number, pump size, impeller diameter, impeller type, maximum impeller
diameter pump can accommodate, rpm, flow-head characteristic curve, consumed
horsepower curve, pump efficiency curve, cross-sectional drawing showing major
components with parts numbers and parts list.
i.
Shop drawings for pumps: submit the following for approval, for each pump prior
to shipment:
Outline dimensional drawing showing overall dimensions, location of foundation
bolt holes and size, location and rating of suction and discharge nozzles,
recommended list of spare parts, installation, operation and maintenance
instruction manual, details and wiring diagrams of pump controllers, starters,
Page 1/5
controls or other electrical device or accessory special instructions for installation

and connection of electrical device, control or accessory.
J.
Vent pipe on fuel oil tank: extend to nearest outside wall of building; carry up at
least 3 m above grade with open end at least 1 m away from any building
opening. Pipe to be sloped back to tank with no traps and adequately supported.
End of pipe to have gooseneck bend or approved weatherproof vent cap.
PART 2 - CAST IRON HEATING BOILER

Type: cast iron, sectional type, designed for firing by forced draught burner, with
pressurized combustion chamber. It is to be factory assembled, sealed and hydrostatically
tested to 6 bars for an operating pressure of 6 bars at 110 deg. C.
Combustion Chamber: to be water cooled by being completely surrounded with water. It
is not to require firebrick or refractory except at limited locations such as on rear wall and
at bottom in front of burner to evaporate oil drippings from burner nozzle.
Boiler Sections: high grade cast iron, ribbed to provide sinuous path for combustion gases
for best efficiency of heat transfer. Boiler to have integrally cast supporting legs to
permit it to rest directly on concrete support with uniform distribution of load throughout
length. Boiler to be assembled with steel tie rods and nuts and externally sealed with
special high temperature mastic for complete gas tightness.
Access Doors: cast iron cleanout doors to be provided on front section to permit easy
access to internal combustion gas passages. Hinged cast iron burner mounting door to be
provided for full access to combustion chamber. Doors to be sealed gas-tight with
asbestos rope gaskets, stud bolts and brass nuts.
Burner Mounting Door: to be fitted with thick steel front plate for securing burner,
supplied undrilled and provided with internal frame to support factory supplied
refractory. Hole for burner nozzle to be formed in refractory. Door to have Pyrex
observation port with cover for inspecting flame condition.
Accessories: boiler to have cast iron rear smoke hood with horizontal smoke outlet fitted
to boiler with asbestos rope gasket to ensure permanent gas-tight seal. Necessary threaded
connections to be integrally cast with boiler sections for boiler fill, boiler drain, altitude
gauge, thermometer and two thermostats. Connections to be plugged at factory.
Accessories: the following are to be packed separately for field installation: all-around
fiberglass insulated heavy gauge sheet steel jacket, sectionalized for fitting to boiler
without removal of door fittings or pipe connections, cast iron flanged outlet and return
headers with steel counter flanges, gaskets, bolts and nuts, brass separable socket wells
for insertion of thermometer and thermostat bulbs into boiler and decorative control panel
designed for fitting on boiler.
Control Panel: to contain the following: burner on-off switch, burner signal lights for
operation and malfunction, boiler water thermometer with remote bulb and adequate
length capillary tube, two adjustable boiler water operating thermostats with remote bulb
and adequate length capillary tube, with manual reset, excess temperature release button
Page 2/5
for high limit thermostat and numbered terminals strip for electrical connections to mains,
burner and heating control devices.
Maintenance Equipment: boiler to be provided complete with set of cleaning brushes with
handle, special tools required for maintenance and installation, gun for application of
sealing mastic and recommended quantity of sealing mastic in sealed containers required
for field sealing of joints.
PART 3 - SMOKE PIPE AND BREECHING

Construction: fabricate from 3 mm thick black steel plate, welded, stiffened and
reinforced for maximum rigidity.
Cleanout doors: provide adequate number of approved design.
PART 4 - FUEL TANK

Tank to be rectangular, fabricated from 4mm thick high quality black steel plate welded
on both internal and external seams.
Hydrostatically test tank at factory to pressure of one atmosphere held for 24 hours. All
welds to be proven sound.
Manhole to be 500 mm diameter on top of tank, constructed from 6 mm thick side, flange
and cover welded to tank. Cover to be fixed to flange with 1.5 mm thick asbestos
composition ring gasket and 20 mm diameter machine bolts 40 mm long with nuts
equally spaced around 600 mm diameter bolt circle.
Connections: tank to have necessary female threaded connections comprised of black
forged steel pipe couplings fitted through holes cut in tank and welded all around inside
and outside tank.
Connections made to top of tank, except vent connection, are to be extended down to
within 150 mm of tank bottom with seamless black steel pipes of same size as connections and well braced to tank inside walls. Vent connection is not to extend more than 20
mm into tank.
Fill and sounding line connections to have hinged lockable caps with 50 mm female
threaded bottom inlets as manufactured by Buckeye, No. 628 or approved equal.
Tank level gauge: remote reading hydrostatic type, with readout at the supervisory remote
data centre.
Local tank level gauge: 20mm gauge glass of correct length, complete with 20mm gauge
cocks, drain cock, and gauge glass protector as manufactured by Hatterseley Fig. 160,
with Fig. 180 Reliance gauge glass protector or approved equal.
Paint finish: tank, manhole and connections to be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, slag,
oil, grease and all foreign matter by sand blasting or wire brushing down to base metal
Page 3/5
and painted on outside only with two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats of
emulsified asphalt.
PART 5 - OPEN EXPANSION TANK

Tank: to be open rectangular, fabricated from 3 mm thick black steel plate of welded
construction. Provide tank with cover of same thickness hung on approved heavy duty
hinges.
Connections: tank to have female threaded pipe coupling connections as indicated.
Support: tank to have welded 50 x 50 x 5 mm structural angle support all around tank
bottom and 200 mm high 50 x 50 x 5 mm angle legs with 100 x 100 x 6 mm steel sole
plates welded on.
Paint Finish: wire brush tank and support down to base metal and paint inside and outside
with two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats of heat resistant aluminum paint.
PART 6 - CLOSED EXPANSION TANK

Tank to be closed, cylindrical, welded, pressure vessel type, with fixed spherical ends,
fabricated from high quality black steel plate for design working pressure of 1030 kPa at
150 deg. C. It is to be hydrostatically tested at factory to 1 1/2 times design working
pressure.
Tank to have rubber composition spherical balloon diaphragm to prevent system water
coming into contact with air cushion. Tank to be provided with means for easy removal
of diaphragm for inspection and for inspecting inner wall of tank.
Accessories: 25 mm female threaded expansion line connection on bottom spherical end
and appropriate air valve for field adjustment of cushion pressure to suit cold fill pressure.
Support: provide adequate legs for floor mounting tank vertically.
Paint: tank to be painted at factory with durable enamel paint on outside and with
adequate treatment against corrosion on inside.
Tank to be precharged at factory with air at cold fill cushion pressure indicated on the
Drawings.
PART 7 - EMERGENCY FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE

Supply and install fuel shut off valves at fuel pipes crossing the fuel storage room to the
boiler room.
Fuel shut off valve shall be solenoid type controlled by fire alarm.
Page 4/5
PART 8 - TESTING OF THE SYSTEM
a.
Plant Testing
Once the pipe laying has been completed, it is necessary to proceed with the plants
hydraulic test. Connecting to the distribution collector, the various circuits are filled while
taking care to vent the air sacks. The manual pressure pump will be connected to the
collector and, choosing the various circuits, they will be tested individually leaving the
plant in pressure (10 bars) for at least 24 hours. A physiological drop of the hydrostatic
pressure can occur according to variation of the temperature of (10C and can change the
pressure by 1 bar on the circuits.
Once the hydraulic trial is finished, proceed to covering the pipes with building mix,
mixed with the additive for thermal plants.
Pre-trial
Duration of 30 minutes.
While filling and venting the air, the pressure (10 bar) of each single ring should be
checked and restored every 15 minutes. Verify eventual leaks. At the end of the pre-trial,
the hydrostatic pressure should be stable.
Final Trial
Duration of 2 hours.
Recharge the plant with 10 bars of pressure which, over the duration of the final trial,
should undergo a maximum drop of 0.3 bar.
Testing Protocol
It is advisable to have a protocol that attests that the trials have been performed for each
single plant.
Notes:
b.
The testing pump pressure gauge should allow control of 0.1 bar variations.
c.
If severe temperatures are present (from +5C), it is possible to carry out the test
by adding antifreeze fluids to the water to protect the plant from eventual
temperature decreases and sub sequential formations of ice inside the pipes that
could become damaging to the plant itself.
Page 5/5
SECTION 15680 AIR COOLED CHILLERS
AIR-COOLED CHILLERS
SECTION 15680
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of Work: The extent of air-cooled chiller work is indicated by drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section. Each unit is defined to include (but
not by way of limitation), hermetic screw compressor, evaporator, air-cooled
condenser, controls and panel including gages and indicating lights, auxiliary
components, accessories and interconnecting piping. Required work also includes
additional requirements as compressor and fan, motor starters, vibration isolators and
seismic (earthquake) restrainers, evaporator insulation, anchor bolts and all required
accessories by the manufacturer.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: A firm regularly engaged in manufacture of air-cooled chillers, of

types, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been successfully used in
similar service for not less than five years. Chiller Manufacturer must be ISO9001
registered.
B.
Certification: Certify performance of chiller at full-load scheduled values for

capacity, power load, chilled water leaving temperature and flow and fouling factors.
Include a report of expected performance at part-load conditions, for 80%, 60%, 40%
and 20% of scheduled full-load capacity. Show data in terms of load versus actual
capacity.
For certified and expected performance capacities, include: Total heat rejection
values (including effects of transmission for purge and refrigerant transfer systems)
total power-input requirements, evaporator tube velocities.
C.
Typical Performance Data: Prepare data for (ANSI/ARI 590) schedules full-load
capacity using "standard rating conditions" , part-load at 80%, 60% 40%, and 20% of
scheduled full-load capacity using "application rating conditions".
D.
Certify that sound pressure level will not exceed scheduled values when tested in
accordance with ARI 575. Include report of expected sound pressure level with
chiller operating at scheduled capacity, and include also report of expected sound
pressure level for each schedule capacity including part-load capacities.
E.
Ratings: Rate chiller in accordance with ARI 590.
F.
Safety: Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
G.
UL Labels: Provide chiller electrical components which have been listed and labeled
by Underwriters laboratories.
NEMA compliance: Comply with applicable portions of National Electrical
Manufacturers Association standards pertaining to chiller motors and motor energy
management.
H.
Page 1 of 12
I.
1.03
Standards for Design, Fabrication and Installation: Except as otherwise indicated,

comply with following:
1.
ASME boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 8.

Provide ASME stamp on chiller showing compliance with ASME Code.
2.
National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70).
3.
ANSI B31.1 Power Piping code.
4.
ASHRAE Standard 90-75, as applicable to air-cooled type water chillers.

Show compliance with, but not by way of limitation, minimum energy
efficiency ratio (EER).
SUBMITTALS
Submit manufacturer's data on air-cooled chillers, including certified drawings
showing overall dimensions of complete assembly, operating weights, foundation
requirements, sizes, and locations of connection, accessories, auxiliary support
requirements, and parts lists. Include the following information:
1.
Performance certifications and reports.
2.
Wiring diagrams showing electric service for chiller electrical components,

safety devices and indicator lights.
3.
Written instructions for installation and assembly.
4.
Written listing of limiting conditions for chiller operation.
5.
Written operating instructions including start-up, routine and normal

operations, regulations and controls and shut-down for emergency.
6.
Written service instructions including manufacturer's recommendation on

stocking of spare parts, including gaskets and O-rings.
7.
Report signed-by chiller manufacturer's representative, indicating that work

has been properly installed in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
8.
Tool kit, including manufacturer's special tools and non-standard wrenches

required for servicing chiller.
9.
Provide written warranty on air-cooled chiller work, agreeing to replace/repair

inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage,
breakage, improper assembly and failure to performs required. Include
separate product warranties as indicated (if any) for specific parts or products
in the work. Provide warranty signed by the Contractor.
10.
Include manufacturer's standard product warranty, covering chiller operation

under normal conditions and use, where installed, operated and maintained in
Page 2 of 12
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide product warranty period

terminating 12 months after start-up of the chiller installation.
11.
Special warranty period is 2 years after date of substantial completion.
Page 3 of 12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
SCREW TYPE CHILLERS
A)
General
-
The Contractor shall supply and install factory assembled air-cooled packaged
cooling only chiller. The number and capacity of which shall be as indicated in
the capacity schedule shown on the drawings.
Each machine shall consist of at least two accessible hermetic fully modulating
screw compressors air-cooled condenser, evaporator, interconnecting
refrigerant piping, controls, safety devices, accessories, and control power
transformer as applicable to limit control voltage to 240 volts maximum. No
phase to neutral voltage shall be required. Each compressor shall have its
independent circuit, evaporator, condenser, microprocessor-based controls and
a unit mounted motor starter.
The machine shall be completely charged at the factory with Refrigerant R

134a or R407c. All factory wiring and piping shall be contained within the
machine enclosure. All electrical components shall be protected from the
weather.
The refrigerant circuit components shall include hot gas muffler, high side
pressure relief valve, liquid line shut off valve filter drier, liquid line sight
glass, liquid line solenoid valve and thermal expansion valve.
Each machine shall be enclosed in a sound attenuating, galvanized steel

casing, zinc phosphatized, with corrosion resistant finish, and shall be
mounted on spring type vibration isolators. Unit shall have primary coating
and an acrylic weather proof paint.
Each machine shall be capable of operating satisfactorily at low outdoor air

temperatures.
Chiller manufacturer shall provide for each chiller a certified factory run test
report.
The manufacturer shall perform all field testing, balancing and final adjustment
of the refrigeration machines in accordance with the applicable provisions of
the relevant ASHRAE Standards.
The following data shall be compiled and certified:
Temperature of chilled water "In and Out".

Chilled Water flow (gpm).
Pressure drop in chiller (Feet of Water).
Operating power consumption from measured voltage, amperes and power
factor.
Page 4 of 12
B)
Any part of the machines or system failing to meet the contract requirements
shall be adjusted, repaired or replaced.
Each chiller shall have protection grills.
Chiller casing shall be capable of withstanding 500 hrs salt spray test in
accordance with ASTMB-117 standard.
Each packaged unit shall be factory equipped to connect to only one electrical
power feeder with the necessary built-in circuit breakers, and one main
disconnect switch. Disconnect switch shall be accessible from outside the
chiller without opening the panel door.
Each packaged unit shall be supplied with spring type vibration isolators
flexible enough to dampen any vibrations supplied by chiller manufacturer.
Each chiller shall have sound proof enclosure on compressor, condenser fan air
intake to maintain noise level of 60 dBA,10m away from chiller. Condenser
fan shall be of the low RPM type. Sound proof enclosure shall be factory
assembled and designed. Contractor shall provide additional sound treatment
around chiller to attain a maximum noise level of 30NC in the nearest room
included in the unit rate of the chiller.
Each packaged unit shall have a microprocessor control unit to provide all the
control and safety functions of the chiller with main circuit breaker for each
chiller.
Chiller shall be connected to building management system with pumps and all
other equipment as indicated in electrical drawings. Chiller shall have all the
necessary interface to connect to the selected BMS during execution.
A computer interface shall be provided for all the chiller including all control
and electrical works. The remote PC interface shall be connected to all chillers
at the same time and shall display all the data available at each chiller
microprocessor. This interface shall support the logging of alarms and all
operating parameters. This item is provisional incase chillers interface with the
selected BMS is not possible.
The chiller supplier shall train the project maintenance staff on the installed
chiller and the end of the training the attendees shall receive a certificate from
manufacturer for the operation and maintenance of chiller.
Compressor
-
The compressor shall be of the accessible hermetic screw compressor direct

drive 2950 RPM and 50 Hz with sound proof enclosure.
The compressor shall have separately housed pressure lubricated rolling

element bearing groups at each end of both rotors.
The compressor shall have fully modulating capacity control by use of a slide
valve in the rotor section of the compressors positioned by hydraulic action.
Page 5 of 12
The compressor shall have squirrel cage two pole induction motor, suction gas
cooled
Compressor shall be provided with oil separator and filtration devices.
The compressor shall have sound attenuating enclosure.
Motor and starter shall be in accordance with the requirements of these

specifications regarding Electrical Equipment.
Compressor motor shall be protected by internal overload thermisters.
Each compressor shall be equipped with the following controls and instruments
and their respective connections:
C)
Part winding starters.

Built-in automatic unloading capacity control unloaded starting.
High and low pressure cutout with manual reset for the high pressure cut
out and automatic reset for the low-pressure cutout.
Internal discharge check valve to prevent reverse rotation at shut down.
Oil pressure failure cut out with manual reset.

Suction and discharge refrigerant pressure gauges.
Suction and discharge shut off valves.
Oil Heater
Oil pressure gauge.
Oil drain valves.
The gauges shall comply with these specifications regarding instruments.
The compressor shall have hot gas discharge muffler and liquid line sight glass
and filter drier all as recommended by supplier.
Evaporator
-
The evaporator shall be of the direct expansion shell-and-tube type, with

removable heads.
The shell shall be constructed and tested in accordance with ASME Code for
Unfired Pressure Vessels.
The tubes shall be made of seamless copper tubes of the individually

replaceable type. Support sheets shall be provided to prevent sagging of the
tubes.
The shell shall be completely insulated with 2"(50mm) thick urethane foam
insulation covered with a sheet steel jacket.
The shell shall be provided with an electric heater cable under the insulation.
Page 6 of 12
The evaporator shall be supplied with the following controls and instruments
and their respective connections:
D)
E)
Liquid line solenoid shut-off valve(s) and strainer(s).

Thermostatic expansion valve(s).
Control thermostat.
Low limit thermostat (Freeze protection).
Thermometer to measure the refrigerant gas temperature.
Thermometers (well type) at the chilled water inlet and outlet.
Pressure gauge to measure the refrigerant pressure.
Air-Cooled Condenser
-
The Condenser shall be air-cooled, upward air discharge type.
Each condenser fan shall be in its own compartment to eliminate cross flow of
condenser air during fan cycling.
The condenser coil shall be made of seamless copper tubes, with aluminum
fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. With unti-corrosion paint factory
applied.
The condenser shall have an integral sub cooler.
The condenser fans shall be of the propeller type, constructed of corrosion

resistant blades such as heavy gauge aluminum. The fan and drive shall be held
in proper alignment. Fan assemblies shall be provided with heavy gauge, close
mesh, electrogalvanized fan guards.
Fan motors shall be drip-proof type, with built-in over load protection, and
starting contactors. Motors shall be mounted on vibration isolators, and
provided with lubricated ball bearings.
Starter Panel
Chiller shall include a starter panel containing motor starter, disconnect switches
with fuses, 3 phase current transforment for motor overload protection.
F)
a)
Control Panel
Control panel shall be a microprocessor unit control module that provides all the
control and safety functions including startup and shut down, leaving chilled water
control, compressor and electronic expansion valve modulation, fans sequencing, antirecycle logic, automatic lead/lag compressor starting and load limiting. Unit protective
functions shall include loss of chilled water flow, evaporator freezing, loss of
refrigerant, low and high refrigerant pressure, reverse rotation, compressor starting and
running over current, phase loss, phase unbalance, phase reversal and loss of oil flow.
The unit shall include a menu driven digital display that indicate the chilled water
setpoint, current limit setpoint, leaving chilled water temperature, evaporator and
condenser refrigerant pressures and temperatures.
Page 7 of 12
b)
the microprocessor shall have an LCD type display with a minimum of 32 characters
with all messages in English. Coded messages and LED displays are not acceptable.
LCD display to be with light-emitting diode back light for outdoor viewing of data.
The control panel section shall include high and low pressure gauges.
Microprocessor shall be able to equalize the number of starts and the operatings of
each compressor in the chiller and to alternative between compressors to have equal
running hours and start ups.
The microprocessor shall be able to display the following readings.
-
Entering and leaving chilled water temperature.

Ambient air temprature.
Evaporator and condensing refrigerant temperatures and pressures.
Compressor suction temperature.
Present RLA for each compressor.
Present line voltage.
Compressor starts and running hours.
Active set points :
Chilled water set point.
Current limit set point.
Low ambient lockout set point.
Part failure diagnostics:
Water temperature sensors
Refrigerant temperature sensors
Compressor contactors.
Over 90 diagnostic and operating conditions.
Page 8 of 12
1.
Microprocessor to support the following functions:
2.
Password protection for critical parameters.

Automatic control of compressor start/stop and load/unload.
Automatic pump down at start-up and shut-down.
Automatic control of anti-coincidence and anti-recycle timers.
Automatic control of condenser fans, and evaporator pump.
Water temperature control by monitoring the leaving and entering water
temperatures.
Soft load function to prevent the system from operating at full load during
the chilled water pull-down period.
Auto restart after a power failure.
Safety shutdowns shall be date and time stamped with system temperatures
and pressures recorded. At least six previous occurrences shall be kept in
memory.
Discharge pressure control through intelligent cycling of condenser fans.
Pro-active compressor unloading in response to high discharge pressure or
low evaporator pressure.
Operating data or system fault shutdown history printout from a printer via
an RS-232 port.
System safeties shall cause individual compressor systems to perform autoreset shut-down. Manual reset required after the third trip in 90 minutes.
Safeties to include : high discharge pressure, low suction pressure, high/low
motor current, high/low differential oil pressure, high oil temperature, and
compressor motor protector, compressor motor protector shall protect
against damage due to : low or high input current, phase reversal (reverse
rotation), current unbalance, phase loss, thermal overload of windings, and
low voltage.
Automatic control of alarm contacts for: low leaving chilled water
temperature, low voltage, and per compressor circuit: high discharge
pressure, low suction pressure, low or high motor current, low or high
differential oil pressure, and high oil pressure.
Microprocessor to include the following for connection to the BMS:
On/off status contacts.

Run signal contacts for each compressor.
Demand load limit set point to be adjustable through the BMS using a010vDC or 4-20mA signal.
General fault contact.
Shall receive remote Start/Stop dry contact signal.
3. The microprocessor shall display the following in addition to the data listed on page
15680-6.
Each circuit suction, discharge, and oil pressures and temperatures.

Each compressor capacity control valve position.
Fan operation.
Last six faults-shutdown data.
Page 9 of 12
G)
Cutout status and set-points for: supply water temperature, low suction
pressure, high discharge pressure, high oil temperature, low and high
ambient temperature, phase rotation safety, and low leaving chilled water
temperature, compressor motor current percent limit, fan control discharge
pressure set point.
Training for chillers:
Provide training for personnel. Training to include but not limited to:
i. Unit operation and maintenance.
ii. Unit theory of operation and trouble shooting methods for all
components.
iii. Service of all components down to compressor service and
microprocessor boards replaced.
iv. Checking unit for correct refrigerant and oil charge.
v. Unit refrigerant and oil charging and refrigerant recovery.
Page 10 of 12
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, install air-cooled chiller work, including

components and controls required for chiller operation, in accordance with chiller
manufacturer's instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that
chiller equipment complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.
B.
Locate chillers in general position indicated in relation to other work. Position

chillers with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, including
clearance for cleaning and replacement of tubes and clearance for component
replacement.
C.
Install chiller on vibration isolation mounts and earthquake restrainers as herein

before in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated.
D.
Charge chiller with refrigerant in quantity recommended by chiller manufacturer.

Bleed-out non-condensable gases. Test chiller refrigerant system for leakage in
manner recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Install pressure relief system in compliance with governing regulations, to vent

refrigerant in manner indicated.
F.
Install auxiliary piping, solenoid valves, shut-off valves, protective devices, water
strainers and controls within chiller work, and for ancillary systems. Comply with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
G.
Interlock flow switches with chiller controls in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, except as otherwise indicated.
H.
Paint damaged and abraded factory finish with touch-up paint matching factory
finish.
I.
Install gages in positions where machine vibrations will not interfere with taking
readings.
J.
Grounding:
components.
3.02
EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK
Provide positive, equipment ground for chiller equipment and
Observe installation of other work (related and connected to chiller work) and after
completion check for inadequacies and protect operation and performance of chiller
work to suit chiller manufacturer's requirements and to the Engineer satisfaction and
approval, do not start chiller work until inadequacies have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer.
Page 11 of 12
3.03

Manufacturer's Supervision: Chiller manufacturer shall supervise field assembly (if
any) and installation of chiller work, with a factory-trained technical service
representative, for a minimum of 2 working days, plus one additional day for each
chiller unit in excess of one. Prepare manufacturer's written report of installation.
Include leak testing, evacuation, dehydration, vacuum pumping, and charging in
scope of supervision by manufacturer's representative.
3.04
CHILLER START-UP
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, start-up chiller in accordance with chiller

manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Sustained Operation: Do not place chiller in sustained operation prior to initial

balancing of mechanical systems affected by chiller operation. Refer to requirements
of Division 15 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing.
C.
Cooperate with other trades of other work during the testing, adjusting, balancing and
start-up of mechanical systems.
3.05
TESTING
General: Except as otherwise indicated, test chiller in accordance with ANSI/ARI
Standard 590.
END OF SECTION
Page 12 of 12
SECTION 15710 HEAT EXCHANGERS
HEAT EXCHANGERS
SECTION 15710
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes plate heat exchangers for HVAC applications.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate dimensions, weights,
loads, and required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection.
B.
Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options:
Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional
requirements of heat exchangers and are based on the specific equipment indicated. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
B.
ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

1.
Alf Laval Thermal, Inc.
2.
API Heat Transfer Inc.
3.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
4.
Flat Plate, Inc.
5.
Invensys APV, Inc.
6.
ITT Industries; Bell & Gossett.
Page 1 of 3
7.
8.
9.
2.2
Mueller, Paul Company.

Polaris Plate Heat Exchangers.
Tranter PHE, Inc.
PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A.
Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, fixed and movable end
plates, tie rods, plates, and one-piece gaskets.
B.
Configuration: Brazed assembly consisting of two end plates, one with nozzles, and patternembossed plates.
C.
End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel with steel tie-rods.
D.
Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless-steel tie-rods.
E.
Piping Connections: Flanged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural
rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
HEAT EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A.
3.3
Install heat exchangers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. Install piping
connections to allow service and maintenance of heat exchangers.
C.
Install piping with threaded or flanged connections at heat exchangers.
D.
Install shutoff valves at heat exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
E.
Install relief valves on heat exchanger heated-fluid connection.
3.4
Drawings
CLEANING
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
Page 2 of 3
3.5
COMMISSIONING
A.
Verify that heat exchangers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
B.
Adjust flows and controls to deliver specified performance.
C.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers as specified below:
1.
2.
3.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining heat exchangers.
Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
Schedule training with Owner, through Engineer, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
END OF SECTION
Page 3 of 3
SECTION 15801 AIR DISTRIBUTION
AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 15801
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
Section 15200: Noise and Vibration Control.
C.
D.
Section 15800: General HVAC Requirements.
E.
Section 15900: Automatic Controls.
F.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide air distribution equipment and system as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein.
B.
Work incorporated in this section includes:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.03
Air handling Units and Accessories.

Fan Coil Units.
Fans.
Filters.
Ductwork and Fittings.
Grilles and Diffusers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Codes and Standards.

1.
2.
3.
B.
Unit fans shall be tested and performance rated in accordance with the
current AMCA standards.
Unit coils shall be ARI certified and labeled.
Electric heating coil shall be UL listed and labeled.
Manufacturer's Qualifications
1.
Manufacturer shall be presently engaged in the manufacture of

material and equipment similar to that specified herein. In addition,
manufacturer must have the necessary experience, technical
qualifications, facilities, and engineering organization to undertake and
execute all the required work.
2.
The manufacturer shall be approved.
Page 1 of 43
1.04
3.
Manufacturer shall have not less than five (5) years experience in
manufacturing the system specified herein, and will have supplied and
have in operation at least 5 systems similar in magnitude to the system
proposed for this installation.
4.
Manufacturer must be able to demonstrate a sufficient inventory to

assure readily available replacement parts as such items become
necessary.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
1.
Description literature for each of the actual proposed equipment to be

used including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Shop Drawings
1.
Shop drawings for each of the actual proposed equipment shall include
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1.05
Capacity
Operating Pressure Ranges.
Pressure Losses.
Fluid Flows.
Test Reports.
Certificates of approval including noise level ratings for fans
and terminal units.
Operation and Maintenance Data.
Any Other Technical Data.
Working or Manufacturing Drawings.

Calculations.
Installation Details.
Connections By Other Services.
Wiring and Control Diagrams.
Accessories available indicating those included.
Pictures and System Diagrams.
REFERENCES
A.
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE) Guide and Data Books.
B.
Underwriters Laboratory (UL)

1.
C.
Standard 181: Standard for Factory Made Air Duct Materials and Air
Duct Connectors.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1.
Standards 90 A: Standard for installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems.
Page 2 of 43
D.
E.
2.
Standard 90 B: Standards for Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air

Conditioning Systems.
3.
Standards 101: Code for Safety to life in Buildings and Structures.
Sheet metal and air Conditioning Contractors National Association,

Inc.(SMACNA).
1.
Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
2.
High Pressure Duct Construction Standards.
Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC)

1.
The international Conference of Building Officials.
PART 2 - GENERAL
2.01
AIR HANDLING UNITS

A.
General
1.
Packaged central station air handling units shall be generally modular

type, horizontal, arranged for vertical or horizontal air discharge. All
component parts shall be selected, manufactured and assembled by the
same suppliers.
2.
All sections shall be of double skinned construction with the exception

of the normal filter sections which shall be constructed in such a
manner as to prevent leakage or passing of air, round the sides of the
filter frames.
3.
Equipment design shall be such that the selected filter media, bearings
insulation etc. will be suitable for the ambient temperature existing
within the unit duct when heating coils are operating at their working
temperature.
4.
All lubrication points shall be easily accessible with external

lubrication nipples provided to enable recharging of bearing whilst
equipment is running.
5.
Lifting lugs shall be provided to enable lifting of equipment by crane

and to assist in the positioning of sections at site.
6.
Each unit shall be constructed to prevent drumming, distortion and

vibration and shall be of a modular construction for ease of handling
and replacement of sections.
Page 3 of 43
B.
C.
Casings
1.
Construction shall consist of a frame fabricated from heavy gage steel

for maximum strength and rigidity with minimum strength and rigidity
with minimum weight.
2.
Unit Framework: Frame construction shall be of sufficient strength and

rigidity to support the components and fittings forming the air handling
unit.
3.
The unit casing shall be suitable stiffened to conform to the pressure

characteristics of the system under all operating conditions.
4.
Inspection panels shall be provided to facilitate access to all sections of

the unit. Panels shall be easily removable. Where access doors are
provided these shall be of the quick release type.
5.
Where applicable, fixed and removable sections and panels shall be

insulated with an approved fire resistant thermal insulation, and double
skinned.
6.
All components shall be phosphatized to resist corrosion. The primer

shall be an enamel finish to provide an exceptionally hard, rust
resistant finish. This shall be followed by an air-dried enamel top coat,
applied before assembly. Finally, after assembly, the complete unit
shall be given an external overspray of enamel for additional
protection.
Insulation
1.
D.
All fan sections, humidifier sections, coil sections and mixing box
sections shall be insulated using 50 mm thick, panel, with mineral
wool 80 kg/m3.
Double Skin Construction

1.
Sections shall be double skinned using 50 mm thick panel with 50

kg/m3 mineral wool and manufactured from solid galvanized steel
sheet with outer panel 1.0 mm thick & perforated galvanized sheet
metal 0.6 mm thick for inner panel. All panels associated with each
section shall be double formed, and the cavity filled with 50mm
mineral wool. Maximum noise transmitted to surroundings should not
exceed 55 dbA. Contractor to provide all necessary sound proof
protection externally & internally to unit and surrounding false ceiling,
walls and slabs to attain specified noise level. Material used shall be
mineral wool 50 kg/m3 with perforated galvanized sheet metal
protection. All sound proof study shall be done by a specialized firm
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Page 4 of 43
E.
F.
Fan Section
1.
Fans shall be double width double inlet centrifugal type with airfoil
blades to suit the pressure and operating characteristics specified. Inlet
guide vanes shall be provided where applicable.
2.
Fan housing shall be constructed from mild steel sheet with angle
stiffeners utilized to prevent vibration and drumming. The casing shall
be constructed to a truly volute form.
3.
Casing shall have rigid cone inlets truly circular and free from dents.
All fan housings shall be welded on assembly irrespective of pressure
and air volume to provide a rigid airtight housing.
4.
Impellers shall be robustly fabricated from steel sheet, with a cast iron
boss and fabricated steel backplate. The boss shall be bored and
keywayed to the shaft. Impellers shall be rigidly braced to ensure
concentricity and eliminate vibration. They shall be statically and
dynamically balanced on their shafts after assembly.
5.
Shafts shall be cold finished, turned, and polished steel sized so the
first critical speed is at least 25% greater than the operating fan speed.
Flats or keyways shall be machined on to the shaft to provide a means
of securing the impeller. Keyways shall be provided for all driving
pulleys.
6.
Bearings shall be self-aligning, grease lubricated ball or roller type

with extended greasing points carried to outside the casing. Minimum
average life of bearing shall be 200,000 hours. Bearings shall be
located on either side of the fan wheel.
7.
All parts of fans and motors liable to deterioration shall be protected

by paint or grease before delivery to site.
8.
fan performance data shall be in accordance with ARI standard 430-66.
9.
The fan and motor assembly is to be mounted on a combined frame,

isolated from the fan section by rubber-in shear isolators and flexible
fan connection.
10.
A double ended fan shaft and extra mounting base for standby motor
shall be provided where indicated.
Motors and Drives

1.
Motors shall be unit mounted, internally arranged on fan bases with

tensioners to provide adequate drive belt adjustment.
2.
All units with the exception of the operating rooms which have a
complete AHU for standby, with a duty and standby motor included.
3.
The electric motor shall, unless otherwise stated, be squirrel caged

induction type, as specified generally in Section 16150 but with class F
Page 5 of 43
insulation and shall be suitably rated for the duty as shown in the
schedules.
4.
Fan drives shall be of the Vee-belt pattern with variable pitch

(adjustable) pulley type taper lock pattern. Belts shall be matched and
be of anti-static type.
5.
Motor Temperature Protection

a.
G.
H.
J.
All fan motors above 4kw rating shall be fitted with bimetallic
type temperature sensing winding protection. The temperature
sensing circuits shall be connected to the central control and
monitoring system (BMS).
Mounting and Accessories

1.
Anti-vibration mounts shall be provided as necessary, selected and

supplied in accordance with Section 15200.
2.
Flexible connections shall be of high density material and shall be

securely fixed to the unit Sections by means of fixing strips and
flanged connectors. All flexible connections shall be air-tight and
suitable for the maximum operating pressures associated with the
system.
Mixing Box Section

1.
Each mixing box shall be of double skinned construction fitted with

two sets of dampers. These shall be parallel acting to give the most
effective degree of mixing i.e. so that the air streams are directed
towards each other.
2.
The dampers shall utilize painted steel blades with leading and trailing
edges specifically designed so that adjacent blades interlock on closure
to give a tight seal. Each blade shall be securely locked to its spindles
by means of an adjustable locking device and the spindles rotate in self
lubricating nylon brushes. Motorized dampers shall be
Electrically/Electronically operated as required by the control system.
3.
Access doors shall be provided giving access to the dampers.
Electric Heating Coils

Supply and install wherever shown on the Drawings "0 to 100%" modulating
electric heaters of the duct mounted type or incorporated with air handler of
capacities as indicated in the Capacity Schedule of the air handlers on the
Drawings.
Duct heaters shall comply with NEC Section 424 Part F. and NFPA 9, 90A2-1.3 for adjacent duct linings.
Each heater shall be supplied complete with the following:
Page 6 of 43
K.
Fin tube heating element constructed of steel sheath with ceramic coated
steel fins, 80% nickel 20% chromium coiled resistor wire centered within
the sheath and highly compacted MgO film on the internal surface of the
sheath for electrical insulation and heat transfer.
Heavy gauge aluminized steel frame housing the heater, and shall be
suitable for horizontal and vertical mountings.
Control panel incorporated with the heater housing and same material as
the housing. Panel shall include the following:
Auto-reset thermal cutout and manual-reset thermal cutout with the

sensing bulb in the air stream.
Cutout shall de-energize the heating element in case of excessive

temperature.
Modulating contactors and controls to control the heating element

from "0 to 100%" and as required by the temperature controller
and the auto-reset thermal cutout. Heating elements shall be phaseto-phase connected to eliminate need for neutral in control panel.
Safety contactors (controlled by the manual reset thermal cutout) are

wired in series with the staging contactors to serve as a back-up in
the event staging contactors fail.
Static pressure type air flow switch that prevents energization when
air flow is inadequate.
Fan delay control, to delay fan motor operation until the heating
elements have reached a preselected temperature.
Terminal box and knock outs.
Built-in control power transformer as applicable to limit control

voltage to 240 volts maximum. No phase to neutral voltage shall be
required.
Cooling Coils
1.
Cooling coils shall be manufactured from 16 mm O/D solid drawn

seamless copper tube staggered in direction of air flow. Tube return
bends shall be copper and brazed to tube ends.
2.
Fins shall be continuous aluminum, with factory applied anti corrosion

paint having extended collars for spacing and bonding mechanically to
the tube. Support plates shall be fitted as required to provide adequate
support and rigidity to the fin tubes.
3.
Tube sheets and top and bottom plates shall be of minimum 0.95 mm
galvanized steel. All tube sheets shall have die formed lipped holes to
receive tubes.
Page 7 of 43
L.
4.
Coil headers shall be fitted with plugged vent tapings and plugged
drain bosses to facilitate draining and venting.
5.
Coils shall be air pressure tested to 2MPa while immersing the coil in a
tank of water after completion.
6.
Tubes shall be expanded on to the fin collar by hydraulic pressure

only.
7.
All coils shall have ARI Certification.
8.
Cooling coil panels shall be removable for access purposes.
9.
No part of the coil tube ends or headers shall be external to the section.
Air baffles shall be arranged to prevent air by-pass of the coil. Coils
shall be suitably sealed with grommets where connections pass through
unit casing.
10.
Each coil section incorporates a galvanized drain pan with integral

insulation. Pan shall be fitted with galvanized drain socket connections
for attachment to drain point. A manometric trap should be supplied
and supplied and installed by the installing contractor.
11.
Where the duty of the coil is such that a multi-bank arrangement is

necessary intermediate galvanized drain pans shall be fitted to collect
and dispose of condensate formed on the elevated coil bank.
12.
Cooling coil shall include all valves shown on drawing including

dynamic pressure compensating valve. Motorized valve should be
selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected pump
pressure at no additional cost.
Filter Section
1.
M.
Filter shall be provided of the types detailed on the equipment

schedules and herein. The filter section of the air handling unit shall
adequately house the filters without by-pass leakage and offering
adequate removal space.
Humidifier Section (Provisional)

1.
Sections shall be manufactured with flush mounted access panels.
2.
In order to ensure efficient operation of humidifiers adequate clearance

up stream and down stream of the manifold should be provided.
3.
Humidifier sections shall be double skinned.
4.
Provide dry steam humidifier to accept an integral fully modulating

steam humidifier to accept an integral fully modulating steam metering
valve. Valve to have a modified linear characteristic to provide full
control over the entire stroke of the actuator.
Page 8 of 43
2.02
5.
Humidifier to receive steam up to 3-bar absolute supply pressure, and

discharge at atmospheric pressure. Unit to include a separating
chamber of a volume and design that will disengage and remove all
droplets of water and particulate matter larger than three microns.
6.
The metering valve to be fully steam jacketed and to pass the metered
steam at atmospheric pressure to an internal drying chamber, fully
jacketed by steam at supply pressure, a silencer to be incorporated
using a stainless steel medium.
7.
Distribution manifold(s) to be provided to give uniform steam

distribution over its entire length, jacketed by steam at supply pressure
to ensure that vapor discharge is free of water droplets. A full length
stainless steel silencing to be fitted internally.
8.
Humidifier to be supplied with inverted bucket steam trap, (Y) type

line strainer, electric temperature switch for drain leg and all valves
and accessories as detailed.
FILTERS
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
C.
Louvers shall be fitted to all outside connection.

Provide all air handling units with pre-filters and secondary filters to
handle the full volume of air.
Provide secondary type filter to transfer air connections between
dining and kitchen areas.
Provide grease filters on kitchen exhaust systems.
Provide Inertia type particle filters, as indicated .
Filter section shall include pre filter and secondary filter.
Pre- Filters
1.
Provide pre-filters upstream of secondary filters.
2.
Pre-filters shall be of the washable panel filter type housed within a

separate flat filter section. The section shall consist of galvanized metal
frames and synthetic material filters of 85% efficiency against
ASHRAE 52 Weight Arrestance Test.
3.
The section shall be insulated with glass fiber and of double skinned
construction. A hinged access door shall be provided for filter
changing.
Secondary Filter
1.
Shall be of the high efficiency disposable bag filter type. The bag filter
section shall be capable of accepting 50mm thick pre-filters and a
combination of 300mm by 600 mm ( nominal) bag filters. The bag
filters shall be of 95% efficiency against ASHRAE 52 Atmospheric
Duct Spot Test.
Page 9 of 43
2.
D.
The section shall be insulated with glass fiber and of double skinned
construction. A hinged access door shall be provided for filter
changing.
Grease Filters
1.
E.
The grease filters shall be of the corrugated plate or crimped wire mesh
type and shall be entirely of metal, and all ferrous metal shall be
protected against corrosion. Where grease filters are fitted in Kitchen
hoods, the assembly shall be include a drip tray and the element shall
be secured in the frame by quick release clips.
Activated Carbon Filter

USE on transfer air fans as shown on drawings and as specified.
Filter to be high single pass efficiency, 200 mm thick, 1.25 m/s design velocity
50 kpa resistance at 1.25m/s, removable standard trays of epoxy coated steel.
Each filter to contain approximately 45kg of activated carbon of tetrachloride
activity rating of 50% per 100l/s of air flow.
Filter casing to be of 14 gauge steel to permit stacking the filters one on top of
other with filters foolted together and caulked. All parts of the filter casing and
frame to be dual coated with corrosion resistant epoxy.
F.
Lint Filter
Lint filter shall be able to remove up to 98% of all lint and maintains a clean
lint screen. All lint shall be collected in plastic bag.
Lint filter shall be inline space saver lint filters as manufactured by Energetic
Corporation constructed of class A fire retarding fiber glass on aluminum
frame solid state 24 VAC 240 V with lint BAG.
Lint filter shall be compete with fire control system, and excess pressure alarm,
static pressure gauge, 360 degree rotating top side discharge and flexible lint
tube to collect lint at floor and automatic barometric damper.
2.03
BLOWER COIL UNITS

Blower coil units shall be double skin as described for Air-handling units complete
with fan section cooling coil, electric heating coil, filters and all other components as
detailed on drawings.
2.04
FAN COIL UNITS

A.
Fan coil units consist of centrifugal fans, cooling coil, electric heating coil, (
where specified) and drain pan assembly, filter, insulated cabinet, discharge
grille, motorized valve kit, dynamic pressure compensating valve (Flowcon K)
return air grille, motor and drive all factory assembled. Units shall be
horizontal arrangement as scheduled or drawn. Motorized valve shall be of the
high pressure rating to withstand the maximum system pressure and operate at
the selected pump pressure at no additional cost.
Page 10 of 43
B.
Fans shall be centrifugal double inlet drive coupled to permanent split

capacitor, totally enclosed 3-speed motor suitable for 240V, 1-phase, 50 Hz
supply.
C.
Filters shall be of the cleanable aluminum type.
D.
Cooling coils shall be of copper tube mechanically bonded to aluminum plate

fins, with brass header. The connection side shall be field changeable. Coils
shall have manual air vent and 15 mm FPT connections.
E.
Main drip pan shall be provided with 2x24 mm OD drains ( one at each end)
for vertical units, one drain fitted with a removable plastic tap. Horizontal units
shall be provided with 1x22 mm OD drain.
F.
Unit casing shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel internally insulated.
Unit cabinet shall be fabricated from prepainted sheet steel with a baked
enamel finish. Cabinet shall have doors for easy access to the fan switch and
the connections on the coil.
G.
Units shall include speed control switch (3-speed/4 position) which shall select
any of the three available fan speeds and also switch off the fan. When the
switch is in the OFF position the unit shall be completely isolated from the
mains.
H.
Fan coil units shall be of the quite type with maximum noise level as specified
in various rooms. Unit shall be selected on medium speed, 35 dbA and
specified static pressure.
J.
Fan coil units shall be concealed type with plenum box and filter or exposed
type with cabinet decorative as shown on drawings.
K.
Fan coil units shall be complete with 2 way on-off motorized valves (3-way
valves in specific locations), gate valves, self balancing valves, double
regulating valves, strainers, di-electric fittings, unions and all other accessories
as detailed on drawings. All to be supplied built in the FCU- Factory
manufacture.
L.
Digital type thermostat shall include speed control switch ( 3-speed/4 position)
which shall select any of the three available fan speeds and also switch off the
fan. When the switch is in the OFF position the unit shall be completely
isolated from the mains. Thermostat shall have cooling mode to control the 2way or 3-way motorized valve thermostat in summer, or heating mode to
control the electric heater (when specified) in winter. Refer to section 15900
for thermostat specifications.
M.
Fan coil units shall be interlocked with lights system and windows to readjust
operation of FCU as shown on drawings.
Page 11 of 43
2.05
2.051
A.
FANS
GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance
with the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301
and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
Application of sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit
construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and
to requirements specified.
Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and
outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required,
and shall be constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ASME
B15.1. Installation shall be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not
negated.
Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B.
Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated

with minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and
paint system shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog;
ASTM B 117 salt spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 23 weather meter.
C.
Bearings
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified,

with provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be
imposed by the service.
Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys and
shall have a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of
200,000 hours. Bearings shall have dust tight seals suitable for lubricant
pressures encountered. Housings shall be cast iron unless otherwise specified
or approved.
Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude
overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball
check type. Where necessary, manual or automatic grease pressure relief
fittings shall be provided. Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief
fittings shall be located on the side opposite the supply fitting. Relief fittings
shall be visible from normal maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions
shall include extension tubes where necessary.
Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel
spiral wrapped or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper pins
are not acceptable.
Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified
materials and ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided
for fans driven by motors with a power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower
(375 watt)
Page 12 of 43
D.
Drives:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
E.
Belts:
1.
2.
2.052
Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch
diameter of sheave.
Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be
standard belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than
1.5.
Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40
horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or
variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixedsheave, high-capacity, super type, with a service factor of not less than 1.5.
Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall
be aligned by the four-point method.
Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with cross

section to suit sheave grooves.
Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching machine at the
factory. Selection by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not
acceptable. Each belt set shall be bound with wire and tagged with equipment
identification.
UTILITY SET FANS
A.
Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,

bearings, motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
B.
Housings: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or
welded to scroll sheets.
1.
C.
Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions.
Fan Wheels: Single width, single inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spunsteel inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1.
2.
Blade Materials: Steel.

Blade Type: Die formed, backward inclined or forward curved, as scheduled.
D.
Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
E.
Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings

with AFBMA 9, L-50 of 200,000 hours.
Page 13 of 43
F.
Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.053
Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.5.

Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at
the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
Belts: Oil resistant, no sparking, and no static; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan
cabinet.
Back draft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking

aluminum blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.
Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable
linkage.
Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
Drain Connections: DN20 threaded coupling drain connection installed at
lowest point of housing.
Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive
compartment.
CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A.
Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of

housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly,
curb base, and accessories.
B.
Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
1.
Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air

upward, with rain and snow drains.
C.
Housing:
Removable, extruded-aluminum, rectangular top; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
D.
Housing: Removable, galvanized steel, mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece,

hinged, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
E.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
F.
Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following
features:
1.
2.
Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.
Page 14 of 43
3.
4.
G.
Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100

percent to less than 50 percent.
Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection
mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum
conduit.
Bird Screens: Removable 13 mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, back draft dampers mounted in
curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50 mm thick,
rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50 mm wood nailer.
Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.054
Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
Overall Height: 200 mm.
MIXED FLOW FANS (For basement smoke exhaust and ventilation)

Supply and install all mixed flow inline fans wherever shown on the drawings and as
specified herein.
The housing shall be constructed of welded heavy gauge steel to assure no air leakage.
Housing shall have inlet and outlet collars for slip fit duct connections.
The housing and bearing and/Or motor supports shall be constructed of structural steel
members to prevent vibration and rigidly support the shaft and bearings.
Welded steel vanes shall straighten the flow of air from the fan discharge.
The wheel shall be of the mixed flow type.
Wheels shall have a wheel cone, spherical back plate and single thickness cambered
blades.
Each assembled fan shall be test run at the factory at the specified fan RPM. The
maximum allowable fan vibration shall be 0.15 in/sec . peak velocity, filter-in for belt
drive units.
Inlet and outlet sound power levels shall be provided for each of the eight octave bands
at the point of operation.
Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA seal for sound and air performance.
Sound reduction enclosure to be provided wherever necessary.
Fans used for smoke exhaust shall be suitable for operation at 250oC for two hours.
Page 15 of 43
2.055
UPBLAST PROPELLER ROOF EXHAUST FANS
A.
Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of

housing, wheel, butterfly-type discharge damper, fan shaft, bearings, motor and
disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.
B.
Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced galvanized steel,
containing galvanized steel butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and drive
assembly, and fan wheel.
C.
Wind Band, Fan Housing, and Base: Reinforced and braced aluminum, containing
aluminum butterfly dampers and rain trough, motor and drive assembly, and fan
wheel.
1.
Damper Rods: Steel with bronze bearings.
D.
Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub;

factory set pitch angle.
E.
Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum

hub; factory set pitch angle.
F.
Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing; weatherproof

housing of same material as fan housing with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50 mm thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50 mm wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.056
Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball
bearings.
Motor Mount: On outside of fan cabinet, adjustable base for belt tensioning.
Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS
A.
Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of

housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and
accessories.
B.
Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi
inlet cone.
C.
Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
Page 16 of 43
D.
Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following
features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.057
Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.
Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100

percent to less than 50 percent.
Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection
mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit.
Bird Screens: Removable, 13 mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting.
Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall
sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops.
IN-LINE VENTILATORS
A.
Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling, wall, duct, or for
concealed in-line applications.
B.
Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.
C.
Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor,
and fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D.
Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and

receptacle for motor plug-in.
E.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to

less than 50 percent.
F.
Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack, wall cap, or duct collars, and
transition fittings.
2.058
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A.
Description: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet

guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch,
mounting brackets, and accessories.
B.
Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes; inlet and
outlet flanges; and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C.
Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to
disconnect located on outside of fan housing.
Page 17 of 43
D.
Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves,

enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings
extended to outside of fan housing.
E.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F.
Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:

1.
2.
3.
2.059
Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in

fan outlet.
Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. Provide belt guards for
units not connected to ductwork.
MOTORS
A.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed

motors.
B.
Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B or

equivalent characteristics in accordance with IEC 34.
C.
Air-over-motor units shall be provided with NEMA-rated Class H insulation for all
services where air stream temperature exceeds 38 deg. C (100 deg. F). Air velocity
over motor surfaces shall be sufficient to maintain insulation temperatures within
NEMA standards at maximum fan horsepower. Motors used with variable frequency
drives (VFDs) shall be rated for VFD use.
D.
Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:

1.
2.
3.
E.
Open drip proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during
operation.
Guarded drip proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building
occupants.
Totally enclosed motors where located in unfiltered air streams.
Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as otherwise
specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with fixed-sheave
standard belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable pivoted motor bases
wherever equipment configuration permits proper installation.
FACTORY FINISHES
F.
Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
G.
Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
H.
Aluminum Parts: No finish required.
I.
Paint finish of fans exposed to outdoor shall be suitable for the hot and humid climate
of the project.
J.
Internal sides of fans used for 100 percent outdoor air shall be specially painted.
Page 18 of 43
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

K.
Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:

1.
2.
L.
Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans
according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
Fans." Label fans with the AMCA Seal.
Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density,
speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to
AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and suitable for high smoke temperature
of 250deg. C (500 deg. F) for a minimum of 2 hours continuous operation(Class B
smoke exhaust) ..
M. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation.
The overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
N.
Fans utilized for kitchen extract shall be spark-resistant and suitable for kitchen
operation. Fans shall be UL and cUL listed for grease removal, tested under high
temperature exhaust of 190 deg. C (375 deg. F). Fans shall be tested in accordance
with relevant NFPA standard. Fan coating shall be as directed by the Engineer. Units
shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.06
Bolted access door.

Drain connection.
Aluminum grease trap.
Weatherhood.
Upblast discharge.
Windband discharge cap with gravity damper.
Outlet guard where fan discharge is accessible.
AIR CURTAINS
Each unit shall consist of an all-metal, corrosion-resistant, galvanized steel housing with
electrostatically -applied epoxy finish over powder primer.
Cabinets are to have flush louvers and full-length discharge with two 25mm directional vanes
for maximum 40 sweep for optimum air flow adjustment.
Cabinets shall be suited for continuous mounting.
Motor shall be fixed 2-speed with rocker-style hi/low selector switch. Motors shall be doubleshafted, resilient mounted, direct-drive, and totally enclosed.
Ball bearings shall be permanently-lubricated, rubber-sealed.
Blower wheels shall be cross-flow type for maximum outlet uniformity. Unit shall be furnished
with molded cord and plug assembly.
Sound level measured 10 feet from unit shall not exceed 54dbA. Mounting template and an
eight-page comprehensive operation, installation and parts manual shall be furnished with
every unit.
Page 19 of 43
2.07
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (VFD)

The inverters shall be suitable for variable or constant torque applications. Suitable
for speed control of induction motors.
VRDs shall be able to control pumps and fans for heating, ventilation and airconditioning systems, and shall be of the torque inverters type.
The VRD unit shall include an AC choke, protecting against over voltages, and an
internal RFI filter.
Variable frequency drive shall have the following specifications:
Power supply constant torque
Power supply variable torque
Power supply
Input frequency
Output voltage
Continuous output current
Starting torque
Starting current
Output frequency
Frequency resolution
Serial communication
Protection class
Immunity
Safety
Emissions
2.2 . 250 kW
2.2 . 315 kW
3ph, 415/440 Volts
45 66 Hz
0-U in
Ict + 50C ambient, overload : 1.5xIct,
1/10min. Ivt+40C no overload ability
200% from 0 rpm
2.5 Ict, max 2 s every 20 s max output frequency
lower than 30 Hz and heatsink temperature
lower than 60C.
0 . 500 Hz
0.01 Hz
Interbus-S Modbus, Echelon.
Ip21
The design fulfils EN 50082-1,2.
According EN 500178, CE,UL,C-UL,FI
EMC level I: EN50081-2;
EMC level C: EN50081-1,2
Variable speed motors shall be inverter-duty motors and shall be with manual bypass
for fixed speed operation incase the VFD is not operating.
2.08
DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS : GENERAL

A.
General
1.
The Contractor shall supply and erect ductwork of the dimensions and
in the positions indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall be
deemed to have checked building dimensions on site before the
preparation of the ductwork manufacturing drawings and shall submit
these drawings for approval before commencement of manufacture.
The Contractor shall also be required to erect ductwork in such an
order to maintain an overall continuity of work for all trades.
2.
All ductwork shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with

SMACNA Standards and this Specification.
Page 20 of 43
3.
All access opening shall be rigidly framed and fitted speedily removed
and re-fixed. Multiple set screws or self tapping screws are not
acceptable as a method of fixing, unless otherwise stated.
4.
Access doors and other openings in the duct work shall be provided for
the purpose given below.
5.
a.
Access for personal for maintenance and replacement of

equipment.
b.
Access for routine maintenance, lubrication and adjustment of

items not requiring full man access.
c.
Access for cleaning.
d.
Access for inspection of items concealed in ductwork ( e.g.

dampers, fusible links, thermostats ).
e.
Hand holes required to permit proper jointing of ductwork

sections in awkward location (these should be kept to a
minimum and as small as possible). To be sealed after use.
f.
Test holes to permit entry of pilot tubes and other test

equipment.
Pressure- Velocity Classification.

Duct Class
Static
Pressure
Rating Pressure
Seal
Class
Velocity
High Pressure Duct Standard

High Pressure
2.5 Kpa Pos.
10 m/s Up
Medium
pressure
1.5 Kpa Pos.
10 m/s Up
Medium
Pressure
1.0 Kpa Pos.
10 m/s Up
Medium
Pressure
0.75 Kpa Pos.or

Neg.
20 m/s Dn.
Low Pressure Duct Standard

Low Pressure
0.50 Kpa Pos. or

Neg.
12.5 m/s Dn.
Low Pressure
0.25 Kpa Pos. or

Neg.
12.5 m/s Dn.
Low Pressure
0.125 Kpa Pos. or

Neg.
10 m/s Dn.
Page 21 of 43
2.09
LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK

A.
General
1.
Materials shall be as specified in clauses 2.1 and 2.2 except that

thickness stiffening and joints shall be as specified below.
Supply and install sheet metal ductwork for the air conditioning and
the ventilating systems as shown on the drawings and as detailed
below. Ductwork galvanization shall be 275g/m2 (G90).
The Contractor shall check the building dimensions and the
dimensions and positions of plant on site before the fabrication of
ductwork are started. All seems, joints and connections to plant shall
be made so as to reduce air leakage to a minimum. Internal roughness
and obstructions to airflow (other than dampers, vanes, etc.) will not be
accepted. Sharp edges or corners on the outside of ductwork, flanges,
supports, etc. will not be accepted. Any part of galvanized ductwork
where the galvanizing is damaged during manufacture or erection shall
be painted with two coats of aluminum, zinc rich or other corrosion
resisting paint.
B.
Ductwork
Provide all ductwork, plenums, fittings and related sheet metal work
shown, noted and/or specified for the air conditioning and ventilating
systems.
Provide wood frames for air outlets fixing and duct passage through no
fire rated walls and slabs.
Conform accurately to the layout indicated on the drawings, and
construct to be straight and smooth on the inside with all joints neatly
finished.
Securely anchored to the building construction in an approved manner,
and installation to be completely free from vibration and pulsing under
all operating conditions.
Contractor shall be fully responsible for all off-sets,
up-slopes,
down-slopes, etc. necessary to avoid conflict with lighting fixtures,
sanitary piping, etc.
Bends and offsets shall have a minimum throat radius equal to the
width of the duct. Where short radius elbows are indicated or are
agreed by the Engineer as necessary due to site limitations the
dimensions and internal vane(s) shall be in accordance with duct detail
drawings.
Low pressure flat ducts over 450 mm wide shall be stiffened by cross
breaking.
Page 22 of 43
Fire rated and smoke ducts shall have two hour fire rating wrapping
material shall be of asbestos light weight non combustible material
board with square sawn edges and a smooth flat surface. Boards shall
be resistant to water and should not promote corrosion. Boards shall be
UL Listed.
All exposed ductwork shall be painted with one coat of primer suitable
to galvanized steel and two coats of finishing paint of type and color as
C.
Rectangular Ductwork: Low Velocity

1.
The ductwork construction shall be used on the Duct Construction

Standards as laid by The Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
2.
Material thickness is to be based upon a pressure velocity classification

as indicated below. Thickness is dependent upon the relationship
between the pressure class as depicted in this table and the
frequency/type of supports.
3.
Up to 125 Pa - Ductwork any is made in the following minimum

thickness with no additional stiffening:
Up to 400 mm
( Longest side )
401 to 600 mm
( Longest side )
601 to 650 mm
( Longest side )
651 to 750 mm
( Longest side )
751 to 900 mm
( Longest side )
901 mm and over shall be made with stiffeners.
4.
126 Pa to 250 Pa - Ductwork may be made in the following minimum

thickness with additional stiffening.
Up to 350 mm
( Longest side )
351 to 450 mm
( Longest side )
451 to 500 mm
( Longest side )
501 to 650 mm
( Longest side )
651 to 750 mm
( Longest side )
5.
0.6 mm
0.8 mm
1.0 mm
1.2 mm
1.6 mm
0.6 mm
0.8 mm
1.0 mm
1.2 mm
1.6 mm
250 Pa to 500 Pa - Ductwork may be made in the following minimum

thickness with no additional stiffening.
Up to 300 mm
( Longest side )
301 to 350 mm
( Longest side )
351 to 450 mm
( Longest side )
451 to 500 mm
( Longest side )
501 to 600 mm
( Longest side )
0.6 mm
0.8 mm
1.0 mm
1.2 mm
1.6 mm
Page 23 of 43
6.
D.
Thinner materials may be used but stiffening must be added to comply

with tables 1-3 through 1-9 of the SMACNA Standards. Proposed
thicknesses are:
Largest duct size
Sheet Metal Thickness
0
300 mm
310 750 mm
760 1500 mm
1510 2200 mm
0.6 mm
0.7 mm
0.9 mm
1.0 mm
Duct Fittings : Low Velocity

1.
All duct fittings except where stated otherwise, shall be made from the
same material and specification of material as the adjoining ductwork.
The specifications with regards to stiffeners, joints, seams and
maximum distance between joints and stiffeners for straight ductwork
shall also apply to the duct fittings. The distance between joints
stiffeners of bends shall be taken around the centerline of the fitting,
and stiffeners shall be , when required, arranged in a radial pattern. The
larger dimension in all fittings shall determine the sheet thickness and
stiffening.
2.
Rectangular Fittings
a.
The inside radius of bends shall be 100 mm or equal to the

width of the duct, viewed on the bend, whichever is the
greatest.
b.
Alternatively square bends with turning vanes shall be used.

The turning vanes shall be provided at a maximum spacing of
300 mm across the angle of the bend, and shall be double skin
aerofoil type. The recommended ratio between spacing and the
distance between the leading and trailing edges of the vane,
measured in a straight line, is 0.5. The vanes shall be securely
fastened at each end, to internal runners and the runners
attached to the duct by mechanically closed rivets, bolts or
welds, at 150 mm maximum spacing.
c.
Branch piece shall conform to the standards American take-off

that incorporates an aerofoil splitter damper pivoted at one
end. The throat dimensions for branch ducts emanating from
the side of the duct run shall be calculated from the equation 1.
t=
v 1. W ------- 1
v2
Throat dimensions for small branch ducts which maintain the

depth of the branch duct on connection to the main duct shall
be calculated from equation 2.
t=
v 1. W.D 2 ------- 2
v2
D1
Page 24 of 43
Where t
V1
V2
=
=
=
D1
D2
W
=
=
=
Throat dimension
Air volume in branch
Air volume in main duct before branch
take off.
Depth of branch duct.
Depth of main duct before branch take off.
Width of main duct before branch take off.
The splitter damper shall be capable, in the case of a full depth

branch, of isolating either branch of main. The splitter damper
rod shall extend outside the ductwork to a hand control lever
with a locking device.
E.
d.
In all cases of change sections the larger dimensions shall

determine the sheet thickness and stiffening. Where
expansions and contractions are required, an expansion shall
be made up stream of a branch connection and a contraction
downstream of a branch connection. The slope of either an
expansion or contraction shall not exceed 22 1/2 on any side.
e.
Change of shapes, used to avoid obstructions or to suit

available space, shall, where the cross sectional area remains
unchanged, have a maximum slope of 22 1/2 on each side of
the obstruction. Where the cross sectional area changes
temporarily, the percentage area reduction shall not exceed
15.
f.
Connections to equipment shall have a maximum slope of 30

on expansions and 45 on contractions on any side.
g.
The maximum slopes may be exceeded where space prevents

the specified slope from being used, provided that splitters are
fitted such that the angle of slope and the center line of the
duct are divided into sections, and the angle between the
splitter and the center line of the duct and the angle between
splitters does not exceed the maximum specified. The splitters
shall be securely fixed to the duct in a similar manner to
turning vanes on bends.
Fastening: Low Velocity

1.
Permitted Sheet to Sheet Fastening

Fastening mm
RIVETS
Solid
Mechanically closed
WELDS
Spot
Plug
Continuous
Maximum Spacing mm
60
60
30
60
Continuous
Page 25 of 43
2.
Permitted Sheet to Section Fastening s

Fastening
Maximum
spacing
for
cross joints mm
Maximum
spacing for
intermediate
stiffeners
RIVETS
Solid
Mechanically
closed
150
100
300
150
LOCK BOLTS
150
300
BOLTS & NUTS
150
300
WELDS
Spot
Plug
Tack
75
150
150
150
300
300
The minimum number of fastening per side or per stiffener relating to table shall be
three.
3.
Permitted Section to Section Fastening.

Fastening mm
Maximum Spacing mm
LOCK BOLTS
BOLTS & NUTS
150
150
The minimum number of fastening per side relating to Table above shall be two .
F.
Supports and Hangers: Low Velocity.

1.
Page 26 of 43
Length of longer side

mm
Drop rod or hanger
Minimum bearing
member mm
Maximum
spacing mm
M.S. rod mm
M.S. flat mm
Up to 500
10
25 x 3
25x25x3 angle
3000
501 - 800
10
25 x 3
40x40x4 angle
3000
801 - 1000
10
25 x 3
40x40x4 angle
2500
1001 - 1500
10
25x 3
50x50x5 angle
2500
1501 2250
12.5
40 x 3
100x50 channel
2000
Above 2250 to suit loading -----------------------------------------------------------------------
G.
2.
The bearing member shall not be required on ductwork above 1500mm where
the hanger supports are fixed to the duct joints, due to the provision of the
angle flanges.
3.
No screws, bolts or other fittings for brackets or supports shall penetrate the air
duct.
4.
The design of supports for vertical ducts is dictated by the site conditions and
spacing may be greater than that of horizontal ducts . Vertical ducts shall be
supported by the stiffening angles, or angle flanges, but where this is
impractical, supporting angles shall be fixed to the duct. Fastenings shall be in
accordance with the table for cross joints.
Sealants
1.
H.
Sealants shall be of the liquid/mastic type which permanently retain adhesion

and elastically throughout a temperature range of 0C to 70C . The sealant
shall be applied with a brush or gun and shall completely seal the joints.
Sealant shall be applied on all duct joints and seams.
Duct Protection
The Contractor shall by means of polyethylene or similar sheeting protects all openings
in ductwork during erection to prevent the collection of dust and dirt during the
building construction.
He shall be responsible for removing all these sealers from the systems prior to the plan
being commissioned.
He shall nevertheless be responsible for cleaning all ducts internally before the plant is
commissioned, the provision of the seals being a precaution aimed at reducing the
amount of cleaning necessary.
I.
Duct Leak Test & Sealing

The Contractor, shall when the main fans are operable, test all flanged joints, access
doors or panels, hand holes and test points with soap and water. Any joints failing the
test shall be remade.
Insulation shall not be applied until this test has been made.
J.
Silencing & Acoustic

Page 27 of 43
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quietness of the equipment in respect of
vibration and sound transmission to the structure and occupied spaces.
Where it is necessary to provide silencing equipment, anti vibration inserts mountings
and other acoustic devices, the Contractor shall include them in his tender.
K.
Duct Lining- Internal Insulation

Where ducts are to be provided with internal absorbent linings to meet the Contractor's
requirements in respect of silence, the Contractor shall provide 25 mm thick noninflammable resin bonded mats of glass fiber 48 kg/m3 that have a strong film of PVC
sheet on the air flow side. Such mats shall be secured to ducts with synthetic resin or
other suitable adhesives and aluminum strips. See Section 15200.
The type of external insulation required will be specified under normal insulation.
L.
Plenum Boxes
Plenum boxes construction and installation shall be similar to ductwork with internal
duct lining as specified above.
2.10
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A.
General
1.
Where flexible connections are indicated or required between rigid ductwork

and particular component or items of equipment the internal diameter of the
flexible duct shall be equal to the external diameter of the rigid duct. The use
of flexible ductwork between rigid sections of sheet metal ductwork to change
direction or plane will not be permitted except where indicated.
2.
The flexible duct shall have a liner and a cover of rough heat-resistant fabric
equal in durability and flexibility to glass fiber fabric and shall be impregnated
and coated with plastic. It shall be reinforced with a bonded galvanized spring
steel wire helix between the liner and the cover and an outer helix to glass fiber
cord, or equal shall be bonded to the cover to ensure regular convolutions.
Insulation shall be as specified for rigid steel.
3.
Alternatively, where indicated on drawings the flexible duct shall consist of

flexible corrugated metal tubing of aluminum. The metal may be lined on the
inside or the outside or both with plastic material. The joints to rigid spigots
shall be sealed with a brush coat of pipe jointing paste or mastic compound.
Ducts up to 150 mm diameter shall be secured with a worm drive type hose
clip complying with BS 3628. Ducts over 150 mm diameter shall be secured
with a band clip. Insulation shall comply with regulator rigid duct.
4.
The frictional resistance to the air flow per unit length of the flexible duct shall
not exceed 50% more than the frictional resistance per unit length of the
galvanized steel ducts of equivalent diameter. The radius ratio R/D for bends
shall not be less than 2. Where R is the centre line radius and D is the diameter
of the flexible duct.
Page 28 of 43
5.
The leakage from any section of flexible air duct shall not exceed 1% of the
design air flow rate at the static operating pressure.
6.
Flexible ducts shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of -18C to 120C and shall comply with BS 476 Part 1, Section 2, Clause 7 ( class 1 :
surface of very low flame spread).
7.
Flexible ducts shall be supported at 1 meter centers.
2.11
PRE-INSULATED DUCTWORK SPECIFICATION:
A.
Surface:
A.1 The panel shall be manufactured of CFC free and Halogen free, closed cell
phenolic foam thermo- bonded.
A.2 Foil Thickness in the inner side panel should be not less than 25 micron thickness
aluminum foil reinforced with a 5mm glass scrim for inner to insure smooth
surface and reduce friction loss.
A.3 Foil thickness in outer side panel should be rigid and embossed aluminum with
minimum 60 micron thickness to insure better durability and protection.
A.4 Both sides aluminum foil covering the panel must be maintained intact after
installation to ensure vapor barrier continuity.
B.
Density:
C.
Phenolic foam density must be not less than 60 kg/m3 as per ASTM D 1622: 03.
Thermal conductivity:
Thermal Conductivity: 0.024 W/ (m.K) at 35 +/-2 0C, 60 +/-5% RH, 24 h according to
ASTM C 518:2004.
D.
Compressive strength:
Compressive strength should be not less than 351.5 kPa at 23 +/- 2C, 50 +/- 5% RH
according to ASTMD 1621:00.
E.
Water Absorption and transmission:

E.1
E.2
F.
Water absorption must be less than 0.25% at 23 +/- 2C, 50 +/- 5% RH, 48 h
according to ASTM C 209:1998.
Water vapor transmission of materials should be 0.00 at 23 +/- 1C0 , 50 +/- 2%
RH according to ASTM E96-00.
Fire properties:
Page 29 of 43
Fire retardant characteristics shall be as follows:

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
G.
Class 0 according to BS 476 Parts 6 Fire Propagation Index I & BS 476: Part 7
Class 1 Surface Spread of Flame.
Reaction to fire test for Building Products exposed to the thermal attack by a
single Burning Item according to BS EN 13823: 2002
UL 181 Surface Burning Characteristics in accordance with Standard
ANSI/UL723, ninth edition, dated August 29, 2003
Ignitability of a Building Products subjected to Direct Impingement of a Flame
according to BS ISO 11925-2: 2002.
ASTM 84 Surface Burning Characteristics, Flame Spread and Smoke
Developed.
Toxicity:
Phenolic Panels must be Toxic free as per IMO test IMO RESOLUTION MSC 61 (67)
1996; Annex 1, Part 2 Smoke & Toxicity Test. WF Report
No. 160905 and No. 160906 dated 14th of February 2007 which is superior to NES 723.
H.
Temperature range:
No relevant reduction of insulation, chemical or physical characteristics of the panels to
be measurable, when conveying air in the temperature range
I.
Duct work:
The pre-insulated aluminum ductwork shall also have the following characteristics:
I.1
I.2
I.3
I.4
J.
Ductwork and fittings shall be fabricated strictly in accordance with SAT

Insulation requirements and recommendations using SAT Insulation
materials, tools and accessories as a whole. The Fabricators shall be trained by
the SAT Insulation and only those certified by the SAT Insulation shall be
permitted to work on the project. Fabrication and installations shall be
supervised and certified by the SAT Insulation representatives.
The maximum length of individual pieces of ducts shall not exceed 4000mm.
Ductwork and fittings shall be fabricated and joined in accordance with SAT
Insulation instructions.
Wherever necessary ductwork shall be reinforced using aluminum discs,
stiffening system including aluminum rods as per SAT Insulation
recommendations.
All turning vanes in elbows shall be of aluminum.
Installation:
The general installation characteristics shall be as follows:
J.1
J.2
Ductwork and plenums to be fabricated & joined in accordance with SAT

Insulation instructions.
Ductwork shall be installed using supports as SAT Insulation requirements.
Page 30 of 43
J.3
J.4
J.5
J.6
2.12
The joints between the ducts to be installed in air-conditioned areas and plant
rooms shall be made, using aluminum flange with aluminum slide-in-bayonet.
The joints between the ducts will be completed with the installation of
adhesive to reduce air leakage.
Proprietary inspection and access panels to be installed as SAT Insulation
requirement.
Flexible connections shall be provided between the ductwork and any piece of
equipment subject to vibration or movement (i.e. FCU).
DAMPERS
All dampers shall be fabricated by an approved Manufacturer and not by the
Mechanical Subcontractor duct-man.
A.
B.
Regulating Dampers
1.
Sufficient dampers shall be provided to regulate and balance the system.

Dampers on grilles or diffusers shall be used for fine or secondary control. All
dampers shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent fluttering. The air leakage past
dampers in the fully closed position shall not exceed 5% of the maximum
design air flow in the duct. All duct dampers except fire dampers and selfclosing dampers, shall be fitted with locking devices and position indicators.
2.
Each primary control damper shall be fitted with a non-corrodible label stating
the actual air flow in m/s and the cross sectional area; alternatively, these
figures shall be painted in a visible position on the adjoining ductwork or
insulation. The position of a damper as set after final regulation and balancing
shall be indelibly marked on the damper quadrant.
3.
Motorized dampers shall be fitted with a Electric actuator as described in

Section 15900 of the specification.
Multileaf Dampers
1.
Multileaf dampers shall be used in rectangular ducts having a short side

dimension in excess of 300 mm. All multileaf dampers shall be constructed on
demountable ductwork sections, which shall extend beyond the swing of the
blades. The blades of the damper shall operate on the opposed blade principle
unless required solely for isolation, in which case they may be arranged for
parallel operation.
2.
No damper blade shall exceed 150 mm in width and where dampers are
required for greater widths, the damper sections shall be constructed in
multiple frames. Individual dampers blades shall not exceed 225 mm in height.
Each leaf of a multileaf damper shall consist of two plates of material of the
same thickness as the associated duct and rigidly fixed to each side of an
operating spindle, the ends of which shall be housed in brass, nylon, oil
impregnated sintered metal, PTFE impregnated or ball bearings. The ends of
the spindles shall be linked so that one movement of the operating handle shall
move each leaf an equal amount. An inspection door shall be provided adjacent
to each multileaf damper.
Page 31 of 43
C.
D.
3.
On low velocity systems only, multileaf damper blades may be of a single

plate, at least 1.6 mm thick and suitably stiffened and the blade linkages may
be within the duct. These dampers shall have bearings and inspection doors as
specified above.
4.
Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die-cast aluminum with the words
OPEN and CLOSED cast on the quadrant. Quadrants shall be securely
fixed and the damper spindles shall be close fitting in the quadrant hubs to
prevent any damper movement when the damper levers are locked.
Single Blade Dampers

1.
In ductwork 300 mm or less, single blade dampers may be used. The blade
shall be made from a single plate, at least 1.6 mm thick and suitably stiffened.
One end of the damper spindle shall be housed in brass, nylon, oil impregnated
sintered metal, PTFE impregnated or ball bearings. The other end shall extend
beyond the damper casing with an operating handle and quadrant.
2.
Quadrants and operating handles shall be of die-cast aluminum with the words
Open & Closed cast on the quadrant. Quadrants shall be securely fixed
and the damper spindles shall be close fitting in the quadrant tubes to prevent
any damper movement when the damper levers are locked.
Pressure Relief Dampers

Pressure relief dampers shall be combination of weather resistant louvers and multileaf
pressure relief dampers with masonry sub-frames.
Masonry sub-frames and pressure relief dampers casing shall be of galvanized sheet
steel with weather resistant louver of extruded aluminum sections. Pressure relief
dampers blades shall be of anodized extruded aluminum. All other accessories shall be
of stainless steel.
Relief damper shall be fitted with pressure deferential regulator to maintain specified
pressure with stairwells.
Relief damper installed on roof slab shall be mounted in a louvered pent house.
Louvered pent house shall be made of 4 louvered sides and one cover. The sides are
joined at the four corners by sheet metal screws in each louver. The cover is securely
fastened to the unit by stainless steel sheet metal screws.
The louvered pent house shall be designed for low pressure drop and shall be
constructed of aluminum. The removable cover shall be lined with fiber glass to
prevent condensate. Louvered pent house shall include bird screen and relief damper
with pressure differential as described before louvered penthouse.
E.
Back Draft Dampers

Supply and install gravity dampers wherever shown on the Drawings and with the
airflow direction indicated therein.
Gravity dampers shall consist of:
Page 32 of 43
Galvanized sheet steel frame.

Aluminum blades.
Stainless steel bearing shafts and brass bearings.
Neoprene seal to withstand 120 deg.C. air temperature.
Aluminum blade travel stop.
All blades shall be coupled together by means of an aluminum bar.

F.
Volume Dampers - Duct Mounted

Supply and install all duct mounted volume damper wherever shown on the drawings
and as specified herein.
Each duct mounted volume damper shall be of galvanized steel construction, butterfly
type for ducts up to 15" deep, and multiple, opposed blade type for ducts deeper than
15".
Maximum blade sized shall be 48" x 10" and not less than 1.2mm thick.
Multiple frame sections shall be used for dampers installed in ducts larger than 48".
2.13
FLEXIBLE JOINTS
A.
General
1.
Flexible joints shall be provided on the fan inlet and outlet connections and
elsewhere on the ductwork where indicated. They shall be of the full cross
sectional area of the mating fan inlet, outlet or duct section. The ends of the
ducts or the duct and the fan connection shall be in line.
2.
Flexible joints shall consists of , or be protected by material having a fire

penetration time of at least fifteen minute when tested in accordance with the
BS 476 Part 1, Section 3. The material shall be of the glass fibre cloth type;
canvas will not be accepted. The width of joints from metal edge to metal edge
shall not be less than 80 mm and not more than 250 mm.
3.
All flexible joints other than fan inlet connections shall be between flanged
ends. The flexible material flange shall be backed by an angle or flat iron
flange and the flexible joint shall be securely held between the metal flanges.
Flat iron bands used with fan inlets shall be not less than 5 mm thick.
2.14
DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES
A.
General
1.
Provide diffusers and grilles as scheduled and detailed on the drawings.
2.
Diffusers and grilles shall be of heavy gauge extruded aluminum construction,

mechanically assembled and anodized.
3.
Grilles and diffusers shall be not less than the size indicated; where no size is
given they shall be capable of dealing with the air flow and distribution as
indicated with a maximum neck velocity of 4 m/s.
Page 33 of 43
B.
C.
D.
4.
All grilles except those on exposed ducting shall incorporate an edge seal.
5.
All grilles and diffusers shall have suitable color finish as approved by the
Engineer.
6.
The fixing of grilles and diffusers to the ductwork shall be by means of spring.
External screws will not be accepted.
Sidewall Grilles & Registers

1.
Each sidewall supply air grille shall have two sets of separately adjustable
blades, one set horizontal and one set vertical, and shall be complete with an
opposed blade multi-leaf damper. The blades and the dampers shall be
adjustable from the front of the grille.
2.
Sidewall return air grilles shall have a single set of horizontal blades. Each
return air grille shall be complete with an opposed blade multi-leaf damper
operable from the front.
3.
All supply and return air grilles shall have quick release subframes.
Ceiling Diffusers and Grilles

1.
Four-way supply diffusers shall have adjustable core pattern, shall be provided
with opposed blade volume control damper, and shall be compatible with the
ceiling system provided. Perforated face shall be finished in black enamel.
2.
Four-way return air grille shall be similar in appearance to the Four-way

supply diffusers provided and shall be compatible with the ceiling system
provided.
3.
Egg crate return air grilles shall be fabricated of aluminum with extruded frame
and shall be compatible with the ceiling system provided.
4.
Diffusers and grilles shall be provided with volume control dampers of the
opposed blade type which shall be adjustable from the front of the diffuser.
5.
Liner diffusers shall include a control damper at the rear of the vanes giving
volume control down to complete shut-off and operated from the face of the
diffuser. Liner diffuser for supply air shall have adjustable blades to give
directional control of air flow. Where linear diffusers are mounted in a
continuous line, there shall be means of ensuring alignment between
consecutive diffusers and of equalizing pressure behind the vanes. Return air
linear grilles shall match supply diffusers. Linear diffusers shall have factory
supplied plenum box, internally lined as specified under ductwork.
6.
All diffusers shall have a quick-release center to facilitate easy cleaning.
Air Transfer Grilles

1.
Air transfer grilles shall be V core sight proof type.
Page 34 of 43
External Louvers
All louvers for fresh air and exhaust air shall be fabricated from heavy duty aluminum
extrusions. The horizontal blades shall be angle down towards the front of the louvers
and each blade shall have a down turn at the front and up turn at the back edges in such
a manner that the ingress of rain is prevented. Each blade shall be securely fixed to the
surrounding frame.
All louvers shall be fitted with an aluminum bird wire screen on the inside face.
F.
Linear Bar Grilles (Continuous Diffusers)

Each linear bar diffuser shall be of the fixed bar blades type with 6 mm bars, 13mm
spacing or as indicated on drawings, complete as specified below:
a)
Supply grilles shall include flow equalizing dampers and continuous plenum
box over the entire diffuser length. Plenum size shall be as indicated on the
drawings.
b)
Return grilles shall not require adjusting blades or equalizing dampers.
c)
Fixing frame for outlet mounting on walls and false ceiling, etc... Frame may
be of wood of metallic construction as site conditions dictate. Fixing for linear
grilles shall be of the concealed fixing type; screws shall not be accepted.
d)
All necessary supports and fixing accessories.

The drawings indicate the length and neck width of each linear bar diffuser.
When diffuser length is omitted on the drawings, diffuser length shall fill space
allocated for it, as required by interior decoration schemes.
G.
Linear Slot Diffusers

Linear slot diffusers are to be continuous, single or multiple slot type, with individually
adjustable supply air pattern and volume control blades on each slot. Air supply
pattern is to be adjustable through 180 degrees from diffuser face with two way
capability from multiple slots. Noise level is not to exceed 25 NC at specified air
quantity.
Linear diffusers to be of total length, number of slots and l/s per linear m as indicated
on the Drawings.
Linear diffusers to be surface mounting type, without screw holes, suitable for ceiling
or sidewall air supply and for air return, supplied in standard lengths up to 1500 mm.
Where longer lengths are specified, multiple lengths are to be joined with special key
strips supplied with diffusers.
Linear diffusers to be complete with end caps on end sections and one-piece diffusers,
grid pattern air straighteners and concealed mounting brackets for easy installation
without need for special tools.
Page 35 of 43
Linear diffusers: finish is to be natural anodized white or colored with black volume
and pattern blades.
Linear diffuser: factory supplied diffuser plenum fittings are to be coated steel insulated
internally with 12 mm thick duct insulation.
H.
2.15
Door Louvers
-
Supply and deliver door louvers to the door manufacturer for installation.
The door louvers shall be sized so that the face velocity does not exceed 250
fpm (1.3 m/s) unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
The louver shall be extruded aluminum completely lightproof V-Section with

double frame.
AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPERS

Automatic air dampers: vertical, back draught or barometric type that open under air
pressure to allow air to escape from room, fan plenum or duct and that close by weight
of blades to prevent air from passing in reverse direction.
Automatic air dampers to consist of multiple blades of light aluminum, mounted inside
aluminum of galvanized steel frame on nylon bearings and linked together to operate in
parallel. Blades to have seamed-in, felted edges to hold air leakage and noise to a
minimum. Frame to be suitable for installation in duct or wall.
Barometric air dampers used as pressure relief for staircase pressurization shall have
weights that can be adjusted to the required differential pressure at which they should
open.
2.16
PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

Pressure relief dampers shall be combination of weather resistant louvers and multileaf
pressure relief dampers with masonry sub-frames .
Masonry sub-frames and pressure relief dampers casing shall be of galvanized sheet
steel with weather resistant louver of extruded aluminum sections. Pressure relief
dampers blades shall be of anodized extruded aluminums. All other accessories shall be
of stainless steel.
Relief damper shall be fitted with pressure deferential regulator to maintain specified
pressure with stairwells.
Relief damper installed on roof slab shall be mounted in a louvered pent house.
Louvered pent house shall be made of 4 louvered sides and one cover. The sides are
joined at the four corners by sheet metal screws in each louver. The cover is securely
fastened to the unit by stainless steel sheet metal screws.
The louvered pent house shall be designed for low pressure drop and shall be
constructed of aluminum. The removable cover shall be lined with fiber glass to
prevent condensate. Louvered pent house shall include bird screen and relief damper
with pressure differential as described before louvered penthouse.
Page 36 of 43
2.17
JET DIFFUSERS
Jet diffusers shall be manually adjustable allowing variation in discharge angle to
compensate for changing temperature difference.
Jet diffuser shall be adjusted 30 upwards to 30 downwards. The nozzle mounting
plate shall also be rotated though 360 which enables the air jets to be fully directional.
Jet nozzles shall be installed singularly or in banks as required.
Construction of jet diffusers shall be of aluminum, the border being extruded from
aluminum to BS- 1474 grade 6063 T6 and the mounting plate from aluminum sheet to
BS 1470 grade NS4.
Jet diffuser shall be supplied in different colors to suit the engineer requirement
Jet diffuser shall be supplied with a plenum box which is manufactured from
galvanized sheet steel to BS 2989 Z2 G275 M.
For supply air jet diffuser supply an opposed blade damper shall be installed in the rear
of the plenum box. Construction is of galvanized mild steel to BS2989 Z2 G275 M for
the border and BS 1472 grade 6063T6 for the extruded aluminum blades.
All visible surfaces of plenum box and damper unit shall be finished stove enamel paint
matt black.
2.18
KITCHEN HOODS (DOUBLE SKIN)

Supply and install wherever shown on the drawings double skin Hoods of shape shown
on the drawings and shall overhang the cooking equipment approximately 300 mm. on
all sides with approximately 600mm. high inside clear dimensions. Hood shall be
fabricated of # 18 ga. stn. stl. with all seamless welded construction, all inside corners
rounded to 25mm. radius.
Hood shall be formed back on approximately 30 degree angle and arranged to accept
lighting fixtures herein specified. The hood shall be furnished with a full length filter
bank set at approximately 60 degree angle and be provided with a full length plenum
chamber constructed of gauge material as the hood. Plenum chamber shall be provided
with g dampers to suit the duct sizes shown on the ventilation drawings. The lower
edge of the hood shall be welded to a # 14 ga. stn. stl. one piece watertight
condensation trim member approximately 50 x 100 x 25mm. for the full perimeter of
the hood. The hood body shall be reinforced with 40 x 40 x 4mm. steel angles at
approximately 600mm. O.C. formed to the contour of the hood section, concealed
fastenings or welding shall be used, and the ends of the hood flat. A 1/2"(13mm) ips
stn. stl. Threaded coupling together with a length of drip pipe, to spill to floor drain
shall be provided.
Hood and gutter shall be hung from structural members above.
Grease filters measuring approximately 500 x 250 x 50mm. shall be provided for the
full length of the hood, with lift handles set into permanent stn. stl. snug air tight frame
and easily removable without the use of tools.
Page 37 of 43
Hood shall be fabricated in a minimum number of sections with hair line butt field
joints.
Hood shall be provided with lighting fixtures, as herein described, equally spaced,
wired with Type A.V.A. wire in rigid galvanized conduit. Fixtures shall be commercial
vapor-tight square surface mounted units with square prismatic glass panel for a 150
watt lamp. Fixtures shall consist of a square metal housing with provisions for
mounting in stn. stl. hood together with horizontally mounted lamp with dome shaped
aluminum reflectors. Square face plate shall be formed of # 18 ga. stn. stl. with satin
finished hinged panel, and shall contain 215mm. square diffusers. Diffusers shall be
gasketed to frames and frames gasketed to housing forming completely vaportight
units.
The face of all exposed sides of the hood below ceiling shall be enclosed with vertical
facing of # 18 ga. stn. stl. Stn. stl. panels shall measure not more than 900mm. in width,
with each second panel removable and provided with a stn. stl. recessed finger grip.
Where panels meet at vertical joints, they shall be flanged inward 250 mm to form a
hairline joint. Provide a # 14 ga. stn. stl. trim member at ceiling and at joints against
walls.
Hood shall be fitted with built in automatic total flooding fire protection system
utilizing dry powder designed and installed in accordance with NFPA. Fire protection
System shall be UL listed. Contractor to submit all necessary calculations and system
components for approval.
Exposed kitchen hood ductwork shall be of stainless steel 1.2 mm thick, 304 type,
installed in accordance with NFPA 96.
Concealed kitchen hood ductworks shall be black steel 1.5 mm thick with flanged
joints and heat resistant gasket. All longitudinal seams shall be continuously welded
with provision for expansion. Duct shall be insulated as specified and installed in
accordance with NFPA 96.
2.19
SOUND ATTENUATORS
Supply and install sound attenuators on all air handling equipment to satisfy the
required noise level criteria whether or not shown on drawings and as specified.
a.
Sound attenuators to be suitable for 100 mm W.G. internal air pressure and 40
deg. C operating air temperature. Maximum static pressure drop through silencer is not to exceed 5 mm W.G. at specified air quantity. Silencer to
attenuate sound by at least 10 DB in the 125 Hz and 30 DB in the 2000 Hz
octave band mid-frequencies respectively.
b.
Sound attenuators for axial flow fans: to be the product of fan manufacturer,
designed to match fan with end rings drilled and tapped to match fan flanges.
Silencer to be cylindrical type with centre pod, comprising galvanized steel
casing lined with mineral wool and retained by expanded steel. Lining to be rot
proof and fire proof faced to withstand high air velocities without erosion.
Sound attenuators to have specially designed sound absorbent single or double
pods mounted concentricity within lined outer casing. It is to be complete with
lifting lugs and mounting feet of same type supplied for fan.
Page 38 of 43
c.
Sound attenuators for air handling units: straight, rectangular, splitter type,
designed for mounting in ducts, with pre- drilled flanges. Silencer is to have
number of air passages in parallel and in height and width to meet resistance to
air flow requirements and length to meet sound attenuation requirements.
Sound attenuators to comprise multiple galvanized steel splitters held in
galvanized steel casing. Splitters and casing to be lined with rot-proof and fireproof resin bonded mineral wool faced with woven glass fiber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A.
Air- handling units, fans and equipment generally shall be floor mounted on 100 mm
raised concrete housekeeping pads and supported from building structural frame using
vibration isolators. Provide all supporting steel, anchors etc. required to properly
support the unit.
B.
Replace throwaway filters just prior to building acceptance and after the system has
been balanced.
3.02
CONNECTIONS TO BUILDERS WORK
A.
Where metal ducts and fan inlets and outlets connect to builders work, connections
shall be by either built-in timber frames or built-in companion rings or flanges. Built-in
timber frames shall be used except where the connection is to be made in fire barrier
walls or in the fixing of fire dampers. Timber frames shall be constructed in hardwood
of 50 mm minimum thickness. Companion rings or flanges shall be provided with an
adequate number of suitably sized rag bolts or similar fixing devices.
B.
In all cases the duct end shall be finished with a mating flange and where this is fixed
to a timber frame the flange shall be wide enough to overlap the joint between timber
and masonry by least 15 mm.
C.
The material of the duct shall be extended in the form of a spigot, beyond the flanged
connection and into the builders work cavity.
D.
Joints between mating flanges and companion rings or hardwood frames shall be fitted
with a sealing gasket as specified previously.
3.03
DUCTWORK INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
All external ductwork shall be galvanized after manufacture. Ducting passes

through the roof, it is to be fitted with angle flanges and a weather cravat
welded to the ducting or other approved method. External ductwork shall be
protected by one coat of calcium phumbate primer followed by two coats of
zinc chromate paint.
Page 39 of 43
2.
Where ductwork is to be galvanized after manufacture in order to restrict the

distortion encountered in galvanizing such ductwork it shall be manufactured
from thick sheet.
3.
Where a continuous vapor barrier is required, supports shall not be connected

directly to the duct stiffening or flanges. The insulation and vapor barrier
should be abutted to an insulator incorporated with the duct support. The
insulator shall be incompressible and made from hardwood, rot-proofed soft
wood or other approved material
4.
Support drop rods and bolts shall be bright steel, nuts and washers shall be sheradized.
B.
Access Doors and Panels, Test Holes
C.
1.
Hinged access doors should not be larger than 600 mm high by 600 mm wide
unless necessary for equipment handling. Doors should preferably open against
the air pressure. Both the opening in the duct and the access door itself should
be adequately reinforced to prevent distortion. A suitable sealing gasket shall
be provided together with sufficient clamping type latches to ensure an air-tight
and water-tight seal between the door and the duct. The latches shall have
handles to operate from both the inside and outside of the door.
2.
Removable access covers shall not be larger than 375 mm wide by 300 mm
high, unless essential for access to equipment, in which case the size shall be
agreed. The opening in the sufficiently rigid shall be provided distortion. A
suitable sealing gasket shall be provided with sufficient fastenings to ensure an
air-tight seal.
3.
Access openings in insulated ducts shall have door frames extended beyond the
face of the duct by a measurement equal to the thickness of the insulation and
be so arranged that the insulation and finish can be dressed into the frame,
thereby ensuring that the opening is not concealed and that the edges of the
insulation are protected from accidental damage. The access door shall be
dished to contain the insulation.
4.
Test holes for instruments shall be provided at regular intervals along the
ductwork and to enable fan duties to be tested and the performance of
regulating dampers to be accessed. All holes shall be 25 mm diameter and
provided with an effective seal.
Flexible Joints
1.
Flexible joints shall be of full cross-sectional area of the mating equipment

connections and duct section and the ends of the duct and equipment
connection shall be in line.
2.
The flexible joints shall be manufactured from fire rated reinforced Neoprene
or glass fiber cloth and not be less than 75 mm wide (metal edge to metal edge)
and not more than 250 mm wide.
Page 40 of 43
D.
E.
F.
3.
Flexible joints shall be normally fitted to suction and delivery connections of

all fans and at expansion joints in buildings. Any other requirements shall be
4.
On rectangular connections, the flexible material shall be held in place by a

mating flange with a backing plate. If proprietary material is used, the metal
edge shall be held in position by a backing plate or angle flange. Backing
plates shall be not less than 3 mm thick.
5.
On spirally wound circular ducts, a coupling shall be attached to duct ends to

provide a smooth surface and ends carefully cleaned with a suitable solvent
over a length of 100 mm.
6.
On all circular spigots, the flexible material is to be secured by a clipband with

adjustable screw or toggle fittings. Unless a proprietary metal edged material is
used when screws and sealant may be used.
7.
Flexible ducts may be used to overcome difficult connections between rigid

components but the minimum amount shall be used to prevent excess pressure
drop. In normal circumstances, connections should not exceed six diameters.
Adequate support must be installed to prevent the ductwork sagging. The
Contractor shall ensure that the properties of the flexible duct comply with the
fire regulations applying to the building.
Sealants and Gaskets

1.
The sealant shall be applied with a brush or gun and shall completely seal the
joint. The ductwork must not be pressurized until the sealant has cured. The
jointing between angles shall be suitable gaskets or mastic sealant.
2.
The gasket shall not be less than 3mm thick for ducts of up to 1mm sheet
thickness or not less than 4mm for ducts of up to 1.2mm sheet thickness.
Before application of the sealant, all surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Connections
1.
Ends of sections where connecting to grilles and diffusers shall be flanged or

shaped according to the connection required. Sharp edges or corners on ducts,
associated equipment, supports, angle stiffeners etc., shall not be permitted. All
duct edges shall be painted with zinc chromate paint. Ductwork where the
galvanized protection is damaged during manufacture or erection shall only be
accepted, by applying two coats of zinc chromate paint and a final coat of
aluminum paint.
2.
Exposed ductwork shall have 75 mm clearance from walls and ceilings for
cleaning purposes.
Supports
1.
Supports and brackets for ductwork shall be purpose made and adjustable,
fixed to the building structure with special brackets and cantilevers and spaced
to ensure adequate support and where practicable, should be fitted at each joint
of the ductwork.
Page 41 of 43
2.
G.
Vertical ducts shall be supported by the stiffening angles or angle flanges but
where this is impractical, supporting angles should be fixed to the duct.
Spacing of supports for vertical ducts may be at greater intervals than for
horizontal ducts.
Air Leakage Tests

1.
For testing of ductwork and equipment see Section 15050.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF KITCHEN HOOD DISHWASHER DUCTWORK
A.
Ductwork for the kitchen hoods and dishwasher shall be fabricated and installed in
accordance with the Uniform Mechanical Code, Chapter 20. Exposed ducts shall be of
stainless steel. Hidden ducts shall be of black steel painted and insulated as specified.
All duct connections shall be flange type with fire rated gasket. Access doors shall be
provided at each change of direction.
3.05
INSTALLATION OF AIR GRILLES
A.
Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended
functions.
B.
Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, lighting,
structural and Architectural elements, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets
and inlets with other work.
C.
Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction
"Reflected Ceiling Plans" or as approved by Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated,
locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules.
D.
Diffuse supply air to assure air velocities not in excess of (50 fpm) 0.017 m/s at 1.8m
or less above the floor line. Mix room air with the primary air by induction to effect
subsequent equalization of the room temperature without stratification. Install all
outlets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
E.
For outlets used with under-the-window or wall units, coordinate the outlet dimensions,
arrangement and pressure drop with the units and enclosure to assure compatibility.
F.
Outlets shall comply with applicable noise criteria specifications.
3.06
A.
Tests During Construction

1.
During construction of the duct systems and before the application of

insulation, one or more designated duct sections shall be tested for each Duct
Construction Class and for each Leakage Class for each system as designated
Page 42 of 43
by and in accordance with the SMACNA"HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test

Manual", including casings and flexible run outs in the presence of the
Engineer. The Engineer shall establish the sizes and locations of test sections.
The designated duct section shall represent a minimum of 25% of each system.
If any section has three (3) section failures, the entire system shall be tested.
2.
The testing shall be performed by the Mechanical Subcontractor and

supervised by Engineer familiar with testing procedures. See Section "Testing
and Balancing of Mechanical Systems."
3.
The size of the test section may vary from a complete supply or exhaust system
to a portion of a system, depending on its complexity and size. The Engineer
shall use Appendix F in the aforementioned SMACNA Manual as a guide in
determining test section sizes and locations.
4.
Refer to Section 15991 for Testing & Commissioning.
END OF SECTION
Page 43 of 43
SECTION 15803 COOLING SYSTEM
COOLING SYSTEM
SECTION 15803
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Section 15801: Air Distribution.
F.
Section 15990: Instrumentation.
G.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.03
1.
Connect all diverting valves, balance connections, pumps etc. as shown

on the drawings.
2.
Provide and install in the position shown on the drawings an

expansion/pressurization unit for the total chilled water system.
REFERENCES
A.
1.04
General
Refer to individual materials for specified standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data
1.
Descriptive literature for each of the actual proposed equipment to be

used including:
a.
Capacity
b.
Operating Pressure Ranges
c.
Pressure Losses
d.
Fluid Flows
e.
Test Reports
Page 1 of 6
B.
f.
Certificates of Approval
g.
Operation and Maintenance Data
h.
Any other Technical Data
Shop Drawings
1.
Shop Drawings for each of the actual proposed equipment shall include
the following:
a.
Working or Manufacturing Drawings.
b.
Calculations.
c.
Installation Details.
d.
Connections by other services.
e.
Wiring and Control Diagrams.
f.
Accessories Available Indicating Those Included.
g.
System Diagrams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A.
General
1.
The pipework shall be as specified in Section 15060. Seamless black

steel, schedule 40.
2.
Condensate runs from drip trays under cooling coils shall be of

pressure UPVC when concealed above false ceiling.
B.
Valves shall be as specified in Section 15100.
C.
Insulation shall be complete with vapor barrier as specified in Section 15250.
Page 2 of 6
2.02
PUMPS
A.
General
1.
2.03
As specified in Section 15140.
CHEMICAL FEEDER POT

The unit shall be of a quality construction with dished ends for safe operation at
pressure and shall be supplied complete with all valves and funnels all factory
assembled. The feeder unit shall be supplied with a stand and shall be pressure tested
with a certificate from the factory.
2.04
EXPANSION TANK
1.
Provide compression tank ( expansion tank) as shown on the drawings, constructed for
930 Kpa working pressure for chilled water system and 1500 KPA for condenser water
system, stamped with U symbol and supplied with National Board From U-1
denoting compliance with ASME boiler and pressure vessel code. Provide fittings and
connections to related equipment in accordance with tanks manufacturers
recommendations. Tank shall be insulated externally. Insulation shall be same type
used for exposed ductwork, specified hereinbefore. Tank diaphragm shall withstand 10
deg. C up to 120 deg C suitable for heating water systems.
2.
Refer to drawings for tank support.
2.05
CHILLED WATER TREATMENT

Contractor shall assign a chemical specialist to execute all chemical treatment works
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The scope of work for the chemical treatment specialist is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Chemical Supply
Supervision of treatment program applied
Water analysis and recommendations.
The mechanical contractor shall make sure that the following are completed
and handed over to the engineer prior to commencement of water treatment
work s:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
System is electromechanical operating.

System is tested and pressurized for leaks.
System to be cleaned should be final and any new loops to be
connected should be separately.
Drain points should be provided and sufficient for quick system
draining.
Make up water supply should match with system volume.
Estimated volume of chilled water system and condenser water system are to be
verified by the Contractor and submitted for approval.
Page 3 of 6
2.06
CHILLED WATER CHEMICAL TREATMENT PROGRAM

Expected water holding capacity is to be verified by contractor and submitted for
review.
A-
Chemical Flushing Program

-
B-
Alkatreat 20 or approved equal is added into the system during the

initial water fill and circulated to remove oil & grease deposits.
System solution is drained completely and flushed then refilled again.
During refilling and draining phases, strainers has to be removed and
cleaned and reinstalled after final flushing.
This should include the strainers ( FCU & Pumps & AHU). System
should be flushed until water PH is as raw water or neutral and TDS is
within 10% of raw/make-up water supply.
Chemtreat 248 or approved equal should be introduced during system
refill to ensure efficient dispersion through out the system.
Circulate this solution for 10-16 hours. Time will be specified by the
specialized chemist who is attending the site.
On the completion of the above procedure, system water should be
drained and flushed thoroughly.
Strainers are to be cleaned as above.
System is to be flushed completely until system water is neutral or as
raw water.
Refill system with raw water and add Alkatreat 20 or approved equal.
On completion of above strainers should be cleaned as above properly.
System is to be refilled and flushed thoroughly to ensure removal of all
suspended and solubilized debris.
Cooltreat 011 or approved equal is to be added & circulated for 1 hour
& drained.
Strainers are to checked & cleaned before the chemical treatment
injection ( final)
When strainers check test reveal that they are clean, fresh water is to
circulate for 1-2 hours to ensure that circulating water parameters are
within 10% of raw/make-up supply.
Individual strainers will be checked at random for the presence of any
residual suspended material which may have accumulated from low
flow areas and/or restricted/small bore pipe work following the above
procedures.
If strainers are blocked or system water values are greater than 10% of
the incoming supply, the Cooltreat 011 flush should be repeated until
strainers and water quality meet the required parameters given below.
On completion of above treatment chemicals are to be added.
Chemical Treatment Program

-
Heatreat 502 (or approved equal).

Initial shot dose
Annual running dose
Microtreat 2200 ( or approved equal )

Page 4 of 6
Initial shot dose

Annual running dose
The Contractor should make sure that the make up water before
chemical injection should be soft water of total hardness around 50-70
PPM as CaCO3.
C-
Hot Water System

Same as chilled and quantities will be :
Flushing Chemicals:
Alkatreat 20
Chemtreat248
Cooltreat 011
Treatment Chemicals:
Heatreat 502
Microtreat 2200.
D-
General
The Contractor should make sure that the water treatment specialist execute the
following tasks during the one year guarantee period.
Schedule visits frequency
: 6 per annum.
The following is carried out on every visit by the chemist:
1234-
Full on-site analysis of all waters connected with the system.

Wiring a report on his findings and any recommendations he may
have.
Checking the operation of the dosage/ control equipment.
Checking the record chemical treatment stock levels.
Plant inspection: observe/ monitor the water treatment program in action.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL INSTALLATION
A.
Piping
1.
The piping shall be installed generally as described in Section 15060

and as shown on the drawings for chilled water.
2.
Install thermometers in piping system adjacent to the heat inlet and

outlet connections of each chillers evaporator.
3.
Install strainers in water piping ahead of all pumps, automatic

modulating valves, and heating coils.
Page 5 of 6
4.
Provide balancing valves and pressure gage cocks in all returns from
equipment and three way valve bypass loops to balance the system.
5.
Balancing valves shall be required on the return of each branch main to

balance the system.
6.
Provide flexible connections at the inlet and outlet to all major

equipment which require vibration isolation.
END OF SECTION
Page 6 of 6
SECTION 15860 MINI SPLIT UNITS
SECTION 15860
MINI SPLIT UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
complete installation of the mini split units and related work as indicated on the
B.
1.
Extent units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and
by requirements of this section. Types of units specified in this section include the
following:
a.
Mini Split units
2.
Provide factory-mounted and wired controls and electrical devices as specified in this
section.
C.
1.
Basic Mechanical Requirements - Section 15010.
2.
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods - Section 15050.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Materials shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards and reference
specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
2.
ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigerating system of packaged heating and

cooling reverse cycle units in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following accordance with requirements specified under Submittals in

Section 15010.
1.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities
of selected model clearly indicated, weights, furnished specialties and accessories and
installation and startup instructions.
Page 1 of 4
2.
Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating

dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and methods of assembly of
components.
3.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply

wiring to packaged heating and cooling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type
wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of
packaged heating and cooling units and controls. Clearly differentiate between
portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
4.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each packaged heating
and cooling unit, control and accessory, including "troubleshooting" maintenance
guide. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual in accordance with
requirements of Section 15010.
1.04
A.
Handle units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and
scoring. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.
B.
Store units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes,
water, construction debris and physical damage.
C.
Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading units,
and moving units to final locations for installation.
1.05
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer,

agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate
and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper
assembly or failure to perform as required. Manufacturer's instructions for handling,
installing, protecting and maintaining units must be adhered to during warranty period.
Replacement includes component replacement and labor for removal, reinstallation and
retesting and balancing.
1.
Warranty Period: one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
2.
Contractor shall include separate service Contract for Labor, if required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MINI-SPLIT UNIT
A)
General
Mini split system shall cover a range up to two tons of refrigeration and shall consist of
a condensing unit, an evaporator blower unit, and refrigerant piping network between
the blower coil and the condensing unit.
Page 2 of 4
B)
Condensing Unit
Condensing unit shall be of the air cooled type completely assembled at the factory and
shall consist of the following:
-
C)
Phosphatized zinc coated steel casing.

Hermetic Compressor.
Air cooled condenser and condenser fan.
four way solenoid reversing valve.
All necessary controls and accessories for automatic and proper operation.
Evaporator blower Unit

The evaporator blower unit shall be installed indoors and shall be of the type indicated
on the Drawings.
The unit shall be complete with:
-
Evaporator cooling unit.

Centrifugal 3-speed blower and blower motor.
Cleanable filter.
Thermostat and speed selector switch.
Decorative cabinet if installed exposed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
EXAMINATION
1.
Examine Conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to
site conditions.
B.
PREPARATION
1.
Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section. Provide supplementary parts necessary to
complete all insulation work, though not specifically indicated or specified herein.
2.
Verify all measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the
coordination and scheduling of the work of this section with the work of related trades,
so as not to delay job progress.
C.
INSTALLATION
1. Install mini-split units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Install units plumb and level, firmly anchor in locations indicated and maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances.
Page 3 of 4
3.
Electrical Wiring
a.
Turn over to Electrical Contractor devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified
to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to
Electrical Contractor.
b.
Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal

and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment
startup until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment manufacturer.
4.
Drain Piping - Connect unit drain to nearest indirect waste connection. Provide trap at
drain pan, construct at least 1 inch deeper than fan pressure in inches of water.
D.
1.
Startup units, in accordance with manufacturer's startup instructions. Test controls and
demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
E.
DEMONSTRATION
1. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one-half day to
instruct Employer's personnel in operation and maintenance of packaged cooling
units.
a. Schedule training with Employer, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and
Engineer of training date.
b. Provide operating and maintenance manuals as approved.
END OF SECTION 15860
Page 4 of 4
SECTION 15900 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

SECTION 15900
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall supply and install all the control equipment, auxiliary devices, instruments,
etc. to perform satisfactory operations of all systems described in the specifications and/or
indicated on the drawings. The drawings and the specifications are complemented each to the
other. The sequence of operation of each system or piece of equipment is specified either
under the equipment specification section or detailed on the drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials shall conform to the latest edition of industry standards and reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. Controls shall comply with NFPA and shall be UL
Listed and certified.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under Submittals in
Section 15010.
1.
Product Data: Submit names of manufacturer and copies of latest published literature
including types, applications and thermal characteristics for materials specified herein
for approval; obtain written approval before ordering materials.
2.
Samples: Submit samples of materials specified herein for approval; obtain approval
before ordering materials.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.
Deliver materials specified herein in manufacturer's unopened containers, with

manufacturer's name and point of origin on each container.
B.
Deliver materials and handle to prevent the inclusion of foreign materials and the
damage of materials by water or breakage.
C.
Store materials and equipment where designated and within the manufacturer's
recommended temperature range. Assume responsibility and security for materials and
equipment and take precautions for protection from detrimental conditions.
1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

-
Control system shall be of the electric, or electronic, (solid state) or a combination of

them to provide the required sequence of operation.
Provide all relays, switches, gauges, sources of electricity and all other auxiliaries,
accessories and connections necessary to make a complete operable system.
Page 1 of 13
Install controls so that adjustments and calibrations can be readily made.
Unless otherwise noted, install all wall mounted thermostats 1400 mm above the floor,
measured to the center line of the instruments.
Insertion type thermostats shall have adjusting head at eye level, wherever practicable,
for adjustment and calibration.
Install all control valves horizontally with the power unit up.
Unless stated otherwise temperatures shall be controlled within plus or minus 2 oF (1

oC) and humidity within plus or minus 5 per cent of the set point.
Provide positive positioner devices on all controls operated in sequence and/or where
specified or required to maintain the set point within the required limits without
override.
After completion of installation, all automatic controls shall be regulated and adjusted
and placed in complete operating conditions subject to the approval of the Engineer and a
maintenance brochure including all operating instructions, specifications and sheets for
all instruments shall be submitted by the Contractor.
Electric control systems shall conform to the requirements shown on the Drawings and
shall effect the operation of the air conditioning systems contemplated by the design.
After all controls, valves and motors have been connected, test the systems in the
presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the capability of each automatic control system
to meet contract requirements.
Basic components shall be standard catalogue products of single reputable Manufacturer.
Do not duplicate factory furnished controls of unitary equipment like refrigeration

machines, fan coil units, etc. but modify them to conform to these specifications:
Obtain from the manufacturer of unitary equipment, and submit written certification that
proposed control circuit modifications do not conflict with or invalidate Manufacturer's
equipment warranty.
Instrument wire shall be run in conduits separate from other types of wiring and shall
terminate on identified terminal strips.
The wire terminals on instruments shall not be used as junction points to facilitate
removal of instruments without disturbing others.
Instruments shall have laminated plastic name tags with tag numbers and service
engraved on the tag. Tags shall be securely fastened to the instrument. Tags shall be
black with white lettering.
The equipment shall be restarted after a power failure in the same sequence and with the
same time delays as specified for normal start-up.
Page 2 of 13
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
.
A.
Heat Exchanger
1.
C.
Immersion temperature sensor located in the heat exchangers inlet and outlet pipe
at the AHU side and at the cooling plant side shall sense the water temperature and
end the relevant measurements to the PLC controller in order to modulate the flow
coming from the cooling plant accordingly.
Air Handling Systems

Fresh air AHUs are controlled by a DDC interlocked with the supply air sensor, the
BMS system and with an override from the fire alarm system .
(refer to the BMS drawings )
.
D.
Fan Coil Units

Apartment FCU,s are controlled by a room thermostat with a three speed selector
switch..
Lift lobbies FCU,s and public area FCUs are controlled by a DDC interlocked with
the return temperature air sensor, the BMS system and with an override from the fire
alarm system .
2.02
SMOKE AND FIRE CONTROL OF AIR HANDING SYSTEMS

In case of fire the following sequence should be activated:
1234-
All AHU in the fire floor should be switched OFF

All extract fans for kitchens and toilets should be switched OFF
All staircase pressurization fans should be switched ON.
The smoke extract fans should be switched ON. The smoke extract fans
shall depressurize the fire floor only.
5- The fresh air AHU in the neighboring floor should be switched ON .
6- All the above shall be interlocked with the fire alarm system.
2.03
CONTROL PANEL AND CONTROL SYSTEM

-
Control panels shall be installed where shown and as required on the

Drawings. Each panel shall include start-stop and pilot lights for all major
equipment being controlled together with their starters and necessary heat
detector, alarm and other related safety and fire alarm systems.
The control system shall be complete with all necessary transformers,

thermostats, valves, dampers, damper operators, and associated regulators
required to maintain the conditions desired together with the thermometers,
gauges, and other necessary accessories and the control wiring.
Page 3 of 13
Shop drawings shall be schematic diagrams showing all the components of

the control systems and the interconnection scheme. Each component shall be
identified by name and/or schedule number of equipment item it controls.
Manufacturer's detailed Shop Drawings, specifications, and data sheets for all
equipment to be furnished shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
2.04
CONTROL DEVICES
A)
Temperature Controllers (With Remote Sensors)

Shall be supplied complete with metal cases and manual set point adjusters.
Room type controllers shall be mounted 1800 mm above the
accessible location .
floor and in an
Panel-mounted controllers shall be supplied with metal mounting adaptor plate and
mounting assembly.
Controllers shall be designed for a throttling range of 2 oF (1 oC) for a 3Vdc
output change with a control dial range 55- 85 oF (13-29 oC) and shall be suitable for
ambient operating limits 40-135 oF (4-57 oC).
B)
Dampers
-
Motorized automatic dampers shall be of the louver type with not less than 13
gauges welded steel frames and galvanized finish. Blades shall have
interlocking edges, stainless steel side springs (or vinyl or neoprene gaskets),
and Teflon-coated stainless steel thrust washers. Blades shall be edged with
neoprene if the damper is to operate in outside air service either as an intake
or discharge damper. Damper blades shall have steel trunnions mounted in
nylon or oilite bearings.
Dampers shall be not more than 1200mm. in length between bearings.

Modulating dampers shall be of the opposed blade type unless specified
otherwise. Blades shall be not over 200mm. in width and shall not be less
than 16 gauge galvanized steel. Hardware shall be zinc plated. One damper
actuator shall be provided for each 1.5 sq. meter of damper area.
C)
Provide parallel blade dampers arranged for maximum turbulance and mixing
of outside air with return air. Arrange dampers as necessary to prevent
stratification or provide baffles necessary to correct stratification problems.
Provide dampers of low leakage construction, so designed that the maximum

leakage shall be 10 cfm/ft2 (0.005 m3/s/m2) of damper with 4" WG. (1 Kpa)
pressure differential applied.
Temperature Sensors
Duct temperature sensors shall have their sensing elements immersed inside the duct
and the wiring enclosure mounting on the outer surface of the duct and shall be of the
Page 4 of 13
averaging duct type with linear output and suitable for ambient limits -40 to 250 oF (40 to 120 oC).
Sensor shall be complete with a steel wiring enclosure with 1/2" (13mm) conduit
knockout (top and bottom) and a 5 feet (1.5m) long sensing element.
Sensors shall be of corrosion proof construction.
Sensing elements for water pipe mounting shall be of the rod and tube type with
linear output and shall be furnished complete with separable stainless steel bulb wells
filled with heat conductive compound. Sensors shall be factory calibrated and
tamperproof. If easily adjustable sensors are provided, they shall be located inside
metal enclosures with cylinder lock and key to prevent unauthorized setting.
D)
Room Thermostats
-
Shall have metal locking covers and shall be provided with concealed
adjustment means, and with thermometers.
Each room thermostat shall be supplied with metal auxilliary mounting bases
and metal subbase for surface mounting applications; plus a plastic guard to
protect thermostat from damage.
E)
Line voltage on/off thermostats shall be of the bimetal operated snap action
switch. They shall be underwriters' laboratories inc., listed at an electrical
rating appropriate to the application. Thermostat shall operate on 2 oF (1 oC)
differential and shall have a control dial range 55-85 oF (13-29 oC).
Low voltage thermostats shall be of the self contained type with a 1000 ohm
sensing element and an amplifier. Thermostat shall have a control dial range
55-85 oF (13-29 oC) and a throttling range of 2 oF (1 oC) for a 3 Vdc output
change.
FCU Thermostats (Digital Type)

To provide line voltage, on-off control of fan coil unit valve and fan through spdt
switching. To have following features:
-
Cooling/ heating modes

Wall mounted, with silver bronze finish and moulded cover
Manual fan speed and on/off selection ( on/off -lo-med-hi)
3 speed switches.
Horizontal temperature scale range with set point control lever
Provision to break cooling circuit when fan is off
Range approximately 40-90 deg. F with fixed differential of 2 deg. F
Accessories including outlet box and adjustable range stops.
Thermostat controlling cooling and electric heating coil valves of guest rooms
shall have feature to switch FCU to low speed automatically when door access
card is not in and to start FCU when temperature exceeds high limit including
all controls, sensors and related accessories.
Automatic switching of fan speed and to readjust room temperature during unoccupancy shall be as detailed on drawings.
Page 5 of 13
Where shown on drawings 2 or 3 FCUS can be controlled by one thermostat especially

designed for this purpose.
F)
G)
Return Air Duct Thermostat and Temperature Controllers Type T-2: to provide line
voltage, proportional control of damper or valve motor through sensing element and
capillary adjusting potentiometer in proportion to temperature variations. To have the
following features:
-
set point adjustment knob on dial
differential adjustment dial with 135 ohms resistance potentiometer
liquid filled, fast response coiled capillary element for duct applications or
sensing bulb with immersion well components for chilled and heating water
pipes applications
6 meters copper capillary tube
range 55-175 deg. F with adjustable proportioning range of 3-30 deg. F
accessories including controller mounting, capillary holder for mounting

sensing element in air duct or immersion well assembly with compression
fitting and tube clip for mounting bulb in tank or with T-strap for clamping
bulb on pipe.
Sequence Controller Type SC-1: to provide sequence control for multiple water chiller
units or multiple boiler units according to the preset temperatures and provide
programmed permutations for lead / lag chillers or boilers for equal use.
Advanced proportional plus derivative microprocessor control algorithm, with the
required number of steps for 3 water chiller units and for 2 water boiler heating units.
To be used with electronic temperature sensors.
H)
Sensors
1.
Temperature Sensor TS-1

To provide proportional single output for electronic temperature controller. To have the
following features:
electronic type
insertion or immersion type for mounting on air duct or liquid line
set point range -40 to + 257oF
accessories including 125 to 450mm insertion element for duct mounting and 100mm
immersion element with pressure rating for 150 psi for liquid line mounting.
2.
Humidity Sensor - Type H-1
Page 6 of 13
To provide proportional or proportional plus integral control action, electronic type.

Range 15-90% RH with adjustable throttling range 1-10% RH.
I)
Low Limit Thermostat and Temperature Controller Type T-3: to provide line voltage,
on-off control of damper or valve by sensing temperature of air in duct or liquid
through spdt switch. To have the following features:
set point adjustment knob on dial
differential adjustment dial with snap-acting switch
liquid filled, fast response coiled capillary element for duct applications and sensing
bulb with immersion well components for pipe applications
6 meter copper capillary tube
range 55-175 deg. F with adjustable differential of 3-10 deg. F
accessories including wiring knock-outs, controller mounting, capillary holder for

mounting sensing element in air duct with bag assembly or immersion well assembly
with compression fittings and tube clip for mounting bulb in tank or with T-strap for
clamping bulb on pipe.
J)
Motorized Valves and Actuatores
1.
Motorized Valves Type A: low voltage, 3-way, mixing, proportional reversing type,
providing modulating control of water by-pass flow through operation of motor
actuator and valve linkage in response to signal from proportional controller. To have
the following features:
2.
valves 15 mm to 50 mm sizes, with two inlets and one outlet screwed end
connections, cast bronze body, stainless steel stem, brass plug, integral brass
seat and spring loaded, self-adjusting, Teflon cone packing
valves 65 mm and larger, with two inlets and one outlet flanged end
connections, cast iron body, stainless steel stem, brass plug, replaceable bronze
seat and spring loaded, self-adjusting, Teflon cone packing
reversing type motor, oil-immersed gear train, die-cast aluminum case, single
160 degree stroke, double-ended crankshaft, die-cast aluminum cover with
built-in transformer and direct drive feedback potentiometer
linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and

comprising roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with
150 lb. seal-off force
valve rated 250 deg. F maximum water temperature and 150 psi maximum
water pressure
motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperature.

Motorized Control Valves 2 way
Page 7 of 13
Motorized Control Valve shall be low voltage, 2-way, 2-position, providing openclosed control of water flow through operation of motor actuator and valve linkage in
response to signal from an on-off switch. To have the following features:
3.
single seated valve, straight-through pattern; screwed end connections, bronze

body and removable brass seat on 15 to 40 mm sizes; flanged end connections,
cast iron body and removable bronze seat on 50 to 80 mm sizes; stainless steel
stem and composition disc with removable throttling plugs
reversing type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die- cast aluminum case,
dual-stroke (90 and 160 degrees), double-ended crankshaft and die-cast
aluminum cover with built-in transformer
linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and

comprising roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with
160 lb. seal-off force
valve rated 240 deg. F maximum water temperature and 125 psi maximum
pressure for flanged end connections and 150 psi for screwed end connections
motor rated 125 deg. F maximum ambient temperature.

-
Valve shall be sized to produce a full flow pressure drop approximately 1.5
times the full flow pressure drop of the unit by-passed, unless noted
otherwise.
Valve shall be selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected
pump pressure at no additional cost.
Motorized Control Valve 2 way

-
Applicable to fan coil units.
Electric, 2-way, 2-position valve (where shown on drawing valve shall be 3way motorized on/off type)
Forged brass swing ball type.
Complete with motor operator assembly.
Valve shall be sized to produce a full flow pressure drop approximately 1.5
times the full flow pressure drop of the unit by-passed, unless noted
otherwise.
4.
Valve shall be selected to withstand system pressure and operate at the selected
pump pressure at no additional cost.
Control Motor (Actuator)
Electric, reversible, spring-return, proportional type complete with linkage.
Suitable for damper operation.
Page 8 of 13
5.
Shall be sized to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth

modulating action or two-position action as specified.
Differential Bypass Valve (Self balancing Valve)

The differential by-pass valve shall modulate, open or close, according to the set
differential pressure between the chilled water supply and return pipes. The
differential by pass valve shall be complete with pressure controller , two way
modulating valve and all related accessories and controls. Pressure controller shall
be suitable for converting subranges of positive pressure, negative pressure and
pressure differential into electrical output signals and to control operation of
modulating valve accordingly.
Manufacturer to be proposed by Tenderer as part of his tender, in all cases to be
approved by consultant.
Pressure controller shall be suitable for liquids with differential pressure up to 10
bars. Output signals shall be from Zero to 20 mA (0 to 10V).
The sensor section and the terminal connection box shall be made of die cast
aluminium from one unit. The evaluation electronics shall be housed in a module
casing of makrolon.
K)
THERMOMETERS AND GAUGES
1.
General
Mount pressure gauges directly at the sensing point unless otherwise indicated.
Select the instrument so that the normal range of operating temperatures and
pressures falls within the middle-third of the instrument range. Use compound gauges
when normal operating pressure is near or below atmospheric.
Locate temperature sensing devices in a portion of the fluid stream where it will
measure the average fluid temperature without obstructing flow. Increase pipes 1
1/2" (40 mm) in diameter and smaller at least one pipe size at the point of insertion.
Where thermometer sensing bulbs are inserted in air ducts or casings, provide
perforated bulb housing with a 3" (80 mm) diameter union flange to permit removal.
Connections for sensing elements are to be brass except where otherwise specified.
Provide all thermometers in piping systems with stainless steel wells and 3/4" (20
mm) seperable sockets.
Provide extension necks where thermometers and pressure gauges are located in
insulated piping, vessels, ductwork, casings or equipment.
All thermometers and gages shall have both english and metric units gradings.
Page 9 of 13
2.
Thermometers
Permanently installed thermometers shall be mercury-in-steel dial type 150mm
diameter having a suitable length of copper covered steel capillary tubing to connect
the dial with the bulb, shall be supplied and installed as specified and as approved
by the Engineer. Each thermometer shall be provided with back flange or arranged
for flush mounting.
Mercury-in-glass type thermometers with metal guard shall be supplied and
installed as specified or as approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified, thermometer bulbs shall be of steel type, screwed 3/4"
(20mm) British Standard pipe and supplied with stainless steel separable pockets
suitable for screwing, brazing or welding into the pipe carrying the medium to be
measured.
Thermometers shall be tested to read alike on the midscale band, with their bulbs
immersed in water, and the discrepancy between the highest and the lowest
thermometer shall not exceed 0.5 oC.
A red mark on each thermometer scale shall indicate the working temperature at the
point of measurement.
Thermometers shall be marked in both Degree C and Degree F.
3.
Pressure Gauges
Bourdon-tube type with 120 mm. diameter cast aluminium case with moistureproof and dustproof blowout discs. Panelmounted gauges to have steel or aluminium
hinged rings; direct mounted gauges to have back flange, black numerals on a white
background face.
Pressure gauge shall be furnished with a lever-operated gauge cock, and shall have
snubbers installed between the gauge cock and the gauge to eliminate pulsations.
Bourdon Tube shall be Phosphor bronze, (beryllium copper bellows).
Socket shall be Stainless steel.
Accuracy shall be at least 1% of scale range , range shall be equal to twice the rated
working pressure of the unit ( pumps, chillers,....) reading shall be in psi. and Kpa.
Gauges for combined pressure and vacuum service to have compound seal.
4.
Gauge Test Points

Gauge test points for temperature and pressure of flow shall be installed in all
systems and particularly pairs of valves for regulating mains at flow and return
connections to all plant and at all thermostatic elements and sensors.
Pressure gauge test points shall consist of 6mm. bore bosses in the pipe work fitted
with a test cock and plugged off.
Page 10 of 13
Air flow test points shall be provided in the air ducting at all branches and
regulating dampers adjacent to each plant item and automatic control element at
all fan inlets and discharges and elsewhere as required.
Test points shall consist of a 40mm. diameter hole drilled through the ducting and
covered with a removable spring clip fastened cover.
5.
6.
7.
Filter Condition Indicators

-
Indicators shall be provided for all air filter units on air handlers and main
fresh air louvers. The indicators shall be spirit or moving vane type suitably
calibrated and provided with flexible pressure tubes to a test point on each side
of all 'roughing' and 'fine' filters.
The position on the gauge dial at which the filters require cleaning or changing
shall be clearly marked.
Water Flow Switches

-
Water flow switches shall be of the paddle type electric as manufactured by the
McDonnell and Miller Company. Those flow switches used in chilled water
applications shall be of the vaporproof type to prevent condensation on the
electrical switch.
Paddles shall be properly trimmed for the pipe sizes in which they are
installed. The flow switches shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations regarding locations in horizontal piping and
proper distance from fittings.
Firestats
Provide manual reset firestate for each fan of 750 cfm (0.35 m3/sec) or larger
capacity, to stop the fan on rise above set point temperature 136 oF (58 oC).
8.
9.
Freezestats
-
Provide a freezestat for each water coil subject to freezing to protect coil by
deenergizing the supply fan when triggered.
Freezestats shall be remote bulb, 20 ft (6 m) averaging type, with manual

reset, adjustable setpoint, 15 oF to 55 oF., (-9 to 13 oC) mechanical stop to
limit control point adjustment below predetermined minimum.
Smoke Detectors
Supply and install smoke detectors as shown on the Electrical drawings and as
required by NFPA code.
Smoke detectors shall be as specified under the Fire Alarm System section of the
specifications.
Page 11 of 13
Smoke detectors shall be supplied complete with the necessary power relays and
control wiring to perform the proper operations and function specified. Smoke
detectors shall be connected to the fire alarm system with independent zoning
designated on the fire alarm control panel.
10.
Ammeters
One 100 mm dial ammeter shall be supplied for each motor 10 HP (7.5KW) or
larger, and for all electrical apparatus fed from the control panel. Ammeter shall be
red lined at the normal running load.
11.
Voltmeters
One 150 mm dial voltmeter shall be supplied to indicate the voltage of the motor
control center in each Plant-Room.
The Voltmeter shall be complete with a seven-position, rotary switch to enable
reading the voltage between all phases and neutral.
12)
Electric Smoke Curtain

The smoke curtain shall be electrically operated automatic curtain for use as
part of the integral smoke control system. The smoke curtain shall be a roller
blind incorporating heat resistant fabric normally held retraced at ceiling level.
In the event of a fire a signal to the electric motor drive is given to allow the
curtain to unroll at a controlled rate and drop to a preset height as indicated on
drawings. A triangular bottom bar shall be fixed to the lower edge of the fabric
to drive gravity deployment and to reduce movement by air currents and
provide a neat finish when retracted. The curtain shall be fabricated
incompliance with HBS476 and unit to BS 7346. Motor to be low voltage
normally type taken from mains via an emergency power (EPU) and a battery
back up in event of power failure. Smoke curtain panel to give signals to BMS
and fire alarm panel on status of curtain weather open or shut. Curtin to be
rated to at least 600C for 30 minutes.
L)
Carbon Monoxide Detection and Control System

Supply and install a carbon monoxide central detection and control system as specified
herein and as shown on drawings.
a.
The system shall basically consist of but not limited to the required number of
remote carbon monoxide detectors, transmitters and multiple centralized
control panels. The number of centralized control panels shall be dependent on
the maximum allowable distance between sensors, transmitters and panels.
b.
The central panels shall incorporate the required number of modules connected
to remote sensors. Modules shall be fully electronic incorporating solid state
circuitry, microprocessor based control, with decontamination sequence to
periodically remove water vapour and other contaminants from the sensor
elements surface.
The panel shall incorporate all the necessary logic circuits to operate the 2
speed exhaust fans as per the control diagram shown on the drawings.
Page 12 of 13
c.
Carbon monoxide detectors or sensors shall be of the semi conductor type,

micro-processor based with multi-stage output levels, sensitive to CO gas.
Sensor is to be housed in a heavy duty enclosure with IP64 protection and of
vandal proof construction. The sensor is to be provided with a filter for
protection from contaminants. Detection range shall be from 0-500ppm.
Supply and install a carbon monoxide central detection and control system as specified
herein and as shown on drawings:
d.
Each module on the central panel shall have the following indications:
-
2.05
Low level
High level
Alarm
Fault
Power on
e.
The system shall be compatible with and be linked to the "Building

Automation and Control System" (BACS) and is to be provided with all
necessary accessories required for connection to the BACS.
f.
The system shall be provided complete with all wiring, conduits, contactors,
relays, transformers, circuit breakers, etc.... necessary for proper operation of
the system.
HARDNESS MONITOR
Hardness monitor installed on soft water blending valves shall be capable to read the
hardness of the water after blending zero ppm soft water with ordinary water to
produce 30 ppm soft water. The hardness monitor shall readjust automatically the 3way motorized mixing valve in order to result with a 30 ppm soft water.
The hardness monitor shall be of the high range type 5 to 100 mg/L. Alarm points
shall be expressed in mg/L of CaCo3 with an easy to read LED indicator with built in
alarm relay to actuate an external annunciator. Monitor shall be complete with power
cord kit with strain relief. The hardness monitor shall continuously sample water
every two minutes thru pump and necessary tubing and automatically control the
mixing process. Hardness monitor shall be HACH Model SP 510 or approved equal.
Power supply 240 V/ 1 PH/ 50Hz.
END OF SECTION
Page 13 of 13
SECTION 15910 FIRE DAMPERS
FIRE DAMPERS
SECTION 15910
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
Extent of Work: The extent of fire dampers work is shown on drawings and by the
requirements of this section.
1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of fire damper products

of the types and capabilities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B.
ANSI Compliance: Comply with American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

Z233.1 (UL 555), "Fire Dampers".
C.
UL Labels: Provide units which have been approved and listed by Underwriters'
Laboratories (UL) and bear the UL Label, for 1 1/2 hour fire rating unless otherwise
indicated.
D.
NFPA code: Comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning Ventilating Systems" pertaining to
fire dampers.
E.
NEC Code: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70), as applicable to
installation of electrical smoke detection and activation devices.
F.
Industry Standards: Comply with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association, Inc.) recommendations for fabrication,
construction and installation procedures as contained in applicable guides and
manuals on fire dampers and low velocity and high pressure ductwork.
1.03
SUBMITTALS
Submit manufacturer's data on fire dampers together with dampers fire rating
certifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
FIRE DAMPER CURTAIN TYPE.

Fire dampers shall be provided wherever ductwork passes through a fire barrier or
protected shaft in walls, floor and ceilings or as described in schedules. Dampers shall
meet the requirements of NFPA 90A.
Page 1 of 5
Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with UL 555 Standards (Sixth
Edition). Dampers shall have a UL555 fire rating of 1 hours.
Damper blades shall be roll formed 22Gauge galvanized steel interlocked between each
other folding in a curtain. Blades shall be held open (in the air stream or out of the
air stream) depending on the size of the fire damper and the calculated friction loss)
by a heat responsive device (fusible link) melting at a temperature rating of 165F,
212F or 285F according to the application.
If the closing of the fire damper should be controlled by the fire alarm or the building
management system an electro-thermal fusible link should be used.
Damper frames shall be roll formed 22Gauge galvanized steel with reinforced corners.
Fire damper should be equipped with a closure spring to ensure correct operation
regardless of whether the damper is horizontally or vertically mounted.
Fire damper should be equipped with a factory-mounted sleeve; the type of sleeve
should be selected according to the application.
For partition less than 4 or for wood partition, a thin type fire damper should be used
with the same specification as the normal fire damper.
Contractor should follow the installation instruction of the manufacturer.
2.02
MULTI-BLADE FIRE DAMPER. OR MOTORIZED FIRE DAMPER.

Fire Dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installed
where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 90A.
Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with UL 555 Standards
(Sixth Edition). Dampers shall have a UL555 fire rating of 1 hours. Each damper
shall be equipped with a heat responsive device, which has been tested and approved,
for use with the damper assembly in accordance with UL555. The heat responsive
device shall have a temperature rating of 165F, 212F. Dampers shall be UL labeled
for use in dynamic systems. The damper shall have a dynamic closure pressure rating
of 4Wg.
UL555 Dynamic Closure Ratings shall be qualified for airflow and pressure in either
direction through the damper. UL ratings shall allow for mounting damper vertically
(with blades running horizontal) or horizontally.
Damper air performance data shall be developed in accordance with the AMCA
Standard 500-D.
Damper blades shall be 16Gauge galvanized steel 3 V type with three longitudinal
grooves for reinforcement. Blades shall be linked together with external linkage (out
of air stream).
Damper frames shall be 16 Gauge galvanized steel formed into a structural hat
channel shape with reinforced corners. Bearings shall be sintered bronze, oil
impregnated type, rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame.
Page 2 of 5
Damper actuators, spring return, UL listed, shall be factory mounted and shall be
electric type for 240,120 or 24 volts operation (depending of the control system).
Manufacturer's submittal data shall indicate actuator space requirements around the
damper.
2.03
SMOKE DAMPER.
Smoke Dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installed
where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet the
requirements of NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92B.
Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest edition of UL
Standards 555S (Forth Edition). Dampers shall be UL labeled for use in dynamic
systems. The damper shall have a dynamic closure airflow rating equal to or greater than
the airflow at the damper's installed location and a dynamic closure pressure rating of
4Wg.
Dampers shall have a UL555S Leakage rating and a Temperature rating of 250F.
Dampers shall have a UL555S operational airflow rating equal to or greater than the
airflow at its installed location and an operational pressure rating of 4Wg.
Damper actuators shall be factory mounted and qualified for use with the damper in
accordance with UL555S. Damper actuators, spring return, UL listed, shall be electric
type for 240,120 or 24 volts operation (depending of the control system). Manufacturer's
submittal data shall indicate actuator space requirements around the damper.
All UL555S Dynamic Closure Ratings, Operational Ratings and Leakage Ratings shall
be qualified for airflow and pressure in either direction through the damper. UL ratings
shall allow for mounting damper vertically (with blades running horizontal) or
horizontally.
Damper air performance data shall be developed in accordance with AMCA Standard
500-D.
grooves for reinforcement. Blades shall be linked together with external linkage (out of
air stream). Blade shall have a stainless steel or fire rated silicon blades seal to provide
airtight seal between two blades.
Damper frames shall be 16Gauge galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel
shape with reinforced corners. Bearings shall be sintered bronze, oil impregnated type
rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel
compression type to provide airtight seal between blades and frame.
2.04
FIRE SMOKE DAMPER

Combination Fire Smoke Dampers meeting the following specifications shall be
furnished and installed where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules.
Dampers shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92B.
Page 3 of 5
Dampers shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest edition of UL
Standards 555 (Sixth Edition) and UL 555S (Forth Edition). Dampers shall have a
UL555 fire rating of 1 hour. Each damper shall be equipped with a heat responsive
device, which has been tested and approved, for use with the damper assembly in
accordance with UL555. The heat responsive device shall have a temperature rating of
165F, 212F. Dampers shall be UL labeled for use in dynamic systems. The damper
shall have a dynamic closure airflow rating equal to or greater than the airflow at the
damper's installed location and a dynamic closure pressure rating of 4Wg.
Dampers shall have a UL555S Leakage rating and a Temperature rating of 250F.
Dampers shall have a UL555S operational airflow rating equal to or greater than the
airflow at its installed location and an operational pressure rating of 4Wg. Damper
actuators shall be factory mounted and qualified for use with the damper in accordance
with UL555S. Damper actuators, spring return, UL listed, shall be electric type for
240, 120 or 24 volts operation (depending of the control system). Manufacturer's
submittal data shall indicate actuator space requirements around the damper.
All UL555 and 555S Dynamic Closure Ratings, Operational Ratings and Leakage
Ratings shall be qualified for airflow and pressure in either direction through the
damper. UL ratings shall allow for mounting damper vertically (with blades running
horizontal) or horizontally.
Damper air performance data shall be developed in accordance with the latest edition
of AMCA Standard 500-D.
grooves for reinforcement. Blades shall be linked together with external linkage (out of
air stream). Blade shall have a stainless steel or fire rated silicon blades seal to provide
airtight seal between two blades.
Damper frames shall be 16Gauge galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel
shape with reinforced corners. Bearings shall be sintered bronze, oil impregnated type
rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel
compression type to provide airtight seal between blades and frame.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire damper products in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
product serve the intended function. Comply with applicable portions of NFPA's
Installation Standard 90A.
B.
Coordinate with other work including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation

of fire dampers properly with other work.
Page 4 of 5
C.
Damper Access Doors: Refer to Section 15860 for installation of damper access
doors in ductwork.
3.02

Test installed units for compliance with the requirements including those of
governing regulations.
3.03
PERSONNEL TRAINING
Fire Damper Maintenance Training: Train employer's personnel (maintenance
persons) by demonstrating to them how to visually inspect and test damper operation
and how to reset frangible and fusible link assemblies, and how to replace used links.
END OF SECTION
Page 5 of 5
SECTION 15976 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ( BMS)
SECTION 15976
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
PART 1
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
WORK INCLUDES
fully integrated building management system (BMS), UL listed, incorporating direct
digital control (DDC) for energy management, equipment monitoring and control,
including color graphic workstations. System major elements include, without being
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.03
A.
Central processing units.

Personal computer operator workstations.
Data storage units.
Stand-alone Data terminal units.
Data communication units.
Stand-alone Remote control units.
Portable operator's terminals
Data interface units.
Communication cable.
System software.
Console.
Uninterruptable power supply (UPS).
RELATED WORK
The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements"

Division 15 Section "Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Works"
Division 15 Section "HVAC Pumps
Division 15 Section "Fire Tube Boilers"
Division 15 Section "Centrifugal Chillers"
Division 15 Section "Terminal Units"
Division 13 Section "Electric Drive Fire Pumps"
Division 15 Section "Sewage Pumps" and "Sump Pumps"
Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Pumps"
Division 15 Section "Fans "
Division 15 Section "Central Station Air Handling Units"
Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing"
Division 15 Section "Security Systems"
Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices for Lighting Control"
Division 16 Section "Fire Alarm System"
Division 16 Section "Medium Voltage Switchgear"
Division 16 Section "Transformers"
Division 16 Section "Uninterruptable Power Supply"
Page 1 of 56
19.
20.
21.
22.
1.04
A.
SCOPE OF WORK
General: all materials and/or equipment, necessary for proper operation of the systems,
not specified or described herein are to be deemed part of the Specification. Perform the
work under this section and provide all labour, materials, services, equipment and
accessories necessary to furnish and install all instrumentation and equipment as
indicated by the Drawings and/or as required by the Specification, which without limiting
the generality thereof, consists of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.05
A.
Division 16 Section "Main Distribution Boards"

Division 16 Section " Motor Control Centers"
Division 16 Section "Diesel Generators"
Division 16 Section "Central Battery System".
Master Control Communication Station: to be located in the central control room

where shown on the Drawings and to be the primary operator's position for the
systems being monitored and controlled. From this position the operator is to
monitor and control all systems of the Building, chillers, air handling units, pumps,
ventilation control, fans, smoke detection, switch-gear, unit sub-stations, lighting
control, etc. via a communication network at a 1 million baud communication
speed.
Direct Digital Controller (DDC) or so-called field processing units (FPU): to be
located where required and allocated for distributed processing units are to be
connected together through a communication network having a 78.8 kbaud
communication rate. Field processing units or controllers (FPU) are to be of the
preprogrammed and/or programmable type of appropriate number of input/output
points for the specified application.
Interfacing Panels to enable connection to physical control points via transducers,
signal conditioners, interposing relays and the like
Instrumentation, including sensors/transducers, transformers, sensing piping,
tubing as required
Control valves, dampers, actuators and accessories.
Field wiring conducting communication trunks from DDC/FPU back to central
processors in addition to interconnections between processors peripherals, etc. to
yield a complete system. This to include power supply connection from nearest
emergency panels/substations
Shop drawings, as-built drawings, instruction manuals, source-code programme
listing and all other documentation as required
Testing and commissioning of installations at take over.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Building Management System: Distributed process control system consisting of central
control, central communications, and remote control systems to monitor and control the
following building systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems control.

Smoke control.
Energy management.
Plumbing systems control
Building and exterior lighting.
Fire alarm and detection.
Intrusion detection and security access.
Emergency power generator
Power supply
Page 2 of 56
B.
C.
D.
Central Control System: Configure central processing units, mass memory units, data
terminal units, and related software to perform the following functions:
1.
Develop, store, access, and update building management data base.
2.
Provide human operator interface with system.
3.
Display and record system operation.
4.
Provide central monitoring and automatic control of building systems.
Central Communication System: Configure central communication units, data
communication network, and related software to control input and output between central
control system and remote control system.
Remote Control System: Configure remote control units, data interface units, input
sensing devices, and output control elements to perform the following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
General Product Description:

1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Process variable sensing, signal transmitting, and signal conversion for each input
point.
Signal conversion, transmitting, and operation of control drive or other element for
each output point.
Receive remote control programs and system data from central communication
system.
Manual entry of remote control programs.
Storage of data and remote control programs.
Execute remote control program commands.
Transmit local status data to central communication system.
Execute commands received from central communication system.
The building management system (BMS) shall integrate multiple building

functions including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy
management and historical data collection.
The system shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity
and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, DDC Controllers,
Application Specific Controllers and operator devices.
System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for
alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC Controller shall operate
independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management,
operator I/O and data collection. The failure of any single component or network
connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other
operational devices.
DDC Controllers shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands
and alarm reports directly to, any other DDC Controller or combination of
controllers on the network without dependence upon a central processing device.
DDC Controllers shall also be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator
workstations without dependence upon a central processing device.
Definitions
1.
2.
3.
4.
Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem.

Analog: A continuously varying signal value (temperature current, velocity, etc.).
Application Specific Device: A device that is furnished with a pre-established
built in application that is configurable but not re-programmable.
Binary: A two-state system where an "ON" condition is represented by a high
signal level and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.
Page 3 of 56
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Control Wiring: This includes conduit, wire, and wiring devices to install
complete HVAC control systems, including motor control circuits, interlocks,
sensors, PE and EP switches, and like devices. This also includes all wiring from
node to node, and nodes to all sensors and points defined in the I/O summary
shown on drawings or specified herein, and required to execute the sequence of
operation. Does not include line voltage power wiring.
Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and isolate
system and component malfunctions.
Distributed Control: A system whereby all control processing is decentralized and
independent of a central computer.
Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to translate
input data from one format to output data in a second format.
Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Human-machine interfacing allows the operator
to manage, command, monitor, and program the system.
HVAC Control Systems: The complete LONWORKS control system, comprising
the user interface and routers, gateways, repeaters, nodes, the operator workstation,
software, portable operator terminals, network communications wiring and
raceways, and required field hardware, etc.
Integration: Establishing communication between two devices through the use of a
gateway.
Interoperable: Establishing communication between two devices through the use
of a common protocol and without the use of any gateways.
LonTalk: Open communication protocol developed by the Echelon Corporation.
LONWORKS: The overall communications technology for control systems
developed by Echelon Corporation. The technology employs routers, gateways,
bridges, and multimedia transceivers to permit topology and media- independent
control solutions.
LONMARK Interoperability Association: Standards committee consisting of
numerous independent product developers and systems integrators dedicated to
determining and maintaining the interoperability guidelines for the LONWORKS
industry.
LonMarked - device has been certified for compliance with LonMark standards
by the LonMark association.
LONWORKS Application Specific Nodes (LASN) - a networked device or node
that contains a complete, configurable application that is specific to a particular
task.
LONWORKS Programmable Nodes (LPN) - a programmable control product that
incorporates solid state components based upon the Neuron chip to perform
control loops or functions. The application in the controller is custom software
produced by the integrator specifically for the project.
LONWORKS Single Point Nodes (LSPN): devices such as temperature and
humidity sensors, that have an on-board Neuron microprocessor and network
interface allowing them to communicate on the LONWORKS network.
Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a
communication bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all
control units. Additionally, a network provides central monitoring and control of
the entire system from any distributed control unit location.
Node: A LonWorks device with a neuron chip and LonTalk transceiver.
Operating System (OS): Software which controls the execution of computer
programs and which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls,
accounting, compilation, storage assignment, data management, and related
services.
Operator Workstation (OW): The OW consists of a high-level processing personal
computer that provides graphic user interface to network.
Page 4 of 56
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
1.06
A.
1.07
Peripheral: Input/Output (I/O) equipment used to communicate to and from the

computer and make hard copies of system outputs and magnetic files. Peripherals
include CRTs, printers, hard drives, disk drives, and modems, etc.
Portable Operations Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to
facilitate network management, node commissioning, diagnostics, and general
operator interface with the installed LONWORKS control system.
Programmable Device: A device that does have a pre-established built in
application. An application creation software tool is required for an application to
be created and downloaded to the device.
Router: A device which routes messages destined for a node on another segment
sub-net or domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic
based on node address and priority. Routers shall also serve as communication
links between powerline, twisted pair, fiber, coax, and RF media.
XIF: External Interface File contains the contents of the manufacturers product
documentation.
SCHEDULE OF CONTROL POINTS

Schedule of control points included in the Drawings or in the Annex to this specification
is for the control and monitoring points related to HVAC, Plumbing, and Electrical
Works. A 'point' as referred to herein represents every analog output, analog input, digital
output and digital input to be physically connected to a FPU/DDC panel.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design central processing unit with modular system architecture to allow expansion of
processor memory and addition of application software programs, terminal units, and
central memory units.
B.
Minimum System Configuration: Accommodate input and output points, building

systems data base, and functions specified and allow for 20 % additional input/output
points and related expanded data base, without modifying system hardware or software.
C.
Future System Expansion: Design system to be expanded to accommodate 50 %

additional input/output pointsand related expanded data base, without hardware
orsoftware modification. Design application software programs and system data base to
be transportable to expanded central processing unit if required to accommodate specified
future expansion.
D.
Operator Data Terminal Unit: Provide operator interface functions through data terminal
unit, including manual setpoints and overrides, data base display and maintenance,
program loading and entry, operating system software functions, alarm display and
acknowledge, graphic display, and operation logging.
E.
Design operator display terminal data screens with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Split screen display to allow entering commands and variables while observing
status and alarm screen.
Provide constant display of date, time, outside environmental conditions, and
system status.
Indicate off-normal conditions in a flashing display.
Design graphic display screens to present dynamic, interactive display of process

variables and system status.
Page 5 of 56
G.
Layout data terminal units to allow operator to view displays, acknowledge system
alarms and messages, manually enter data or commands, and communicate over
telephone or intercom systems from one seated position.
H.
Central Control System: Perform the following functions:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
Design central communication system to control input and output between central
processing unit, data memory units, remote control units, and data gathering units.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Perform optimization routine.

Display value of each input point.
Display alarm when value of any input point exceeds preset minimum or maximum
limit.
Record each alarm indication.
Record each operator initiated action of control system.
Data Communication Network: Dual redundant distributed control network.

Network Topology: Ring, or bus.
Network Media: Twisted pair.
Network Protocol: LonTalk protocol
Network Transmission Speed: 78.8 kbaud.minimum.
Remote Control System: Provide the following functions and features:

1.
2.
3.
4.
K.
Signal inputs.
Control outputs.
Data and program memory.
Independent control and monitoring of local processes during failure of central
control or central communication systems.
Design and build all system components to be fault-tolerant.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
L.
1.08
A.
Satisfactory operation without damage at 110% and 85% of rated voltage and at plus
3 Hertz variation in line frequency.
Static, transient and short-circuit protection on all inputs and outputs.
Protect communication lines against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced
magnetic interference.
Network-connected devices to be A.C. coupled or equivalent so that any single
device failure will not disrupt or halt network communication.
All real time clocks and data file RAM to be battery-backed for a minimum 72 hours
and include local and system low battery indication.
It must be possible to receive and print out alarms at a central location even when the
workstation at that location is non-operational or taken out of service for periodic
maintenance.
Design system to continue operation of alarm display and printing at central location and
operation of remote control unit functions during removal or failure of central processing
unit.
QUALIFICATIONS
Manufacturer and installer to have an office staffed with factory trained engineers and
technicians fully capable of providing instructions, routine maintenance and emergency
maintenance service on all system components.
Page 6 of 56
B.
Manufacturer and installer to have 10 years experience in design and installation of

computerized building systems similar in performance to that specified herein and to
provide evidence of experience as condition of acceptance and approval.
C.
Supplier to have an in-place support facility within 250 km of the site with, spare parts
inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment.
1.09
A.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15,
Section 15, Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled.
BMS shall comply with UL 916 PAZX and 864 UDTZ or ETL LonMarkTM and be so listed at
the time of bid. All equipment used in system is to bear appropriate UL listing label/mark
to ensure compliance.
C.
The DDC system manufacturer shall provide documentation supporting compliance with
ISO-9000 certification mark from applicable registrar.
D.
Unitary controllers, intelligent sensors, and intelligent actuators shall comform to the
appropriate LonMarkTM functional profile configurations based on intended use and shall
be so labeled.
1.10
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: maintain a complete test, inspection and documentation program covering all
phases of construction and implementation of the instrumentation and control systems.
Also maintain an engineering assurance program throughout final design and equipment
selection phases of the project. Quality control and engineering assurance programs to be
fully documented in a project procedures manual which is to be submitted for approval.
B.
Project procedure manual is to detail, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
equipment selection criteria

design standards
installation standards
field personnel qualification procedures such as for welders and non destructive
testing personnel
equipment calibration procedures
calibrated loop check procedures
system test and start-up procedures.
C.
Start up procedures: portions of the manual may be equipment dependent such as start up
procedures. In such cases submit these portions in accordance with the requirements of
sub-section SUBMITTALS. However, selection criteria, design standard, and installation
standards to be established and approved before detailed design starts.
D.
Inspection: the Engineer has the right, at all times, to inspect the work, piping material,
equipment, or quality assurance procedures as applicable to confirm that requirements as
set forth are being complied with. Provide all tools, instruments and equipment necessary
to facilitate these inspections.
E.
Inspection: cooperate with the Engineer in establishing when the various inspections or
tests will be performed during progress of the work.
Page 7 of 56
F.
Obligations: the presence or activities of the Engineer are in no way to relieve the
Contractor of his obligations.
G.
Inspection duties assigned to the Contractor's personnel are to include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
1.11
A.
verify that all non-destructive testing personnel are qualified for the work being
done
verify that all components received comply with the Specification and receipt,
inspection and storage of materials comply with requirements of the Specification
verify that the Contractor's storage facilities are maintained
verify that rack wiring check and electrical continuity tests are conducted in
accordance with the Specification
witness that all hydrostatic tests performed on instrument sensing lines are in
accordance with the Specification and that all tests are properly filled in signed and
submittal for approval
witness all pneumatic leak tests performed on instrument sensing lines and
pneumatic tubing required by the Specification
verify that all wiring insulation tests are performed in accordance with the
Specification and that all test reports are properly filled in, signed and submitted
for approval
verify that assembly and nameplates of the transmitter racks are in accordance with
the Specification
verify that all racks, panels and local instruments have been located in accordance
with the Specification
verify that all tubing supports are in accordance with the Specification
verify that all tubing has been installed in accordance with the Specification
verify that all repairs and revisions to instrument components and assemblies are in
accordance with the Specification
verify that all repairs and revisions to instrumentation, tubing and their components
is in accordance with the Specification
inspect in detail the tubing system or portions of the system as completed to verify
that system or portion of system is correct and complete as specified prior to the
initiation of any flushing, hydrostatic test, or leak test opera
witness the construction loop inspection performed by the Contractor. All items
control components to conform to the specification requirements and drawings.
Equipment and components to be undamaged as determined by visual examination.
All documentation as required to be complete and on file. Construction loop
inspection, as performed, to comprehensively
and conclusively prove
completeness and conformity of the installation to the Drawings and Specification
verify that calibration of instrumentation and control loops is in accordance with
the approved procedures as submitted in the project procedures manual
witness the calibrated loop check and verify that all calibration reports are properly
filled in, signed and submitted for approval
witness the system operational tests on a sub-system basis to assure operational
integrity and conformance to operational requirements as specified
verify all plant documentation required for plant acceptance is in accordance with
sub-section SUBMITTALS for completeness and conformance.
TECHNICAL PROPOSALS
Technical proposals shall be prepared in accordance with these specifications. Three
copies of the proposal shall be submitted. The technical proposal shall include the
following data/information as a minimum. The order of listing here is not intended to
Page 8 of 56
indicate, nor should it be construed to indicate, the relative importance of the

data/information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Information on organizational capability to handle this project (management,

personnel, manufacturing, single source responsibility, etc.)
Information on training program to demonstrate specification compliance.
System Configuration as proposed:
a.
Describe system architecture including a schematic layout with location
and type of all control panels.
b.
Describe system operation, functions and control techniques.
c.
Modularity.
d.
Provisions against obsolescence due to technological advancement.
Technical data to support the information on the hardware configuration in No. 3
above.
Detailed description of all operating, command, application and energy
management software provided for this project.
A signed certificate stating the Contractor "has read the performance and functional
requirements, understands them and his technical proposal will comply with all
parts of the specification."
Other requirements for inclusion in the technical proposal are located throughout
this specification.
B.
Submit Unit Price schedule with the proposal.
C.
Submit technical proposals with pricing in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
1.12
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system configuration; interconnection wiring diagrams;

location, data characteristics, range and units for each input and output point; logic
diagram for each type of control routine; programming and operating reference for
central processing unit operating system; programming and operating reference for each
application and programming language provided.
C.
Product Data: Provide for each component, including sensors, control drives and
elements, plug-in circuit boards, and enclosed equipment units. Include cabinet
dimensions, weights, and support point locations for each item of enclosed equipment.
D.
Design Data: Indicate basis of optimization algorithms.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify system meets or exceeds listing requirements of

Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for fire alarm and security equipment.
G.
Submit software provider's license agreement stating limits on use, copying, and
transferring software.
I.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate acceptance of component and equipment

installation, interconnecting wiring, and weekly progress on installation and start-up of
system software.
Page 9 of 56
J.
Where installation procedures, or any part thereof, are required to be in accord with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of
these recommendations shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to installation.
Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are
received.
K.
P & I or process flow diagrams: to be completed for each system and submitted for
approval. Instrument symbols and identification to be in accordance with ISA-S5.1.
L.
Technical Data Sheets: control and instrumentation technical data sheets (TDS) to be
prepared for each device. TDS to be similar to and meet the intent of ISA-S20, 1975.
M.
Loop Diagrams: control and instrument loop diagrams prepared and furnished for all
instrument systems. Typical diagrams are not permitted. Loop diagrams are to be unique
for each loop.
N.
Equipment Installation Plans: to indicate location of instrument junction boxes, individual

field instruments, transmitter racks, and routing of cable duct from junction boxes to
respective remote processing units and back to Central Control Room. This is to be
accompanied by a list of control points connected by each FPU, with indication of related
control functions. Interfacing provided is to be listed; these are to be grouped as per
standard sub- module size of digital and analog input/output boards, comprising similar
requirements; such as interposing relays amplifiers, level translators, etc.
P.
Operating Consoles: drawings detailing operating consoles, instrument panel layouts and
dimensions and control room plans.
Q.
Instrument Installation: detail drawings for each field installation are to be furnished.
Details are to include but are not limited to instrument piping details, transmitter rack
details and pipe mounted equipment installation details.
R.
Logic Diagrams detailing the operational logic are to be completed for the digital binary
operations. In addition to these drawings, operational logic descriptions are to be
prepared detailing the sequence of operation and operational constraints and limitations.
These drawings are to be in conformance with ISA-S5.2, 1976. Submit details for each
primary and secondary processing units separately, in addition to logic diagrams relating
Central Control Room processing functions and resulting operations.
S.
Instrument Schedule listing all devices to be keyed to instrument loop number and device
numbers. Schedule to be submitted in two (2) formats; first, in an alpha-numeric listing
by device type and second, a listing with equipment grouped by loop number. Schedule
to contain as a minimum the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
T.
instrument identification number

service
flow diagram number
logic diagram number
piping drawing number
installation plan number
manufacturer's name
processing units termination, interfacing and communication.
Instrument Schedule to provide a comprehensive data source indicating where all specific
information may be found for each service. Schedule to include not only balance of plant
Page 10 of 56
equipment but also that equipment furnished as part of packaged systems and is to be
noted as such.
U.
Prior to procurement of equipment submit for approval the following drawings and
documents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
V.
Prior to start of system installation and construction submit for approval the following
drawings and documents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
W.
shop drawings for valves, dampers, transducers, transmitters, signal conditioners,

indicators, recorders, miscellaneous instruments, central operator processing unit,
consoles and ancillary
control loop diagrams
electrical elementary diagrams
instrument installation plans
detailed panel diagrams
point to point wiring diagrams
instrument schedule, including processing unit panel termination/interface.
Prior to commencing start-up activities the documents to be submitted for approval:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
X.
process and instrumentation flow diagrams

equipment specifications and completed technical data sheets
control logic diagrams and logic descriptions
input/output points charts for every processing unit
system construction inspection procedures

points calibration procedures
calibration technical procedures
plant operational system test procedures
operator and maintenance personnel training curriculum.
Prior to system acceptance and turn-over and as a condition of system acceptance, the
following documents are to be submitted in four copies in accordance with requirements
of Division 1:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
system user manual

systems maintenance manual including specifications on each piece of equipment,
trouble-shooting charts, and preventive maintenance instructions, technical data
sheet for each instrument referenced for each application
as-built drawings including equipment outlined dimension drawings, equipment
wiring and or piping connection drawing
complete supplementary information about software and hardware of system
supplied. This to include:
system block diagram (hardware)
software "functional" flow diagram
memory map of all units
specific tasks performed by each processor, especially where a distributed
processing architecture is provided. These are to be clearly indicated in
functional form
source and object lists of software program
internal equipment wiring, complete with circuit diagrams for each processing unit,
board layout (single and double sided), plus edge connection schedule and lists of
all components (integrated circuits, transistors, regulators, resistors, capacitors,
etc.) plus edge-connection schedules
Page 11 of 56
6.
7.
8.
1.13
tests and calibration data pertinent to each item installed in the systems.
Password at all levels.
Meets LonMark Interoperability Association Standards.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisioins of the Contract
Documents
B.
Accept products on site and verify damage.
C.
Protect products from construction operations, dust, and debris by storing in conditioned
space.
1.14
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install products when temperature is not within operating range requirements.
B.
Maintain temperature between 15 and 27 degrees C and relative humidity between 10 and
90 % during and after installation of central control equipment.
1.15
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Furnish service and maintenance of building management system for one year from Date
of Substantial Completion.
B.
Include installation of software revisions issued during maintenance service period.
1.16
A.
1.17
SPARE PARTS
As soon as practicable after approval of materials and equipment and, if possible, not
later than 4 months prior to the date of beneficial use, submit spare parts data for each
different item of equipment furnished. Data to include a complete source of supply, a list
of parts and supplies that are either normally furnished at no extra cost with the purchase
of the equipment, or specified hereinafter as EXTRA MATERIALS to be furnished as
part of the Contract; and a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to
assure efficient operation for a period of 360 days at the particular installation. The
foregoing is not to relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities under the guarantee
condition.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide special tools required for maintenance.
B.
Provide two of each plug-in circuit board.
C.
Provide 1000 sheets of continuous form paper.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Page 12 of 56
2.01
NETWORKING COMMUNICATIONS
A.
The system architecture shall utilize intelligent distributed control modules, located at
each site, which communicate using ANSI/EIA Standard 709.1-A-1999, LONWORKS
technology communication protocols, in one open, truly interoperable system. The design
of the BMS shall network operator workstations and stand-alone DDC Controllers.
B.
Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the
Building Management System. The hardware configuration of the BMS network shall be
totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control programs.
1.
Operator workstations and DDC Controllers shall directly reside on a network such
that communications may be executed directly between DDC Controllers on a
peer-to-peer basis, directly between workstations and between DDC Controllers
and workstations.
3.
All operator devices shall have the ability to access all point status and application
report data or execute control functions for any and all other devices. Access to
data shall be based upon logical identification of building equipment. No hardware
or software limits shall be imposed on the number of devices with global access to
the network data.
4.
Network design shall include the following provisions:

a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Provide high-speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report
generation from multiple controllers and upload/download efficiency
between network devices. System performance shall insure that an alarm
occurring at any DDC Controller is displayed at workstations and/or alarm
printers within 5 seconds.
Support of any combination of DDC Controllers and operator workstations
directly connected to the network.
Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost.
Error detection, correction and retransmission to guarantee data integrity.
Synchronization of real-time clocks, to include automatic daylight savings
time updating between all DDC Controllers shall be provided.
The system architecture shall support the following levels.

a.
b.
c.
d.
78kbyte FTT 10 channels for operating nodes

1.25 mB high speed bus to tie together multiple 78kbyte FTT 10 channels
IP (via network interface card, or a LTA card & Lon to IP adaptor)
Modem to FTT10 for remote sites.
6.
Options for connecting the operator workstation shall include connection directly
to the 78kbyte FTT 10 channel, connection to the 1.25 mB high speed bus or
connection to the Ethernet (IP) level.
7.
Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements:

a.
b.
c.
Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3.

Cable; 10 Base-T, UTP-8 wires, category 5.
Minimum throughput; 10 Mbps, with ability to increase to 100 Mbps.
Page 13 of 56
C. Lon Routers, Repeaters And Transceivers

1.
General
a.
Equip each router and bridge with a network transceiver on each network
port (inbound and outbound) as dictated by the network type (Type 1 - FTT,
Type 2 - TP, Type 3 - PL, Type 4 - LP, Type 5 - RF).
b.
The network router shall be designed to route messages from a segment, subnet, or domain in full duplex communication mode.
c.
Routers shall utilize LonTalk protocol transport, network, session layers to
transparently route messages bound for a node address in another sub-net or
domain.
d.
Routers and repeaters shall be fully programmable and permit a systems
integrator to define message traffic, destination, and other network
management functions utilizing LONWORKS software tool.
e.
The routers and repeaters shall be capable of DIN rail or panel mounting and
be equipped with status LED lights for Network traffic and power.
f.
Provide a minimum of two Neuron 3120 or 3150 processors for use as the
network router communication controller.
2.
Ethernet IP Router
a.
Equip each router with a Ethernet IP communication on one side and a
LonTalk transceiver Type 1 FTT or Type 2 - TP on the other side.
b.
The network router shall be designed to route messages from a segment, subnet, or domain in full duplex communication mode.
c.
On Ethernet IP side, the router shall utilize Ethernet IP protocol transport to
route messages.
d.
On the LonTalk side, the routers shall utilize LonTalk protocol transport,
network, session layers to transparently route messages bound for a node
address in another sub-net or domain.
e.
Routers shall be fully programmable and permit a systems integrator to
define message traffic, destination, and other network management functions
utilizing LonWorks software tool.
f.
The routers shall be capable of DIN rail or panel mounting and be equipped
with status LED lights for Network traffic and power.
3.
Transceivers
a.
Type 1 network transceiver, free topology, twisted pair: Provide a
transformer isolated, twisted pair transceiver capable of mounting directly on
a printed circuit board.
The transceiver shall meet the following
specifications:
b.
Meets LonMark Interoperability Association Standards.

Differential Manchester encoded signaling for polarity insensitive
network wiring.
Transformer isolated for common mode rejection.
78kbs network bit rate up to distances of 2000 meters.
Free topology supports star, home run, multidrop and loop wiring
topologies.
Complies with FCC and VDE requirements.
UL recognized component.
Type 2 Network Transceiver, Twisted Pair: Provide a transformer isolated

twisted pair transceiver capable of mounting directly on a printed circuit
board. The transceiver shall meet the following specifications:
Page 14 of 56
D.
Telecommunication Capability:
1.
2.
Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow DDC

Controllers to communicate with remote operator stations and/or remote terminals
on an intermittent basis via telephone lines, as indicated in the sequence of
operations.
Auto-dial DDC Controllers shall automatically place calls to workstations to report
alarms or other significant events.
a.
b.
3.
DDC Controllers shall be able to store a minimum of 10 phone numbers of

at least 20 digits. Retry a single primary number at a fixed interval until
successful.
The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals,
"no answers" and incomplete data transfers. Provide as a minimum 3
secondary numbers when communications cannot be established with the
primary device.
Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform all control functions, all
report functions and all database generation and modification functions as
described for workstations connected via the network. Routines shall be provided
to automatically answer calls from remote DDC Controllers. The fact that
communications are taking place with remote DDC Controllers over telephone
lines shall be completely transparent to an operator.
a.
b.
E.
Meets LONWORKS interoperability standards.

Differential Manchester encoded signaling for polarity insensitive
network wiring.
Transformer isolation for common mode rejection.
1.25Mbs network bit rate up to distances of 1000 meters.
FCC and VDE Level B requirements compliance.
UL recognized component.
An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selection of any

facility by its logical name. The workstation dial-up program shall store the
phone numbers of each remote site, so the user shall not be required to
remember or manually dial telephone numbers.
A PC workstation may serve as an operator device on a network, as well as a
dial-up workstation for multiple auto-dial DDC Controllers or networks.
Alarm and data file transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not
interfere with network activity, nor shall network activity keep the
workstation from handling incoming calls.
Provide all necessary hardware and software for remote communications with all remote
processors, back-up processors and all operator input/output peripheral devices.
Controller hardware for remote communications to be modular. It is to be possible for
each channel to be individually programmed (or re-programmed) for its function and
appropriate baud rate by on-line operator software. Each communications channel to be
fully buffered, and to support asynchronous data transmission and recep. All
communications channels to be able to communicate simultaneously to support the realtime, multi-tasking, multi-user operating syspecified here. Each communication channel
to be dual- trunk fully redundant type; loading to be up to 60% of manufacturer's
recommended limits.
Page 15 of 56
2.02
CENTRAL PROCESSINGS
A.
BMS hardware to be totally solid-state using computer oriented digital technology.

System to have a fully modular architecture permitting expansion by adding computer
memory, additional processing units application software, operator peripherals and field
hardware.
B.
BMS to be capable of supporting the following "point" types:

Analog Input (AI)
Analog Output (AO)
Digital Input (DI)
Digital Output (DO)
Software Duplicate Points
Software Computed Points
Software Simulated Points.
Configuration and control of any system "point" is not to require special software. Point
capacity of system to be a function of available system memory only.
D.
SPU is to have a 72 hours battery back-up of the data base stored in RAM. Each SPU is
to have the capability to communicate and programme up to 150 zone controllers.
E.
A user friendly programming language is to be used to programme the SPU and the zone
controller connected to it. Further the panel is to have the predefined software listed
below:
-
F.
input points
output points
pulse points
annual schedule
weekly schedule
alarm
controller
totalizer
trend log
zone controller access points
optimized start
system display
user access
scale range
load shed
Zone Processing Unit or Controller (ZPU) to be distributed stand alone DDC controller
for control of various unitary and terminal equipment or controls with built in network
communication for integration into the BMS system. Zone controller is to have flexible
control strategies with user configurable algorithms that reside in a non volatile memory.
Zone controllers are to have a serial port that will allow the connection of electronic
sensors, set point adjustment, overrides at service tools.
Page 16 of 56
G.
Loading/Backup Facilities: provide as an integral of an IBM PC or compatible, all

hardware required to load, reload, or backup the memory of the system and the software
to execute specified functions. Loading of system to be through use of high-speed, mass
storage media, such as magnetic tape cartridge or floppy diskette. This same media to be
used for making on-line system backups and for remote historical data storage.
Data Dumpings: if SPU OR ZPU memory fails, the operator shall not have to manually
re-enter system data. Necessary hardware and software are to be supplied to:
-
2.03
allow periodic dumping of operator entered data onto another storage media online
reload this data as the operator desires.
Data dumpings are not to interrupt any other system operation (such as operator
input/output, scanning of field hardware, application software execution, etc.)
DDC CONTROLLER
A.
Stand-alone Controllers shall be equipped with a 3120 Neuron with co-processor or

3150 Neuron microprocessor controller, (flash or EEPROM) memory for general data
processing, power supply, network transceivers They shall also be multi-tasking, multiuser, real-time digital control processors consisting of modular hardware with plug-in
enclosed processors, communication controllers, power supplies and input/output point
modules. Controller size shall be sufficient to fully meet the requirements of this
specification and the attached point list.
B.
Operating system software, custom operating sequence software and application

programs shall be stored in programmable, non-volatile memory. Each DDC Controller
shall have sufficient memory, to support its own operating system and databases,
including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
D.
E.
Control processes
Energy management applications
Alarm management applications including custom alarm messages for each level
alarm for each point in the system.
Historical/trend data for points specified
Maintenance support applications
Custom processes
Operator I/O
Dial-up communications
Manual override monitoring
A DDC shall operate totally stand-alone and independent of a central computer for all
specified control applications. Software shall include a complete operating system (OS),
communications handler, point processing, standard control algorithms, and specific
control sequences.
DDC packaging shall be such that complete installation and checkout of field wiring can
be performed prior to the installation of electronic boards. The complete DDC including
power supplies, etc., shall be factory-mounted, wired and housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure
or as required by the location and local code requirements.
The DDC LONWORKS network interface shall be a Type 1 transceiver. A
communication connection shall be provided for attaching POT to node for downloading
and troubleshooting applications.
Page 17 of 56
F.
Each DDC Controller shall support:

1.
Monitoring of the following types of inputs, without the addition of equipment

outside the DDC Controller cabinet:
a.
b.
2.
G.
Analog inputs
1)
4-20 mA
2)
0-10 Vdc
3)
Thermistors
4)
1000 ohm RTDs
5)
PT1000
6)
LG-Ni 1000
7)
PT100
8)
0-20mA
Digital inputs
1)
Dry contact closure
2)
Pulse Accumulator
3)
Voltage Sensing
Direct control of pneumatic and electronic actuators and control devices. Each
DDC Controller shall be capable of providing the following control outputs
without the addition of equipment outside the DDC Controller cabinet:
a.
Digital outputs (contact closure)

1)
Contact closure maintained
2)
Contact closure pulsed
3)
Contact closure staged
b.
Analog outputs
1)
0-20 psi
2)
4-20 mA
3)
0-10 Vdc
Each DDC Controller shall have a minimum of 20% spare capacity for future point
connection. The type of spares shall be in the same proportion as the implemented I/O
functions of the panel, but in no case shall there be less than two spares of each
implemented I/O type. Provide all processors, power supplies and communication
controllers complete so that the implementation of a point only requires the addition of
the appropriate point input/output termination module and wiring.
1.
Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and have at
least 25% of the memory available for future use.
H.
DDC Controllers shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for
operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator terminals,
modems and portable operator's terminals. DDC Controllers shall allow temporary use of
portable devices without interrupting the normal operation of permanently connected
modems, printers or terminals.
I.
As indicated in the point I/O schedule, the operator shall have the ability to manually
override automatic or centrally executed commands at the DDC Controller via local,
point discrete, on-board hand/off/auto operator override switches for digital control type
points and gradual switches for analog control type points. These override switches shall
be operable whether the panel processor is operational or not.
Page 18 of 56
1.
2.
J.
Switches shall be mounted either within the DDC Controllers key-accessed

enclosure, or externally mounted with each switch keyed to prevent unauthorized
overrides.
DDC Controllers shall monitor the status of all overrides and inform the operator
that automatic control has been inhibited. DDC Controllers shall also collect
override activity information for reports.
Equip DDCs with the following diagnostic indicators and service buttons:
Network service pin.
Power On indicator light.
Network communication indicator light.
K.
DDC Controllers shall provide local LED status indication for each digital input and
output for constant, up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an
operator I/O device. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value shall also be
provided for each analog output. Status indication shall be visible without opening the
panel door.
L.
Each DDC Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication

diagnosis and diagnosis of all panel components. The DDC Controller shall provide both
local and remote annunciation of any detected failures, low battery conditions or repeated
failure to establish communication.
M.
Isolation shall be provided at all peer-to-peer network termination, as was all field point
terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standards 5871980.
N.
In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all DDC
Controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatile
memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and battery
backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a
minimum of 72 hours.
1.
2.
2.04
A.
Upon restoration of normal power, the DDC Controller shall automatically resume
full operation without manual intervention.
Should DDC Controller memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the
capability of reloading the DDC Controller via the local RS-232C port, via
telephone line dial-in or from a network workstation PC.
SMOKE MANAGEMENT REMOTE CONTROL

Components: The smoke management's remote control is to be performed through
MFAC room at the ground floor and to be complete with all necessary instruments,
controls, devices, relays, switches, push buttons, pilot lights, etc. and to be factory prewired to provide full control and monitoring of the smoke management system of the
complex in accordance with NFPA 92A & B and 101 requirements, including the
following:
-
start stop push buttons for every AHU & fan motor.
Red-green indicating lamps for every AHU & fan motor
Labels for control devices of every AHU & fan motor
Page 19 of 56
Mimic panel showing locations of equipment

Interface requirements with BMS.
Detail to be submitted for approval.

B.
2.05
A.
Scope of Work: The scope of the smoke management remote control panel is to include
all necessary field wiring, cabling, raceways, labelling, etc. from the remote control panel
to all relevant equipment, motor control panels/centers including wiring termination and
labelling at both ends, and coordination with the equipment and motor control
panel/center suppliers to provide all necessary interface devices and installations inside
their equipment.
DDC CONTROLLER RESIDENT SOFTWARE FEATURES

General:
1.
2.
B.
Open-close switches for every motorized smoke danger.
All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this

specification shall be provided.
The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral
part of DDC Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level
computer or master controller for execution.
Control Software Description:

1.
The DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested
control algorithms:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Two-position control
Proportional control
Proportional plus integral control
Proportional, integral, plus derivative control
Control loop tuning
Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each
piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period.
The system shall provide protection against excessive demand situations during
start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays between successive start
commands to heavy electrical loads.
Upon the resumption of normal power, each DDC Controller shall analyze the
status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling
and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operations.
DDC Controllers shall have the ability to perform any or all the following energy
management routines:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Time-of-day scheduling
Calendar-based scheduling
Holiday scheduling
Temporary schedule overrides
Start-Stop Time Optimization
Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover
Night setback control
Page 20 of 56
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Enthalpy switchover (economizer)

Peak Demand Limiting
Temperature-compensated duty cycling
Fan speed/CFM control
Heating/cooling interlock
Cold deck reset
Hot deck reset
Hot water reset
Chilled water reset
Condenser water reset
Chiller sequencing
a.
D.
DDC Controllers shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by the
user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines.
1.
It shall be possible to use any of the following in a custom process:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Any system measured point data or status

Any calculated data
Any results from other processes
User-defined constants
Arithmetic functions (+, -, *, /,square root, exp, etc.)
Boolean logic operators (and/or, exclusive or, etc.)
On-delay/off-delay/one-shot timers
Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
E.
All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator
intervention and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization.
Time interval
Time-of-day
Date
Other processes
Time programming
Events (e.g., point alarms)
A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any
and all other DDC Controllers on the network. In addition, a single process shall be
able to issue commands to points in any and all other DDC Controllers on the
network.
Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to operator
I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a message to a specified device
or cause the execution of a dial-up connection to a remote device such as a printer
or pager.
The custom control programming feature shall be documented via English
language descriptors.
Alarm management shall be provided to monitor and direct alarm information to operator
devices. Each DDC Controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and
filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network
traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the DDC Controllers ability to
report alarms be affected by either operator or activity at a PC workstation, local I/O
device or communications with other panels on the network.
Page 21 of 56
1.
2.
3.
4.
All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language
description and the time and date of occurrence.
The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms
shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response
to critical alarms. A minimum of six priority levels shall be provided for each
point. Point priority levels shall be combined with user definable destination
categories (PC, printer, DDC Controller, etc.) to provide full flexibility in defining
the handling of system alarms. Each DDC Controller shall automatically inhibit the
reporting of selected alarms during system shutdown and start-up. Users shall have
the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point.
Alarm reports and messages will be directed to a user-defined list of operator
devices or PCs.
In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to
print, display or store a 200 character alarm message to more fully describe the
alarm condition or direct operator response.
a.
5.
F.
Each DDC Controller shall be capable of storing a library of at least 50

alarm messages. Each message may be assignable to any number of points
in the Controller.
In dial-up applications, operator-selected alarms shall initiate a call to a remote

operator device.
A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or

automatically sample, store and display system data for points as specified in the I/O
summary.
1.
DDC Controllers shall store point history data for selected analog and digital inputs
and outputs:
a.
2.
3.
Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point,
regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored
in each DDC Controllers point group. Two methods of collection shall be
allowed either by a pre-defined time interval or upon a pre-defined change of
value. Sample intervals of l minute to 7 days shall be provided. Each DDC
Controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall
be capable of storing a minimum of 25000 data samples.
Trend data shall be stored at the DDC Controllers and uploaded to the workstation
when retrieval is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either user-defined
interval, manual command or when the trend buffers are full. All trend data shall
be available for use in 3rd party personal computer applications.
DDC Controllers shall also provide high resolution sampling capability for
verification of control loop performance. Operator-initiated automatic and manual
loop tuning algorithms shall be provided for operator-selected PID control loops as
identified in the point I/O summary. Provide capability to view or print trend and
tuning reports.
a.
b.
In automatic mode, the controller shall perform a step response test with a
minimum one-second resolution, evaluate the trend data, calculate the new
PID gains and input these values into the selected LOOP statement.
For troubleshooting in manual mode, the operator shallbe able to select
variables to override default values. Calculated PID gains shall then be
reviewed before they are inserted into the selectLOOP statement.
Page 22 of 56
c.
G.
DDC Controllers shall automatically accumulate and store run-time hours for digital
input and output points as specified in the point I/O summary.
1.
2.
H.
2.
3.
Totalization shall provide calculation and storage of accumulations of up to

99,999.9 units (e.g., KWH, gallons, BTU, tons, etc.).
The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
DDC Controllers shall have the ability to count events such as the number of times a
pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall be performed on a daily,
weekly or monthly basis for points as specified in the point I/O summary.
1.
2.
2.06
The totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute or less.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for run-time totalization.
Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
DDC Controllers shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a
daily, weekly or monthly basis for user-selected analog and digital pulse input type points
as specified in the point I/O summary.
1.
I.
Loop shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the DDC Controller,
from a network workstation or remotely using dial-in modems. For all loop
tuning functions, access shall be limited to authorized personnel through
password protection.
The event totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a
minimum of 9,999.9 events before reset.
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified
messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL (POT)
A.
Provide two portable operator terminals with a minimum LCD display of 80 characters
by 25 lines and a full-featured keyboard. The POT shall be handheld and plug directly
into individual distributed control panels as described below. Provide a user-friendly,
English language prompted interface for quick access to system information, not codes
requiring look-up charts.
B.
The POTs shall permit the project operating staff to perform network management, node
configuration, node programming, and node diagnostic.
B.
Functions of the Portable Operator's Terminal connected at distributed control processors

shall be:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Access all DDC Controllers on the network.

Backup and/or restore DDC Controller data bases for all system panels, not just the
DDC Controller connected to.
Display all point, selected point and alarm point summaries.
Display trending and totalization information.
Add, modify and/or delete any existing or new system point.
Command, change setpoint, enable/disable any system point.
Program and load custom control sequences as well as standard energy
management programs.
Page 23 of 56
8.
9.
10.
11.
Provide connection capability at a room sensor to access controller information.

Provide status, setup and control reports.
Modify, select and store controller data base.
Command, change setpoint, enable/disable any controller point.
C.
If the same Portable Operator's Terminal cannot be used for all control processors,
provide separate POTs to accomplish the above functional requirements.
D.
Provide as a minimum, a POT connection in each mechanical room capable of accessing

entire system information.
E.
Connection of a POT to a distributed control processor shall not interrupt nor interfere
with normal network operation in any way, prevent alarms from being transmitted or
preclude centrally initiated commands and system modification.
F.
Portable operator terminal access to controller shall be password-controlled.
2.07
OPERATOR PERIPHERAL DEVICES
A.
General: operator peripheral device communications, here designated as Man-Machine

Interface (MMI) to be handled simultaneously through various devices generally
categorized as software and hardware. Each device may be connected in a direct
proprietary, leased phone line, or dial-up phone line application.
B.
Standards: all peripheral devices to utilize ASCII (American Standard Code for
Information Interchange) code and to be interfaced to the processing units with standard
RS232 port. Communication versatility is to comply with all methods previously
specified herein.
C.
Operator Station to comprise multiple operator peripheral input/output devices which can
all be used simultaneously. Characteristics of each device and the station to be totally on
line definable and completely independent of each other. If any device should experience
a failure, the system to automatically transfer its information to another device.
D.
Operator Access to system to be restricted by a software coding process. Systems which

provide only manual key lock accessibility are not acceptable. This coding process to
restrict:
-
peripheral devices an operator may interface to

point groupings an operator may access
command groupings an operator may access
specific command functionality and point control that an operator has authority
over.
The above authority keys to be software programmable while system is fully on-line with
at least six (6) priority levels. Each operator authority code to consist of from one to
eleven alphanumeric characters, each individually definable and modifiable through
keyboard entry while the system is online. Minimum of 50 authority codes to be
provided. Each authority code to have the following characteristics:
-
authority access code

operator initials
up to a 24 alphanumeric operator descriptor
systems authority access timer.
Page 24 of 56
Unit is to automatically create hardcopy record when an operator has been granted
access.This record to include date and time, which device and which operator was
granted access. System to also have capability to store this record historically (with or
without associated hardcopy record) with future retrieval/analysis capability, should this
mode of recording be preferred. Operator access to be terminated either by operator
command or automatically by the system as predetermined by the authority access timer.
Operator to have the ability to command points, request information, select entry method,
enter memory changes and edit any number of characters without having to retype an
entire line/screen.
E.
Operator Entry: there are to be multiple methods of operator entry. These to consist of,
but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
tutorial method used as a prompting aid to assist an operator each step of the way
in executing the command function
dedicated method which will bypass the tutorial method to allow a quick, direct
command syntax/sequence for system processing. Systems without a direct
command are unacceptable
template method used for mass repetitive/data entry of information and commands.
This method to also be used for data base generation, including such items as point
definition, graphic generation, report creation, and custom/DSC programming/
translation.
Any method of entry is to be verified by the system prior to execution. Any invalid
entries to be highlighted by the system for operator correction. Operator to be able to
request help in any mode of operation at any time to aid in command entry. This help
request to convert mode or provide aid lists on the request parameters. Any operator entry
is not to inhibit any change-of-state COS reporting. Each time an operator command is
issued the system to automatically create a hardcopy record.
F.
Function Keys: as an aid to the operator, the system MMI to provide dedicated function
keys (DFK) for common/repetitive operator functions. These functions to be executed by
single operator keystroke. Utilization of dedicated function keys is not to inhibit any
COS reporting or any other simultaneous functions that operator may be performing.
Provide at least 12 DFK/keyboard. Different keyboards to be programmed to maideal
with specific areas or sub-systems (such as electrical, HVAC), although it is also to be
possible for any one to take over completely. This to be performed to aid operators in
sharing their duties. Clear markers to be affixed to each dedicated function key, giving
its actual function.
G.
Printers: system printers to provide hardcopy data retention of COS, operator initiated
actions, management reports, graphics and trended information. Printers which can be
interfaced include the following:
-
color printer
receive only (RO) printer
Main control station to be provided with one color and two receive only printers.
Secondary stations to be provided with one color and one receive printer.
H.
Modem: Operator station shall be capable of remote communication through a dedicated

auto dial-out/auto answer dial-in modern. The modem shall be capable of interface with
the network computer through a standard EIA RS232-C connection. Speed/data
Page 25 of 56
communication rate shall be 19200 baud minimum (or latest standard). An operator
accessing the system via a modem shall be capable of executing all commands
permissible by his access level. Modem communication shall at not time interfere with
the operation and performance of the network computer or the direct digital field control
units.
2.08
A.
PERSONAL COMPUTER OPERATOR WORKSTATION HARDWARE

BMS Console: Provide multi-bay modular console, made of heavy gauge steel, properly
finished and painted to match surrounding (to Engineer's approval), to accommodate the
BMS equipment including monitors, keyboards, printers, CPU's, wiring blocks, etc.
Monitor modules within the console to be properly titled to suit operator position and
eliminate glare.
Provide four numbers scientifically designed universal task arm-chairs, back rest type,
with gas lift cylinder for seat height adjustment, and finished with carpet castors for base
and back to Engineer's approval.
B.
Personal computer operator workstations shall be provided for command entry,

information management, network alarm management and database management
functions. All real-time control functions shall be resident in the DDC Controllers to
facilitate greater fault tolerance and reliability.
1.
C.
Provide a printer (RO) for recording alarms, operator transactions and systems reports,
meeting the following minimum requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
132 column/270 character per second print speed

24 x 24 DOT matrix character letter quality output.
Compressed mode option for 220 characters per line.
Software selectable under, emphasized, double strike and expanded (double width)
characters capability.
Adjustable line spacing of 6 or 8 lines per inch.
Adjustable tractor for 5 inch to 15 inch paper widths.
96 ASCII upper and lower case character set.
Provide a color printer for printing of graphics and any other screen displays. Printer
shall include as a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.09
Workstation shall consist of a color monitor, personal computer of specifications as

described under central processings and provided with CD ROM drive, 3-l/2"
diskette drive, mouse and 101-key enhanced keyboard. Personal computer shall be
an IBM PS/2 or faster clock speed.
80 Column tractor-feed for normal use with ability to switch to friction feed of
single sheets of paper without any mechanical adjustments.
360 x 360 Dot/Inch image resolution.
Draft and letter quality print selection for alpha-numeric operations.
Four color mix capability to provide true color printing of screen graphics.
Three built-in letter quality fonts from selectable front panel buttons.
64K Buffer to store complete graphics for printing.
Include colour kit.
CATHODE RAY TUBE (CRT)
Page 26 of 56
A.
General: provide Cathode Ray Tubes (CRT) and keyboards to display realtime data,
allow operator commands, perform data base generation and report system activity.
B.
CRTs connected to the system to include color CRT with direct video capability having
minimum 480 mm diagonal display with minimum of 48 lines and 80 character/column
screen with refresh rate of 60 times per second. The display area shall have a resolution
of 1024 x 840 pixels. Format of screen to permit output of dynamic color displays and/or
summaries specified hereinafter, while concurrently displaying the most recent COS
occurrence. It is to have detachable, tactile feedback keyboard having standard
typewriter layout plus 10-key numeric key pad and dedicated function keys.
The CRT shall be capable of displaying 17 colors selected from a palette of 256 colors.
The minimum screen diagonal measure shall be 19 inches.
A digita display clock shall display on the monitor at all times. Provision for manually
resetting it shall be provided. It shall be a 24 hour real time clock and seven day calendar
to provide data for logging.
The network computer keyboard and color graphic CRT shall be the primary means of
operator access to the system, providing the operator interface for the entire system.
C.
Format CRT to include and display in an individual dedicated and protected area of the
viewing screen the following dynamic information:
current time, date and day of week (including holidays)
highest priority unacknowledged COS
visual indication of the type of alarm/off-normal condition still active after
acknowledgement
current operator identification
current status of three points considered critical for that operator's CRT
system advisory alarm messages
operator work area to display various forms of point information, issue commands and
data base generation functions.
Formats are to permit the out of various forms of point displays specified hereinafter,
while concurrently displaying the most recent COS occurrence. Furthermore, while this
information is displayed, the operator to also be able to enter commands to the system.
D.
System Display to be a dynamic output, updating to the current point condition

automatically at least twice a minute. This to be realized for the specified extendability
capacity. System response to a keyboard initiated command or to an alarm, however, to
be maximum of 100 MS, including artificial delay to allow for a reliable
acknowledgement status, free of switch bounce, contact bounce etc.
E.
Any and all CRT screen images to be printable upon single keystroke. While screen
image is being printed, the system is not to inhibit operator utilization of CRT.
F.
Color CRT to output chromatic system graphic displays as specified. These chromatic
graphic displays to detail all mechanical and electrical systems listed in the schedule
attached to this Specification. Operator request for a chromatic graphic display is to cause
associated system to be automatically selected and outputted on viewing screen. When a
point is in alarm on the CRT, the operator to be able to display a graphic with a single
keystroke.
Page 27 of 56
2.10
FIELD DEVICES AND CONTROLS
A.
Transducers: to include, but are not necessarily limited to, temperature sensors, pressure
switches or level switches. Transducer is a device that converts information about a
physical parameter from form in which it is received to some other form, e.g., pressure to
voltage. It is the primary element in an instrumentation and control system, is inserted in
the process flow stream, and provides the signal that can be read, recorded, alarmed or
provides control within a process.
B.
Flow Switch to be vane actuated type, designed to mount to pipeline with threaded
coupling 50 mm NPT. Suitably shaped and beveled coupling is welded to pipe and flow
switch is threaded directly into it. Flow switch to be designed for vertical installation on
horizontal pipelines and to be marked to indicate direction of flow. Actuating vane is
linked to pivoted mercury switch. When vane moves with increase in flow it will trip the
switch. Screw fasteners securing actuating vane to be back welded for added safety.
Switch to be SPDT sealed mercury switch with rating 13 amperes. All materials subject
to wetting to be 316 stainless steel. Switch to be in NEMA 4 housing. Conduit
connection to housing to be 20 mm NPT. Perform necessary tests to assure that flow
switch will be operational at specified flow rates. Repeatability of flow rate actuation
point is to be within 0.1 %.
C.
Pressure Switch to be flexible diaphragm type, with diaphragm sealed in place with "O"
ring. Diaphragm and ring to be of Buna-N. Diaphragm seals out the process fluid but
transfers pressure variations directly to a spring based piston. Pre-stressed spring to be
adjustable to calibrate operating point of switch. Switch element to be a snap action
contact transfer type transferring on 0.55 mm movement. Switch to be electrically rated at
480 volt (max) at 15 amps., AC service, and 125 volt, 0.5 amp, DC resistive load.
Pressure connections to be sized for 12 mm NPT fittings and pipe. Electrical connections
use 20 mm NPT conduit. Housings to be weathertight and conform to NEMA 4 ratings.
D.
Differential Pressure Elements to be bellows type with liquid fill. Bellows and center
plate to be completely filled with clean, non corrosive, low freezing point liquid, and to
stand repeated over-ranging in excess of working pressure of instrument housing without
causing calibration change. Temperature compensation to be provided for the fill. Torque
tube assembly to be an integral part of the bellows assembly to transmit motion. Torque
tube assembly to be so designed that it is installed in a preloaded condito prevent
backlash as it rotates through its complete range. Rotation of torque tube for full scale
differential pressure to be 8 deg.+/-10%. Unto operate within temperatlimits of-5 to +55
deg C. Process connections to be 12 mm NPT.
E.
Level Switches: where application warrants level switches to be capacitance type.

Material or liquid level variations at sensing probe to be sensed and converted by
transmitter into a directly proportional DC current output signal. Transmitter to have
voltage stabilized oscillator which drives an LC bridge. Detector probe is one leg of
bridge. When material or liquid level is at its lowest point on detector probe, the bridge is
in balance and transmitter output is at its lowest value. As material level rises in the
probe, the bridge becomes unbalanced. This imbalance produces an AC signal
proportional to level of material on sensing probe. Integrated circuit operational
amplifiers convert AC signal into transmitter's DC output current signal. This signal is to
operate a DPDT integrally located relay to provide alarm indications as required by
applications.
Operating characteristics of transmitting unit to be as follows:
Page 28 of 56
line voltage
power
:
line variation
operating temperature :
temperature sensitivity :
zero stability
span adjustment
terminal adjustment
output linearity
repeatability
output relays, DPDT
transmitter enclosure
:
220 V AC +/-10%, 50 hertz
20 watts
:
+/-0.5%/20V.
-5 deg. C to +55 deg. C.
0.01% per deg F maximum
:
0.01 pf per deg F maximum
:
10 to 3000 pf
:
0 to 250 pf
:
+/-0.5 %
:
+/-1 %
:
10 A 220 V AC noninductive
:
NEMA 4.
Level Switches probe is to be the primary sensing element of the system. It is to be

designed to be intrinsically safe and is to be furnished with a cast iron conduit junction
fitting. It is to be connected to transmitter through coaxial cable. Probe is to be
fabricated of stainless steel.
F.
Transmitters basically consist of an apparatus directly coupled to the transducers element

that modifies the process variable information so that an electric signal may be
transmitted to some remote receiver. Signal used wherein is a current varying from 4.0 to
20.0 mA DC that proportionately represents from 0 to 100 % of the process variable.
Receiver may be an indicator, recorder, controller or signal modifier.
G.
Pressure Transmitter (PT): to be high stability transducer utilizing solid state circuitry.
Output is a 4.0 - 20.0 mA DC signal proportional to sensed pressure. Accuracy of
instrument to be 0.25 % of span. Two barrier type terminals for No.14 wire plus ground
connections to be provided. Process pressure connections to be made through 6 mm
NPT. Conduit for electrical connections to be 20 mm NPT. Instrument to be operational
in a thermal environment of from -29 deg C to +39 deg C.
Perform necessary tests to ensure that pressure transmitter meets all operational
manufacturer specifications.
H.
Field System Temperature Transmitter: to be installed where shown on the Drawings.

Transmitters (systems) to be SAMA Class II. Enclosure to be NEMA 4. Bulb to be an
adjustable union, 316SS, bendable and 45 cm long extension. Bulb to be 10 mm
diameter, 100 mm in length, with an insertion length of 150 mm. Capillary to be 316SS,
insertion length 150 mm, lagging extension 80 mm and pipe connection 25 mm socket
weld. Transmitter output 0.5 V DC signal proportional to temperature.
I.
Level transmitter shall be of ultrasonic type. Transmitters to be of accuracy 0.2% of

span, with LED indication on power , calibration diagnostic. Memory shall be non
volatile. Supply voltage shall be 14-24Vdc and output signal 4-20mA two wire with
automatic temperature compensation. Transmitter shall be in compliance with EN 61326
EMC
J.
Carbon Monoxide transmitter shall use an electrochemical sensor to monitor the CO level
and output a 4-20 mA or voltage signal. Options shall include an LCD to display the CO
ppm level, control relays, an audible alarm and RS485 network communications.
Operating parameters shall be easily programmed via the keypad to configure the
transmitter to a specific application. The transmitter shall also features a pre-calibrated
replaceable sensor module for convenient maintenance.
Operating characteristics of transmitting unit to be as follows:
Page 29 of 56
Sample Method:
Measurement Range:
Standard Accuracy :
Stability :
Typical Area Coverage
:
Pressure Coefficient :
Response Time:
Diffusion or flow through, sample tube for duct

0-500 ppm for electrochemical standard (0-250 ppm optional) . The
ranges for each sensor type can be changed after installation
3% of reading for electrochemical, 5-45 C (41-113 F), 15-95
%RH
< 5% signal loss/year
700 m2 (7500 ft2)
0.020 0.008% signal/mBar
< 35 seconds for 90 % step change
Warm-up Time :
200 seconds
0-50 C (32-122 F) standard, -20-50 C (-4 -122 F) optional,
Operating Conditions:
15-95 %RH
Power Supply:
20 30 Vac/dc (non-isolated half-wave rectified)
Reverse voltage protected, output limited, transient protected and
Protection Circuitry :
resettable fuse
Output Signal:
4-20 mA active or passive, 0-5 or 0-10 Vdc jumper selectable
Form C contacts (N.O. and N.C.), status LEDs, 5 Amps @ 250 Vac,
Optional Relay Output :
5 Amps @ 30 Vdc
Programming
Via internal push-buttons and jumpers
K.
Control Valves:
a.
2-Way Valves Modulating: low voltage, 2-way, proportional, spring return type,
providing modulating control of water flow through operation of motor actuator
and valve linkage and in response to signal from proportional controller. Valves to
have the following features:
Single seated valve, equal percentage flow characteristic, straight-through pattern;
screwed end connections, bronze body and removable brass seat on 15 to 40 mm
sizes; flanged end connections, cast iron body and removable bronze seat on 50 to
150 mm sizes; stainless steel stem and composition disc with removable throttling
plugs. Operator shall close valves against pump shutoff head.
Spring return type motor, with oil-immersed gear train, die-cast aluminium case.
single 160 degree stroke, double-ended crankshaft, die-cast aluminium cover with
built in transformer and spring to return motor to closed position on power failure.
Linkage directly mounted on motor, without adjustment requirements and
comprising roller, slide mechanism, cam and stem position indicator and with 710
N seal-off force.
Valve rated 115 deg. C maximum water temperature and pressure class based on
maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise
indicated. Motor rated 50 deg. C maximum ambient temperature.
L.
Electric Actuators
Page 30 of 56
a.
Valve Actuator to drive stem of valve by transmitting drive of synchronous motor

into linear motion using worm gear transmission. Actuator to have the following
features:
Stem of motor connected to valve stem by button retainer connection.
Accessories including internal force sensor to switch off motor when force on stem
exceeds factory set force, return spring or hand wheel used on power failure and
end limit switch for status indication.
b.
M.
N.
Damper Actuator to provide linear motion for damper control without convertor for
2-position control and with electronic signal convertor for modulating damper.
Accessories include linkage for head mounting.
Indicators: are required for operating personnel to monitor the several process control
variables. They are located on control panels. Indicator may be operated electrically,
pneumatically or provide a direct indication. Readout area may be scale and pointer or
level glass.
a.
Electrical Indicators are essentially D'Arsonval movements responding to a signal

of 4.0 to 20.0 mA DC. As such they are millimeters calibrated in terms of the
process variable. Meters to have 115 mm dial faces with 270 deg scale of black
numerals on white background. Meter to have nominal accuracy of not less than
0.5 % of full scale. Electric indicators to have a zero setting control.
b.
Pneumatically-Operated Indicators (locally mounted): to be standard "C" shaped

bourdon tube system. Bourdon tube to be fabricated from 316 stainless steel.
Indicator to be manufactured Grade A (1.0 %) accuracy, ANSI 840.1. Dials to be
uniformly graduated with black marking on white background and covering 270
deg of circular scale. Pointer to be adjustable for an accurate zero-set. Connection
to indicator to be 6 mm NPT.
Solid State Switch: to be a rack mounted card capable of selecting an analog input signal
and providing an output of contact transfer. Input to unit to be a 4.0 to 20.0 mA signal
applied to a precision resistor. Adjustable reference to be included to provide a set point.
Voltage of this point to be compared with voltage across precision resistor when input
signal exceeds pre-set value, a comparator-amplifier provides a sharp change in output
signal. Transfer contacts to be activated by change in out signal. These DPDT contacts to
be rated at 3 amps., 220 V, 50 hertz or 3 amps., 28 V DC. Operating parameters to be as
follows:
-
AC power input:
normal :
0.6 watts (1.60 VA)
tripped :
0.85 watts (2.0 VA)
minimum input impedance: power on or off : 1 mega-ohm
isolation: input completely isolated from other inputs and output as regards DC
operating span: 100 %
differential: adjustable: 0.2 % to 5 % total trip set point value
repeatability: +/-0.1 % of span
ambient temperature effects: 0.1% set point drift for temperature range of 2 to 40
degC
line voltage effects: +/-0.1% set point change for line variation of +/-10% at 220
volts, 50 Hertz
response time: 0.015 seconds.
Page 31 of 56
O.
Switching Relays: specifically designed for lighting control applications by a

manufacturer of lighting equipment. Under no circumstances will general purpose relays
be accepted. The lighting contactors are of the electrically operated mechanically-held
type, and these are covered in the Electrical Section. This BMS Section includes
coordination with and wiring to such lighting contactors via suitable contacts in the
respective processing units. The status of the actual lighting contactors are to be checked
by monitoring the auxiliary voltage-free contacts of the latch/unlatch coils, and not those
of any interposing relays that may be used in a processing unit. Reserve in each
processing unit a bank of digital outputs (standard sub-module of 8/16) for such purposes.
Allow for at least one spare or 20% spare interposing relay channels per processing unit,
whichever is larger.
P.
Signal Conditioners: are used in the instrumentation loops to perform mathematical

manipulations of analog signals. Output of each transmitter is either a 0.5 V DC signal or
is converted to a 0.5 V DC signal. All manipulations are performed on the 0.5 V DC
signal or otherwise, provided by software wherein respective DDC units. In general, all
such functions to be performed in a DDC unit, unless otherwise specifically required.
This subsection also covers various interfacing circuitry that will be required for DDC
output signal conditioning. Otherwise, most items specified herein are for a hard-signal
conditioning option which isnot to be followed specifically instructed otherwise.
a.
Adder-subtracter to be used in all cases where the sum of two to four signals is
required or the difference between two signals is the sought-for parameter. Module
to be a rack-mounted instrument of the non-indicating type. It is to be mounted in a
weatherproof enclosure with easy access to the adjustment controls. Unit to be
easily adjusted on site with capability of changing output equation as needed.
Circuitry of adder-substracter to comprise all solid-state components with
integrated circuit amplifiers to provide stability and longevity. Control signal
inputs to be 0.5 V DC and proportional to the sum of difference of the input
signals. Output load resistance can be between zero and 1850 ohms, as referenced
on the Drawings. Output to be short-circuit protected. Thermal stability of unit to
be such that temperature variation of 10 deg C between -5 deg C and +40 deg C to
affect output less than 0.5 %. Input power variations to affect output less than
0.025 % for +/-10 % change in supply voltage. Accuracy of unit to be better than
0.5 % of span. Power supply for unit to be capable of supplying +/-15 V DC at 30
mA each.
b.
Converter: electric transducer to convert 4.0 to 20.0 mA signals into standard linear
20.7 to 103.5 kPa a low level electric current into a coil working within the
magnetic fields of a permanent magnet produces a force operating linearly. This
force operates a pneumatic nozzle, the back-pressure on a nozzle, continually
balances the force produced by the coil, therefore, the transmitted air pressure to at
times be proportional to the coil current. Coil and a float below it to be integrally
mounted on a central shaft so that whole assembly is free to move. Float equals the
weight of the moving coil assembly. Unit to be shock and vibration proof and to be
mounted in an upright position (tilted not more than 10 % from vertical centerline).
c.
Time Delay Relay: to be solid state timing relay, of DPDT configuration. It is to be

capable of being adjusted to either on-delay or off-delay operation. Timing
adjustments to be made with self-contained adjustment potentiometer. Contacts to
be hermetically sealed in glass enveloped with a controlled gas atmosphere to
avoid contamination. Supply and initiate voltage to be 220 V (+10 %, -15 %) 50
hertz. Contacts to have NEMA ratings of 8600 for AC and P300 for DC. 3600
VA on make, 360 VA on break for AC, 138 VA make or break for DC.
Page 32 of 56
d.
Inverse Derivative Converter: to be time rate sensitive device. If pressure in the

pipeline takes a sudden drop, indicative of some unusual occurrence, there is to be
an alarm indication. Normal and gradual variations of pressure in the line are not
to transmit a signal through the unit. Circuitry of converter is a standard electronic,
solid-state mV/I transducer plus an RC network. The 4.0 to 20.0 mA signal from
pressure transmitter is fed to a 250 ohm resistor. This resulting 1 to 5 volt signal is
impressed on an RC network whose R is variable and provides the input to the
mV/I transducer.Transducer will produce an output signal which is approximately
equal to time derivative of input signal. Output may have a zero set at mid-scale so
that both increasing and decreasing signal changes can be monitored, or it can
merely be set for either increasing or decreasing signal measurement starting at
zero. Operating characteristics of unit to be as follows:
power requirements
input signal fixed
scale
variable span
output signal
output ripple
accuracy
sensitivity
zero suppression
stability
span
zero
ambient temperature
: 220 volt +/-10%, 50-60 hertz,single phase at 3 watts

: 1 mV minimum to 1000 mV maximum, full
: 5 mV minimum to 100 mV maximum, full scale
: 4.0 to 20.0 milliamperes DC
: 0.IV rms
: +/-0.5 %
: +/-0.1 % of full scale; not less than 2.5 microvolts
: not to exceed 3 times span
: changes in line voltage of +/-10 %
: cause less than 0.2% of span
: cause less than 0.1% of zero
: -5 to +40 deg C, range normal.
Care must be taken that input signal is free of noise because a differentiator will
greatly amplify any rapid swing of the input to the point that output is of no
practical value. The Contractor to be responsible for determining rate of change of
pressure that will be deemed unsafe and provide an RC network for unit that will
produce an alarm at unsafe limit.
Q.
2.11
Flow meter Sensor: to comprise flow meter with sensing device suitable to be
linked to BMS. Flow meter to be mechanical type designed to operate with dirty
water and high temperature water. Pressure rating is to suit system pressure. Body
to be in cast iron with with epoxy exterior coating. Flow meter sensor to be similar
to Schlumberger type WET/WET-P on approved equal.
UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
A.
Provide uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) System, on-line (load is continuously fed
through inverter), 3-phase, 380/220 V, 50 Hz, as specified under division 16, section
16610 for the central BMS equipment located at the BMS room. UPS capacity is to be
selected based on 125% of the maximum load of all equipment in addition to 25% extra
capacity for future expansion, noting that loads are of non-linear type, consisting of
computer equipment, and UPS capacity is not to be less than 30 kVA with a minimum
duration of 20 minutes. Calculation of the UPS capacity is to be submitted for approval.
B.
Each DDC is to be provided with a local UPS system, 1 or 3-phase, 380/220 V or 220 V
as appropriate, 50 Hz on line (load is continuously fed through inverter) as specified
under Division 16, Section 16610, with adequate capacity to cater for 125% of the
maximum load of DDC in addition to 25% extra capacity for future expansion for a
Page 33 of 56
minimum duration of 20 minutes. Calculation of the UPS capacity is to be submitted for

approval. UPS is to be either incorporated within the DDC enclosure, or separately
installed beside it.
2.12
A.
SOFTWARE OPERATIONAL FEATURES

General: The OW and POT shall be equipped with the latest version of Windows NT
Workstation 4.0, Service Pack 4, or later or Windows 2000 as the main user terminal
operating software.
BMS software package specified herein to be a real time, online, multitasking and multiuser operating system. All features specified herein to be supplied as a package to meet
the requirements of this specification. With operator performing any function (data base
generation, commanding points, custom programming, requesting information, etc.), this
is not to inhibit receipt/recording/ processing of any change-of-state (COS).
The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for
representing all data and control devices within the system. Adherence to industry
standards ANSI/EIA Standard 709.1-A-1999, LONWORKS to assure interoperability
between all system components is required. For each LONWORKS device that does not
have LonMark certification, the device supplier must provide a XIF file for the device if it
is application specific and the XIF file and application file if the device is programmable.
Software supplied to be capable of:
meeting all specification requirements
be generated online
be loaded into PC disk
consist of the operating system
all specified programs
have a complete data base to include all hardware address assignments, English language
identifiers, operator station assignments, COS response handling, point type assignments,
even program interaction assignments and equation assignments for each point.
Should A.C. line power be cycled, upon resumption, the system is to automatically restart
and:
output a power failure message, indicating time and date of occurrence
initialize processors and communications
update all time programs
compare all BMS point conditions before and after power failure and output only
the changed conditions as a COS.
System to provide program to automatically restore building to normal operating
conditions, following building power outage, and to enforce emergency operating
conditions during a power outage. System to automatically restart loads to their correct
operating condition based on whether normal or emergency power is available.
Power fail system to be defined online by operator. Operator to be able to add and delete
loads, add and delete power status points, define power fail system parameters and enable
or disable individual power fail systems. Each BMS point to be programmable on a per
point basis as to its restorability under normal or emergency power operation.
Program shall allow saving/restoring of operating data.
which:
This operating data is that
Page 34 of 56
B.
keeps current with actual building conditions

contains system's operator enterable parameters which are time consuming to reenter manually
operator does not ordinarily change to meet the building's operation requirements.
Centralized Point Monitoring And Information Access: BMS to be capable of

monitoring binary/digital input sensors and control binary/digital output actions. Present
contact condition of two-state device to be continuously storein memory and represented
as a binary engineering unit. Each engineering unit to consist of eight-character
alphanumeric descriptor, unique unit pair for ebinary point, and to be individually
assigned to each point independent of hard location, point type classification or location.
BMS to be capable of monitoring/measure, transduce, transmit and display analog values
for all analog points detailed in the Point List. Each analog point to be expressed as a
digital value, up to seven digits, as a positive or negative real number, with the proper
engineering units for all screen displays and printer hardcopy records. System to allow
the owner to designate a unique eight-character analog engineering unit for each point.
Remote adjustment of controller set points and/or dampers to be provided from any
designated input device for reset points, specified in the Point List. Reset values to be
reported without loss of COS reporting in terms of analog engineering units, which
corresponds to the controlled variable: deg C, kPa, l/s, etc.
Feedback to be employed so that, in the event that point fails to respond, responds with
wrong value, or drifts from set point value by +/-2%, a change of state (COS) message to
be output by the system. Feedback delay timer to be employed to temporarily suppress
COS report following command input to allow adequate response time by the controlled
equipment. This timer to be unique for each point.
Each Field Processing Unit to store current state and value of each point within its central
equipment memory and to make this data available through various system reports. Each
point and its data to be addressed by its level identifiers described herein. Operator to be
able to attain point status information by command or automatically, as pre-programmed,
to a designated peripheral device. Accessible information to be determined by operator's
authority level. Point information to include, but is not limited to, the following:
-
point's full level identification

current value/status
associated mode or engineering units
function labels to indicate application status which is to include:

-
application program in control (where applicable)

online/offline status
commissioned/uncommissioned
limit status (where applicable)
COS status
shutdown status
enable/disable status
trend log reference
alarm reference
totalizer reference
Page 35 of 56
Point information to provide for outputting information for single point, specific group of
points, specific class of points, type of points, etc. Execution of output command to be
recorded with date and time.
Point information displayed on screen or hardcopy recorded to be in the order
programmed by the operator. All screen information to be dynamic and system to
automatically update displayed information at least twice a minute.
Point information: to provide for operator requested information in the form of logs,
summaries, dynamic graphics, dynamic trending, historical data and cu
C.
Change-Of-State (COS) Reporting: BMS to detect and report any change from each
point's normal status. These changes to include, but are not limited to the following
general categories:
-
exceeding or returning to predefined limits

contact status point changing from normal to trouble or abnormal/alarm; returning
to normal
point failing to respond to commanded condition (allow sufficient delay to avoid
false alarms due to switch- bounce, contact-bounce, etc.)
totalization limits exceeded
any hardware ilure/restoration.
COS to be directed to predefined operator peripheral devices and to be capable of being

assigned to any and all operator stations/devices for display and printing.
Output for display to be by priority and chronologically to printers. This output not to be
restricted by the system to a device even though that device may be receiving other
information. All COS output to include priority of COS, point level or hardware
descriptor, current status/units, and date and time.
An online changeable message associated with COS, up to 50 characters in length, is also
to be simultaneously displayed/printed, for each point specified as having alarm or
maintenance message capability in the point list. This message is not to be restricted by
word lists or any other pre-coding method. These messages to be generated by the
operator online, using any desired choice of text. Composition of any one message is not
to restrict the composition of any other message.
BMS to automatically inhibit COS reporting of analog and binary points upon their
associated HVAC control fan system shutdown. COS reporting of these associated
analog and binary points to remain inhibited for an operator predetermined time, upon
restart of HVAC control fan system. This time should be sufficient to bring controlled
environment back to satisfactory operating conditions. If any of the associated analog
and binary points are in their alarm condition after the time delay, the system to
automatically report the COS status, as specified for those points.
D.
Hardware Status/Advisories And Diagnostics: System to provide a summary which

contains current status of all hardware elements. System to continuously interrogate all
hardware for failure and/or tampering and report to operator, in English language, all
changes in hardware status. This is to go down to the level of each printed circuit board
(PCB). Hardware status changes to be in the form of advisories and are to include, at
least, the following:
-
field hardware panel is/or is not communicating/operational

individual field point is/or is not communicating/operational
operator device is/or is not functional
Page 36 of 56
communications channel is/or is not functional

power failure detected at (date) (time).
Logs And Summaries to indicate on a per point basis the hardware communication status
through the use of special character of flags. These indicators to be kept current with the
advisories.
E.
F.
Graphical Object-Oriented Programming Software

1.
The system shall include a graphical object-oriented programming function which

shall be used to create all control sequences utilized in LONWORKS nodes. The
graphical object-oriented programming function shall provide programming
elements to be connected together to create a logic diagram. The graphical objectoriented programming function shall include elements for mathematical, logical,
timing, setpoint, display and input/output functions to create logic diagrams that
represent sequences of operation for LPNs.
2.
Program elements shall be able to be combined into a custom template which can
then be used as a standard function.
3.
Program checkout and debug tools shall include display of real-time and/or
simulated system variables and inter-object data on the programming screens. The
user shall be able to fix or force values of variables to enable program checkout
during debugging.
4.
The programming software shall reside on each POT and OW server for
programming and/or configurating each model of LONWORKS node on the
project. The applications shall be downloaded and executed at the appropriate
nodes. The software shall allow for updated applications via the network from the
OW.
5.
DDC programs are to be provided to meet the control strategies as called for in the
sequence of operation sections of these specifications. Each LPN shall have
available a full library of DDC algorithms, intrinsic control operators, arithmetic,
logic, Proportional Control, Proportional plus Integral (PI), Proportional plus
Integral plus Derivative (PID), and relational operators for implementation of
control sequences.
2-POSITION, FLOATING, STANDARD I/O AND
COUNTER INPUTS, TIME BASED DATA, CURVE FIT FUNCTION,
PSYCHOMETRIC FUNCTIONS, INTEGRATION,
6.
All DDC setpoints, gains, and time constants associated with DDC programs shall
be available to the operator for display and modification via the POT or OW
interface.
Library of Applications: A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be

provided to enable the creation of applications and user interface screens. Provide the
capability to cut & paste objects and libraries into applications for a node/system.
Applications are to be created by selecting the desired control objects from the library,
dragging or pasting them on the screen, and linking them together, using a built-in
graphical connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future
use. Graphical User Interface screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the
user displays is obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the application
objects to provide real-time data updates. Any real-time data value or object property
may be connected to display its current value on a user display. Systems requiring
Page 37 of 56
separate software tools or processes to create applications and user interface display shall
not be acceptable.
G.
Off-line simulations (step function, continuous run function, simulation of external

inputs)
H.
Dynamic presentation of logic in on-line state (all intermediate values)
I.
Text to logic screens
J.
Calculator objects, (basic stuff), including if-then-else, log, ln, exp, and trig functions.
K.
Recognize standard network variable type data (nvi) and create network variables to put
on the network (nvo)
L.
Programming Objects
1.
Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a userdefined library to the users application. Objects shall be linked by a graphical
linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will
support one-to-one, many-toone, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects
shall maintain their connections to other objects, regardless of where they are
positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on
other pages for easy identification.
2.
Configuration of each object will be done through the objects property sheet using
fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom
programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language
for configuration will not be accepted.
3.
The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When
on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time for
easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode
shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing
execution before it is applied to the system (step function and run mode, integral
trend logging).
4.
M.
The system shall support object duplication within the Owners database. An
application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and
duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during
duplication.
Object Libraries
1.
A standard library of object function blocks shall be included for development and
setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and
communication networks.
2.
The function blocks in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into
the users database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition,
the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and
store the new instances of these objects in a user-defined library.
3.
Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization

object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring
Page 38 of 56
space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also,

allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far
enough ahead to take advantage of the buildings flywheel effect for energy
savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on
the previous days performance.
N.
Application Specific Node Configuration software Tools: Provide application specific

node configuration software tools that will permit the individual LASN to be configured
and commissioned with appropriate parameters. This software will reside on the POT.
Functionality shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
O.
4.
P.
Recognize all Standard Configuration Parameters (SCPTs)

Provide capability for setting all Standard Configuration Parameters (SCPTs)
Translation capability for user defined configuration parameters
Monitoring capability for nvos from the nodes
Ability to set the values for nvis to the nodes
Network Management
1.
A LONWORKS network management software tool shall be provided that will

assign domain, subnet, and node addresses to nodes; configures all routers and
repeaters; define network data connections between LONWORKS device network
variables, known as binding; and record binding data into node addressing
tables, and create a database of all addressing and binding information for all
nodes on the network.
2.
Network management shall include the following services: brows all network
variables on nodes; Attach, Detach, Manage, Add, Remove, and Replace nodes;
plus transmission error off-line, on-line reporting.
3.
The network management database shall be resident in the operator workstation

server, ensuring that anyone with proper user name/password authorization has
access to the network management database at all times.
The software shall have Client/server capability to allow multiple users ability to
manipulate the database simultaneously.
Graphics Generation: color graphics generation to be done through any color operator
terminal. While in the generation process, the color terminal is not to be inhibited from
receiving any COS information. Generation of graphics to be accomplished with the
following attributes:
-
online at all times

through cursor position of any lines, symbols text, and data on the color CRT
screen (systems whichuse X-Y coordinate plotting are not acceptable)
single screen to be used during graphics generation to concurrently allow display
and generation of all graphic attributes (dynamic/static lines, text symbols, and
data).
BMS is not to restrict the number to graphics that may be generated. Capability to be
provided for storage of graphics on request in a library for future use in formatting other
graphics.
Page 39 of 56
Help request to be available to assist operator in designing a graphic at any time during
creation process without loosing any graphic information that is already defined. This
help request to provide aid lists for selection of definition attributes, available point types,
colors, and symbols.
BMS to provide library of predefined symbols, consisting of industry standard
representations of HVAC control, plumbing, electrical, fire and security
equipment/devices. Library is to be used by operator for generation of graphic symbols.
If operator wishes to define custom symbols, the BMS to provide capability to
accomplish this during generation phase of each individual graphic. Lines are to include
but are not limited to vertical, horizontal, diagonal and free hand. Character strings are to
include alphanumeric characters and to be capable of 60 characters minimum length.
Q.
Data Base Generation: This is to be done via fill-in-the blank, mass template entry
method. Operator to be able to online:
-
custom program system software

modify, add and delete system software; access to this function will be authority
code restricted
size and resize the data base, define all interface hardware and communications
trunks, define all point parameter characteristics
order system level IDs to customize report format outputs
modify all field hardware to accommodate hardware changes including common
trunks, DDC and operator peripheral devices
add, delete modify mathematical common points and sequences
modify a specific point's software characteristics to accommodate hardware
changes along with control strategy requirements. These changes to include, but
are not limited to the following:
level identifiers with their associated expansion
system timers, including heavy equipment delays, COS feedback delay timers and
adjust point delay timers
point type characteristics, including limits and differentials, engineering units,
mode units, filter tolerance and status pairs
COS output parameters, including COS type, COS priority level, definition of
critical and latchable alarms and printout and acknowledgement requirements
application features eligibility.
Interface Prompting to be used to direct operator throughout program, to use fill-in-theblank, walk-through method to queue and edit operator entered parameters.
R.
Energy Management Features: BMS to be capable of performing all energy management

functions specified herein to reduce energy consumption. System to provide energy
supervisory management routine which is to improve energy efficiency of building
HVAC systems. This routine to coordinate the execution of all energy management
application features, acting as an executive software system for them, and as an interface
for their control strategy with other application features in the system. These energy
management functions to be categorized under load control and HVAC control.
1.
Load Control:
a.
BMS to provide predefined control algorithms to accomplish peak demand

control and power consumption reduction through Demand Limiting and
Duty Cycle control application. Although the primary focus of these
applications is towards electrical energy usage, the system to be capable of
Page 40 of 56
b.
c.
d.
e.
applying these predefined algorithms to other energy sources, such as steam,

without software revisions.
Demand Limiting and Duty Cycle control applications to be coordinated
through energy supervisory management routines. These routines to
coordinate the control action required by Demand Limiting and Duty Cycle
between themselves, all other energy features, and all application features
within the system.
Load Shed systems/meters to support a minimum of 32 load control
systems/meters, each capable of being defined with a unique set of
parameters/characteristics. Each system/meter to support English or metric
units of measurement and be assigned a unique identifier used to request
operator-relevant load control status data. Each meter to be capable of
supporting Demand Limiting and Duty Cycle. Load Shed systems/meters
and their associated points and parameters to be online definable. Any
additions, modifications or deletions to be made online. Each system/meter
to be individually identified with a unique English language descriptor.
Controllable loads to be able to be defined for Demand Limiting and/or Duty
Cycle. A load is to be considered eligible to be shed if its minimum on-time
has expired, and considered eligible for restoration if its minimum off-time
has expired, provided the energy operating conditions are met (e.g., online
unlocked, normal mode, eligible for control, etc.)
Each load shed system to provide a saving profile summary which is to
document, but is not limited to, the following:
-
period start date as defined by operator

daily profile time (on, off, mid-peak or all)
daily peak measured demand and its time of occurrence
daily peak projected demand and its time of occurrence
daily measured energy usage
daily projected energy usage
period profile time
period measured energy usage
period projected energy usage
period peak measured demand
period ratchet clause percentage and number
period billed demand.
These documented savings values to be automatically historically stored for

the current defined period and a minimum of twelve past periods.
f.
g.
h.
Operator Output Information to be available from Load Shed program in a

minimum of two types of summaries. It is to be output upon operator request
or preselected time, as detailed under the Weekly Scheduling of this
specification.
All summaries to include the Load Control system English language
descriptor.
System Summary to include, but is not limited to, the following:
-
demand interval
current KW power
current measured demand
projected demand usage
energy units defined for the energy system
maximum expendable load
average expandable load
Page 41 of 56
i.
System Load Summary to include, but is not limited to, the following:
-
expendable/deferrable load type

point type
point ID
point status
load rating
minimum off, maximum off and minimum on times
today's shed time for each load
today's shed frequency for each load.
j.
Demand Limiting control algorithms/programs to monitor total power

consumption per meter and shed associated loads automatically to reduce
power consumption to an operator presentable maximum demand target
value. Program to use a floating window type demand determination to
monitor average rate of energy usage/demand and by comparing this usage
to target value and request control action to be taken to satisfy its
requirements.
k.
Duty Cycle control algorithms/program to briefly turn selected loads off

periodically to evenly reduce power consumption to an operator presettable
target value. Duty Cycle program to be properly integrated and interactive
with the Demand Limiting program specified herein before.
Loads to be shed automatically throughout Duty Cycle interval by selection
of groups on a priority factor and loads within a group to satisfy calculated
control action. If control action cannot be satisfied, the system to notify
operator through an advisory.
l.
2.
current expandable load

maximum deferrable load
average deferrable load
current deferrable load
demand limit status
demand limit target value
demand limit control action in the last minute
Duty Cycle status
Duty Cycle target value
Duty Cycle control action in the last minute
convergence time
restore bandwidth.
HVAC Control:
a.
b.
c.
BMS to provide predefined control algorithms to accomplish Optimal Run

(start/stop) Time, Supply Air Reset and Enthalpy Switchover Optimization
applications.
Optimization applications to be coordinated through energy supervisory
management routines. These routines to coordinate control action required
by optimization applications between themselves, all other energy features,
and all application features within the system.
Each control system to support English or metric units of measurement and
be assigned a unique identifier which is to be used to request operatorrelevant HVAC control status data. Each control system to be capable of
supporting Optimal Run Time, Supply Air Reset, and Enthalpy Switchover
Optimization.
Page 42 of 56
d.
e.
Control systems and their associated points and parameters to be online

definable. Any additions, modifications or deletions to be made online.
Each system to be individually identified with a unique English language
descriptor.
Each system to provide a savings profile summary which is to document, but
is not limited to, the following:
-
period start date as defined by operator

calculated optimal start time daily saving values
calculated optimal stop time daily saving values
calculated optimal start time daily saving values during current period
calculated optimal stop time daily saving values during current period
calculated SAR (Supply Air Reset) daily saving values
calculated SAR saving values during current period
calculated ESQ (Enthaply Switch-over) daily saving values
calculated ESQ saving values during current per.
These documented savings values to be automatically historically stored for

the current defined period and a minimum of twelve past periods.
f.
OptimaRun Time (ORT) Programme is to:

-
g.
Supply Air Reset (SAR) Programme is to:

-
S.
control start up and shutdown tof HVAC control equipment

provide the most efficient operation during potentially energy
wasteful periods of the day based on occupancy schedules, outside air
temperature, seasonal requirements and interior room mass
temperatures
start up systems by using outside air temperature and room
temperatures to "learn" the building's thermal characteristics through a
dynamic adaptive modelling technique
predict and self-adjust the HVAC control system for how long
building takes to cooldown under different conditions, using the
adaptive model
determine how early it can shut down the system without adversely
affecting ventilation, by using the outside air temperature
automatically determine the seasonal mode and worse case condition
for each day, by analyzing multiple building mass sensors
analysis to require only easily obtained occupancy schedule data and
desired mass temperatures for implementation.
monitor cooling loads in building spaces

monitor single zone unit discharge temperatures
adjust HVAC control discharge temperature to the most energy
efficient levels, and still satisfy the measured load
raise cooling temperatures to highest possible value, and still cool and
dehumidify the warmest monitored room served by fan.
Programming Application Features

a.
Custom Report Generation: BMS to provide the capability to create custom

user/management reports online. Any realtime information; including point values,
data calculation output, accessible energy management features data values, and
accessible programmable application feature data values to be available for
Page 43 of 56
formatting single or multiple page dynamic reports. This realtime information to

include point level identifiers and values, status and alarm information, energy
usage data, and runtime/consumption totalization data. Each custom report to be
created from any of the information stated herein, and not restricted by point
identifiers, grouping, etc.
Positioning of any information or text on a report page to be performed by cursor
control/positioning. A single screen to be used during report generation to
currently allow display and generation of all report attributes. Systems which
generate each type of attribute on a separate screen image and then overlay them
for the final product are not acceptable.
Points formats to be capable of being stored on request in a library for future use in
formatting other pages. A help request to be available to assist the operator in
designing a report point at any time during the creation process without losing any
report information that is already defined.
b.
Alarm Messages: BMS to provide online operator definition of text messages to be

output on any operator terminal and hardcopy record for point COS, system
hardware failures, and totalization limit alarm advisors. Text message to follow its
associated output with no other output separating the two.
Capability to be provided for a definition of a minimum 999 text messages, each
having a maximum length of fifty characters comprised of any standard typewriter
keyboard alphanumeric character.
BMS to allow operator, from any system keyboard, to define, modify, or delete
text messages online. System to provide summaries listing all current text messages
and their related/associated assignments.
c.
Point Trending: Each processing unit to provide the capability to selectively

sample and historically store points data values for trending analysis. At any time,
the BMS to be able to dynamically monitor and sample any designated ninety-nine
points. These points may be selected from any realtime point residing in the data
base, including energy calculated values/savings/usage and custom calculated point
values. For each designated point, sampling intervals may be specified for seconds,
minutes, hours, days or months with historical storage of up to 3000 values of the
designated sampling interval. Systems which do not provide the point capability,
historical sample capacity per point and/or sampling interval flexibility are not
acceptable. Point sampling for trending analysis to be initialized by operator
command or automatically by the system through programming options.
Historically sampled point values to be output via trend logs, bar graphs, and/or
line graphs.
Trend Log Output to be provided through up to thirty operator defined trends logs,
each having up to 4 points per trend log. Trend log output to be provided by
operator command or automatically based on an operator specified number of
samples. System to automatically format all trend log outputs, headers and point
related information to be hardcopy recorded.
Bar And Line Graphical Output to be provided through any color CRT with each
color graphical display capable of being color hardcopy recorded upon a single
keystroke. Each point graphed to be designated with a unique color. Bar graphs to
provide ability for comparative point analysis of up to four points simultaneously.
Systems that do not provide comparative point analysis are not acceptable.
Page 44 of 56
For each bar and line graph display, the BMS to provide a vertical scale of either
actual values or a percentage scale (operator selectable at each display) and a
horizontal scale which the system is to automatically time base with up to 200
samples per screen.
Compression/interval and dynamic forward/backward
scrolling feature to be available to display "off screen" historical data values.
Dynamic Display feature is to provide the display of dynamic data values while
displaying graphs. This dynamic display to automatically update new sample
values and to dynamically display for each point graphed, either observed highest
and lowest data values or lowest and newest data values.
d.
Historical Data Storage: BMS to provide the capability to historically store logs,
summaries, COS records, acknowledgement records and operator commands. This
information to be stored on the PC hard or floppy disks. Unit to be later recalled by
operator command. Information stored to be operator selectable and categorized for
storage as desired. Amount of disk space allocated for each category to be operator
selectable online.
BMS to also provide the capability for remote historical data storage to the PC
storage disk unit loading media. Capability to be provided to remotely store
categories in any order desired. Recall of remote stored information to be by
information type directly from loading media. It is not to be necessary to copy
information back onto mass storage disk unit for operator analysis.
Weekly Scheduling capability to be provided through the BMS to:
-
e.
automatically initiate equipment or system commands, based on a

preselected time schedule for points specified as programmable
provide program times for each day of the week (Monday through Sunday
and holidays) on a per points basis
enter, change or delete program parameters without inhibiting COS reporting
have no set limit on unique time schedule for each time programmable point
automatically generate a COS output for any point not responding to a
program function command
supply an additional time program day for holidays
have capacity of minimum 366 consecutive holidays
program a holiday initialization to a minimum of 31 days in advance
automatically perform programmed functions, based on a preselected time
output a summary containing a listing of programmed function points, their
associated program times and the respective days of the week
output a summary of programmed points by software groups or time of days.
Event Initiated Programming Capability to be provided through the BMS to permit

events to occur, based on a changing condition of one or more "master" points
which are to result in system action on "slave" points, whose conis to be controlled
and/or monitored, based on the condition of the associated master points. Each
event initiated program to have a unique identifier as specifiunder system format.
Any event initiated programming, including additioand deletions, to be done
onlineby the operator through any CRT.
Any binary contact, high/low limit of any analog point, energy management
feature or mathematical calculated point value to be capable of being utilized as a
master for event initiated programming. Event initiated programming to be
capable of using the same master to monitor or command multiple slaves. Any
master to be capable of being a master to multiple slaves.
Page 45 of 56
Event initiated program to be provided to allow operator to assign an overall

process priority to each event initiated process. This priority to range from highest
(1) to lowest (16).
f.
Mathematical Computations: BMS to provide the capability to perform

mathematical calculations from input data obtained from appropriate realtime point
values, operator entered constants or data from another calculation in predefined
formatted algorithms. As a minimum, the following predefined algorithms to be
provided, supplied in a library for ease of operator interface:
-
energy transfer rate for chiller system

chiller coefficients of performance
point average
general summation
WB temperature calculation from DB and RH inputs
WB temperature calculation from DB and DP inputs
total loop load calculation
energy cost savings
incremental energy pricing
up to eight general formats.
Control: Capability to be provided for the operator to organize and control

activation of these algorithms in any combination and sequence desired. BMS to
use a high level control strategy for the execution of these algorithms in their
proper sequence.
Each Algorithm And Control Activation Sequence to be defined online by the
operator including any additions, modifications and/or deletions from any CRT.
For any specific algorithm, the system is to automatically provide any conversation
constants during the definition process. Each algorithm and sequence to be
assigned a unique identifier.
Display System to provide the capability to display the resultant of any algorithm
at any operator peripheral device. Furthermore, the resultant on any algorithm to
be capable of being used in any other application or energy management program.
BMS is not to restrict the number of algorithms or control activation sequences that
can be defined by the operator. Any systems that restrict the capacity are not
acceptable.
g.
Totalization: Capability to be provided through the BMS to accumulate time and

consumption totalization. As a minimum, the system to be capable of
simultaneously accumulating totalization data on 500 points.
Time totalizations to accumulate data for hours of operation for at least the
following general categories:
-
equipment runtime
binary/digital point status (alarm/off-normal/normal) condition
analog point status condition.
Consumption totalization to accumulate data for the amount of the measured data
value recorded over a period of time. Attributes of consumption totalization to
include:
Page 46 of 56
base units of measured data value to be totalized (i.e. litres, watts, watts/hour
etc.)
instantaneous time factor totalization is to be based upon (seconds, minutes,
hours, none)
measured data value scaling factor
associated data point status totalization should occur under.
Each totalized value to have a selectable alarm and reset limit. When totalized
value reaches its alarm limit, a COS message to be output and totalization to
continue. When totalized value reaches it reset limit, a COS message to be output
and total to automatically be reset to zero and totalization continued. Total to also
be able to reset to zero by a manual command.
Totalization value to be accessible for display and/or as a mathematical input in
any custom report or programming language. System is not to restrict this usage in
any manner, nor is operator to duplicate this feature capability to provide this
function.
h.
Custom Programming Language: System to provide the capability to generate

online custom application programs as required for specific owner requirements in
a structured, high level language. Language to be control oriented and interactive
with the BMS data base. This interactive relationship to allow the customer
application programs to:
-
use field point data values

use mathematical computation results
use totalized values
calculated values
make logical decisions and analysis
command points
interact with energy management features, programmable application
features, fire application features, security application features, and operator
peripheral devices
provide instructive and tutorial information on intelligent decision/analysis
routines for operator feedback and automatic control sequenced output.
Three custom programs to be written online using English language sentences

and/or statements.
Each custom program to have access to the BMS data base and its associated
point's identifiers, current value, status, constants and variables. A separate
nomenclature or data base is not to be required for any point or application
program information to be utilized or accessible for any custom program
application.
Each custom program to have the capability to employ mathematical and logic
functions. As a minimum, these functions to include:
-
realtime field point data values/status/state (analog/binary/digital)

integers, constants and real numbers
boolean constants (true, false)
comparison functions (less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than
or equal, and not equal)
time functions (time-of-day, day-of-week, day-of-month, month-of-year)
mathematical value functions (square root, absolute value, absolute
differential, minimum value, maximum value, exponential).
Page 47 of 56
BMS to allow any combination to these functions in any order to read point data,
calculate any mathematical value, and process decision logic statements for control
action, either intra-process or inter-process.
Custom Programming Language to provide user advisory information for system
output during any stage of its control execution. This information to be provided
through a minimum of seventy character user defined message strings. Number of
messages definable for each custom program or the overall system is not to be
restricted.
BMS to provide the ability to review any custom process source code on any CRT
or printer. Online text editing on any CRT to be provided for addition, deletion
and/or modification of any custom process. Text editing to include a HELP
command to prompt an operator on editing functions.
Upon completion of custom process definition, the BMS to provide a resident
translator to develop the executable object code online. If any translation errors are
detected, error messages to be generated indicating location of error and type of
error.
i.
Programming Support Capabilities: The following system to be capable of

supporting the following programs for user program development, compiling,
loading and executing:
-
fortran Compiler
assembler Program
source Editor
loader Program
disk Utility Program
memory Dump and Modify Program
debug Program
system Generation
system Save and restore
diagnostic Software.
2.14
A.
Web Browser Clients

The system shall support web clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet
Explorer or Netscape Navigator.
B.
The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration
that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine
requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web
browser to function with the Web server, shall not be acceptable.
C.
The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics,
schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is
provided by the HMI.
D.
The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:
1.
User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user

attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java
Page 48 of 56
authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be

implemented.
2.
HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a

Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a
specific look or format.
3.
Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Web Server without requiring any
graphics to be stored on the client machine.
4.
Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without

requiring a manual refresh of the Web page.
5.
Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access

privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following:
Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set
points in a graphical manner.
Schedule times will be adjusted.
Holidays shall be set .
Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking or
double clicking, the selected object and selecting the appropriate command
from the pop-up menu.
View logs and charts
View and acknowledge alarms.
6.
[The system shall provide the capability to specify a users (as determined by the
log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to
just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages
in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.
7.
2.15
Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other
locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource
Locator (URL) for the desired link.
WEB SERVER
A.
An operator workstation central server shall be provided. The server shall support all
Owners network whether local or remote.
B.
MULTIPLE SERVER (single client can access data from all servers)
C.
Local connections shall be via an Ethernet LAN. Remote connections shall be via ISDN,
ADSL, T1 or dial-up connection.
D.
It shall be possible to provide access to all LONWORKS nodes via a single connection
to the Web Server.
E.
The server shall provide the following functions, at a minimum:

1.
Global Data Access: The server shall provide complete access to distributed data
defined anywhere in the system.
2.
[Client management, including username/password]
3.
[Handles acknowledgement of alarms]
Page 49 of 56
2.14
4.
[Handles reports, diagrams, and other documents]
5.
[Handles events (historical logging)]
6.
[Presentation of web-based color graphics, reading and writing of values]
7.
[The server shall accept time synchronization messages from trusted precision
Atomic Clock Internet sites and update its master clock based on this data.?????]
MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SUB-SYSTEM
A.
General: provide a complete maintenance management sub-system (MMS) as described

herein. The MMS is to run as a completely stand-alone system except for obtaining
runtime and alarm data. It is not to burden the CPU with demands on the central
processor for day-to-day work order generation or maintenance data manipulation.
B.
Operation station to have a central processing unit such that it can be configured as a
fully operational stand-alone maintenance management system. Operator display to
consist of a color CRT capable of displaying 48 lines x 80/132 color with a screen size of
19" and a resolution of 1056 x 400 image points. The printer to be capable of printing
132 characters per line on standard 8.5 x 11 inch continuous contractor feed paper at a
minimum rate of 220 characters per second. The printer shall be capable of using fan
fold single sheets of paper.
The system to have a minimum of 4 megabytes of random access mass storage and be
expandable to 200 megabytes. Storage may be added by connecting additional storage
units and assigning portions of the programming, data base or maintenance history to the
auxiliary storage devices.
The system to operate through the use of linked menus which guide the operator to the
proper screen or function. The operator to be capable of directly accessing any system
operation without stepping through successive menus. He is to be capable of directly
accessing frequently used functions by a single keystroke through the use of software
designated function keys.
Operator displays to employ color to differentiate data types and to emphasize system
advisories. Colours to be selected in such a manner that they are not distracting to overall
operations.
The operator to have access to all system documentation while operating the system. This
to include information detailing the use and operation of the menu, template, and field in
the system. He is to be capable of displaying the information to either the display or
printer. The system to grant operator access to system functions on a per menu selection
basis. A minimum of fifteen passwords shall be supported.
The system to be capable of executing other facility functions when not executing
maintenance management software. These functions shall include:
-
word processing
accounting
graphics
spreadsheets.
Page 50 of 56
C.
Data Base: the entire data base to be structured to allow a minimum number of required
entries for facilities where the operation is not data intensive. The system to also be
comprehensive and flexible enough to ensure that additional optional data can be entered
to allow more sophisticated configurations to be created.
The component data base to allow the following data to be entered on either a mandatory
or optional basis:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Component ID
Quantity
Location
PM Program
Levels of Service
Tools and Material
Warranty
*
*
*
*
*
Component Name
*
Use
Classification
Master Schedule
*
Seasonal Tasks
Begin and End Weeks
Date Entered.
Separate data to exist for recording information on sub- component parts and repair parts.
Additionally, the system to have the capability of creating user defined component data
base parameters.
The system to allow for a property data base such that non maintainable components can
be tracked as part of the system. All maintainable components may also have a property
record. The property data base shall include such parameters as:
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
D.
*
*
*
Component Name
*
Use
*
Classification
*
Acquisition Code
Serial Number
Inventory Date
Date Entered.
Task Schedules: the system to support a system of master schedules such that
components with similar maintenance requirements can all draw on a single master
schedule. The schedule to be constructed in such a way that minor maintenance variations
between similar components can be accommodated without resorting to creating
additional master schedules. The master schedules to include the following information:
*
*
*
*
*
*
E.
Component ID
Quantity
Location
Accounting Code
Part Number
Purchase Date
Warranty
Task ID
Manuals
Craft
Task Synopsis
Task length
Contractor
*
*
*
*
*
Intervals of Service
*
Tools and Materials
Number of Employees
Priority
Plant Condition
Cost.
BMS Interface: the system to support an interface data base to the BMS system to allow
the transfer of runtime and alarm data to the work order generator. Components to be
capable of being assigned a minimum of three runtime schedules and one alarm schedule.
The data base to include the following information:
*
*
*
Alarm Schedule
Last Runtime Issued
Current Runtime
*
Runtime Schedules
Next Runtime Expected
*
Component ID
Page 51 of 56
F.
Work Order Generation: the system to support scheduled work order generation on a
weekly basis, for any segment of the year or seasonally, or by runtimes as accumulated at
the BMS. Scheduling to be done on either a calendar or a fiscal year basis. Work orders
to be sorted before printing by several user selectable criteria. The system to be capable
of generating one million work orders per year.
The system to support repair work order generation on a demand basis or by alarms
accumulated at the BMS. Repair work orders may be requested and serviced
immediately, or planned for future completion (backlogged).
The system to support a user defined custom work order format. This format is to be
applicable to both scheduled and repair work.
G.
Maintenance History to store the following data as a minimum:

*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Employee Assigned
Date Assigned
Accounting Code
Wage Differential
Hour/Minutes Spent
Downtime
Comments
*
*
*
*
*
Craft
Date Complete
*
Number of Employees
*
Overhead Costs
PM/Repair Type
Materials Used
Condition/Action/Cause
Maintenance history to also compute year-to-year totals and other pertinent history data.
H.
The system to allow a minimum of one year of maintenance history to be stored on-line.
Additional storage capability shall be possible to be added. User to be able to achieve online maintenance history to a bulk storage media for later processing and to free random
access storage devices for current data.
Management Reports: in addition to standard maintenance reports, the system to have the
capability of providing user defined reports. These reports shall be stored in a user library
and recalled upon demand. The reports to be capable of accessing any portion of the data
base or maintenance history, sorting based on user selection and performing math
functions.
UPS: show all control points as per point list.

FIRE ALARM: show system overview including system schematic key plans with indication of
fire zones and alarm/fault status of each zone.
2.16
SCHEDULE OF CONTROL POINTS
REFER TO APPENDIX.
Page 52 of 56
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that conditioned control rooms are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify field measurements are as shown on shop drawings and as instructed by

manufacturer.
C.
Verify that required utilities are available, in proper locations, and ready for use.
D.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions..
3.02
A.
3.03
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
Provide a separate DDC Controller for each AHU. Two AHU systems may be placed on
one DDC Controller if sufficient points are available. However, all points associated with
any AHU system must be located on the same DDC Controller.
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Connect HVAC control devices under provisions of Division 1related Sections.
B.
Connect motor controllers, lighting controls, fire alarm and smoke detection devices,
intrusion detection and security access devices, sensing and measurement devices,
electrical controls and relays, programmablelogic controller, under provisions of Div16
related Sections.
3.04
A.
3.05

Test each sequence of building management system by simulation of normal, off-normal,
and alarm conditions.
ON-SITE TESTING
A.
Provide Engineer-approved operation and acceptance testing of the complete system.

The Engineer will witness all tests.
B.
Field Test: When installation of the system is complete, calibrate equipment and verify
transmission media operation before the system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating,
adjusting and final field tests shall be completed. Provide a detailed cross-check of each
sensor within the system by making a comparison between the reading at the sensor and a
standard traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. Provide a cross-check of each
control point within the system by making a comparison between the control command
and the field-controlled device. Verify that all systems are operable from local controls in
the specified failure mode upon panel failure or loss of power. Submit the results of
functional and diagnostic tests and calibrations to the Engineer for final system
acceptance.
Page 53 of 56
C.
Compliance Inspection Checklist: Submit in the form requested, the following items of
information to the Engineer for verification of compliance to the project specifications.
Failure to comply with the specified information shall constitute non-performance of the
contract. The contractor shall submit written justification for each item in the checklist
that he is unable to comply with. The Engineer will initial and date the checklist to
signify contractor's compliance before acceptance of system.
1.
Verify to the Engineer in letter form that supplier has in-place support facility.
Letter shall show location of support facility, name and titles of technical staff,
engineers, supervisors, fitters, electricians, managers and all other personnel
responsible for the completion of the work on this project.
2.
Submit in data sheet form or official government approval form compliance to

F.C.C. Regulation, Part 15, Section 15.
3.
Manually generate an alarm at a remote DDC Controller as selected by the

Engineer to demonstrate the capability of the workstation and alarm printer to
receive alarms within 5 seconds.
4.
Disconnect an operator workstation in the central control room and manually

generate an alarm at a remote DDC Controller to demonstrate the capability of the
system printer to receive alarms when the workstation is disconnected from the
system.
5.
Disconnect one DDC Controller from the network to demonstrate that a single
device failure shall not disrupt or halt peer-to-peer communication. Panel to be
disconnected shall be selected by the Engineer.
6.
At a DDC Controller of the Engineer's choice, display on the portable operator's

terminal:
a.
b.
c.
3.06
At least one temperature setpoint and at least one status condition, i.e., on or
off for a system or piece of equipment attached to that panel as well as for
points at another DDC Controller on the network.
The diagnostic results as specified for a system or piece of equipment
attached to that panel as well as for a system or piece of equipment attached
to another DDC Controller.
The ability to add a new point to the DDC Controller with the POT and have
it automatically uploaded to the workstation to modify that panel's stored
database.
FIELD SERVICES
A.
Adjust setpoints, alarm points, and display configurations so that system performs as
specified.
B.
Include installing and debugging hardware and software. Perform hardware configuration
revisions required to accommodate software patches.
C.
Enter building management data base and provide backup copy.
3.07
A.
CLEANING
Clean equipment finishes and interiors of equipment cabinets.
Page 54 of 56
3.08
SERVICE AND GUARANTEE
A.
General Requirements: Provide all services, materials and equipment necessary for the
successful operation of the entire BMS system for a period of one year after completion
of successful performance test. Provide necessary material required for the work.
Minimize impacts on facility operations when performing scheduled adjustments and
non-scheduled work.
B.
Description of Work: The adjustment and repair of the system includes all computer
equipment, software updates, transmission equipment and all sensors and control devices.
Provide the manufacturer's required adjustments and all other work necessary.
C.
Personnel: Provide qualified personnel to accomplish all work promptly and

satisfactorily. Owner shall be advised in writing of the name of the designated service
representative, and of any changes in personnel.
D.
Schedule of Work: Provide two minor inspections at 6 month intervals and two major
inspections offset equally between the minor inspections to effect quarterly inspection
ofalternating magnitude, and all work required as specified. Minor inspections shall
include visual checks and operational tests of all equipment delivered. Major inspections
shall include all work described for minor inspections and the following work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean all equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces.

Perform signal, voltage and system isolation checks of system workstations and
peripherals.
Check and calibrate each field device. Check all analog points and digital points.
Run all diagnostics and correct all previously diagnosed problems.
Resolve and correct any previous outstanding problems.
E.
Emergency Service: Owner will initiate service calls when the system is not functioning
properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service to the complete
system. Furnish owner with a telephone number where service representative can be
reached at all times. Service personnel shall be at the site within 24 hours after receiving
a request for service. Restore the control system to proper operating condition within 3
days.
F.
Operation: Performance of scheduled adjustments and repair shall verify operation of the
system as demonstrated by the initial performance test.
G.
Systems Modifications: Provide any recommendations for system modification in writing

to Owner. Do not make any system modifications, including operating parameters and
control settings, without prior approval of Owner. Any modifications made to the system
shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and other
documentation affected.
H.
Software: Provide all software updates and verify operation in the system. These updates
shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with the system operators,
and shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and software
documentation.
3.09
A.
DEMONSTRATION
Provide systems demonstration under provisions of the Contract Documents.
Page 55 of 56
B.
3.10
Demonstrate operation of building management system.

TRAINING
A.
The Contractor shall provide competent instructors to give full instruction to designated
personnel in the adjustment, operation and maintenance of the system installed rather
than a general training course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all aspects of
the subject matter they are to teach. All training shall be held during normal work hours
as follows:
B.
Training shall include:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Explanation of drawings, operations and maintenance manuals

Walk-thru of the job to locate control components
Operator workstation and peripherals
DDC Controller operation/function
Operator control functions including graphic generation and field panel
programming
Operation of portable operator's terminal
Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures
Provide additional training quarterly for a period of one year from final coof the project.
END OF SECTION.
Page 56 of 56
SECTION 15991 TESTING & COMMISSIONING
TESTING & COMMISSIONING

SECTION 15991
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
RELATED WORK
A.
Division 15 - Mechanical
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section covers the testing and commissioning requirements for air handling,
piping controls and mechanical systems generally.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing and Balancing Agency Qualifications

1.
The testing and balancing shall be conducted by a specialist agency other than
the Mechanical Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer, professional
in balancing and testing such systems as herein specified.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Testing and Balancing

1.
Certificate
a.
2.
3.
Submit Warning Certificate.
Data Sheets
a.
Submit typewritten data sheets on each item of testing equipment to be

used.
b.
Include name of device, manufacturers name, model number, latest

data of calibration, calibration due data and correction factors.
c.
All products and instrumentation used shall be subject to approval.
Report Forms
a.
Submit specimen copies of report forms, for approval for their use on
this project.
b.
Forms shall be quarto paper for loose leaf binding, with blanks for
listing of the required test ratings and for certification of report.
Provision Of Test Point And accessories.

All required test points, although not mentioned in the BOQ, are deemed to be included
in the pipework and ductwork installations and included in the unit rate of these
Page 1 of 13
systems. The contractor shall allow sufficient points and where required by the
Engineer for the correct and complete regulation, testing and commissioning. All test
points shall be indicated on the working and record drawings. Test points shall be fitted
with removable plugs, flanges or other approved devices appropriate to the service
concerned.
Balancing valves and dampers shall be included on every main branch and sub circuit
to facilitate system commissioning. All such devices shall be identified on the working
drawings and submitted for approval.
Each volume control damper and fire damper shall be complete with adjacent access
panel.
Balancing valves shall be propriety commissioning sets consisting of double regulating
valve and close coupled orifice plate.
The Contractor shall prepare system loading diagrams for each system including
control dampers, regulating valves and test points and shall indicate their physical
location in pipework or ductwork.
Recording of Test Results :
The Contractor shall give 7 days notice, to the Engineer in writing, prior to any
regulation, testing and balancing being undertaken to enable he Engineer to witness the
work.
The Contractor shall formulate and provide all test sheets to a format agreed by the
Engineer. Each sheet shall contain the project title, the logos of the Employer and the
Engineer . Each sheet shall have witnessing signatory space specific to the Contractors
Engineer, and the Engineers designed representative.
The test result sheets shall be fully cross-referenced to the system loading diagrams
which shall be updated to include the actual test results.
Duplicate signed test certificates shall be provided after each test which will be
countersigned by the Engineer who witnesses the test. The test certificate shall give the
following particulars :
Apparatus or Section under test
Makers number ( if any )
Nature, duration and conditions of test
Result of test
No test shall be valid until the test certificate is provided.
Duplicate copies of test certificates carried out at manufacturer works shall be
forwarded to the Engineer for approval prior to dispatch of the article to site.
No Section of the works shall be insulated or in any other way concealed prior to
testing and inspection and subsequent concealment where applicable shall only take
place following written authority from the Engineer.
Page 2 of 13
All necessary facilities, measuring and recording instruments including test pumps and
gauges for inspection/testing and commissioning requirements shall be provided and
shall be checked or calibrated as necessary before use. The Engineer reserves the right
to call for a demonstration of the accuracy of any instruments provided.
Testing Instruments :
The Contractor shall submit with his Tender a full list of instruments, together with
relevant standards, which he intends to use in the regulation, testing and balancing of
the Contract Works. The Contractor shall include the full cost of regular calibration test
to be carried out on all instruments used and the cost of any necessary recalibration.
Certified documentation confirming current certificate calibration shall be available for
examination by the Engineer at all times. Instruments not supported by up-to-date
calibration certificates shall not be used.
All instruments necessary for conducting the test shall be provided including the
following minimum range :
Tube type velometer ( Range 1.5 to 13 m/sec).
Sloping tube manometers.
Pitot tubes of various length to suit duct sizes.
Mercury in glass thermometers.
Weekly recording thermometers.
Weekly recording R.H. meters.
Specially mounted anemometers fixed in a conical sheet metalwork hood for measuring
accurately air flow from diffusers.
Ammeters.
Tachometers.
Surface contact dial indicating pyrometer.
Hot wire digital anemometers.
Sound meters.
Digital touch thermometers.
Multi-channel digital thermometers ( where necessary ).
U tube manometers.
Commissioning set electronic flow meters.
Brass cased certified thermometers.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit with his Tender a schedule of recommended
test equipment suitable for Technician Grade maintenance staff to assess whether the
commissioned standards are being maintained. Whilst the level of equipment need not
be comparable to the Specialist Commissioning Contractors own test equipment it
should meet the following requirements :
a)
b)
Measurement of air and water temperatures including all test probes.

Air flow measurement, both in duct and at diffuser discharge.
Page 3 of 13
c)
4.
Water flow measurement using commissioning valves sets provided under the
Mechanical Services Contract.
Final Report
a.
Upon completion, all information shall be neatly typed accompanying

schematic diagrams of systems tested.
b.
All test reports shall be assembled, indexed, and submitted to the Engineer.
Page 4 of 13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
OPERATIONS OF EQUIPMENT & SYSTEMS.
A.
The Contractor shall make the necessary adjustments for each system and piece of
apparatus installed, using factory-trained technicians wherever practicable, and shall
thoroughly instruct the client appointed representatives in the roper operation of the
apparatus. Printed instructions written in both Arabic and English, shall be permanently
attached to the relevant equipment.
3.02
TESTING GENERALLY
A.
Where an individual inspection or test takes place at a sub-contractors work, a

representative of the client will be required to be present.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, the Contract shall include the cost of all tests, necessary
instruments, equipment, supervision and labour both at the manufacturers plant and on
site. The accuracy of the test instruments shall be demonstrated where so directed.
C.
The site test shall be of at least six hours duration. On large installations, the site test
may last several days and shall be long enough to allow the taking of all the
measurements required in subsequent clauses of this Section and to demonstrate the
performance of the installation. Any defects of workmanship materials and
performance, maladjustments or other irregularities which become apparent during the
tests shall be rectified by the Contractor at his expense and the tests shall be repeated at
the Contractors expense to the satisfaction.
D.
The Contractors representative present at the site tests shall be fully conversant with
the operation of the thermostatic controls, the control panel and the refrigeration
system, representatives of the manufacturers of the equipment shall be present,
3.03
TESTS AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, tests shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate
Standard or Code or Practice. Test certificates for works tests shall be submitted
induplicate.
B.
Test certificates shall be submitted :

I.
For Fans : Type test certificates showing fan characteristic curves and type test
certificates for sound levels.
2.
For Pumps : Type test certificates for head, discharge, speed and power input.
3.
For Electrical Motors : Type test certificates for motors of 40 KW output and
above, routine ( individual ) test certificate.
Page 5 of 13
4.
For Starters and Control Gear : Type test certificates for control panels as a
whole, routine ( individual ) high voltage test.
5.
For Other Electrical Equipment : Such as air heaters ( but excluding

thermostatic control equipment ) test certificates.
6.
For Hydraulic Equipment : Test certificates for hydraulic and air pressure
testing at works.
3.04
PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPEWORK SYSTEMS
A.
Upon the completion of each length or section of the pipework the Contractor shall
subject the length or section to a hydraulic test and demonstrate to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that the length of the section is sound and watertight. The test pressure
shall be one and a half times the maximum working pressure or 700 KPa, whichever is
the greater, for a period of two consecutive hours. Items of equipment, e.g. safety
valves, bursting discs, set to operate at or below this pressure shall be isolated or
removed prior to applying this test.
B.
All faults discovered during such-test- shall be remedied by the Contractor at his own
expense and the test re-applied until the Engineer is satisfied that the section is sound
and watertight.
C.
Installations sections thereof which will be embedded in the structure or concealed in

permanently sealed ducts, trenches etc., shall be individually tested as they are laid and
before being embedded or concealed.
D.
All pressure tests shall be carried out before the application of thermal insulation.
E.
On completion of the test, the water is to be released and drained completely away as
rapidly as possible, the section then being thoroughly sluiced through to ensure the
removal of as much dirt and foreign matter as possible before being refilled and put
into service.
3.05
AIR LEAK TESTING OF DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
A.
General
1.
All ductwork and equipment items shall be checked for air leakage. This shall
be completed before installation or enclosure of ductwork and before any
terminal units are fixed.
2.
The air leakage tests shall be based on the measurement of air leakage at
constant pressure. The test pressure shall be the design static pressure of the
section to be tested plus 250 pa. The aggregate of air leakage shall not exceed
1% of the system design air flow rate, and leaks shall not be audible. The air
leakage rate for any section shall not be in excess of the permissible rate, in
m3/s per meter, for the whole system.
3.
Sufficient time shall be allowed, before testing, for the sealant to cure. The
ductwork system, or section to be tasted shall be sealed by the incorporation of,
blanking plates fitted at flanged joints, for main ducts and for small open ends,
Page 6 of 13
polythene bags may be used. The polythene bags may be retained to aid in
preventing the ingress of dirt into the system.
4.
B.
Care shall be exercised in jointing tested sections of the ductwork system

together, as it will generally be impracticable to test such joints.
Test Apparatus and Method

1.
Portable test apparatus shall be provided by the Contractor and shall comprise
the following equipment: Electrically driven fan capable of delivering not less
than 0.03m3/s against a duct pressure of 2.5 Kpa, a static pressure gage
suitable for recording the duct static pressure test, an inclined pressure gage, a
variable speed type, and a flow measuring device complete with test cocks.
The accuracy of the measuring device shall be +/-5% of the permitted air
leakage rate.
2.
The apparatus shall be connected to the blanking plate inserted in the section of
ductwork to be tested. With the bleed valve fully open or the variable speed
motor set to minimum speed, start-up fan, and adjust fan speed or close bleed
valve until static pressure reading on static pressure gage reaches desired value.
If pressure cannot be obtained, the ductwork shall be checked for obvious leaks
and rectified. With the duct section maintained at the test pressure, the
ductwork shall be checked for major and audible leaks. The leakage rate, as
indicated on the inclined pressure gage, connected across the flow measuring
device, shall be recorded and checked that it is within the permitted limits. This
leakage rate shall be maintained for at least 15 consecutive minutes without
increasing.
3.
The fan shall then be turned off and the pressure in the test section of duct
returned to zero before starting the fan again and establish that the air leakage
rate has not increased from the previous reading.
4.
Any results not within the permitted limits shall require that the ductwork be
examined and any leaks rectified. Time shall be allowed for the sealant to cure
before the test is restarted.
5.
Readings of the test for each section of ductwork shall be recorded and
presented to the Engineer before any further work is carried out on the section
of ductwork tested.
3.06
TESTING OF SOIL, WASTE AND ROOF DRAINAGE PIPING SYSTEMS
A.
On completion of the soil and waste pipe works or section of the work as may be
required the plumbing contractor shall arrange the testing of the works.
B.
The tests shall comprise an air test as set out in the Uniform Plumbing Code, and
described in section 15405, and a performance discharge test as required. Should the
Engineer deem the test unsatisfactory his visit shall at his desecration be considered
abortive and all costs incurred in respect of time, travel and expenses shall be
recoverable from the contractor who shall then rectify the works and arrange for a
further test to be witnessed at his own expense.
Page 7 of 13
C.
Where the testing is to be carried out in sections the Contractor shall retain on site a
drawing indicating sections tested and recording dates on which the tests took place
duly witnessed.
D.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all skilled and unskilled labor
necessary to carry out tests and ensure that all supplies and instruments are available.
3.07
COMMISSIONING GENERALLY
A.
General
B.
1.
Each installation shall be fully commissioned. Commissioning shall include the

balancing and regulation of air and water distribution systems and the final
adjustment of control system.
2.
Particular attention shall be paid to :

a)
The maintenance of cleanliness of all equipment and distribution and

distribution systems during construction and ensuring that distribution
systems are cleared through as part of commissioning.
b)
The protection of equipment, particularly sensitive of fragile items,

from the activities of other trades during construction and from dirt and
maloperation during commissioning.
c)
The protection of Electrical equipment from damp during construction

and commissioning.
Adjustments
1.
Adjustments shall be made to the following items :

a)
Adjust blowers, fans and ducts to deliver or exhaust design air flow
rate.
b)
Adjust diffusers, register, and grilles to deliver or exhaust design air

flow rate.
c)
Adjust relief dampers and vents.
d)
Adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to minimize drafts.
e)
Adjust all zones for design supply and return air flow rates.
f)
Adjust blowers and fans to design revolutions.
g)
Balance cooling water systems to achieve design flow characteristics.
h)
Balance domestic hot water return loop.
3.08
COMMISSIONING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Preparation :
Page 8 of 13
Prior to system testing and balancing.
B.
1.
Systems shall be fully operational.
2.
All filters shall be clean.
3.
Temperature and system controls shall be checked for proper operation.
4.
Fan rotation shall be checked.
Air handling System

1.
Fan air handling quantities and other major air flow quantities where required,
shall be measured by pitot tube and inclined manometer using multi-point
traversing techniques.
2.
The following items shall be specifically checked and/or adjusted and recorded
on the Site Test Certificate for each air handling unit.
a)
External air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity.
b)
Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity in each space.
c)
Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity in each main return
duct.
d)
Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity before and after each
air heater.
e)
Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity before and after each
air cooler.
f)
Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity before and after a
humidifying equipment.
g)
Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity before and after a fresh
and return air mixing chamber.
h)
Air dry bulb temperature and relative humidity in each main supply air
duct.
j)
Fresh air quantity ( m3/s).
k)
Air flow ( m3/s) and resistance ( Pa or mm of water ) across a main fan

.
l)
Air flow ( m3/s) and resistance ( Pa or mm of water ) across each

heater.
m)

cooler.
Page 9 of 13
n)
3.
C.

humidifying equipment.
Perform the following minimum air system tests balancing.

a)
Air flow (m3/s) in each main supply, return a grille and diffuser.
b)
Air flow (m3/s) at each supply grille and diffuser.
c)
Fan and ,motor speeds, air quantity and dry bulb temperature and
relative humidity, both on and off the cooling coil, for at least two of
each size fan of the cooler unit.
d)
Main fan and motor speeds.
e)
Current taken under running conditions for each fan above 4 KW and
each electric air heater, and maximum current for each electric air
heater.
f)
In cooperation with the temperature control system installer, set

adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified,
indicated and noted.
Record Data
Record the following minimum data :
1.
Air flow rate delivery and rpm of blowers and fans.
2.
Static pressure at inlet and outlet of blowers and fans.
3.
All equipment nameplate data.
4.
Actual running current and voltage of fan motors.
5.
Air flow rate, delivery or exhaust at each diffuser, register and grille.
3.09
COMMISSION WATER SYSTEMS
A.
Preparation :
Prior to system testing and balancing
1.
Open all valves to full open position. Close coil bypass stop valves. Set mixing
valves to full coil flow.
2.
Remove and clean all strainers.
3.
Examine water in system and determine if water has been treated and cleaned.
4.
Check pump rotation.
Page 10 of 13
B.
5.
Clean and set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
6.
Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and the system
is completely full of water.
7.
Check air vents at high points of water systems and determine if all are
installed and operating freely.
8.
Set all temperature controls of all coils calling for full cooling. Same procedure
when balancing hot water coils : set for full heating.
9.
Check operating of automatic bypass valve, if furnished.
10.
Check and set operating temperatures of chillers to design requirements.
11.
A complete air balance must be accomplished before beginning the water

system test and balance.
Water Handling Systems

1.
General
a.
C.
The satisfactory operation of all make-up, drain and overflow

arrangement shall be checked. Where water treatment is included
initial commissioning shall be carried out and then rates of flow,
dosing quantities etc., shall be calibrated and set for routine operation.
2.
Perform the following minimum water system test and balance :
3.
Set water pumps to proper flow rate.
4.
Adjust water flow through equipment.
5.
Check leaving water temperatures and return water temperature. Reset to

correct design temperatures.
6.
Check water temperatures at inlet side of coils. Note rise or drop of

temperatures from sources.
7.
Proceed to balance each water coil.
8.
Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils, mark all settings
and record data.
9.
After adjustments to coils are made, recheck settings at pumps and readjust if
required.
10.
Install pressure gages in gage fittings provided on coil, read pressure drop
through coil at set flow rate for full cooling and on full heating. Set pressure
drop across bypass valve to match coil full flow pressure drop.
Record Data
Page 11 of 13
Record the following minimum data at each cooling element :

1.
Inlet water temperature.
2.
Leaving water temperatures.
3.
Pressure drop of each coil.
4.
Pressure drop across bypass valve.
5.
Pump operating suction and discharge pressures.
6.
List all mechanical specifications of pumps. Check and record starter size,
heater sizes, etc.
7.
Rated and actual running amperage of pump motor.
8.
Water balance device readings and settings.
3.10
COMMISSIONING OF REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
A.
During erection, commissioning and at the end of commissioning particular attention

shall be paid to competent workmanship adequate sealing of valves and fittings and
comprehensive leak testing, to minimize future leakage of refrigerant.
1.
The following items shall be checked and/or tested and entered on the Site Test
Certificate:
a.
Chilled water flow and return temperature.
b.
Refrigerant suction and discharge pressure and temperatures.
c.
Compressor and motor speeds.
d.
Compressor oil pressure.
e.
The satisfactory operation and set operating pressures of high pressure,

low pressure and oil pressure failure cut-outs.
f.
Current taken by each compressor at full load and at each step of

capacity reduction.
3.11
CONTROL SYSTEMS
A.
Particular attention shall be paid to the following features :
B.
1.
Satisfactory operation of any automatic or manually operated sequences to be

used in the event of fire.
2.
Safety in the event of failure and of sudden resumption of electric supply.
The following items shall be checked and/or tested and recorded on the Site Test
Certificate :
Page 12 of 13
1.
Set desired value of all control devices.
2.
Satisfactory operation of equipment protection devices.
3.
Satisfactory operation of all sequencing operations and alternate working

selections, and automatic or manual change-over or duplicate equipment.
3.13
NOISE AND SOUND CONTROL
A.
Sound level readings shall be taken with a simple sound level meter using the A scale
weighting network. The spaces in which readings shall be taken as agreed but will in
general, be the following :
B.
1.
Equipment rooms.
2.
Occupied rooms adjacent to equipment rooms.
3.
Outside equipment rooms facing air intakes and exhausts and condensing
discharge, to assess possible nuisance to adjacent accommodation, if the
adjacent accommodation is private residential building tests may be required at
night.
4.
In the space served by the first grille or diffuser after a fan outlet.
5.
In at least two of the spaces served by fan coil units.
Alternatively, sound level readings shall be taken using a sound analyses to give an
octave band analysis of the sound spectrum and to pinpoint the frequency values of
peak sound levels.
END OF SECTION
Page 13 of 13

Mechanical - Spec

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Mechanical - Spec

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

This section generally specifies administrative and procedure requirements regarding

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

Unless otherwise specifically stated, the mechanical installation shall be complete,

The systems described include the following:

Ventilation and Air Conditioning.

Air-conditioning equipment capacities are based on the following conditions:

Dry Bulb temperature.

Dry bulb temperature.

Dry bulb temperature.

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

Dry bulb temperature.

Definitions: The required submittals of this division, in addition to the definitions of

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

SHOP AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

indicated on the drawings and as described in the specification or to be of physical size

COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

INSTRUCTION MANUALS AND SPARE PARTS LISTS

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL QUALITY WORKMANSHIP

SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems,

Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment and material installation with other

Verify dimensions by field measurements.

Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

Sequence, coordinate and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment

Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance and repair or

Install systems, materials and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems

Cutting and Patching

Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

Mechanical Contractor including people thoroughly familiar with

CLEANING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING-GENERAL

Adjust and balance systems to operate as shown and specified.

INSERTS AND SLEEVES

Inserts in concrete for supports are to be as specified in other Division 15 Section.

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING PIPE TRENCHES

SECTION 15010 -BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENT

MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM PRIOR TO

Take necessary measures to insure adequate protection of equipment and materials

Commencement date of training shall be subject to client approval.

SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL WORKS FOR

All electrical equipment, wiring, cables, conduits, boxes, earth connections,

WORKS NOT INCLUDED

SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL WORKS FOR

Power supply connections to vibrating or rotating machinery shall be made

Shop and Installation Drawings are to be submitted for approval prior to

Complete technical data on all motor starters, motor protection relays,

Instructional details of equipment, particularly motor control centers